UNDER  DRAKE'S 
FLAG 


ILLUSTRATED 


©r 


Mrs.  Mildred  Clemens  Lewis 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


A  TALE  OF  THE  SPANISH  MAIN. 


By  G.  A.  HENTY, 


Author  of  "Bonnie  Prince  Charlie,"  '•'With  Clive  in  India,"  "The  Dragon  and 

the  Raven,"  '"The  Young  Carthaginian"  "The  Lion  of  the  North," 

"With  Lee  in  Virginia,"  "By  Pike  and  Dike,"  "Captain 

Bayley's  Heir,"  "By  England's  Aid,"  "In 

Freedom's  Cause"  "In  the  Reign 

of  Terror^  etc.,  etc. 


ILLUSTRATED   BY  CORDON   BROWNE. 


KTEW  YOBK: 
A.  L.  BURT,  PUBLISHER, 


CONTENTS. 


Southward  Ho!. 


CHAPTER  X. 

M679301 


PAGE. 
1 


13 

25 


CHAPTER  I. 
The  Wreck  on  the  Devon  Coast • 

CHAPTER  II. 
Friends  and  Foes 

CHAPTER  III. 
On  the  Spanish  Main 

CHAPTER  IV. 
An  Unsuccessful  Attack 

CHAPTER  V. 
Cast  Ashore 

CHAPTER  VI. 

In  the  Woods • 

CHAPTER  VII. 

An  Attack  in  Force 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
The  Forest  Fastness 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Baffled 


64 


78 


106 


121 


139 


iv  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  XL 

PAGE. 
The  Marvel  of  Fire 151 

CHAPTER  XII. 
Across  the  Continent 163 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
Through  the  Cordilleras 174 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
On  the  Pacific  Coast 187 

CHAPTER  XV. 
The  Prison  of  the  Inquisition 199 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
The  Rescue 215 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
The  "  Golden  Hind." 231 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
San  Francisco  Bay 247 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
South  Sea  Idols 263 

CHAPTER  XX. 
A  Portuguese  Settlement 281 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
Wholesale  Conversion 297 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Home...  .  314 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


CHAPTER   I. 

THE  WRECK   ON  THE   DEVON   COAST. 

IT  was  a  stormy  morning  in  the  mouth -of  May,  1572, 
aucl  the  fishermen  of  the  little  village  of  Westport,  situated 
about  five  miles  from  Plymouth,  clustered  in  the  public- 
house  of  the  place,  and  discussed,  not  the  storm,  for  that 
was  a  common  topic,  but  the  fact  that  Master  Francis 
Drake,  whose  ships  lay  now  at  Plymouth,  was  visiting  the 
Squire  of  Tread  wood,  had  passed  through  the  village  over 
night,  and  might  go  through  it  again  to-day.  There  was 
not  one  of  the  hardy  fishermen  there  but  would  gladly 
have  joined  Drake's  expedition;  for  marvelous  tales  had 
been  told  of  the  great  booty  which  he  and  other  well- 
known  captains  had  already  obtained  from  the  Dons  on 
the  Spanish  Main.  The  number,  however,  who  could  go 
was  limited,  and  even  of  these  the  seafaring  men  were  but 
a  small  proportion;  for  in  those  days,  although  a  certain 
number  of  sailors  were  required  to  trim  the  sails  and  navi- 
gate the  ship,  the  strength  of  the  company  were  the  fight- 
ing men,  who  were  soldiers  by  trade,  and  fought  on  board 
ship  as  if  on  laud.  Captain  Drake  was  accompanied  by 
many  men  of  good  Devon  blood,  for  that  county  was  then 
ahead  of  all  England  in  its  enterprise  and  its  seamanship, 
and  no  captain  of  name  or  repute  ever  had  any  difficulty 
in  getting  together  a  baud  of  adventurers  from  the  sturdy 
population  of  her  shores. 


2  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"I  went  over  myself  last  week,"  said  a  finely-built  young 
sailor,  "and  I  prayed  the  captain  on  my  knees  to  take  me 
on  board;  but  he  said  the  tale  had  been  full  long  ago,  and 
that  so  many  were  the  applicants  that  Master  Drake  and 
himself  had  sworn  a  great  oath  that  they  would  take  none 
beyond  those  already  engaged." 

"Ay!  I  would  have  gone  myself,"  said  a  grizzly, 
weather-beaten  old  sailor,  "if  they  would  have  had  me. 
There  was  Will  Trelawney,  who  went  on  such  another  ex- 
pedition as  this,  and  came  back  with  more  bags  of  Spanish 
dollars  than  he  could  carry.  Truly  they  are  a  gold  mine, 
these  Western  seas;  but  even  better  than  getting  gold  is 
the  thrashing  of  those  haughty  Spaniards,  who  seem  to 
look  upon  themselves  as  gods,  and  on  all  others  as  fit  only 
to  clean  their  worship's  boots." 

"They  cannot  fight  either,  can  they?"  asked  a  young 
sailor. 

"They  can  fight,  boy,  and  have  fought  as  well  as  we 
could;  but  somehow  they  cannot  stand  against  us  in  those 
seas.  Whether  it  is  that  the  curse  of  the  poor  natives 
whom  they  kill,  enslave,  and  ill-treat  in  every  way  rises 
against  them,  and  takes  away  their  courage  and  their 
nerve,  but  certain  is  it  that  when  our  little  craft  lay  along- 
side their  big  galleons,  fight  as  they  will,  the  battle  is  as 
good  as  over.  Nothing  less  than  four  to  one,  at  the  very 
least,  has  any  chance  against  our  buccaneers." 

"  They  ill-treat  those  that  fall  into  their  hands,  do  they 
not?" 

"  Ay  do  they !"  said  the  old  sailor.  "  They  tear  off  their 
flesh  with  hot  pincers,  wrench  out  their  nails,  and  play  all 
sorts  of  devil's  games,  and  then  at  last  they  burn  what  is 
left  of  them  in  the  market-places.  I  have  heard  tell  of 
fearsome  tales,  lad;  but  the  Spaniards  outwit  themselves. 
Were  our  men  to  have  fair  treatment  as  prisoners  of  war, 
it  may  be  that  the  Spaniards  would  often  be  able  to  hold 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  3 

their  own  against  us;  but  the  knowledge  that  if  we  are 
taken  this  horrible  fate  is  certain  to  be  ours,  makes  our 
men  fight  with  a  desperate  fury,  and  never  to  give  in  as 
long  as  one  is  left.  This  it  is  that  accounts  for  the  won- 
derful victories  which  we  have  gained  there.  He  would 
be  a  coward,  indeed,  who  would  not  fight  with  thumb- 
screws and  a  bonfire  behind  him." 

"It  is  said  that  the  queen  and  her  ministers  favor, 
though  nob  openly,  these  adventures." 

"She  cannot  do  it  openly,"  said  the  old  man,  "for  here 
in  Europe  we  are  at  peace  with  Spain — worse  luck." 

"How  is  it,  then,  that  if  we  are  at  peace  here  we  can  be 
at  war  in  the  Indian  seas?" 

"That  is  more  than  I  can  tell  thee,  lad.  I  guess  the 
queen's  writ  runs  not  so  far  as  that,  and  while  her  maj- 
esty's commands  must  be  obeyed,  and  the  Spanish  flag 
suffered  to  pass  unchallenged  on  these  seas,  on  the  Spanish 
main  there  are  none  to  keep  the  peace,  and  the  Don  and 
the  Englishman  go  at  each  other's  throats  as  a  thing  of 
nature." 

"The  storm  is  rising,  methinks.  It  is  not  olten  I  have 
heard  the  wind  howl  more  loudly.  It  is  well  that  the  ad- 
venturers have  not  yet  started,  it  would  be  bad  for  any 
craft  caught  in  the  channel  to-day." 

As  he  spoke  he  looked  from  the  casement.  Several 
people  were  seen  hurrying  toward  the  beach. 

"Something  is  the  matter,  lads;  maybe  a  ship  is  driving 
on  the  rocks  even  now." 

Seizing  their  hats  and  cloaks,  the  party  sallied  out  and 
hurried  down  to  the  shore.  There  they  saw  a  large  ship 
driving  in  before  the  wind  into  the  bay.  She  was  making 
every  effort  that  seamanship  could  suggest  to  beat  clear  of 
the  head,  but  the  sailors  saw  at  once  that  her  case  was 
hopeless. 

"She  will  go  on  the  Black  Shoal,  to  a  certainty,"  the 


4  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

old  sailor  said,  "and  then,  may  God  have  mercy  on  their 
souls." 

"Can  we  do  nothing  to  help  them?"  a  woman  standing 
near  asked. 

"No,  no,"  the  sailor  said;  "we  could  not  launch  a  hoat 
in  the  teeth  of  this  tremendous  sea.  All  we  can  do  is  to 
look  out  and  throw  a  line  to  any  who  may  be  washed  ashore 
on  a  spar  when  she  goes  to  pieces." 

Presently  a  group  of  men,  whose  dress  belonged  to  the 
tipper  class,  moved  down  through  the  street  to  the  beach. 

"Ay!  there  is  Mr.  Trevelyau,"  said  the  sailor,  "and  the 
gentleman  beside  him  is  Captain  Drake  himself." 

T.ie  .group  moved  on  to  where  the  fishermen  were 
standing. 

"Is  there  no  hope,"  they  asked,  "of  helping  the  ship?" 

The  seamen  shook  their  heads. 

"You  will  see  for  yourself,  Master  Drake,  that  no  boat 
could  live  in  such  a  sea  as  this." 

"It  could  not  put  out  from  here,"  the  captain  said.; 
"but  if  they  could  lower  one  from  the  ship,  it  might  live 
until  it  got  into  the  breakers." 

"Ay,  ay,"  said  a  sailor;  "but  there  is  no  lowering  a 
boat  from  a  ship  which  has  begun  to  beat  on  the  Black 
Shoal." 

"Another  minute  and  she  will  strike,"  the  old  sailor 
said. 

All  gazed  intently  at  the  ship.  The  whole  population 
of  the  village  were  now  on  the  shore,  and  were  eager  to 
render  any  assistance,  if  it  were  possible.  In  another 
minute  or  two  a  general  cry  announced  that  the  ship  had 
struck.  Rising  high  on  a  wave  she  came  down  with  a 
force  which  caused  her  mainmast  at  once  to  go  over  the 
side,  another  lift  on  the  next  sea  and  then  high  and  fast 
she  was  jammed  on  the  rocks  of  the  Black  Shoal.  The 
distance  from  shore  was  but  small,  not  more  than  three 


VtfDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  5 

hundred  yards,  and  the  shoots  of  the  sailors  on  board  could 
be  heard  in  the  storm. 

"Why  does  not  one  of  them  jump  over  with  a  rope?" 
Captain  Drake  said  impatiently.  "Are  the  men  all  cow- 
ards, or  can  none  of  them  swim?  It  would  be  easy  to 
swim  from  that  ship  to  the  shore,  while  it  is  next  to  im- 
possible for  any  one  to  make  his  way  ont  through  these 
breakers.  Js  there  no  one  who  can  reach  her  from  here?" 
he  said,  looking  round. 

"No  one  among  us,  your  honor,"  the  old  sailor  said; 
"few  here  can  keep  themselves  up  in  the  water  in  a  calm 
sea,  but  if  man  or  boy  could  swim  through  that  surf,  it  is 
the  lad  who  is  just  coming  down  from  behind  us.  The 
*  Otter,'  as  we  call  him,  for  he  seems  to  be  able  to  live  in 
water  as  well  as  on  land." 

The  lad  of  whom  they  were  speaking  was  a  bright-faced 
boy  of  some  fifteen  years  of  age.  He  was  squarely  built, 
and  his  dress  differed  a  little  from  that  of  the  fisher  lads 
standing  on  the  beach. 

"Who  is  he?"  asked  Captain  Drake. 

"He  is  the  son  of  the  schoolmaster  here,  a  learned  man, 
and  they  do  say  one  who  was  once  wealthy.  The  lad  him- 
self would  fain  go  to  sea,  but  his  father  keeps  him  here. 
It  is  a  pity,  for  he  is  a  bold  boy,  and  would  make  a  fine 
sailor." 

The  "Otter,"  as  he  had  been  called,  had  now  come  down 
to  the  beach,  and,  with  his  hands  shading  his  eyes  from 
the  spray,  sheets  of  which  the  wind  carried  along  with 
blinding  force,  he  gazed  at  the  ship  and  the  sea  with  a 
steady  intentness. 

"I  think  I  can  get  out  to  her,"  he  said  to  the  fishermen. 

"It  is  madness,  boy,"  Captain  Drake  said.  "There  are 
few  men,  indeed,  so  far  as  I  know,  in  these  climes — I  talk 
not  of  the  heathens  of  the  Western  Islands — who  could 
swim  through  a  breaking  sea  like  yonder." 


6  VNDEU  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"I  think  I  can  do  it,"  the  boy  said  quietly.  "  I  have 
been  out  in  as  heavy  seas  before,  and  if  one  does  but 
choose  one's  time,  and  humor  them  a  bit,  the  waves  are 
not  much  to  be  feared  after  all.  Get  me  the  light  line," 
he  said  to  the  sailors,  "and  I  will  be  off  at  once."  So  say- 
ing he  carelessly  threw  off  his  clothes.  The  fishermen 
brought  a  light  line,  one  end  they  fastened  round  his 
shoulders,  and  with  a  cheerful  good-by  he  ran  down  to  the 
water's  edge.  The  sea  was  breaking  with  tremendous  vio- 
lence, and  the  chance  of  the  lad's  getting  out  through  the 
breakers  appeared  slight  indeed.  He  watched,  however, 
quietly  for  three  or  four  minutes,  when  a  wave  larger  than 
usual  broke  on  the  beach.  Following  it  out  he  stood  knee- 
deep  till  the  next  great  wave  advanced,  then  with  a  plunge 
he  dived  in  beneath  it,  It  seemed  an  age  before  he  was 
again  seen,  and  Captain  Drake  expressed  his  fear  that  his 
head  must  have  been  dashed  against  a  rock  beneath  the 
water.  But  the  men  said,  "  He  dives  like  a  duck,  sir,  and 
has  often  frightened  us  by  the  time  he  keeps  under  water. 
You  will  see  he  will  come  up  beyond  the  second  line  of 
waves." 

It  seemed  an  age  to  the  watchers  before  a  black  spot 
appeared  suddenly  beyond  the  foaming  line  of  breakers. 
There  was  a  general  shout  of  "There  he  is!"  But  they 
had  scarce  time  to  note  the  position  of  the  swimmer 
when  he  again  disappeared.  Again  and  again  he  came 
up,  each  time  rapidly  decreasing  the  distance  between 
himself  and  the  shipwrecked  vessel,  and  keeping  his  head 
above  the  waves  for  a  few  seconds  only  at  each  appearance. 

The  people  in  the  vessel  were  watching  the  progress  of 
the  lad  with  attention  and  interest  even  greater  than  was 
manifested  by  those  on  shore,  and  as  he  approached  the 
ship,  which  already  showed  signs  of  breaking  up,  a  line 
was  thrown  to  him.  He  caught  it,  but  instead  of  holding 
on  and  being  lifted  to  the  ship,  he  fastened  the  light  rope 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  7 

which  lie  had  brought  out  to  it,  and  made  signs  to  them 
to  haul. 

"Fasten  a  thioker  rope  to  it,"  he  shouted,  "and  they 
will  haul  it  in  from  the  shore."  It  would  have  been  no 
easy  matter  to  get  on  board  the  ship;  so,  having  done  his 
work,  the  lad  turned  to  make  his  way  back  to  the  shore. 
A  thick  rope  was  fastened  at  once  by  those  of  the  crew 
who  still  remained  on  the  deck  of  the  vessel  to  the  lighter 
one,  and  those  on  shore  began  to  pull  it  rapidly  in,  but  ere 
the  knotted  joint  reached  the  shore  a  cry  from  all  gathered 
on  the  beach  showed  that  the  brave  attempt  of  the  Otter 
had  been  useless.  A  tremendous  sea  had  struck  the  ship, 
and  in  a  moment  it  broke  up,  and  a  number  of  floating 
fragments  alone  showed  where  a  fine  vessel  had  a  few  min- 
utes before  floated  on  the  sea. 

The  lad  paused  in  his  course  toward  the  shore,  and, 
looking  round,  endeavored  to  face  the  driving  wind  and 
spray  in  hopes  that  he  might  see  among  the  fragments  of 
the  wreck  some  one  to  whom  his  assistance  might  be  of 
use.  For  a  time  he  could  see  no  signs  of  a  human  being 
among  the  floating  masses  of  wreck,  and  indeed  he  was 
obliged  to  use  great  caution  in  keeping  away  from  these, 
as  a  blow  from  any  of  the  larger  spars  might  have  been 
fatal.  Presently  close  to  him  he  heard  a  short  muffled 
bark,  and  looking  round  saw  a  large  dog  with  a  child  in 
its  mouth.  The  animal,  which  was  of  the  mastiff  breed, 
appeared  already  exhausted.  The  Otter  looked  hastily 
round,  and  seeing  a  piece  of  wreck  of  suitable  size  he  seized 
it,  and  with  some  difficulty  succeeded  in  bringing  it  close 
to  the  dog.  Fortunately  the  spar  was  a  portion  of  one  of 
the  yards,  and  still  had  a  quantity  of  rope  connected  to  it. 
He  now  took  hold  of  the  child's  clothes,  the  dog  readily 
yielding  up  the  treasure  he  had  carried,  seeing  that  the 
newcomer  was  likely  to  afford  better  assistance  than  him- 
self, In  a  few  moments  the  child  was  fastened  to  the 


8  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

spar,  and  the  Otter  began  steadily  to  push  it  toward  the 
shore,  the  dog  swimming  alongside,  evidently  much  re- 
lieved at  getting  rid  of  his  burden.  When  he  neared  the 
line  of  breakers  the  lad  waved  his  hand  as  a  sign  to  them 
to  prepare  to  rush  forward  and  lend  a  hand  when  the  spar 
approached.  Ke  then  paddled  forward  quietly,  and  keep- 
ing just  outside  the  line  of  the  breakers  waved  to  those  on 
shore  to  throw,  if  possible,  a  rope. 

Several  attempts  were  made  to  hurl  a  stone,  fastened  to 
the  e«d  of  a  light  line,  within  his  reach. 

After  many  failures  he  at  last  caught  the  line.  This 
he  fastened  to  the  spar,  and  signaled  to  those  on  shore  to 
pull  it  in,  then  side  by  side  with  the  dog  he  followed. 
Looking  round  behind  him  he  watched  a  great  breaker 
rolling  in,  and>  as  before,  dived  as  it  passed  over  his  head, 
and  rode  forward  on  the  swell  toward  the  shore.  Then 
there  was  a  desperate  struggle:  at  one  moment  his  feet 
touched  the  ground,  at  another  he  was  hauled  back  and 
tossed  into  the  whirling  sea;  sometimes  almost  losing  his 
consciousness,  but  ever  keeping  his  head  cool  and  striving 
steadily  to  make  progress.  Several  times  he  was  dashed 
against  the  beach  with  great  force,  and  it  was  his  knowl- 
edge that  the  only  safe  way  of  approaching  shore  through 
a  heavy  surf  is  to  keep  sideways  to  the  waves,  and  allow 
them  to  roll  one  over  and  over,  that  he  escaped  death — for 
had  he  advanced  straight  toward  the  shore  the  force  of  the 
waves  would  have  rolled  him  heels-over-head,  and  would 
almost  certainly  have  broken  his  neck. 

At  last,  just  as  consciousness  was  leaving  him,  and  he 
thought  that  he  could  struggle  no  more,  a  hand  grasped 
his  arm.  The  fishermen,  joining  hand  in  hand,  had  gone 
down  into  the  surf,  and  after  many  ineffectual  efforts  had 
at  last  seized  him  as  a  retiring  wave  was  carrying  him  out 
again  for  the  fifth  time.  With  the  consciousness  of  rescue 
all  feeling  left  him,  and  it  was  some  minutes  before  he 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  9 

recovered  his  senses.  His  first  question  was  for  the  safety 
of  the  child  on  the  spar,  and  he  was  glad  to  hear  that  it 
had  come  to  shore  without  hurt.  The  dog,  too,  had  heen 
rolled  up  the  beach,  and  seized  before  taken  off  again,  but 
had  broken  one  of  its  legs. 

The  Otter  was  soon  on  his  feet  again,  and  saying,  "I 
must  make  my  way  home,  they  will  be  alarmed  about  me," 
was  about  to  turn  away  when  a  group  of  gentlemen  stand- 
ing near  advanced. 

"  You  are  a  fine  lad,"  one  of  them  said  to  him.  "A  fine 
lad,  and  an  honor  to  the  south  of  Devonshire.  My  name 
is  Francis  Drake,  and  if  there  be  aught  that  I  can  do  for 
you,  now  or  hereafter,  I  shall  be  glad  indeed  to  do  my 
utmost  for  so  gallant  a  youth  as  yourself." 

"Oh,  sir!"  the  boy  exclaimed,  his  cheek  flushing  with 
excitement.  "If  you  are  Master  Francis  Drake,  will  you 
let  me  join  your  ship  for  the  voyage  to  the  Indies?" 

"Ah!  my  boy,"  the  gentleman  said,  "you  have  asked 
the  only  thing,  perhaps,  which  I  should  feel  obliged  to 
refuse  you.  Already  we  have  more  than  our  number,  and 
to  avoid  the  importunity  of  the  many  who  wish  to  go,  or 
of  my  powerful  friends  who  desire  to  place  sons  or  relations 
in  my  charge,  I  have  been  obliged  to  swear  that  I  would 
take  no  other  sailor  in  addition  to  those  already  shipped. 
You  are,  however,  young,"  he  said,  as  he  marked  the 
change  in  the  boy's  face,  "and  I  promise  you  that  if  I 
come  back,  and  again  sail  on  an  expedition  like  that  on 
which  I  now  start,  that  you  shall  be  one  of  my  crew. 
What  is  your  name,  lad?  I  hear  them  call  you  Otter,  and 
truly  the  beast  is  no  better  swimmer  than  you  are." 

"  My  name,  sir,  is  Ned  Hearne,  my  father  is  the  school- 
master here." 

"  Will  he  consent,  think  you,  to  your  taking  to  a  sea- 
faring life?" 

"Methinks  he  will,  sir,  he  knows  that  my  heart  is  set 


r 

10  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

upon  it,  for  he  hath  often  said  if  I  loved  my  lessons  with 
one-tenth  of  the  love  I  bear  for  the  sea,  I  should  make  a 
good  scholar  and  be  a  credit  to  him." 

"I  will  not  forget  you,  lad.  Trust  me,  and  when  you 
hear  of  my  return,  fail  not  to  send  a  reminder,  and  to 
claim  a  place  in  my  next  adventure." 

Ned  Hearne,  delighted  at  the  assurance,  ran  off  at  full 
speed  to  the  cottage  where  his  father  resided  at  the  end  of 
the  village.  The  dominie,  who  was  an  old  man,  wore  the 
huge  tortoise-shell  rimmed  spectacles  of  the  time. 

"Wet  again,"  he  said,  as  his  son  burst  into  the  room  in 
which  he  was  sitting  studying  a  Greek  tome.  "Truly 
thou  earnest  the  name  of  which  thou  art  so  proud,  Otter, 
hardly.  What  tempted  thee  to  go  into  the  water  on  a  day 
like  this?" 

Ned  briefly  explained  what  had  taken  place.  The  story 
was  no  unusual  one,  for  this  was  the  third  time  that  he 
had  swum  out  to  vessels  on  the  rocks  between  Westport 
and  Plymouth.  Then  he  related  to  his  father  how  Cap- 
tain Francis  Drake  had  spoken  to  him  and  praised  him, 
and  how  he  had  promised  that,  on  his  next  trip  to  the 
West  Indies,  he  would  take  him  with  him. 

"I  would  not  have  you  count  too  much  upon  that,"  the 
dominie  said  dryly.  "It  is  like,  indeed  that  he  may  never 
come  back  from  this  harebraiu  adventure,  and  if  he  brings 
home  his  skin  safe,  he  will,  methinks,  have  had  enough  of 
burning  in  the  sun  and  fighting  the  Spaniards." 

"But  hath  he  not  already  made  two  or  three  voyages 
thither,  father?"  the  boy  asked. 

"That  is  true  enough,"  said  his  father;  "but  from  what 
I  gather  these  were  mere  trips  to  spy  out  the  land.  This 
affair  on  which  he  starts  now  will  be,  I  wot,  a  very  differ- 
ent matter." 

"How  is  it,  father,"  the  boy  said  on  the  following  morn- 
ing, resuming  the  conversation  from  the  point  which  they 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG,  H 

were  at  when  he  went  up  to  change  his  wet  clothes  the 
day  before,  "that  when  England  is  at  peace  with  Spain, 
our  sailors  and  the  Spanish  do  fight  bloodily  in  the  West 
Indies?" 

"That,  my  son,  is  a  point  upon  which  the  Eoman  law 
telleth  us  nothing.  I  have  in  my  shelves  some  very  learned 
treatises  on  war,  but  in  none  do  I  find  mention  of  a  state  of 
things  in  which  two  powers  at  peace  at  home  do  fight 
desperately  at  the  extreme  end  of  the  earth. 

"But,  father,  do  you  think  it  not  lawful  to  kill  the 
Spaniard,  and  to  take  the  treasures  which  he  robbeth  from 
the  poor  heathen  of  the  West?" 

"I  know  not  about  lawful,  my  son,  but  I  see  no  warrant 
whatsoever  for  it;  and  as  for  heathen,  indeed,  it  appears 
to  me  that  the  attacks  upon  him  do  touch  very  closely 
upon  piracy  upon  the  high  seas.  However,  as  the  country 
in  general  appeareth  to  approve  of  it,  and  as  it  is  said  that 
the  queen's  most  gracious  majesty  doth  gladly  hear  of  the 
beating  of  the  Spaniards  in  those  seas,  it  becometh  not  me 
to  question  the  rights  of  the  case." 

"At  any  rate,  father,  you  would  not  object  when  the 
time  comes  for  me  to  sail  with  Mr.  Francis  Drake?" 

"No,  my  boy;  thou  hast  never  shown  any  aptitude 
whatever  for  learning.  Thou  canst  read  and  write,  but 
beyond  that  thy  knowledge  runneth  not.  Your  mind 
seems  to  be  set  on  the  water,  and  when  you  are  not  in  it 
you  are  on  it,  therefore  it  appears  to  me  to  be  flying  in  the 
face  of  Providence  to  try  to  keep  you  on  shore.  Had  your 
poor  mother  lived,  it  would  have  been  a  different  thing. 
Her  mind  was  set  upon  your  becoming  a  clerk;  but  there, 
one  might  as  well  try  to  make  a  silk  purse  from  the  ear  of 
a  sow.  But  I  tell  you  again,  count  not  too  much  upon 
this  promise,  it  may  be  years  before  Mr.  Francis  Drake 
may  be  in  a  position  to  keep  it." 

Had  Ned  Hearne  watched  for  Captain  Drake's  second 


12  UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG. 

voyage,  he  would,  indeed,  as  Ins  father  had  said,  have 
waited  long.  Three  days  after  the  conversation,  however, 
a  horseman  from  Plymouth  rode  into  the  little  village,  and 
inquired  for  the  house  of  Master  Hearne.  Being  directed 
thither,  he  rode  up  in  haste  to  the  gate. 

"Here  is  a  letter!"  he  cried,  "for  the  son  of  the  school- 
master, who  L'oes  by  the  name  of  the  'Otter.' " 

"I  am  he,"  Ned  cried.  "What  is  it,  and  who  can  have 
written  to  me?" 

"It  is  a  letter  from  His  Honor  the  Worshipful  Mr. 
Francis  Drake." 

Seizing  the  letter,  Ned  broke  the  seal,  read  a  few  lines, 
threw  his  cap  into  the  air  with  a  shout  of  joy,  and  rushed 
in  to  his  father. 

"Father,"  he  said,  "Captain  Drake  has  written  to  ac- 
quaint me  that  one  of  the  boys  in  his  ship  has  been  taken 
ill  and  cannot  go,  and  that  it  has  pleased  him  to  appoint 
me  to  go  in  his  place,  and  that  I  am  to  be  at  Plymouth  in 
three  days  at  the  utmost,  bringing  with  me  what  gear  I 
may  require  for  the  expedition." 

The  schoolmaster  was  a  little  taken  aback  at  this  sudden 
prospect  of  departure,  but  he  had  always  been  wholly  in- 
dulgent to  his  son,  and  it  was  not  in  his  nature  to  refuse 
to  allow  him  to  avail  himself  of  an  opportunity  which 
appeared  to  be  an  excellent  one.  The  danger  of  these  ex- 
peditions was  no  doubt  very  great,  but  the  spoils  were  in 
proportion,  and  there  was  not  a  boy  or  man  of  the  seafaring 
population  of  Devon  who  would  not  gladly  have  gone  with 
the  adventurous  captains. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAB.  13 


CHAPTER  II. 

FRIENDS   AND   FOES. 

THREE  days  after  the  receipt  of  the  letter,  Ned  Hearne 
stood  with  his  bundle  on  the  quay  at  Plymouth.  Near 
him  lay  a  large  rowboat  from  the  ships,  waiting  to  take 
off  the  last  comers.  A  little  way  behind,  Captain  Francis 
Drake  and  his  brother,  Captain  John  Drake,  talked  with 
the  notable  people  of  Plymouth,  who  had  come  down  to 
bid  them  farewell,  the  more  since  this  was  a  holiday,  being 
Whitsun  Eve,  the  24th  of  May,  and  all  in  the  town  who 
could  spare  time  had  made  their  way  down  to  the  Hove  to 
watch  the  departure  of  the  expedition,  for  none  could  say 
how  famous  this  might  become,  or  how  great  deeds  would 
be  accomplished  by  the  two  little  craft  lying  there.  Each 
looker-on  thought  to  himself  that  it  might  be  that  to  the 
end  of  his  life  he  should  tell  his  children  and  his  children's 
children  with  pride,  "  I  saw  Mr.  Drake  start  for  his  great 
voyage." 

Small  indeed  did  the  fleet  appear  in  comparison  to  the 
work  which  it  had  to  do.  It  was  composed  of  but  two 
vessels.  The  first,  the  Pacha,  of  seventy  tons,  carrying 
forty-seven  men  and  boys,  was  commanded  by  Captain 
Francis  Drake  himself.  By  her  side  was  the  Swanne,  of 
twenty-five  tons,  carrying  twenty-six  men  and  boys,  and 
commanded  by  Captain  John  Drake.  This  was  truly  but 
a  small  affair  to  undertake  so  great  a  voyage.  In  those 
days  the  Spaniards  were  masters  of  the  whole  of  South 


14  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

America  and  of  the  isles  of  the  West  Indies.  They  had 
many  very  large  towns  full  of  troops,  and  great  fleets  armed 
to  carry  the  treasure  which  was  collected  there,  to  Spain. 
It  did  seem  almost  like  an  act  of  madness  that  two  vessels, 
which  by  the  side  of  those  of  the  Spaniards  were  mere 
cockle-shells,  manned  in  all  by  less  than  eighty  men,  should 
attempt  to  enter  a  region  where  they  would  be  regarded, 
and  rightly,  as  enemies,  and  where  the  hand  of  every  man 
would  be  against  them. 

Captain  Drake  and  his  men  thought  little  of  these 
things.  The  success  which  had  attended  their  predecessors 
had  inspired  the  English  sailors  with  a  belief  in  their  own 
invincibility  when  opposed  to  the  Spaniards.  They  looked 
to  a  certain  extent  upon  their  mission  as  a  crusade.  In 
those  days  England  had  a  horror  of  Popery,  and  Spain  was 
the  mainstay  and  supporter  of  this  religion.  The  escape 
which  England  had  had  of  having  Popery  forced  upon  it 
during  the  reign  of  Mary,  by  her  spouse,  Philip  of  Spain, 
had  been  a  narrow  one,  and  even  now  it  was  by  no  means 
certain  that  Spain  would  not  sooner  or  later  endeavor  to 
carry  out  the  pretensions  of  the  late  queen's  husband. 
Then,  too,  terrible  tales  had  come  of  the  sufferings  of  the 
Indians  at  the  hands  of  the  Spaniards,  and  it  was  certain 
that  the  English  sailors  who  had  fallen  into  the  hands  of 
Spain  had  been  put  to  death  with  horrible  cruelty.  Thus, 
then,  the  English  sailors  regarded  the  Spaniards  as  the 
enemy  of  their  country,  as  the  enemy  of  their  religion,  and 
as  the  enemy  of  humanity.  Besides  which  it  cannot  be 
denied  that  they  viewed  them  as  rich  men  well  worth 
plundering;  and  although  when  it  came  to  fighting  it  is 
probable  that  hatred  overbore  the  thought  of  gain,  it  is 
Certain  that  the  desire  for  gold  was  in  itself  the  main  in- 
centive to  those  who  sailed  upon  these  expeditious. 

Amid  the  cheers  of  the  townsfolk  the  boats  pushed  off, 
Mr.  Francis  Drake  and  his  brother  waving  their  plumed 


VNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  15 

hats  to  the  burghers  of  Plymouth  and  the  sailors  giving  a 
hurrah  as  they  bent  to  the  oars.  Ned  Hearne,  who  had 
received  a  kind  word  of  greeting  from  Mr.  Drake,  had 
taken  his  place  in  the  bow  of  one  of  the  boats,  lost  in 
admiration  at  the  scene  and  at  the  thought  that  he  was 
one  of  this  band  of  heroes  who  were  going  out  to  fight  the 
Spaniards,  and  to  return  laden  with  countless  treasure 
wrested  from  them.  At  the  thought  his  eyes  sparkled, 
his  blood  seemed  to  dance  through  his  veins.  The  western 
main  in  those  days  was  a  name  almost  of  enchantment. 
Such  strange  tales  had  been  brought  home  by  the  voyagers 
who  had  navigated  those  seas,  of  the  wonderful  trees,  the 
bright  birds,  the  beauties  of  nature,  the  gold  and  silver, 
and  the  abundance  of  all  precious  things  that  it  was  the 
dream  of  every  youngster  on  the  seaboard  some  day  to 
penetrate  to  these  charmed  regions.  A  week  since  and 
the  realization  of  the  dream  had  appeared  beyond  his  wild- 
est hopes.  Now,  almost  with  the  suddenness  of  a  trans- 
formation scene,  this  had  changed,  and  there  was  he  on 
his  way  out  to  the  Swanue,  a  part  of  the  expedition  itself. 
It  was  to  the  Swanue  that  he  had  been  allotted,  for  it  was 
on  board  that  ship  that  the  boy  whose  place  he  was  to  take 
had  been  seized  with  illness. 

Although  but  twenty-five  tons  in  burden,  the  Swaune 
made  a  far  greater  show  than  would  be  made  by  a  craft  of 
that  size  in  the  present  day.  The  ships  of  the  time  lay 
but  lightly  on  the  water,  while  their  hulls  were  carried  up 
to  a  prodigious  height,  and  it  is  not  too  much  to  say  that 
the  portion  of  the  Swanne  above  water  was  fully  as  large 
as  the  hull  which  we  see  of  a  merchantman  of  four 
times  her  tonnage.  Still,  even  so,  it  was  but  a  tiny  craft 
to  cross  the  Atlantic,  and  former  voyages  had  been  gen- 
erally made  in  larger  ships.  Mr.  Francis  Drake,  however, 
knew  what  he  was  about.  He  considered  that  large  ships 
required  large  crews  to  be  left  behind  to  defend  them,  that 


16  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

they  drew  more  water  and  were  less  handy,  and  he  resolved 
in  this  expedition  he  would  do  no  small  part  of  his  work 
with  pinnaces  and  rowboats,  and  of  these  he  had  three  fine 
craft  now  lying  in  pieces  in  his  hold,  ready  to  fit  together 
on  arriving  in  the  Indies.  As  they  neared  the  ships  the 
two  boats  separated  and  Ned  soon  found  himself  alongside 
of  the  Swanne.  A  ladder  hung  at  her  side,  and  up  this 
Ned  followed  his  captain,  for  in  those  days  the  strict  eti- 
quette that  the  highest  goes  last  had  not  been  instituted. 

"Master  Holyoake,"  said  Mr.  John  Drake  to  a  big  and 
powerful-looking  man  standing  near,  "this  is  the  new  lad, 
whose  skill  in  swimming  and  whose  courage  I  told  you  of 
yesternight.  He  will,  I  doubt  not,  be  found  as  willing  as 
he  is  brave,  and  1  trust  that  you  will  put  him  in  the  way 
of  learning  his  business  as  a  sailor.  It  is  his  first  voyage; 
he  comes  on  board  a  green  hand,  but  I  doubt  not  that  ere 
the  voyage  be  finished  he  will  have  become  a  smart  young 
sailor." 

"  I  will  put  him  through,"  John  Holyoake,  sailing-master 
of  the  ship,  replied,  for  in  those  days  the  sailing-master 
was  the  navigator  of  the  ship,  and  the  captain  was  as  often 
as  not  a  soldier,  who  knew  nothing  whatever  about  sea- 
manship. The  one  sailed  the  ship,  the  other  fought  it; 
and  the  admirals  were  in  those  days  more  frequently  known 
as  generals,  and  held  that  position  on  shore.  As  Ned 
looked  round  the  deck  he  thought  that  he  had  never  seen 
a  finer  set  of  sailors.  All  were  picked  men,  hardy  and  ex- 
perienced, and  for  the  most  part  young.  Some  had  made 
previous  voyages  to  the  West  Indies,  but  the  greater  por- 
tion were  new  to  that  country.  They  looked  the  men  on 
whom  a  captain  could  rely  to  the  last.  Tall  and  stalwart, 
bronzed  with  the  sun,  and  with  a  reckless  and  fearless  ex- 
pression about  them  which  boded  ill  to  any  foes  upon 
whom  they  might  fall.  Although  Ned  had  never  been  to 
sea  on  a  long  voyage  he  had  sailed  too  often  in  the  fishing- 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  1? 

boats  of  his  native  village  to  have  any  qualm  of  seasickness, 
or  to  feel  in  any  degree  like  a  new  hand.  He  was,  there- 
fore, at  once  assigned  to  a  place  and  duty.  An  hour  later 
the  admiral,  as  Mr.  Francis  Drake  was  called,  fired  a  gun, 
the  two  vessels  hoisted  their  broad  sails  and  turned  their 
heads  from  shore,  and  the  crews  of  both  ships  gave  a  part- 
ing cheer  as  they  turned  their  faces  to  the  south. 

As  Ned  was  not  in  the  slightest  degree  either  home- 
sick or  seasick,  he  at  once  fell  to  work,  laughing  and 
joking  with  the  other  boys,  of  whom  there  were  three  on 
board.  He  found  that  their  duties  consisted  of  bearing 
messages,  of  hauling  any  rope  to  which  they  were  told  to 
fix  themselves,  and  in  receiving,  with  as  good  a  face  as 
might  be,  the  various  orders,  to  say  nothing  of  the  various 
kicks,  which  might  be  bestowed  upon  them  by  all  on  board. 
At  the  same  time  their  cheerful  countenances  showed  that 
these  things,  which,  when  told,  sounded  a  little  terrible, 
were,  in  truth,  in  no  way  serious. 

Ned  was  first  shown  where  he  was  to  sling  his  hammock, 
and  how;  where  he  was  to  get  his  food,  and  under  whose 
orders  he  was  specially  to  consider  himself;  the  master  for 
the  present  taking  him  under  his  own  charge.  For  the 
next  ten  days,  as  the  vessel  sailed  calmly  along  with  a 
favoring  wind,  Ned  had  learned  all  the  names  of  the  ropes 
and  sails,  and  their  uses;  could  climb  aloft,  and  do  hia 
share  of  the  work  of  the  ship;  and  if  not  yet  a  skilled 
sailor,  was  at  least  on  the  highroad  to  become  one.  The 
master  was  pleased  at  his  willingness  and  eagerness  to 
oblige,  and  he  soon  became  a  great  favorite  of  his.  Be- 
tween the  four  boys  on  the  ship  a  good  feeling  existed. 
All  had  been"  chosen  as  a  special  favor,  upon  the  recom- 
mendation of  one  or  other  of  those  in  authority.  Each  of 
them  had  made  up  his  mind  that  one  of  these  days  he  too 
would  command  an  expedition  to  the  West  Indies.  Each 
thought  of  the  glory  which  he  would  attain;  and  although 


18  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

in  the  hearts  of  many  of  the  elder  men  in  the  expedition 
the  substantial  benefits  to  be  reaped  stood  higher  than  any 
ideas  of  glory  or  honor,  to  the  lads,  at  least,  pecuniary 
gain  exercised  no  inducement  whatever.  They  burned  to 
see  the  strange  country,  and  to  gain  some  of  the  credit 
and  glory  which  would,  if  the  voyage  was  successful,  attach 
to  each  member  of  the  crew.  All  were  full  of  fun,  and 
took  what  came  to  them  in  the  way  of  work  so  good- 
temperedly  and  cheerfully,  that  the  men  soon  ceased  to 
give  them  work  for  work's  sake.  They  were,  too,  a  strong 
and  well-built  group  of  boys.  Ned  was  by  a  full  year  the 
youngest,  and  by  nigh  a  head  the  shortest  of  them;  but 
his  broad  shoulders  and  sturdy  build,  and  the  strength 
acquired  by  long  practice  in  swimming  and  rowing,  made 
him  their  equal. 

There  were,  however,  no  quarrels  among  them,  and  their 
strength  they  agreed  to  use  in  alliance,  if  need  be,  should 
any  of  the  crew  make  a  dead  set  at  one  or  other  of  them ; 
for  even  in  an  expedition  like  this  there  must  be  some 
brutal  as  well  as  many  brave  men.  There  were  assuredly 
two  or  three,  at  least,  of  those  en  board  the  Swanne  who 
might  well  be  called  brutal.  They  were  for  the  most  part 
old  hands,  who  had  lived  on  board  ship  half  their  lives, 
had  taken  part  in  the  slave  traffic  of  Captain  Hawkins, 
and  in  the  buccaneering  exploits  of  the  earlier  commanders. 
To  them  the  voyage  was  one  in  which  the  lust  of  gold  was 
the  sole  stimulant,  and,  accustomed  to  deeds  of  bloodshed, 
what  feelings  they  ever  had,  had  become  utterly  blunted, 
and  they  needed  but  the  power,  to  become  despotic  and 
brutal  masters. 

The  chief  among  these  was  Giles  Taunton,  the  armorer. 
He  was  a  swarthy  ruffian,  who  hid  beneath  the  guise  of  a 
jovial  bonhomie  a  cruel  and  unfeeling  nature.  He  was 
ever  ready  to  cuff  and  beat  the  boys  on  the  smallest  provo- 
cation. They  soon  gathered  together,  in  a  sort  of  defen- 


VNDtiH  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  19 

sive  league,  against  their  common  oppressors.  All  four 
were  high-spirited  lads;  the  other  three,  indeed,  were  sous 
of  men  of  substance  in  Devon,  whose  fathers  had  lent 
funds  to  Captain  Drake  for  the  carrying  out  of  his  great 
enterprise.  They,  therefore,  looked  but  ill  on  the  kicks 
and  curses  which  occasionally  fell  to  their  lot.  One  day 
they  gathered  together  round  the  bowsprit,  and  talked 
over  what  they  should  do.  Gerald  Summers,  the  eldest 
of  the  party,  proposed  that  they  should  go  in  a  body  to 
Captain  Drake,  and  complain  of  the  tyranny  to  which 
they  were  subject.  After  some  talk,  however,  all  agreed 
that  such  a  course  as  this  would  lower  them  in  the  esti- 
mation of  the  men,  and  that  it  would  be  better  to  put  upj 
with  the  ill-treatment  than  to  get  the  name  of  telltales. 

Ned  then  said  to  the  others:  "It  seems  to  me  that  if  we 
do  but  hold  together  we  need  not  be  afraid  of  this  big 
bully.  If  we  all  declare  to  each  other,  and  swear  that  the 
first  time  he  strikes  one  of  us  we  will  all  set  upon  him,  my 
faith  on  it  we  shall  be  able  to  master  him,  big  as  he  is;  we 
are  all  of  good  size,  and  in  two  years  will  think  ourselves 
men;  therefore  it  would  be  shame  indeed  if  the  four  of  us 
could  not  master  one,  however  big  and  sturdy  he  may  be." 

After  much  consultation  it  was  agreed  that  this  course 
should  be  adopted,  and  the  next  day,  as  Keuben  Gale  was 
passing  by  Giles,  he  turned  round  and  struck  him  on  the 
head  with  a  broom.  The  boy  gave  a  long  whistle,  and  in 
a  moment,  to  the  astonishment  of  the  armorer,  the  other 
three  lads  rushed  up  and  at  once  assailed  him  with  fury. 
Astonished  at  such  an  attack,  he  struck  out  at  them  with 
many  strange  oaths.  Gerald  he  knocked  down,  but  Ned 
leaped  on  his  back  from  behind,  and  the  other  two,  closing 
with  him,  rolled  him  on  to  the  deck;  then  despite  of  his 
efforts,  they  pummeled  him  until  his  face  was  swollen  and 
bruised,  and  his  eyes  nearly  closed. 

Some  of  the  men  of  his  own  sort,  standing  by,  would 


20  VNDflR  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

fain  have  interfered;  but  the  better  disposed  of  the  crew, 
who  had  seen  with  disgust  the  conduct  of  the  armorer  and 
his  mates  to  the  boys,  held  them  back,  and  said  that  none 
should  come  between.  Just  as  the  boys  drew  off,  and 
allowed  the  furious  armorer  to  rise  to  his  feet,  Captain 
John  Drake,  attracted  by  the  unusual  noise,  came  from 
hia  cabin. 

"What  is  this?"  he  asked. 

"These  young  wild  cats  have  leaped  upon  me,"  said 
Giles  Taunton  furiously,  "and  have  beaten  me  nigh  to 
death,  but  I  will  have  my  turn;  they  will  see,  and  bitterly 
shall  they  have  cause  to  regret  what  they  have  done." 

"We  have  been  driven  almost  weary  of  our  lives,  sir, 
with  the  foul  and  rough  conduct  of  this  man,  and  of  some 
of  his  mates,"  Gerald  said;  "we  did  not  like  to  come  to 
tell  you  of  it,  and  to  gain  the  name  of  carry-tales;  but  we 
had  resolved  among  ourselves  at  last  that,  whoever  struck 
one  of  us,  the  whole  should  set  upon  him.  To-day  we 
have  carried  it  out,  and  we  have  shown  Giles  Tauuton 
that  we  are  more  than  a  match  for  one  man  at  any  rate." 

"Four  good-sized  dogs,  if  they  are  well  managed,"  said 
Captain  John  Drake,  "will  pull  down  a  lion,  and  the  best 
thing  that  the  lion  can  do  is  to  leave  them  alone.  I  am 
sorry  to  hear,  Master  Taunton,  that  you  have  chosen  to 
ill-treat  these  lads,  who  are  indeed  the  sons  of  worthy  men, 
and  are  not  the  common  kind  of  ship-boys.  1  am  sure 
that  my  brother  would  not  brook  such  conduct,  and  I 
warn  you  that  if  any  complaint  again  on  this  head  reaches 
me  I  shall  lay  it  before  him." 

With  angry  mutterings  the  armorer  went  below. 

"We  have  earned  a  bitter  foe,"  Ned  said  to  his  friends, 
"and  we  had  best  keep  our  eyes  well  open.  There  is  very 
little  of  the  lion  about  Master  Tauntou.  He  is  strong 
indeed;  but  if  it  be  true  that  the  lion  has  a  noble  heart, 
and  fights  his  foes  openly,  methinks  he  resembles  rather 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  21 

the  tiger,  who  is  prone  to  leap  suddenly  upon  his 
enemies." 

"Yes,  indeed,  he  looked  dark  enough,"  Gerald  said,  "as 
he  went  below;  and  if  looks  could  have  killed  us,  we  should 
not  be  standing  here  alive  at  present." 

"It  is  not  force  that  we  need  fear  now,  but  that  he  will 
do  us  some  foul  turn;  at  all  events  we  are  now  forewarned, 
and  if  he  plays  us  a  scurvy  trick  it  will  be  our  own  faults." 

For  several  days  the  voyage  went  on  quietly  and  without 
adventure.  They  passed  at  a  distance  the  Portuguese  Isle 
of  Madeira,  lying  like  a  cloud  on  the  sea.  The  weather 
now  had  become  warm  and  very  fair,  a  steady  wind  blew, 
and  the  two  barks  kept  along  at  a  good  pace.  All  sorts  of 
creatures  strange  to  the  boys  were  to  be  seen  in  the  sea. 
Sometimes  there  was  a  spout  of  a  distant  whale.  Thou- 
sands of  flying-fish  darted  from  the  water,  driven  thence 
by  the  pursuit  of  their  enemies  beneath,  while  huge  flocks 
of  gulls  and  other  birds  hovered  over  the  sea,  chasing  the 
flying-fish  or  pouncing  down  upon  the  shoals  of  small  fry 
whose  splashings  whitened  the  surface  of  the  water,  as  if  a 
sandbank  had  laid  below  it. 

Gradually  as  the  time  went  on  the  heat  increased.  Many 
of  the  crew  found  themsleves  unable  to  sleep  below,  for  in 
those  days  there  was  but  little  thought  of  ventilation. 
The  boys  were  among  these,  for  the  heat  and  the  confine- 
ment were  to  them  especially  irksome.  One  day  the  wind 
had  fallen  almost  to  a  calm,  and  the  small  boat  had  been 
lowered  to  enable  the  carpenter  to  do  some  repair  to  the 
ship's  side,  where  a  seam  leaked  somewhat  when  the  waves 
were  high.  When  night  came  on  and  all  was  quiet  Ned 
proposed  to  the  others  that  they  should  slip  down  the  rope 
over  the  stern  into  the  boat  which  was  towing  behind, 
where  they  could  sleep  undisturbed  by  the  tramp  of  the 
sentry  or  the  call  to  pull  at  ropes  and  trim  sails. 

The  idea  was  considered  a  capital  one,  and  the  boys  slid 


22  VNI>m  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

down  into  the  boat,  where,  taking  up  their  quarters  as 
comfortably,  as  they  could,  they,  after  a  short  chat,  curled 
themselves  up  and  were  soon  sound  asleep,  intending  to 
be  on  board  again  with  the  earliest  gleam  of  morn. 

When  they  awoke,  however,  it  was  with  a  start  and  a 
cry.  The  sun  was  already  high,  but  there  were  no  signs 
whatever  of  the  ship;  they  floated  alone  in  the  mid-ocean. 
With  blank  amazement  they  looked  at  each  other. 

"This  is  a  stroke  of  misfortune  indeed,"  Gerald  said. 
"  We  have  lost  the  ship  and  I  fear  our  lives  as  well.  What 
do  you  say,  *  Otter?' "  for  the  lad's  nickname  had  come  on 
board  ship  with  him  and  he  was  generally  known  by  it. 

"It  seems  to  me,"  said  Ned,  "that  our  friend  the  armorer 
has  done  us  this  bad  turn.  I  am  sure  that  the  rope  was 
well  tied,  for  I  was  the  first  who  slipped  down  it,  and  I 
looked  at  the  knot  well  before  I  went  over  the  side  and 
trusted  my  weight  to  it.  He  must  have  seen  us,  arid  as 
soon  as  he  thought  we  were  fairly  asleep  must  have  loosened 
the  knot  and  cast  us  adrift.  What  on  earth  is  to  be  done 
now?" 

"I  should  think,"  Gerald  said,  "that  it  will  not  be  long 
before  the  ship  comes  back  for  us.  The  boat  is  sure  to  be 
missed  in  the  morning,  for  the  carpenter  will  be  wanting 
it  to  go  over  the  side;  we,  too,  will  be  missed,  for  the  cap- 
tain will  be  wanting  his  flagon  of  wine  soon  after  the  day 
has  dawned." 

"But  think  you,"  Tom  Tressilis  said,  "that  the  captain 
will  turn  back  on  his  voyage  for  us?" 

"Of  that  I  think  there  is  no  doubt,"  Gerald  said;  "the 
only  question  is  as  to  the  finding  us,  but  I  should  say  that 
of  that  there  is  little  fear;  the  wind  is  light,  the  ship  was 
not  making  fast  through  the  water,  and  will  not  be  more 
than  fifty  miles,  at  most,  away  when  she  turns  on  her  heel 
and  comes  to  look  for  us.  I  expect  that  Master  Taunton 
knew  well  enough  that  we  should  be  picked  up  again,  but 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  23 

he  guessed  that  the  admiral  would  not  be  pleased  at  losing 
a  day  by  our  freak,  and  that  the  matter  is  not  likely  to 
improve  the  favor  in  which  we  may  stand  with  him  and 
his  brother." 

"It  is  going  to  be  a  terrible  hot  day,"  Ned  said,  "and 
with  the  sun  above  our  heads  and  no  shade,  and  not  so 
much  as  a  drop  of  water,  the  sooner  we  are  picked  up  the 
more  pleasant  it  will  be,  even  if  we  all  get  a  touch  of  the 
rope's-end  for  our  exploit." 

All  day  the  boys  watched  anxiously.  Once  they  saw 
the  two  vessels  sailing  backward  on  their  track,  but  the 
current  had  drifted  the  boat,  and  the  ships  passed  fully 
eight  miles  away  to  windward  of  them,  and  thus  without 
seeing  them.  This  caused  the  boys,  courageous  as  they 
were,  almost  to  despair. 

"If,"  argued  Gerald,  "they  pass  us  in  the  daylight,  our 
chance  is  small  indeed  that  they  will  find  us  at  night. 
They  will  doubtless  sail  back  till  dusk  and  then  judge 
that  they  have  missed  us  or  that  we  have  in  some -way 
sunk,  then  putting  their  heads  to  the  west  they  will  con- 
tinue their  voyage.  If  we  had  oars  or  a  sail  we  might 
make  a  shift  to  pull  the  boat  into  the  track  they  are  fol- 
lowing, which  would  give  us  a  chance  of  being  picked  up 
when  they  again  turn  west,  but  as  we  have  neither  one 
nor  the  other  we  are  helpless  indeed." 

"I  do  not  think,"  Ned  said,  "that  Captain  John  or  his 
brother  are  the  men  to  leave  us  without  a  great  effort,  and 
methinks  that  when  they  have  sailed  over  the  ground  to 
the  point  where,  at  the  utmost,  we  must  have  parted  from 
them,  they  will  lay  by  through  the  night  and  search  back 
again  to-morrow." 

And  so  it  proved. 

On  the  morrow  about  midday  the  boys  beheld  one  of 
the  ships  coming  up  nearly  in  a  line  behind  them,  while 
the  other,  some  six  miles  away  to  leeward,  was  keeping 
abreast  of  her. 


24  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"They  are  quartering  the  ground  like  hounds,"  Gerald 
said,  "and  thanks  to  their  care  and  though tfulness  we  are 
saved  this  time." 

By  the  time  that,  three  hours  later,  the  ship  which  was 
the  Pacha,  came  alongside,  the  boys  were  suffering  terribly 
from  the  heat  and  thirst;  for  thirty-six  hours  no  drop  of 
water  had  passed  their  lips  and  the  sun  had  blazed  down 
upon  them  with  terrible  force,  therefore  when  the  vessel 
hauled  her  cause  and  laid  by  for  a  boat  to  be  lowered  to 
pick  them  up,  their  plight  was  so  bad  a  one  that  Captain 
Francis,  although  sorely  vexed  at  having  lost  near  two 
days  of  his  voyage,  yet  felt  tlsat  they  had  been  amply  pun- 
ished for  their  escapade. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  25 


CHAPTER  III. 

ON   THE   SPANISH   MAIN. 

THE  four  boys,  upon  gaining  the  Pacha's  deck,  were 
taken  below,  and  after  drink  and  food  had  been  given 
thein  were  called  to  the  captain's  cabin.  He  spoke  to 
them  gravely  and  inquired  how  it  was  that  they  had  all, 
got  adrift  together.  They  told  him  the  circumstances, 
and  said  that  they  thought  there  was  no  chance  of  any 
mishap  occurring;  the  knot  was  well  fastened,  the  night 
was  calm,  and  though  they  regretted  much  the  pains  and 
trouble  which  they  had  given  and  the  delay  to  which  they 
had  put  the  fleet,  yet  it  did  not  appear  to  them,  they  said 
frankly,  that  they  had  been  so  very  much  to  blame,  as 
they  could  hardly  have  believed  that  the  boat  would  have 
broken  afloat;  and  indeed,  Ned  said  plainly,  they  believed 
that  it  was  not  the  result  of  chance,  but  that  an  enemy 
had  done  them  an  evil  turn. 

"Why  think  you  so?"  Captain  Drake  said  sharply. 
"How  can  boys  like  you  have  an  enemy?" 

Gerald  then  detailed  the  account  of  their  trouble  with 
Master  Taunton. 

"He  is  a  rough  man,"  Captain  Drake  said,  "and  a  vio- 
lent man  may  be,  but  he  is  useful  and  brave.  However,  I 
will  have  reason  with  him.  Of  course  it  is  a  mere  suspi- 
cion, but  I  will  speak  to  my  brother." 

When  the  boat  had  first  come  in  sight  the  Pacha  had 
made  the  signal  to  the  Swanne  that  the  boys  were  found, 


26  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

and  that  she  was  to  keep  her  course,  drawing  gradually 
alongside. 

Before  dark  the  vessels  were  within  hailing  distance, 
and  Captain  Drake,  lowering  a  boat,  went  himself  on 
board  the  Swauue  with  the  four  lads.  Captain  John  was 
at  the  top  of  the  ladder  and  was  about  to  rate  them  soundly. 
Captain  Francis  said,  "Let  us  talk  together,  John,  first;'5 
and  he  repaired  with  him  to  his  cabin,  while  the  crew 
swarmed  round  the  boys  to  gather  an  account  of  how  they 
got  adrift. 

Then  Captain  John  appeared  at  the  door  of  his  cabin 
and  called  for  Master  Tannton,  who  went  in  and  remained 
for  some  time  in  converse  with  the  two  captains.  Then 
he  came  out,  looking  surly  and  black,  and  Captain  Francis 
soon  after  issued  out  with  his  brother,  walked  round  the 
ship,  said  a  few  cheery  words  to  all  the  crew,  and  with  a 
parting  laugh  and  word  of  advice  to  the  boys  to  be  more 
careful  where  they  slept  in  future,  descended  the  side  and 
went  off  to  his  ship  again. 

Opinions  were  much  mingled  on  board  the  Swanne  as  to 
whether  the  slipping  of  the  knot  had  been  the  effect  of 
accident  or  of  an  evil  turn;  however,  the  boys  said  little 
about  it,  and  endeavored,  so  far  as  might  be,  to  let  it  pass 
as  an  accident.  They  felt  thai;  the  matter  between  them- 
selves and  Master  Taunton  had  already  gone  too  far  for 
their  safety  and  comfort.  They  doubted  not  that  he  had 
been  reprimanded  by  the  admiral  as  well  as  by  Captain 
John,  and  that  they  had  earned  his  hatred,  which,  although 
it  might  slumber  for  awhile,  was  likely  to  show  itself  again 
when  a  chance  might  occur.  Not  wishing  to  inflame  further 
his  fury  against  them,  they  abstained  from  giving  such  a 
complexion  to  their  tale  as  might  seem  to  cast  ,a  suspicion 
upon  him.  Nevertheless,  there  was  a  strong  feeling  among 
many  of  the  crew  that  Master  Tauuton  must  have  had  a 
hand  in  the  casting  adrift  of  the  boys,  or  that  if  he  did  not 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  27 

himself  do  it,  it  had  been  done  by  one  of  the  party  who 
always  worked  with  him. 

Whatever  the  feelings  of  Giles  Taunton  might  be,  he 
kept  them  to  himself.  He  now  never  interfered  with  the 
boys  by  word  or  deed,  working  sullenly  and  quietly  at  his 
craft  as  armorer.  The  boys  felt  their  lives  much  lightened 
thereby,  and  now  thoroughly  enjoyed  the  voyage.  Al- 
though as  boys  it  was  not  a  part  of  their  duty  to  go  aloft, 
which  was  done  by  the  regular  sailors  who  were  hired  for 
the  purpose,  yet  they  spent  no  small  part  of  their  time 
when  not  engaged — and  their  duties  truly  were  but  nom- 
inal— in  going  aloft,  sliding  down  the  ropes,  and  learning 
to  be  thoroughly  at  home  among  the  sails.  Every  day  too 
there  would  be  practices  with  arms. 

It  was  of  the  utmost  importance  that  each  man  should 
be  able  to  use  sword  and  axe  with  the  greatest  skill;  and 
on  board  each  ship  those  who  were  best  skilled  would  ex- 
ercise and  give  lessons  to  those  who  were  less  practiced 
with  their  arms,  and,  using  wooden  clubs  in  place  of 
boarding-axes,  they  would  much  belabor  each  other,  to  the 
amusement  of  the  lookers-on.  The  boys  were  most  assid- 
uous at  this  kind  of  work.  It  was  their  highest  ambition 
to  become  good  swordsmen  and  to  have  a  chance  of  distin- 
guishing themselves  against  the  Spaniards;  and  so  they 
practiced  diligently  with  point  and  edge.  The  knowledge 
of  single-stick  and  quarterstaff  still  lingered  in  the  country 
parts  of  England.  They  had  all  already  some  skill  with 
these,  and  picked  up  fast  the  use  of  the  heavier  and  more 
manly  arms. 

It  was  the  end  of  July  before  they  sighted  land.  Great 
was  the  delight  of  all,  for,  cooped  up  in  what  were  after 
all  but  narrow  quarters,  they  longed  to  a  gight  of  the  green 
and  beautiful  forests  of  which  they  had  heard  so  much* 
They  were  still  far  from  the  destination  which  the  admiral 
bad  marked  m  his  base  of  operations,  They  cruised  along 


38  UNDER  DhAKE'S  FLAG. 

for  days,  with  the  land  often  in  sight,  but  keeping  for  the 
most  part  a  long  distance  out,  for  they  feared  that  the 
knowledge  of  their  coming  might  be  carried  by  the  na- 
tives to  the  Spaniards  in  the  towns,  and  that  such  prepa- 
rations might  be  made  as  would  render  their  journey 
fruitless.  Near,  however,  to  some  of  the  smaller  islands 
which  were  known  to  be  uninhabited  by  Spaniards  the 
vessels  went  closely,  and  one  day  dropped  anchor  in  a  bay. 

They  observed  some  natives  on  the  shore,  but  the  white 
men  had  so  bad  a  name,  caused  by  the  cruelty  of  the  Span- 
iards, that  these  withdrew  hastily  from  sight.  The  cap- 
tain, however,  had  a  boat  lowered,  which,  pulliug  toward 
shore,  and  waving  a  white  flag  in  token  of  amity,  met  with 
no  resistance.  There  were  on  board  some  who  could  speak 
Spanish,  and  one  of  these  shouted  aloud  to  the  Indians  to 
have  no  fear  for  that  they  were  friends,  and  haters  of  the 
Spaniards,  whereupon  the  natives  came  out  from  the  woods 
and  greeted  them. 

They  were  a  fine  race  of  men,  but  gentle  and  timid  in 
their  demeanor.     They  were  copper  in   color,   and  wore 
headdresses   of  bright  feathers,  but  the  men  had  but  little 
other  clothing,  of  which  indeed  in  such  a  climate  there  is  , 
but  slight  necessity.     In  exchange  for  some  trifles  from  the  v 
ship  they  brought  many  baskets  of  fruits  such  as  none  of 
those  who  had  fresh  come  from  England  had  ever  before 
seen. 

Great  was  the  joy  on  board  ship  especially  among  the 
four  boys  at  the  profusion  of  strange  fruits,  and  they  wer$ 
seen  seated  together  eating  pineapples,  bananas,  and  many 
other  things  of  which  they  knew  not  so  much  as  the  name, 
but  which  they  found  delicious  indeed  after  so  long  a  voy- 
age upon  salted  food. 

Then,  sailing  on,  they  dropped  anchor  in  the  bay  which 
Captain  Drake  had  himself  christened  during  his  last  voy- 
age Port  Pheasant,  for  they  had  killed  many  of  this  kind 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  2(J 

of  bird  there.  Here  the  admiral  purposed  waiting  for 
awhile  to  refresh  the  crews  and  to  put  the  pinnaces 
together.  Accordingly  the  anchors  were  put  out,  and  all 
was  made  snug.  A  boat's  crew  was  sent  on  shore  to  see 
that  all  was  safe,  for  there  was  no  saying  where  the  Span- 
iards might  be  lurking.  They  returned  with  a  great  plate 
of  lead  which  they  had  found  fastened  to  a  tree  close  to 
the  water's  edge.  Upon  it  were  these  words:  "Captain 
Drake,  if  it  is  your  fortune  to  come  into  this  part,  make 
haste  away,  for  the  Spaniards  which  were  with  yon  here 
last  year  have  betrayed  the  place  and  taken  away  all  that 
you  left  here.  I  departed  hence  on  this  present  7th  July, 
1572.  Your  very  loving  friend,  John  Garrett." 

"1  would  I  had  been  here  a  few  clays  earlier,"  Captain 
Drake  said  when  he  read  this  notice,  "for  John  Garrett 
would  assuredly  have  joined  us,  and  his  aid  would  have  been 
no  slight  assistance  in  the  matter  in  which  we  are  about  to 
engage.  However,  it  will  not  do  to  despise  his  caution; 
therefore,  lest  we  be  attacked  while  on  shore  by  the  Span- 
iards we  will  even  make  a  fort,  and  we  shall  be  able  to  un- 
load our  stores  and  put  our  pinnaces  together  without  fear 
of  interruption." 

The  crew  were  now  landed  and  set  to  work  with  hatchet 
and  bill  to  clear  a  plot  of  ground.  Three-quarters  of  an 
acre  was  after  three  days'  work  cleared,  and  the  trees  were 
cast  outward  and  piled  together  in  such  form  as  to  make  a 
sort  of  wall  thirty  feet  high  round  it.  This  hard  work 
done,  most  of  the  crew  were  allowed  a  little  liberty,  the 
carpenters  and  experienced  artificers  being  engaged  in  put- 
ting the  three  pinnaces  together. 

The  boys,  in  pairs,  for  all  could  never  obtain  leave  to- 
gether, rambled  in  the  woods,  full  of  admiration  for  the 
beauties  of  nature.  Huge  butterflies  flitted  about  upon 
the  brilliant  flowers,  long  trailing  creepers,  rich  with  blos- 
som, hung  on  the  trees.  Here  and  there,  as  they  passed 


30  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

along,  snakes  slipped  away  among  the  undergrowth,  and 
these  in  truth  the  boys  were  as  ready  to  leave  alone  as  the 
reptiles  were  to  avoid  them,  for  they  were  told  that  it  was 
certain  death  to  be  bitten  by  these  creatures.  Most  of  all, 
the  boys  admired  the  little  birds,  which  indeed  it  was  hard 
for  them  to  believe  not  to  be  butterflies,  so  small  were  they, 
so  rapid  their  movements,  and  so  brilliant  their  color. 

On  the  seventh  day  from  landing  the  pinnaces  were  fin- 
ished, and  the  vessels  being  anchored  near  the  shore,  the 
crews  went  on  board  for  the  last  time  preparatory  to  making 
their  start  the  next  day.  There  was  one  tall  and  bright- 
faced  sailor  with  whom  the  boys  had  struck  up  a  great 
friendship.  He  had  sailed  before  with  Captain  Drake, 
and  as  the  evening  was  cool  and  there  was  naught  to  do 
they  begged  him  to  tell  them  of  his  former  visits  in  the 
Carribeau  Seas. 

"My  first,"  he  said,  "was  the  worst  and  might  well  have 
been  my  last.  Captain  John  Hawkins  was  our  captain,  a 
bold  man  and  a  good  sailor,  but  not  gentle  as  well  as  brave, 
as  is  our  good  Captain  Francis.  Our  fleet  was  a  strong 
one.  The  admiral's  ship,  the  Jesus,  of  Ltibeck,  was  seven 
hundred  tons.  Then  there  were  the  smaller  craft,  the  Min- 
ion, Captain  Hampton,  in  which  I  myself  sailed;  the  Will- 
iam and  John  of  Captain  Boulton;  the  Judith  with  Captain 
Francis  Drake,  and  two  little  ships  besides.  We  sailed  later 
in  the  year,  it  was  the  2d  of  October,  five  years  back,  that  is 
1567.  We  started  badly,  for  a  storm  struck  us  off  Finisterre, 
the  ships  separated,  and  some  boats  were  lost.  We  came  to-i 
gether  at  Cape  de  Verde,  and  there  we  tried  to  get  slaves, 
for  it  was  part  of  the  object  of  our  voyage  to  buy  slaves  on 
the  coast  of  Africa  and  sell  them  to  the  Spaniards  here. 
It  was  a  traffic  for  which  I  myself  had  but  little  mind,  for 
tliosi^U  it  bo  true  that  thcso  black  fellows  are  a  pernicious 
race,  {jivuii  to  murder  and  to  il^liriuga  of  all  kinds  among 
themselves,  yet  uve  thi\y  human  beings,  ami  it  is,  methiuks, 


VMDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  31 

cruel  to  send  them  beyond  the  seas  into  slavery  so  far  from 
their  homes  and  people.  But  it  was  not  for  me,  a  simple 
mariner,  to  argue  the  question  with  our  admirals  and  cap- 
tains, and  I  have  heard  many  worshipful  merchants  are 
engaged  in  the  traffic. 

"However  that  be,  methinks  that  onr  good  Captain 
Francis  did  likewise  turn  himself  against  this  kind  of  traffic 
in  human  flesh,  for  although  he  has  been  three  times  since 
in  these  regions  he  has  never  again  taken  a  hand  in  it. 
With  much  to  do  at  Cape  de  Verde,  we  succeeded  in  get- 
ting a  hundred  and  fifty  men,  but  not  without  much  resist- 
ance from  the  natives,  who  shot  their  arrows  at  us  and 
wounded  many,  and  most  of  those  who  were  wounded  did 
die  of  lockjaw,  for  the  arrows  had  been  smeared  in  some 
poisonous  stuff.  Then  we  went  farther  down  the  coast 
and  took  in  two  hundred  more.  Coasting  still  farther 
down  to  St.  Jorge  de  Mina,  we  landed,  and  Captain  Haw- 
kins found  that  the  negro  king  there  was  at  war  with  an 
enemy  a  little  farther  inland.  He  besought  our  assistance 
and  promised  us  plenty  of  slaves  if  we  would  go  there  and 
storm  the  place  with  him.  Captain  Hawkins  agreed 
cheerfully  enough,  and  set  off  with  a  portion  of  his  crews 
to  assist  the  king.  The  enemy  fought  well,  and  it  was 
only  after  a  very  hard  fight  on  our  part  and  a  loss  of  many 
men  that  we  took  the  town.  Methiuks  the  two  hundred 
and  fifty  slaves  which  we  took  there  were  dearly  paid  for, 
and  there  was  much  grumbling  among  the  ships  at  the 
reckless  way  in  which  our  admiral  had  risked  our  lives  for 
meager  gain.  It  is  true  that  these  slaves  would  sell  at  a 
high  price,  yet  none  of  us  looked  upon  money  gained  in 
that  way  quite  as  we  do  upon  treasure  taken  in  fair  fight. 
In  the  one  case  we  traffic  with  the  Spaniards,  who  are  our 
natural  enemies,  and  it  is  repugnant  to  a  Christian  man  to 
hand  over  even  these  poor  negroes  to  such  willful  masters 
as  these;  in  the  other  we  are  fighting  for  our  queen  and 


32  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

country.  The  Spaniards  are  the  natural  enemies  of  all 
good  Protestants,  and  every  ship  we  see  and  every  treasure- 
bag  we  capture  does  something  to  pare  the  nails  of  that 
fierce  and  haughty  power. 

'  Having  filled  up  our  hold  with  the  slaves  which  we  had 
captured  at  St.  Jorge  de  Mina,  we  turned  our  back  upon 
the  African  coast  and  sailed  to  the  West  Indies.  At  Eio 
de  llacha,  the  first  port  at  which  we  touched,  the  people 
did  not  wish  to  trade  with  us;  but  the  admiral  was  not  the 
man  to  allow  people  to  indulge  in  fancies  of  this  kind. 
We  soon  forced  them  to  buy  or  to  sell  that  which  we  chose 
and  not  what  they  had  a  fancy  for.  Sailing  along  we  were 
caught  in  a  storm,  and  in  searching  for  the  port  of  St. 
Juan  d'Ulloa,  where  we  hoped  to  refit,  we  captured  three 
ships.  In  the  port  we  found  twelve  other  small  craft,  but 
these  we  released,  and  sent  some  of  them  to  Mexico  to  ask 
that  victuals  and  stores  might  be  sent. 

"The  next  day  thirteen  great  ships  appeared  off  the 
harbor.  In  them  was  the  Viceroy  of  Mexico.  We  had 
then  only  the  Jesus,  the  Minion  of  one  hundred  tons,  and 
the  Judith  of  fifty  tons,  and  this  big  fleet  was  large  enough 
to  have  eaten  us,  but  Captain  Hawkins  put  a  good  face  on 
it  and  sailed  out  to  meet  them,  waiting  at  the  mouth  of 
the  harbor.  Here  he  told  them  haughtily  that  he  should 
not  allow  their  fleet  to  enter  save  on  his  terms.  I  doubt 
not  that  Hawkins  would  have  been  glad  enough  to  have 
made  off  if  he  could  have  done  so,  for  what  with  the  sale 
of  the  slaves  and  the  vessels  we  had  captured,  we  had  now; 
£1,800,000  in  silver  and  gold  on  board  of  the  ships.  The 
Spanish  admiral  accepted  the  terms  which  Captain  Haw- 
kins laid  down  and  most  solemnly  swore  to  observe  them. 

"  So  with  colors  flying,  both  fleets  sailed  into  the  harbor 
together.  It  is  true,  however,  that  the  man  who  places 
faith  in  a  Spaniard  is  a  fool,  and  so  it  proved  to  us.  No 
sooner  had  they  reached  the  port  than  they  began  to  plot 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  33 

secretly  among  themselves  how  to  fall  upon  us;  even  then, 
though  they  had  thirteen  big  ships,  the  smallest  of  which 
was  larger  than  the  Jesus,  they  feared  to  attack  ns  openly. 
Numbers  of  men  were  set  to  work  by  them  on  the  shore 
secretly  to  get  up  batteries  by  which  they  might  fire  into 
us,  while  a  great  ship,  having  five  hundred  men  on  board, 
was  moored  close  alongside  the  Minion.  I  remember  well 
talking  the  matter  over  with  Jack  Boscowan,  who  was 
boatswain  on  board,  and  we  agreed  that  this  time  we  had 
run  into  an  ugly  trap,  and  that  we  did  not  see  our  way  out 
of  it.  Englishmen  can,  as  all  the  world  knows,  lick  the 
Spaniards  when  they  are  but  as  one  to  five,  but  when  there 
are  twenty  of  the  Dons  to  one  of  us  it  is  clear  that  the  task 
is  a  hard  one.  What  made  it  worse  was  that  we  were  in 
harbor.  At  sea  our  quickness  in  handling  our  ships  would 
have  made  us  a  match  for  the  Spanish  fleet,  but  at  anchor 
and  with  the  guns  of  the  port  commanding  us  we  did  not 
truly  see  how  we  were  to  get  out  of  it. 

"  The  fight  began  by  the  Spaniards  letting  their  big  ship 
drift  alongside  the  Minion,  when  suddenly  five  hundred 
men  leaped  out  on  our  decks.  We  were  beaten  below  in 
no  time,  for  we  were  scarce  prepared  for  so  sudden  an 
onslaught.  There,  however,  we  defended  ourselves  stoutly, 
firing  into  the  hull  of  the  ship  alongside,  and  defending 
our  ports  and  entrances  from  the  Spaniards.  For  awhile 
our  case  seemed  desperate.  The  Jesus  was  hard  at  work 
too,  and  when  she  had  sunk  the  ship  of  the  Spanish 
admiral,  she  came  up,  and  gave  a  broadside  into  the  ship 
alongside  of  us.  Her  crew  ran  swiftly  back  to  her,  and 
we  with  much  rejoicing  poured  on  deck  again  and  began 
to  pay  them  hotly  for  their  sudden  attack  upon  us.  It 
was  a  great  fight,  and  one  that  would  have  done  your  heart 
good,  to  see  the  three  English  ships,  two  of  them  so  small 
as  to  be  little  more  than  boats,  surrounded  by  a  whole 
fleet  of  Spaniards,  while  from  on  shore  the  guns  of  the 


34  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

forts  played  upon  us.  Had  it  not  been  for  those  forts,  I 
•verily  believe  that  we  should  have  destroyed  the  Spanish 
fleet.  Already  another  large  vessel  had  followed  the 
example  of  their  admiral's  ship  and  had  gone  to  the  bot- 
tom. Over  five  hundred  and  forty  of  their  sailors  we  had, 
as  they  have  themselves  admitted,  slain  outright. 

"  We  were  faring  well,  and  had  begun  to  hope  that  we 
might  get  to  find  our  way  out  of  the  toils,  when  a  cry 
came  from  the  lookout,  who  said  that  the  Jesus  was  hoist- 
ing signals  of  distress,  and  that  he  feared  she  was  sinking. 
Close  as  she  was  lying  to  a  battery,  and  surrounded  by 
enemies,  our  bold  captain  did  not  hesitate  a  minute,  but 
sailed  the  Minion  through  a  crowd  of  enemies  close  to  the 
Jesus.  You  should  have  heard  the  cheer  that  the  two 
crews  gave  each  other;  it  rose  above  all  the  noise  of  the 
battle,  and  would  assuredly  have  done  your  heart  good. 
The  Jesus  was  sinking  fast,  and  it  was  as  much  as  they 
could  do  to  tumble  into  the  boats  and  to  row  hastily  to 
our  side.  We  should  have  saved  them  all,  but  the  Span- 
iards, who  dared  not  lay  us  aboard,  and  who  were  in  no 
slight  degree  troubled  by  the  bravery  with  which  we  had 
fought,  set  two  of  their  great  ships  on  fire,  and  launched 
them  down  upon  us,  preferring  to  lose  two  of  their  own 
ships  for  the  sake  of  capturing  or  destroying  our  little 
bark.  The  sight  of  the  ships  coming  down  in  flames  shook 
the  hearts  of  our  men  more  than  all  the  fury  of  the  Span- 
iards had  been  able  to  do,  and  without  waiting  for  orders 
they  turned  the  ship's  head  for  the  mouth  of  the  port. 

"The  admiral,  who  had  just  come  on  board,  cursed  and 
shouted  when  he  saw  what  was  being  done;  but  the  panic 
of  the  fireships  got  the  better  of  the  men,  and  we  made 
off,  firing  broadsides  at  the  Spaniards'  fleet  as  we  passed 
through  them,  and  aided  by  the  little  Judith,  which  stuck 
to  us  through  the  whole  of  the  fight.  When  we  cooled 
down  and  came  to  think  of  it,  we  were  in  no  slight  degree 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  35 

ashamed  of  our  desertion  of  our  comrades  in  the  Jesus. 
Fortunately  the  number  so  left  behind  was  not  large;  but 
we  knew  that  according  to  their  custom  the  Spaniards 
would  put  all  to  death,  and  so  indeed  it  afterward  turned 
out,  many  of  them  being  despatched  with  horrible  tortures. 

"This  terrible  treatment  of  the  prisoners  caused,  when 
it  was  known,  great  indignation,  and  although  Queen 
Elizabeth  did  not  declare  war  with  Spain,  from  that  time 
she  gave  every  countenance  she  could  to  the  adventurers 
who  waged  war  on  their  own  account  against  her. 

"The  Minion  suffered  severely,  packed  close  as  she  was 
with  all  her  own  crew  and  a  great  part  of  that  of  the  Jesus,, 
vast  numbers  of  whom  were  wounded.  However,  at 
length  a  hundred  were  at  their  own  request  landed  and  left 
to  shift  for  themselves,  preferring  to  run  the  risk  of 
Indians,  or  even  of  Spaniards,  to  continue  any  longer  amid 
the  horrors  on  board  the  ship.  I  myself,  boys,  was  not 
one  of  that  number,  and  came  back  to  England  in  her. 
Truly  it  was  the  worst  voyage  that  I  ever  made,  for  though 
fortune  was  for  a  time  good  to  us,  and  we  collected  much 
money,  yet  in  the  end  we  lost  all,  and  hardly  escaped  with 
our  lives.  It  has  seemed  to  me  that  this  bad  fortune  was 
sent  as  a  punishment  upon  us  for  carrying  off  the  negroes 
into  slavery.  Many  others  thought  the  same,  and  methinks 
that  that  was  also  the  opinion  of  our  present  good  admiral." 

"Did  you  come  out  with  him  in  his  further  voyages 
here?"  Ned  asked. 

"I  was  with  him  in  the  Dragon  two  years  ago  when 
with  the  Swanne  she  came  here.  Last  year  I  sailed  with 
him  in  the  Swanne  alone." 

"You  did  not  have  any  very  stirring  adventures?" 

"No,  we  were  mainly  bent  on  exploring,  but  for  all  that 
we  carried  off  many  prizes,  and  might  had  we  been  pil- 
grims have  bought  farms  ill  Devonshire,  and  settled  down 
on  our  share  of  the  prize-money;  but  there,  that  is  not 


36  UNDE&  DRAKE'S  FLA&. 

the  way  with  sailors.  Quick  come,  quick  go,  arid  not  one 
in  a  hundred  that  I  have  ever  heard  of,  however  much  he 
may  have  taken  as  his  share  of  prizes,  has  ever  kept  it  or 
prospered  greatly  therefrom." 

It  was  now  evening  and  many  of  the  men  had  betaken 
themselves  to  the  water  for  a  swim.  The  heat  had  been 
great  all  day,  and  as  it  was  their  last,  they  had  been 
pressed  at  work  to  get  the  stores  which  had  been  landed, 
again  on  board  ship,  and  to  finish  all  up  ready  for  the 
division  of  the  party  next  day. 

"I  do  not  care  for  bathing  here,"  Ned  said  in  reply  to  a 
sailor,  who  asked  him  why  he  too  did  not  join  in  the  sport. 
"I  confess  that  I  have  a  dread  of  those  horrible  sharks  of 
•which  we  have  heard  so  much,  and  whose  black  fins  we 
see  from  time  to  time." 

"I  should  have  thought,"  said  the  harsh,  sneering  voice 
of  Giles  Taunton,  "  that  an  Otter  would  have  been  a  match 
for  a  shark.  The  swimmers  of  the  South  Isles,  and  indeed 
the  natives  here  attack  the  sharks  without  fear;  I  should 
have  thought  that  any  one  who  prides  himself,  as  you  do, 
upon  swimming,  would  have  been  equally  willing  to  en- 
counter them." 

"I  do  not  know  that  I  do  pride  myself  on  my  swimming, 
Giles  Taunton,"  Ned  said  composedly;  "at  any  rate  no 
one  has  ever  heard  me  speak  of  such  abilities  as  I  may 
have  in  that  way.  As  to  the  natives,  they  have  seen  each 
other  fight  with  sharks,  and  know  how  the  matter  is  gone 
about.  If  I  were  to  be  present  a  few  times  when  such 
strife  takes  place,  it  may  be  that  I  should  not  shirk  from 
joining  in  the  sport;  but  knowing  nothing  whatever  of 
the  method  pursued,  or  of  the  manner  of  attack,  I  should 
be  worse  than  a  fool  were  I  to  propose  to  venture  my  life 
in  such  a  sport." 

Many  sailors  who  were  standing  round  approved  of  what 
Ned  said. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  37 

"Ay,  ay,  lad,"  one  said,  "no  one  would  think  of  making 
his  first  jump  across  the  spot  where  he  might  be  dashed  to 
pieces.  Let  a  man  learn  to  jump  on  level  ground,  and 
then  when  he  knows  his  powers  he  may  go  across  a  deep 
chasm." 

By  this  time  a  good  many  of  the  men  were  out  of  the 
water,  when  suddenly  there  arose  the  cry  of  "Shark!" 
from  the  lookout  on  the  poop.  There  was  a  great  rush 
for  the  ship,  and  the  excitement  on  board  was  nearly  as 
great  as  that  in  the  water.  Ned  quietly  dropped  off  his 
jacket  and  his  shoes,  and  seizing  a  short  boarding  pike, 
waited  to  see  what  would  come  of  it.  It  chanced  that  his 
friends,  the  other  boys,  were  farther  out  than  the  men, 
having  with  the  ardor  of  youth  engaged  themselves  in 
races,  regardless  of  the  admonition  that  had  frequently 
been  given  them  to  keep  near  the  ship,  for  the  terror  of 
these  water  beasts  was  very  great. 

The  men  all  gained  the  ship  in  safety,  but  the  shark, 
which  had  come  up  from  a  direction  in  which  it  would  cut 
them  off,  was  clearly  likely  to  arrive  before  the  boys  could 
gain  the  side.  At  first  it  seemed  indeed  that  their  fate 
was  sealed;  but  the  shark,  who  in  many  respects  resembles 
a  cat  with  a  mouse,  and  seems  to  prefer  to  trifle  with  its 
victim  to  the  last,  allowed  them  to  get  close  to  the  ship, 
although  by  rapid  swimming  it  could  easily  have  seized 
them  before.  The  nearest  to  it  as  it  approached  the  ship 
was  Tom  Tressilis,  who  was  not  so  good  a  swimmer  as  the 
others;  but  he  had  swum  lustily  and  with  good  heart, 
though  his  white  face  showed  how  great  the  effect  of  the 
danger  was  upon  him.  He  had  not  spoken  a  word  since 
the  shark  first  made  its  appearance.  As  he  struck  despair- 
ingly to  gain  the  ship,  from  which  the  sailors  were  already 
casting  him  ropes,  his  eye  caught  that  of  Ned,  who  cried 
to  him  cheerily: 

"Keep  up  your  spirits,  Tom;  I  will  be  with  you." 


38  UNDER  DllAKK'S  FLAG. 

As  the  huge  fish  swept  along  at  a  distance  of  some  four 
yards  from  the  side  of  the  ship,  and  was  already  turning 
on  its  back,  opening  its  huge  mouth  to  seize  its  victim, 
Ned  dived  head  foremost  from  the  ship  on  to  him.  So 
great  was  the  force  and  impetus  with  which  he  struck  the 
creature,  that  it  was  fairly  driven  sideways  from  its  course, 
missing  by  the  nearest  shave  the  leg  of  Tom  Tressilis.  Ned 
himself  was  half  stunned  by  the  force  with  which  his  head 
had  struck  the  fish,  for  a  shark  is  not  so  soft  a  creature  to 
jump  against  as  he  had  imagined;  however,  he  retained 
consciousness  enough  to  grasp  at  the  fin  of  the  shark,  to 
which  he  held  on  for  half  a  minute.  By  this  time  the 
shark  was  recovering  from  the  effects  of  the  sudden  blow, 
and  Ned  was  beginning  to  be  able  to  reflect.  In  a  moment 
he  plunged  the  half  pike  deep  into  the  creature's  stomach. 
Again  and  again  he  repeated  the  stroke,  until  the  shark, 
rolling  over  in  his  agony  and  striking  furiously  with  his 
tail,  shook  Ned  from  his  hold.  He  instantly  dived  beneath 
the  water  and  came  up  at  a  short  distance.  The  shark 
was  still  striking  the  water  furiously,  the  sailors  on  board 
were  throwing  down  upon  him  shot,  pieces  of  iron,  and  all 
sorts  of  missiles,  and  some  of  the  best  archers  were  hastily 
bringing  their  bows  to  the  side.  The  shark  caught  sight 
of  his  opponent  and  instantly  rushed  at  him.  Ned  again 
dived  just  before  the  creature  reached  him,  and  rising 
under  him  inflicted  some  more  stabs  with  the  pike,  then 
he  again  swam  off,  for  he  was  in  no  slight  fear  that  he 
might  bo  struck  by  his  friends  on  board  ship,  of  whose 
missiles  indeed  he  was  more  in  dread  than  of  the  shark 
himself. 

When  he  rose  at  a  short  distance  from  the  shark  he  was 
again  prepared  for  a  rush  on  the  part  of  his  enemy,  but 
the  great  fish  had  now  had  enough  of  it.  He  was  still 
striking  the  water,  but  his  movements  were  becoming 
slower,  for  he  was  weakened  by  the  loss  of  blood  from  the 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  39 

stabs  he  had  received  from  below,  and  from  the  arrows, 
many  of  which  were  now  buried  to  the  goose-quill  in  him. 
In  a  minute  or  two  he  gradually  turned  on  one  side  and 
floated  with  his  white  belly  in  the  air.  A  shout  broke 
from  the  crew  of  the  Swaune  and  also  of  the  Pacha,  who 
had  been  attracted  to  the  side  by  the  cries.  When  he  saw 
that  the  battle  was  over,  and  that  the  enemy  had  been 
vanquished  without  loss  of  life  or  hurt  to  any,  Ned  speedily 
seized  one  of  the  ropes  and  climbed  up  the  side  of  the  ship, 
where  he  was,  you  may  be  sure,  received  with  great  cheer- 
ing, and  shouts  cf  joy  and  approval. 

"You  are  a  fine  lad,"  Captain  John  Drake  said,  "and 
your  name  of  Otter  has  indeed  been  well  bestowed.  You 
have  saved  the  life  of  your  comrades;  and  I  know  that  my 
old  friend,  Mr.  Frank  Tressilis,  his  father,  will  feel  in- 
debted indeed  to  you  when  he  comes  to  learn  how  gallantly 
you  risked  your  life  to  preserve  that  of  his  sou." 

Ned  said  that  he  saw  no  credit  in  the  action,  and  that 
he  was  mightily  glad  to  have  had  an  opportunity  of  learn- 
ing to  do  that  which  the  negroes  thought  nothing  of,  for 
that  it  shamed  him  to  think  that  these  heathens  would 
venture  their  lives  boldly  against  sharks,  while  he,  an 
English  boy,  although  a  good  swimmer,  and  not  he  hoped 
wanting  in  courage,  was  yet  afraid  to  encounter  these 
fierce  brutes. 

This  incident  acted,  as  might  be  expected,  as  a  fresh 
bond  between  the  boys,  and  as  it  also  secured  for  Ned  the 
cordial  good-will  of  the  sailors,  they  were  in  future  free 
from  any  persecution  at  the  hands  of  Master  Taunton  or 
of  his  fellows. 


40  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

AN   UNSUCCESSFUL   ATTACK. 

IT  should  have  been  said  in  its  proper  place,  that  upon 
the  day  after  the  arrival  of  the  Pacha  and  Swanne  in 
Pheasant  Bay  a  bark  named  the  Isle  of  Wight,  com- 
manded by  James  Rause,  with  thirty  men  on  board,  many 
of  whom  had  sailed  with  Captain  Drake  upon  his  previous 
voyages,  came  into  the  port,  and  there  was  great  greeting 
between  the  crews  of  the  various  ships.  Captain  Rause 
-brought  with  him  a  Spanish  caravel,  captured  the  day 
before,  and  a  shallop  also,  which  he  had  taken  at  Cape 
Blanco.  This  was  a  welcome  reinforcement,  for  the  crews 
of  the  two  ships  were  but  small  for  the  purpose  which 
they  had  in  hand,  especially  as  it  would  be  necessary  to 
leave  a  party  to  take  charge  of  the  vessels.  Captain  Drake 
made  some  proposals  to  Captain  Rause,  which  the  latter 
accepted,  and  it  was  arranged  that  he  and  his  crew  would 
be  for  a  time  under  the  command  of  Captain  Drake. 
When  the  division  of  the  crews  was  made,  it  was  decided 
that  James  Rause  should  remain  in  command  of  the  four 
ships  at  Pheasant  Bay,  and  that  Captain  Drake,  with  fifty- 
three  of  his  own  men  and  twenty  of  Rause's,  should  start 
in  the  three  pinnaces  and  the  shallop  for  Norabre  de  Dios. 

The  first  point  at  which  they  stopped  was  the  Isle  of 
Pines,  on  the  22d  of  July;  here  they  put  in  to  water  the 
boats,  and,  as  the  crews  had  been  cramped  from  their  stay 
therein,  Captain  Drake  decided  to  give  them  a  day  on 


UNDER  DHAKE'S  FLAG.  41 

shore.  Ned  and  Reuben  Gale  were  of  the  party,  the  other 
two  being,  to  their  great  discontent,  left  behind  in  the  ship. 
After  the  barriques  had  been  filled  with  water,  the  fires  lit 
for  cooking,  and  the  labors  of  the  day  over,  Ned  and 
Reuben  started  for  a  ramble  in  the  island,  which  was  of  a 
goodly  extent.  When  they  had  proceeded  some  distance 
in  the  wood,  picking  fruit  as  they  went,  and  looking  at 
the  butterflies  and  bright  birds,  they  were  suddenly  seized 
and  thrown  upon  the  ground  by  some  men,  who  sprang 
out  from  the  underwood  through  which  they  had  passed. 
They  were  too  surprised  at  this  sudden  attack  to  utter 
even  a  cry,  and,  being  safely  gagged  and  bound,  they  were 
lifted  by  their  captors  and  carried  away  into  the  interior 
of  the  island.  After  an  hour's  passage  they  were  put 
down  in  the  heart  of  a  thick  grove  of  trees,  and,  looking 
round,  saw  they -were  surrounded  by  a  large  number  of 
natives.  One  of  these,  a  person  evidently  in  authority, 
spoke  to  them  in  a  language  which  they  did  not  under- 
stand. They  shook  their  heads,  and  after  several  times 
attempting  to  make  them  comprehend,  Ned  caught  the 
word  Espanolos. 

To  this  he  vehemently  shook  his  head  in  denial,  which 
caused  quite  an  excitement  among  his  hearers.  One  of 
the  latter  then  said  "English,"  to  which  Ned  and  his  com- 
panion nodded.  The  news  evidently  filled  the  natives 
with  great  joy;  the  bands  were  taken  off  the  boys,  and 
the  Indians  endeavored  by  gestures  to  express  the  sorrow 
that  they  felt  for  having  carried  them  off.  It  was  clear 
that  they  had  taken  the'm  for  Spaniards,  and  that  they 
had  been  watched  as  they  wandered  inland,  and  captured 
for  the  purpose  of  learning  the  objects  and  force  of  the 
expedition.  Now,  however,  that  their  captors  understood 
that  the  ships  were  English,  with  great  signs  of  pleasure 
they  started  with  them  for  the  seashore.  It  had  already 
darkened  when  they  arrived  there,  and  the  crews  of  the 


42  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

boats  jumped  hastily  to  their  feet  at  the  sight  of  so  many 
persons  approaching.  Ned,  however,  called  to  them  jnst 
as  they  were  about  to  betake  themselves  to  their  arms,  and 
shouted  that  the  natives  were  perfectly  friendly  and  well- 
disposed.  Captain  Drake  himself  now  advanced,  and  en- 
tered into  conversation  with  the  leader  of  the  natives  in 
Spanish.  It  seemed  that  they  had  met  before,  and  that 
many  indeed  of  the  natives  were  acquainted  with  his  per- 
son. These  were  a  party  of  Simeroons,  as  they  were  then 
called,  i.e.,  of  natives  who  had  been  made  slaves  by  the 
Spaniards,  and  who  had  now  fled.  They  afterward  came 
to  be  called  Cameroons,  and  are  mostly  so  spoken  of  in  the 
books  of  English  buccaneers.  These  men  were  greatly 
pleased  at  the  arrival  of  Captain  Drake  and  his  boats,  for 
their  own  had  been  destroyed,  and  they  feared  taking  to 
the  sea  in  such  as  they  could  build. 

After  much  talk  Captain  Drake  arranged  to  put  them 
on  shore,  so  that  they  would  go  on  to  the  Isthmus  of 
Darien,  where  there  were  more  of  them  in  the  forests,  and 
they  promised  to  prepare  these  to  assist  Captain  Drake 
when  he  should  come  there.  The  natives,  some  thirty  in 
number,  were  soon  packed  in  the  boats,  and  were  ready  to  , 
cross  to  the  mainland;  and  the  party  then  going  forward, 
entered  the  port  of  Nombre  de  Dios  at  three  in  the 
morning. 

As  they  sailed  in,  being  yet  a  good  way  from  the  city, 
they  came  upon  a  bark  of  some  sixty  tons.  It  was  all 
unprepared  for  attack,  and  the  boats  got  alongside,  and! 
the  crews  climbed  on  to  the  deck  before  their  presence 
was  discovered  or  dreamed  of.  No  resistance  whatever 
was  offered  by  the  Spaniards  against  the  English,  all  were 
indeed  asleep  below.  A  search  was  made,  and  it  was  found 
that  the  ship  was  laden  with  Canary  wine,  a  ciron  instance 
which  gave  great  pleasure  to  the  English,  who  looked  for- 
ward to  a  long  bout  of  good  drinking*  White  they  were 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  43 

searching  the  ship,  they  had  paid  but  little  attention  to 
the  Spanish  crew.  Presently,  however,  they  heard  the 
sound  of  oars  at  some  little  distance  from  the  ship. 

"What  is  that?"  said  Captain  Drake. 

Ned  ran  to  the  stern  of  the  vessel. 

"I  think,  sir,"  he  said,  "that  one  or  two  of  the  Span- 
iards have  got  off  with  their  boat.  I  saw  it  towing  to  the 
stern  when  we  boarded." 

Captain  Drake  leaned  over  the  side,  and  at  once  gave 
orders  to  one  of  the  boats  whose  crew  had  not  boarded  the 
vessel,  and  was  lying  alongside,  to  pursue  and  to  strain 
every  nerve  to  catch  the  boat  before  she  came  near  the 
town.  The  sailors  leaped  to  the  oars,  and  pulled  with  a 
will,  for  they  knew  as  well  as  their  captain  how  serious  a 
matter  it  would  be  were  the  town  alarmed,  and  indeed  that 
all  their  toil  and  pains  would  be  thrown  away,  as  it  was 
only  by  surprise  that  so  small  a  handful  of  men  could  pos- 
sibly expect  to  take  a  large  and  important  town  like 
Nombre  de  Dios. 

Fortunately  the  boat  overtook  the  fugitives  before  they 
were  within  hailing  distance  of  the  town,  and  rapidly 
towed  them  back  to  the  ship.  All  then  took  their  places 
in  the  pinnaces,  and  pushed  off  without  further  delay.  It 
was  not  yet  light,  and  steered  by  one  who  knew  the  town 
well,  they  rowed  up  alongside  a  battery,  which  defended 
it,  without  the  alarm  being  given.  As  they  climbed  up 
over  the  wall  the  sentry  fired  his  piece,  and  the  artillery- 
men, who,  there  having  been  some  rumors  of  the  arrival 
of  Drake's  fleet  in  those  waters,  were  sleeping  by  the  side 
of  their  guns,  sprang  to  their  feet  and  fled  as  the  English 
leaped  down  into  the  battery. 

There  were  six  large  guns  in  the  place,  and  many  small, 
and  bombards. 

"Now,  my  lads,"  Captain  Drake  said,  "you  must  lose 
no  time;  in  five  minutes  yonder  artillerymen  will  have 


44  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

alarmed  the  whole  town,  ana  we  must  be  there  before  the 
Spaniards  have  managed  to  get  their  sleepy  eyes  open. 
Advance  in  three  parties,  and  meet  in  the  market-place; 
it  is  good  that  we  should  make  as  much  show  as  possible. 
There  can  be  no  more  concealment,  and,  therefore,  we 
must  endeavor  to  make  the  Spaniards  believe  that  we  are 
a  far  stronger  force  than  in  truth  we  are." 

It  was  not  until  the  three  parties  met  in  the  market- 
place that  any  real  resistance,  on  the  part  of  the  Spaniards, 
began,  although  windows  had  been  opened,  and  shots  fired 
here  and  there.  The  alarm-bells  were  now  ringing,  shouts 
arid  screams  were  heard  through  the  town,  and  the  whole 
population  was  becoming  fairly  aroused.  As  they  entered 
the  market-place,  however,  a  heavy  fire  was  opened  with 
arquebuses  and  guns.  The  English  had  taken  with  them 
no  firearms,  but  each  man  carried  his  bow  and  arrows,  and 
with  these  they  shot  fast  and  hard  at  the  Spaniards,  and 
silenced  their  fire. 

At  this  moment,  however,  it  happened,  sadly  for  the 
success  of  the  enterprise,  that  a  ball  struck  Captain  Drake, 
and  inflicted  a  serious  wound. 

Ned  was  standing  near  him,  and  observed  him  stagger. 

"Are  you  hit,  sir?"  he  asked  anxiously. 

"Tush,  my  boy,"  he  replied,  "it  is  a  scratch;  say  noth- 
ing of  it.  Now,  forward  to  the  treasury.  The  town  is  in 
your  hands,  my  lads;  it  only  remains  to  you  to  sack  as 
much  treasure  as  you  can  carry;  but  remember,  do  not 
lose  your  discipline,  and  keep  together.  If  we  straggle  we 
are  lost.  Now,  light  at  once  the  torches  which  you  have 
brought  with  you,  and  shout  aloud  to  the  inhabitants,  you 
that  can  speak  Spanish,  that  if  any  more  resistance  is 
offered,  we  will  burn  the  whole  town  to  the  ground." 

This  threat  mightily  alarmed  the  inhabitants,  and  the 
firing  ceased  altogether,  for  as  these  were  not  regular  sol- 
diers, and  knew  that  the  object  of  the  English  attack  was 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG,  45 

to  plunder  the  public  treasuries  rather  than  private  prop- 
erty, the  townsmen  readily  deemed  it  to  their  interest  to 
hold  aloof  rather  than  to  bring  upon  their  city  and  them- 
selves so  grievous  a  calamity  as  that  threatened  by  the 
English. 

In  the  advance,  two  or  three  Spaniards  had  fallen  into 
the  hands  of  the  men,  and  these  being  threatened  with 
kistaut  death  if  they  hesitated,  at  once  led  the  way  to  the 
governor's  house,  where  the  silver,  brought  down  on  mules 
from  Panama,  was  stored.  A  party  were  placed  at  the 
door  of  this  building,  and  Captain  Drake  with  the  rest 
entered. 

The  governor  had  fled  with  his  attendants.  The  house 
was  richly  furnished,  full  of  silk  hangings,  of  vessels  of 
gold  and  silver,  and  of  all  kinds  of  beautiful  things. 
These,  however,  attracted  little  attention  from  the  Eng- 
lish, although  Ned  and  his  young  comrades  marveled 
much.  Never  had  they  seen  in  England  anything  ap- 
proaching to  the  wealth  and  beauty  of  this  furnishing. 
It  seemed  to  them,  indeed,  as  if  they  had  entered  one  of 
the  houses  of  the  magicians  and  enchanters,  of  whom  they 
had  read  in  books  during  their  childhood.  Captain  Drake, 
however,  passed  through  these  gorgeous  rooms  with  scarce 
a  glance,  and,  led  by  the  Spaniards,  descended  some  steps 
into  a  vast  cellar. 

A  cry  of  astonishment  and  admiration  burst  from  the 
whole  party  as  they  entered  this  treasury.  Here,  piled  up 
twelve  feet  high,  lay  a  mighty  mass  of  bars  of  silver,  care- 
fully packed.  This  heap  was  no  less  than  seventy  feet 
long  and  ten  feet  wide,  and  the  bars  each  weighed  from 
thirty-five  to  forty  pounds. 

"My  lads,"  Captain  Drake  said,  "here  is  money  enough 
to  make  us  all  rich  for  our  lives;  but  we  must  leave  it  for 
the  present  and  make  for  the  treasury  house,  which  is  as 
full  of  gold  and  of  precious  stones  as  this  is  of  silver," 


46  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

The  men  followed  Captain  Drake  and  his  brother,  feel- 
ing quite  astonished  and  almost  stupefied  at  the  sight  of 
this  pile  of  silver;  but  they  felt,  moreover,  the  impossi- 
bility of  their  carrying  off  so  vast  a  weight  unless  the  town 
were  completely  in  their  hands. 

This,  indeed,  was  very  far  from  being  the  case,  for  the 
whole  town  was  now  rising.  The  troops,  who  had  at  the 
first  panic  fled,  were  now  being  brought  forward,  and  as 
the  day  lightened,  the  Spaniards,  sorely  ashamed  that  so 
small  a  body  of  men  should  have  made  themselves  masters 
of  so  great  and  rich  a  city,  were  plucking  up  heart  and 
preparing  to  attack  them.  Ill  was  it  then  for  the  success 
of  the  adventure  that  Captain  Francis  had  suffered  so 
heavy  a  wound  in  the  market-place.  Up  to  this  time  he 
had  kept  bravely  on,  and  none  except  Ned,  all  being  full 
of  the  prospect  of  vast  plunder,  had  noticed  his  pale  face, 
or  seen  the  blood  which  streamed  down  from  him,  and 
marked  every  footstep  as  he  went;  but  nature  could  now 
do  no  more,  and,  with  his  body  well-nigh  drained  of  all  its 
blood,  he  suddenly  fell  down  fainting. 

Great  was  the  cry  that  rose  from  the  men  as  they  saw 
the  admiral  thus  fall.  Hastily  gathering  round  him,  they* 
lifted  his  body  from  the  ground,  and  shuddered  at  seeing 
how  great  a  pool  of  blood  was  gathered  where  he  had  been 
standing.  It  seemed  almost  as  if,  with  the  fall  of  their 
captain,  the  courage  which  had  animated  these  men,  and 
would  animate  them  again  in  fighting  against  ever  so  great 
odds,  had  for  the  moment  deserted  them.  In  spite  of  the 
orders  of  Captain  John,  that  four  or  five  should  carry  his 
brother  to  the  boats,  and  that  the  rest  should  seize  without 
delay  the  treasures  of  gold  and  diamonds  in  the  treasury, 
and  carry  off  as  great  a  weight  as  they  might  bear,  none 
paid  attention. 

They  gathered  round  the  body  of  Captain  Francis,  and 
lifting  him  on  their  shoulders  they  hurried  to  the  boats, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  4? 

careless  of  the  promised  treasures,  and  thinking  only  to 
escape  and  bear  with  them  their  beloved  commander  i'rorn 
the  forces  of  the  Spaniards,  who,  as  they  saw  the  party 
fall  back,  with  great  shouting  fell  upon  them,  shooting 
hotly.  The  swoon  of  the  admiral  had  lasted  but  a  few 
moments.  As  cordial  was  poured  down  his  throat  he 
opened  his  eyes,  and  seeing  what  the  men  were  minded  to 
do,  protested  with  all  his  force  against  their  retreat.  His 
words,  however,  had  no  weight  with  them,  and  in  spite  of 
his  resistance  they  carried  him  down  to  the  battery,  and 
there,  placing  him  in  a  pinnace,  the  whole  took  to  their 
boats  and  rowed  on  board  ship. 

Wonderful  to  relate,  although  many  were  wounded,  but 
one  man,  and  he  Giles  Tan n ton  the  armorer,  was  killed  in 
this  attack  upon  the  great  city,  in  which  they  only  missed 
making  themselves  masters  of  one  of  the  greatest  treasures 
upon  earth  by  the  accident  of  their  commander  fainting  at 
a  critical  moment,  and  to  the  men  being  seized  by  an  un- 
accountable panic.  Some  of  the  crew  had  indeed  carried 
off  certain  plunder,  which  they  had  snatched  in  passing 
through  the  governor's  house,  and  in  such  short  searches 
as  they  had  been  able  to  make  in  private  dwellings;  but 
the  men  in  general  had  been  so  struck  with  amazement 
and  sorrow  at  the  sight  of  their  general's  wound,  that  al- 
though this  wealth  was  virtually  at  their  mercy,  they  put 
off  with  him  without  casting  a  thought  upon  what  they 
were  leaving  behind. 

The  boats  now  rowed  without  pausing  to  the  isle,  which 
they  called  the  Isle  of  Victuals,  and  there  they  stayed  two 
days,  nursing  their  wounds  and  supporting  themselves 
with  poultry,  of  which  there  was  a  great  abundance  found 
in  the  island,  and  with  vegetables  and  fruits  from  the  gar- 
dens. There  was  great  joy  among  them  when  it  was  found 
that  Captain  Drake's  wound,  although  severe  enough,  was 
yet  not  likely  to  imperil  his  life,  and  that  it  was  loss  of 


48  UNDER  DRAKK'S  FLAG. 

blood  alone  which  had  caused  him  to  faint.  At  this  news 
the  men  all  took  heart  and  rejoiced  so  exceedingly  that  a 
stranger  would  have  supposed  that  they  had  attained  some 
great  victory,  rather  than  have  corne  out  unsuccessful 
from  an  adventure  which  promised  to  make  each  man 
wealthy. 

Upon  the  second  day  after  their  arrival  at  the  Isle  of 
Victuals,  they  saw  a  hoat  rowing  out  from  the  direction  of 
Nombre  de  Dios.  As  they  knew  that  there  was  no  fleet 
in  that  harbor  which  would  venture  to  attack  them,  the 
English  had  no  fear  of  the  approaching  boat,  although, 
indeed,  they  wondered  much  what  message  could  have 
been  sent  them.  On  board  the  boat  was  an  hidalgo,  or  :, 
Spanish  noble,  who  was  rowed  by  four  negroes.  He  said  >• 
that  he  had  come  from  the  mainland  to  make  inquiries  as 
to  the  gallant  men  who  had  performed  so  great  a  feat,  and 
that  he  cherished  no  malice  whatever  against  them.  He 
wished  to  know  whether  the  Captain  Drake  who  com- 
manded them  was  the  same  who  had  been  there  before, 
and  especially  did  he  inquire  whether  the  arrows  used  by 
the  English  were  poisoned;  for,  he  said,  great  fear  and 
alarm  reigned  in  the  town,  many  believing  that  all  who  • 
had  been  struck  by  the  English  shafts  would  certainly  die. 

Upon  this  head  he  was  soon  reassured,  and  the  English 
were,  indeed,  mightily  indignant  at  its  being  supposed 
that  they  would  use  such  cowardly  weapons  as  poisoned 
arrows. 

Then  the  hidalgo  inquired  why  the  English  had  so  and-' 
denly  retreated  from  the  town  when  it  was  in  their  hands, 
and  why  they  had  abstained  from  carrying  off  the  three 
hundred  and  sixty  tons  of  silver  which  lay  at  the  governor's 
house,  and  the  still  greater  value  of  gold  in  the  treasure 
hor.se.  The  gold,  indeed,  being  far  more  valuable  than 
the  silver,  insomuch  as  it  was  more  portable.  The  answers 
to  all  these  questions  were  freely  given,  for  in  those  days 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  49 

there  was  a  carious  mixture  of  peace  and  war,  of  desperate 
violence  and  of  great  courtesy,  between  combatants;  and 
whereas  now,  an  enemy  arriving  with  a  view  merely  to 
obtain  information  would  be  roughly  treated,  in  those  days 
he  was  courteously  entertained,  and  his  questions  as  freely 
answered  as  if  he  had  been  a  friend  and  ally. 

"When  he  heard  of  the  wound  of  Captain  Drake  he  ex- 
pressed great  sorrow,  and  after  many  compliments  were 
exchanged  he  returned  to  Nombre  de  Dios,  while  the  next 
day  Captain  Drake  and  the  English  rowed  away  to  the 
Isle  of  Pines,  where  Captain  Eause  was  remaining  in 
charge  of  the  ships.  He  was  mightily  glad  to  see  them 
return,  as  were  their  comrades  who  had  remained,  for 
their  long  absence  had  caused  great  fear  and  anxiety,  as  it 
was  thought  that  Captain  Drake  must  have  fallen  into 
some  ambuscade,  and  that  ill  had  come  to  the  party.  Al- 
though there  was  some  regret  at  the  thought  that  the 
chance  of  gaining  such  vast  booty  had  been  missed,  yet 
the  joy  at  the  safe  return  overpowered  this  feeling,  and 
for  a  day  or  two  the  crews  feasted  merrily  and  held  festival. 
Captain  Rause  then  determined  to  continue  the  adventure 
no  further,  but  to  separate  with  his  ship  and  men  from 
Captain  Drake.  He  was  of  opinion  firmly  that  now  the 
Spaniards  had  discovered  their  presence  in  the  island,  such 
measures  of  defense  would  be  taken  at  every  port  as  to 
place  these  beyond  the  hazard  of  attack  by  so  small  a  body 
as  those  carried  by  the  three  ships.  He,  therefore,  receiv- 
ing full  satisfaction  for  the  use  of  his  men  and  for  guarding 
the  ships,  sailed  away  on  the  7th  of  August,  leaving  the 
Swanne  and  the  Pacha  to  proceed  upon  the  adventure 
alone. 

Captain  Drake  sent  his  brother  and  Ellis  Hickson  to 
examine  the  river  Chagres,  and  on  their  return  Captain 
Drake  with  his  two  ships  and  three  pinnaces  sailed  for 
Carthagena,  where  he  arrived  on  the  13th  day  of  August. 


60  UNDER  DRAKE'S 

While  on  the  voyage  thither  he  captnred  two  Spanish 
ships,  each  of  two  hundred  and  forty  tons,  with  rich  car- 
goes, neither  of  them  striking  so  much  as  a  hlow  in  resist- 
ance. At  evening  he  anchored  between  the  Island  of  Cara 
and  St.  Bernardo,  and  the  three  pinnaces  entered  the 
harbor  of  Carthagena. 

Lying  at  the  entrance  they  found  a  frigate,  which  in 
those  days  meant  a  very  small  craft,  not  much  larger  than 
a  rowing-boat.  She  had  but  one  old  man  on  board,  who 
said  that  the  rest  of  the  company  had  gone  ashore  to  fight 
a  duel  about  a  quarrel  which  they  had  had  overnight.  He 
said,  too,  what  was  much  more  important  to  the  English, 
that  an  hour  before  nightfall  a  pinnace  had  passed  him, 
and  that  the  man  who  was  steering  had  shouted  out  that 
the  English  were  at  hand,  and  that  he  had  better  up  anchor 
and  go  into  the  port.  He  said,  moreover,  that  when  the 
pinnace  reached  Carthageua  guns  were  fired,  and  he  could 
see  that  all  the  shipping  hauled  in  under  shelter  of  the 
castle. 

This  was  bad  news  indeed,  and  there  was  much  hard 
language  among  the  sailors  when  they  heard  it.  It  was 
clear  that  the  castle  of  Carthagena,  if  prepared,  was  not 
to  be  carried  by  some  thirty  or  forty  men,  however  gallant 
and  determined  they  might  be.  There  was,  too,  but  little 
hope  that  the  old  man  had  spoken  falsely,  for  they  had  them- 
selves heard  guns  shortly  before  their  arrival  there.  With 
much  bitterness  it  was  determined  to  abandon  the  plan  of 
attack,  and  thus  Oarthagena  as  well  as  Nombre  de  Dios 
escaped  from  the  hands  of  the  English. 

They  did  not,  however,  go  out  empty-handed,  for  they 
succeeded  in  capturing,  by  boarding,  four  pinnaces,  each 
laden  with  cargo,  and  as  they  turned  their  heads  to  go  out 
to  sea,  a  great  ship  of  Seville  came  sailing  in.  Her  they 
laid  alongside  and  captured  easily,  she  having  just  arrived 
from  Spain,  having  no  thoughts  of  meeting  a  foe  just  as 
she  reached  her  port  of  destination. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  51 

This  lightened  the  hearts  of  the  crew,  and  with  their 
prizes  in  tow  they  sailed  out  in  good  spirits.  The  ship 
contained  large  stores  of  goods  from  Spain,  with  sherries, 
and  merchandise  of  every  kind.  They  went  back  to  the 
Isle  of  Pines,  their  usual  rendezvous,  and  on  adding  up 
the  goods  that  they  had  taken  from  various  prizes,  found 
that  even  now  they  had  made  no  bad  thing  of  their  voyage. 

They  were  now  much  reduced  in  fighting  strength  by 
illness,  and  Captain  Drake  determined  in  his  mind  that 
the  crews  were  no  longer  strong  enough  for  the  manning 
of  two  ships,  and  that  it  wo'nld  be  better  to  take  to  one 
alone.  Ho  knew,  however,  that  even  his  authority  would 
not  suffice  to  persuade  the  sailors  to  abandon  one  of  the 
vessels,  for  sailors  have  a  great  love  for  their  ships.  He 
therefore  determined  to  do  it  by  a  sudden  stroke,  and  that 
known  only  to  himself  and  another.  Therefore  he  called 
to  him  Thomas  Moore,  the  carpenter  of  the  Swanne,  and 
taking  him  aside  told  him  to  make  augur- holes  in  the  bot- 
tom of  that  ship.  Moore,  who  was  a  good  sailor,  made  a 
great  resistance  to  the  orders,  but  upon  the  admiral  assur- 
ing him  that  it  was  necessary  for  the  success  of  the  enter- 
prise that  one  of  the  ships  should  be  destroyed,  he  very 
reluctantly  undertook  the  task.  . 

Previous  to  this  Captain  Drake  had  ordered  all  the  booty 
and  a  considerable  portion  of  the  stores  of  both  ships  to  be 
hauled  on  shore,  so  that  they  might  lose  nothing  of  value 
to  them. 

The  next  morning  Ned  and  his  friends  were  sitting  on 
the  bulwark  of  the  vessel,  watching  the  fish  playing  about 
in  the  depths  of  the  clear  blue  water. 

"We  seem  to  be  lower  in  the  water  than  usual,"  Ned 
said;  "does  not  it  seem  to  you  that  we  are  not  so  high 
above  the  sea  as  we  are  wont  to  be?" 

The  others  agreed  that  the  vessel  had  that  appearance; 
but  as  it  seemed  clearly  impossible  that  it  should  be  so, 


£•>  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&. 

especially  when  she  was  lighter  than  usual,  they  thought 
that  they  must  be  mistaken,  and  the  subject  was  put  aside. 
Half  an  hour  later  Captain  Drake  himself  rowing  alongside 
called  to  his  brother,  who  came  to  the  side. 

"I  am  going  to  fish,"  he  said;  "are  you  disposed  to 
come  also?" 

Captain  John  expressed  his  willingness  to  do  so. 

"I  will  wait  for  you,"  his  brother  said. 

Captain  John  was  turning  to  go  into  his  cabin  to  get 
his  cap  and  cloak,  when  Captain  Francis  cried  out: 

"Is  not  your  ship  very  low  in  the  water  this  morning?" 

"The  same  as  usual,  I  suppose,"  Captain  John  said, 
laughing,  but  looking  over  the  side  himself  he  said,  "me- 
thinks  she  does  lie  deep  in  the  water,"  and  calling  the 
carpenter  he  bade  him  sound  the  well.  The  latter,  after 
doing  so,  cried  out  loudly  that  there  were  four  feet  of 
water  in  the  ship.  A  great  astonishment  seized  upon  both 
officers  and  crew  at  this  unexpected  news.  All  hands  were 
at  once  set  to  work,  the  pumps  were  rigged,  and  with 
buckets  and  all  sorts  of  gear  they  strove  manfully  and  hard 
to  get  rid  of  the  water.  It  soon,  however,  became  plain 
that  it  entered  faster  than  they  could  pump  it  forth,  and  I 
that  the  vessel  must  have  sprung  a  bad  leak.  \Vhen  it 
was  clear  that  the  Swarme  could  not  be  saved,  the  boats  of 
the  Pacha  were  brought  alongside,  and  all  the  goods  that 
remained  in  her  were  removed,  together  with  the  arms  and 
ammunition.  Then  the  crew,  taking  to  the  boats,  lay  by,, 
until  in  a  few  minutes  the  Swanne  sank,  among  the  tears1' 
of  many  of  her  crew,  who  had  made  three  voyages  in  her 
and  loved  her  well. 

It  was  not  for  a  long  time  afterward  known  that  the  loss 
of  this  ship  was  the  effect  of  the  orders  of  the  admiral, 
who  indeed  acted  with  his  usual  wisdom  in  keeping  the 
matter  secret,  for  assuredly,  although  the  men  would  have 
obeyed  his  orders,  he  would  have  lost  much  favor  and 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  53 

popularity  among  them  had  the  truth  been  at  that  time 
known.  The  next  day  the  news  was  spread  among  the 
men  that  it  was  determined  to  fill  the  Pacha  with  all  the 
stores  that  were  on  shore,  and  leaving  a  party  there  with 
her,  to  embark  the  crews  in  the  pinnaces  for  service  in  the 
river  Chagres  and  along  the  coast  until,  at  any  rate,  they 
could  capture  another  ship  to  replace  the  Swanne.  Next 
day  they  rowed  on  into  the  Gulf  of  Darien;  there  the  ship 
was  laid  up  in  a  good  place,  and  they  remained  quiet  for 
fifteen  days,  amusing  and  refreshing  themselves.  By  this 
means  they  hoped  to  throw  all  the  Spaniards  off  their 
guard,  and  to  cause  a  report  to  be  spread  that  they  had 
left  the  island. 

The  Simeroons,  living  near,  had  been  warned  by  those 
who  had  been  landed  from  the  Isle  of  Pines  of  their  com- 
ing, and  received  them  with  good  cheer,  and  promised  all 
aid  that  could  be  required.  Then  the  pinnaces  were  sent 
out  to  catch  any  passing  ships  which  might  be  cruising 
along  the  coast. 

It  happened  one  day  that  two  of  them  had  set  off  in 
pursuit  of  a  great  ship  which  they  saw  passing  in  the  dis- 
tance. The  wind  was  light,  and  they  had  little  doubt 
that  they  should  overhaul  her.  Ned,  who  was  one  of 
those  who  remained  behind,  was  much  angered  at  missing 
so  good  an  enterprise,  but  some  four  hours  afterward 
another  ship  was  seen  to  pass  along.  The  remaining  pin- 
nace was  at  once  manned,  Captain  John  Drake  taking  the 
command,  and  with  fourteen  men  she  set  out  to  take  the 
Spanish  galleon.  Gallant  as  are  the  exploits  which  have 
been  performed  in  modern  times  by  British  tars  in  their 
attacks  upon  slavers,  yet  in  none  of  these  cases  does  the 
disparity  of  force  at  all  approach  thaf  which  often  existed 
between  the  English  boats  and  the  Sp  lish  galleons;  indeed 
the  only  possible  reason  that  can  be;  ven  for  the  success 
of  the  English  is  the  fear  that  their  eiremy  entertained  for 


54  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

them.  Both  the  Spanish  captains  and  crews  had  come  to 
look  upon  them  as  utterly  invincible,  and  they  seemed, 
when  attacked  by  the  English  buccaneers,  altogether 
paralyzed. 

As  the  boat  rowed  up  toward  the  great  ship,  her  size 
became  gradually  more  apparent,  and  her  deck  could  be 
seen  crowded  with  men;  even  Ned,  who  was  not  greatly 
given  to  reflection,  could  not  but  feel  a  passing  doubt  as 
to  the  possibility  of  one  small  boat  with  fourteen  men 
attacking  a  floating  castle  like  this. 

Presently  the  boom  of  a  cannon  from  the  forecastle  of 
the  vessel  was  heard,  and  a  ball  whizzed  over  their  heads, 
then  shot  after  shot  was  fired,  and  soon  a  rattle  of  small 
arms  broke  out,  and  the  water  all  round  was  cut  up  by 
bullets  and  balls.  The  rough  seamen  cared  little  for  this 
demonstration.  With  a  cheer  they  bent  their  backs  to  the 
oars,  and  although  some  were  wounded  they  rowed  up  to 
the  side  of  the  ship  without  hesitation  or  doubt.  Then 
from  above  a  shower  of  missiles  were  hurled  upon  them — 
darts,  stones,  hot  water,  and  even  boiling  tar. 

It  would  have  gone  hard  with  the  English  had  not  the 
Spanish  carelessly  left  a  porthole  open  near  the  water 
level;  through  this  the  English  clambered,  eager  to  get  at 
their  foe,  and  many  of  them  raging  with  the  pain  caused 
by  the  boiling  materials.  As  they  rushed  on  to  the  deck, 
the  Spaniards  were  ranged  in  two  ranks  on  either  side  of 
the  hatchway  and  fell  upon  them  at  once;  but  so  great 
was  the  fury  of  the  English,  that,  facing  either  way,  with; 
a  roar  like  beasts  springing  on  their  prey,  they  fell  with 
axe  and  sword  upon  the  Spaniards. 

It  was  the  wild  rage  with  which  the  English  buccaneers 
fought  that  was  the  secret  of  their  success.  The  Spaniards 
are  a  people  given  to  ceremony,  and  even  in  matters  of 
battle  are  somewhat  formal  and  pedantic.  The  combat, 
then,  between  them  and  the  English  was  one  which  pre- 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  55 

sented  no  familiar  conditions  to  their  minds.  These  rough 
sailors,  hardened  by  exposure,  skilled  in  the  use  of  arms, 
were  no  doubt  formidable  enough  individually,  but  this 
alone  would  not  have  intimidated  the  Spaniards  or  have 
gone  any  great  distance  toward  equalizing  the  tremendous 
odds  between  them.  It  was  the  fury  with  which  they 
fought  that  was  the  secret  of  their  success.  It  was  as 
when  a  cat,  furious  with  passion,  flies  at  a  dog  many  times 
larger  and  heavier  than  itself.  The  latter  may  be  as  brave 
in  many  matters  as  the  cat,  and  ready  to  face  a  creature 
much  larger  even  than  itself  under  ordinary  circumstances. 
It  is  the  fury  of  the  cat  which  appals  and  turns  it  into  a 
very  coward.  Thus  when  the  band  of  English  fell  upon 
the  Spaniards  in  the  galleon — who  were  some  six  times  as 
numerous  as  themselves — naked  to  the  waist,  with  hair 
streaming  back,  with  all  their  faces  wild  with  pain,  bran- 
dishing their  heavy  axes,  and  with  a  shout  rushed  upon 
their  foes  drawn  up  in  regular  order,  the  latter  after  a 
moment  or  two  of  resistance  began  rapidly  to  fall  back« 
Their  officers  in  vain  shouted  to  them  to  stand  firm.  In 
vain  they  taunted  them  with  falling  back  before  a  handful 
of  men.  In  vain  even  turned  their  swords  against  their 
own  soldiers.  It  was  useless.  Those  in  front,  unable 
indeed  to  retreat,  were  cut  down  by  the  heavy  axes. 
Those  behind  recoiled,  and  after  but  a  few  minutes'  fight- 
ing some  began  to  leap  down  the  hatchways,  and  although 
the  fight  continued  for  a  short  time,  isolated  groups  here 
and  there  making  resistance,  the  battle  was  virtually  won 
in  five  minutes  after  the  English  appeared  on  deck. 

The  captain  and  his  two  principal  officers  were  killed 
fighting  bravely,  and  had  their  efforts  been  in  any  way 
backed  by  those  of  their  men,  they  would  have  made  short 
work  of  the  assailants.  Captain  Drake's  voice  was  heard 
high  above  the  din  as  soon  as  the  resistance  ceased. 

He  ordered  the  prisoners  to  be  all  brought  upon  deck 


56  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

and  disarmed,  and  at  once  forced  into  their  own  boats  and 
obliged  to  row  away  from  the  vessel;  for  he  knew  that 
were  his  men  once  to  begin  to  plunder  and  to  fall  upon 
the  liquors,  the  Spaniards,  even  if  unarmed,  would  be  able 
to  rise  and  overpower  them. 

No  sooner  was  the  last  Spaniard  out  of  the  ship,  than 
the  men  scattered  to  look  for  plunder.  Ned  was  standing 
on  the  poop  watching  the  boats  rowing  away,  and  thinking 
to  himself  that,  so  crowded  were  they,  if  a  breeze  were  to 
spring  up  there  would  not  be  much  chance  of  their  reach- 
ing Nombre  de  Dios.  Suddenly  he  heard  below  him  a 
scream  followed  by  a  splash;  looking  over  he  saw  the  head 
of  a  woman  appear  above  the  water,  and  without  hesitation 
dived  at  once  from  the  side.  For  a  moment  the  girl,  for 
she  was  little  more,  struggled  with  him  as  if  she  would 
have  sunk,  but  Ned,  grasping  her  firmly,  in  a  few  strokes 
swam  with  her  alongside  the  ship  to  the  boat,  and  two  or 
three  sailors  running  down  assisted  him  to  pull  her  into  it; 
then  dripping  wet  she  was  taken  to  the  deck,  where  the 
captain  in  kind  tones  assured  her  that  she  would  receive 
the  most  courteous  treatment,  and  that  she  need  be  under 
no  fear  whatever. 

She  was  the  daughter  of  a  wealthy  Spaniard  at  Nombre 
de  Dios,  and  was  now  coming  out  from  Spain  to  join  him; 
frightened  by  the  noise  of  the  fighting  and  by  the  terrible 
reputation  of  the  English  buccaneers,  she  had,  when  the 
sailors  rushed  into  the  cabin  with  loud  shouts,  been  so 
alarmed  that  she  had  jumped  from  the* stern  windows  into 
the  sea. 

Captain  Drake  assured  her  courteously  that,  rough  as 
his  men  might  be,  they  would,  none  of  them,  lay  a  finger 
upon  a  woman.  He  then  hoisted  a  flag  and  fired  a  gun  as 
a  signal  to  the  Spanish  boats,  which  were  yet  within  a 
quarter  of  a  mile,  to  return.  For  a  moment  they  rowed 
on,  but  a  ball,  sent  skimming  across  their  bows,  was  a  hint 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  57 

which  they  could  not  disregard;  for,  full  as  they  were  of 
men,  they  could  not  have  hoped  to  avoid  the  English  pin- 
nace should  it  have  put  off  after  them. 

When  the  boats  carne  alongside,  some  of  those  on  board 
were  ordered  to  ascend  the  side  of  the  ship,  and  plenty  of 
accommodation  having  been  made,  the  young  Spanish  lady 
and  her  maid,  who  had  remained  in  the  cabin,  descended 
into  the  largest  boat;  handed  down  by  Captain  Drake  with 
a  courtesy  equal  to  that  which  a  Spanish  hidalgo  himself 
would  have  shown. 

Before  she  went,  the  young  lady  turned  to  Ned,  who 
was  standing  near,  and  expressed  to  him  her  deep  thanks 
for  the  manner  in  which  he  had  leaped  over  for  her.  Ned 
himself  could  understand  only  a  few  words,  for,  although 
many  of  the  sailors  spoke  Spanish,  and  sometimes  used  it 
among  themselves,  he  had  not  yet  made  any  great  progress 
with  it  although  he  had  tried  to  pick  up  as  many  words 
and  phrases  as  he  could.  The  captain,  however,  translated 
the  words  to  him,  and  he  said  to  her  in  reply,  that  there 
was  nothing  for  her  to  feel  herself  under  any  obligation  to 
him  for,  for  that  any  dog  would  have  jumped  out  and 
done  the  business  just  as  well. 

The  young  lady,  however,  undid  a  bracelet  of  gold  on 
her  arm  and  insisted  upon  herself  fastening  it  round  Ned's 
wrist,  an  action  which  caused  blushes  of  confusion  to 
crimson  his  face.  In  a  few  minutes  the  Spanish  boats 
were  again  off.  The  captain  added  to  that  in  which  the 
young  lady  was  placed,  some  food,  some  bottles  of  liqueur 
and  other  matters  which  might  render  her  voyage  easy  and 
pleasant.  He  promised  that  the  Spaniards  who  had  been 
transferred  again  to  the  ship  should  be  landed  at  the  ear- 
liest opportunity. 

The  vessel  was  now  searched  regularly  and  was  found  to 
contain  much  treasure  in  goods,  but  as  she  was  on  her  way 
from  Europe  she  had  of  course  none  of  the  gold  and  silver 


58  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

which  was  the  main  object  of  their  search.  However,  they 
consoled  themselves  with  the  thought  that  the  ship  which 
had  been  chased  by  their  comrades  earlier  in  the  day  was 
homeward-bound,  and  they  hoped,  therefore,  that  a  rich 
cargo  would  there  be  secured.  They  were  not  mistaken, 
for  when  the  ship  sailed  up  to  the  rendezvous  they  found 
another  alongside,  and  the  cheers  of  their  comrades  told 
them  that  the  prize  had  been  a  handsome  one.  They 
found  that  they  had  secured  nearly  half-a-million  in  gold 
and  silver,  and  transferring  the  cargo  of  the  one  ship  into 
the  other,  they  set  the  first  on  fire  and  sailed  back  to  the 
spot  where  their  camp  was  formed  on  the  isthmus. 

Several  other  ships  fell  into  their  hands  in  this  way,  but 
after  this  they  hindered  no  more  vessels  on  their  way  from 
Europe.  They  had  ample  stores  and,  indeed,  far  more 
than  enough  to  supply  them  with  every  luxury,  for  on 
board  the  Pacha  the  richest  wines,  the  most  delicate  con- 
serves, the  richest  garments  of  all  kinds  were  already  in 
such  abundance  as  to  become  common  to  them  all. 

Down  to  the  common  sailor,  all  feasted  on  the  best,  and 
drank  wines  that  an  emperor  might  have  approved.  Cap- 
tain Drake,  in  this  way,  gave  his  men  when  on  shore  much 
license,  insisting,  however,  that  they  should  abstain  from 
drunkenness.  For,  a"s  he  said,  not  only  would  they  be  at 
the  mercy  of  any  small  body  of  the  enemy  which  might 
find  them,  but  drunkenness  breeds  quarrels  and  disputes, 
and  as  between  comrades  would  be  fatal  indeed.  Thus, 
although  enough  of  good  liquor  was  given  to  each  man  to 
make  him  merry,  none  were  allowed  to  drink  beyond  this 
point. 

The  reason  why  the  ships  coming  from  Europe  were 
allowed  to  pass  unmolested,  was,  that  Drake  wished  not 
that  each  day  some  fresh  tale  of  capture  should  be  brought 
to  Panama  by  the  crews  set  free  in  the  boats,  for  it  was 
xsrtain  that  the  tale  so  told  would,  at  last,  stir  up  such 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  59 

fear  and  indignation  at  the  ravages  committed  by  so  small 
a  body,  that  the  governors  of  the  Spanish  towns  would 
combine  their  forces  and  would  march  against  them  with 
a  veritable  army.  While  only  the  ships  starting  from 
Darien  were  overhauled  and  lightened  of  their  contents 
the  tale  was  not  brought  back  to  Darien,  for  the  crews 
were  allowed  to  sail  on  with  their  sbipib  '"  Europe,  as 
Drake  had  already  more  vessels  than  he  knew  what  to  do 
with,  and  as  for  prisoners  they  were  to  him  quite  useless. 
Captain  John  did,  indeed,  at  one  time  propose  to  him  that 
he  should  take  out  of  each  ship  all  the  principal  men,  so 
as  to  hold  them  as  hostages  in  case  of  any  misfortune  hap- 
pening to  the  English,  but  the  admiral  said  to  him,  that 
so  great  was  the  enmity  and  fear  of  them,  that  did  they 
fall  into  the  hands  of  the  Spaniards,  these  would  not  ex- 
change them  and  let  them  go  even  if  as  many  kings  were 
set  free  in  return. 

In  all  five  vessels  were  seized  and  plundered  while  lying 
at  Darien.  All  was  not,  however,  going  well,  for  while 
they  lay  there  a  terrible  sickness  broke  out  among  them; 
whether  this  was  from  the  change  of  life  or  from  any  nox- 
ious thing  which  they  ate,  or  merely  from  the  heat,  none 
could  say,  but  very  shortly  the  illness  made  great  ravages 
among  them.  First  died  Charles  Clift,  one  of  the  quarter- 
masters; then  one  day  when  the  pinnace  in  which  Ned 
always  sailed  returned,  they  were  met  with  the  sad  news 
that  Captain  John  Drake  was  also  dead.  He  had  fallen, 
however,  not  by  the  fever,  but  by  the  ball  of  the  Spaniards. 
He  had  gone  out  with  one  of  the  pinnaces,  and  had  en- 
gaged a  great  Spanish  ship,  but  the  latter  had  shot  more 
straight  and  faster  than  usual,  and  the  captain  himself 
and  Richard  Allen,  one  of  his  men,  had  been  slain  in  an 
unsuccessful  attempt  to  capture  the  ship.  His  sad  end 
was  not  the  result  of  any  rashness  on  his  part,  for  he,  in- 
deed, had  told  the  men  that  the  vessel  carried  many  guns, 


60  UNDER  DRAKK'8  FLAG. 

and  that  it  was  too  rash  an  enterprise.  The  sailors,  "how- 
ever, had  by  this  time  become  so  accustomed  to  victory  as 
to  despise  the  Dons  altogether,  and  insisted  upon  going 
forward. 

It  was  with  bitter  lamentation  and  regret  that  they  re- 
turned, bringing  the  body  of  the  admiral's  brother.  They 
were  now  at  the-end  of  the  year,  and  in  this  week  no  less 
than  six  of  the  company  died,  among  whom  was  Joseph 
Drake,  another  of  the  admiral's  brothers.  These  losses 
saddened  the  crew  greatly,  and  even  the  treasures  which  * 
they  had  amassed  now  seemed  to  them  small  and  of  little 
account.  Even  those  who  did  not  take  the  fever  were 
much  cast  down,  and  Captain  Drake  determined  without 
any  further  loss  to  attempt  the  expedition  on  which  he 
had  set  his  mind.  On  February  3d,  being  Shrove  Tuesday, 
he  started  with  eighteen  English  and  thirteen  Simeroons 
for  Panama.  He  had  now  since  he  sailed  lost  no  less  than 
twenty-eight  of  the  party  which  set  out  from  Plymouth. 

In  a  few  days  they  reached  Veuta  Cruz,  but  one  of  the 
men  who  had  taken  too  much  strong  liquor  made  a  noise, 
and  the  alarm  being  given,  much  of  the  treasure  was  car- 
ried out  of  the  place  before  they  could  effect  a  lauding. 
They  followed,  however,  one  of  the  treasure  parties  out  of 
the  town,  and  pursued  them  for  some  distance.  On  their 
way  they  came  across  another  large  convoy  with  gold;  this 
they  easily  took,  and  having  sent  the  Spaniards  away,  un- 
loaded the  mules  and  buried  the  gold,  desiring  to  press  on; 
further. 

As  they  went  one  of  the  chief  Simeroons  took  the  admiral 
apart  from  the  road  they  were  traversing,  and  led  him  to 
the  foot  of  a  lofty  tree.  Upon  this  steps  had  been  cut, 
and  the  Indian  told  the  admiral  to  ascend  and  see  what  he 
could  observe  from  the  top.  Upon  reaching  the  summit 
the  admiral  gave  a  shout  of  joy  and  astonishment.  From 
that  point  he  could  see  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  by  turning 
his  head  the  Atlantic  which  they  had  just  left. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  61 

This  was  a  joyful  moment  for  the  great  sailor,  and  when 
he  descended,  one  by  one  most  of  the  men  climbed  to  the 
top  of  the  tree  to  see  the  two  oceans.  Drake  was  the  first 
Englishman  who  had  seen  this  sight;  to  the  Spaniards  it 
was,  of  course,  familiar;  indeed  Vasco  Nufiez  had  stood 
upon  the  spot  and  had  seen  the  Pacific,  and  taken  posses- 
sion of  it  in  the  name  of  Spain  in  the  year  1513. 

They  now  retraced  their  steps,  for  with  the  force  at  their 
disposal  Captain  Drake  thought  it  would  be  madness  to 
cross  the  isthmus  with  any  view  of  attacking  the  Spaniards 
on  the  other  side.  He  had  now  accomplished  his  purpose, 
and  had  learned  the  nature  and  geography  of  the  place, 
and  proposed  on  some  future  occasion  to  return  with  a 
force  sufficient  to  carry  out  the  great  enterprises  on  which 
he  had  set  his  mind.  On  their  return  they  were  sorely 
disappointed  at  finding  that  the  Spaniards,  having  captured 
one  of  the  party,  had  extorted  from  him  the  hiding-place 
of  the  gold,  and  had  lifted  and  carried  it  off.  They  now 
prepared  to  re-embark  in  their  pinnace.  Beaching  the 
seashore,  however,  they  were  surprised  and  in  some  way 
dismayed  at  seeing  seven  Spanish  vessels  nearing  the  coast. 
The  Spaniards  had  at  last  determined  to  make  an  effort, 
and  had  arrived  at  a  time  more  unfortunate  for  the  English 
than  could  have  been  supposed.  The  pinnace,  after  land- 
ing the  party,  had  sailed  away  in  order  to  prevent  the 
Spaniards  seizing  upon  those  on  board,  and  when  Captain 
Drake  reached  the  shore  she  was  not  in  sight,  having 
indeed  hauled  her  wind  and  made  off  on  the  approach  of 
the  Spanish  fleet.  The  situation  seemed  bad  indeed,  for 
it  was  certain  that  the  Spaniards  would  land  their  troops 
and  search  the  shore,  and  it  was  of  the  highest  importance 
that  the  pinnace  should  be  discovered  first. 

There  was  a  counsel  held,  and  the  men  were  well-nigh 
despairing.  Captain  Drake,  however,  bade  them  keep  up 
their  courage,  and  pointed  out  to  them  the  four  lads,  all 


62  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

of  whom  had  escaped  the  effect  of  fever  and  disease,  their 
constitution,  no  doubt,  being  strengthened  by  the  fact 
that  none  of  them  indulged  in  too  much  liquor,  indeed 
seldom  touching  any. 

"Look,"  said  Captain  Drake,  "at  these  four  lads;  their 
courage  is  unshaken,  and  they  look  cheerful  and  hopeful 
on  all  occasions.  Take  example  from  them  and  keep  up 
your  hopes.  I  propose  to  make  a  raft  upon  which  I  myself 
will  embark,  and  by  making  out  from  this  bay  into  the 
open  sea,  may  succeed  in  catching  sight  of  the  pinnace 
and  bringing  it  hither  to  your  rescue." 

The  proposal  seemed  a  desperate  one,  for  it  was  far  more 
likely  that  the  Spaniards'  ships  would  come  along  and 
descry  the  raft  than  that  the  latter  should  meet  with  the 
pinnace.  However,  there  seemed  no  other  resource.  The 
materials  for  the  raft  were  scanty  and  weak,  and  when 
Captain  Francis  with  three  companions  got  fairly  out  of 
the  bay  the  raft  sank  so  deeply  in  the  water  that  they  were 
completely  standing  in  the  sea. 

For  some  hours  they  beat  about,  and  then  to  their  great 
joy  they  descried  the  pinnace  in  the  distance  making  for 
land.  The  wind  had  now  risen,  and  it  was  blowing  hard, 
and  their  position  on  the  raft  was  dangerous  enough. 
They  found  that  it  would  be  impossible  for  them  to  keep 
at  sea,  and  still  more  impossible  to  place  themselves  in  the 
track  of  the  pinnace,  which  was  making  for  a  bay  behind 
a  projecting  headland.  Painfully  paddling  the  raft  to  the 
shore  Captain  Francis  landed,  and  they  made  their  way 
with  much  toil  and  fatigue  over  the  hill  which  divided 
them  from  that  bay,  and  toward  morning  got  down  to  the 
pinnace,  where  they  were  received  with  much  joy.  Then 
they  at  once  launched  the  boat  and  made  for  the  spot 
whea-e  they  had  left  their  comrades.  These  received  them 
as  if  risen  from  the  dead,  for  they  had  all  made  up  their 
minds  that  their  admiral  and  his  companions  had  been  lost 


DRAKE'S  PLA&.  63 

upon  the  frail  raft  on  which  they  had  embarked.  They 
now  put  to  sea,  and  had  the  good  fortune  to  escape  the 
ken  of  the  Spaniards,  who  had  sailed  further  up  the  coast. 
So  thanking  God  for  their  escape  they  sailed  back  to  the 
bay,  where  the  Pacha  and  her  prizes  lay,  and  then  all 
hands  began  to  make  great  preparation  for  return  home. 


64  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&. 


CHAPTER  V. 

CAST  ASHORE. 

IT  was  time  indeed  for  the  little  band  of  adventurers  to 
be  turning  their  faces  toward  England.  Their  original 
strength  of  eighty  men  was  reduced  to  fifty,  and  of  these 
many  were  sick  and  weak.  They  had  gained  a  vast  store 
of  wealth,  although  they  had  missed  the  plunder  of  Nom- 
bre  de  Dios  and  of  Carthagena.  Their  doings  had  caused 
such  consternation  and  alarm  that  it  was  certain  that  the 
Spaniards  would  ere  long  make  a  great  and  united  effort 
to  crush  them,  and  fifty  men,  however  valiant,  could  not 
battle  with  a  fleet.  The  men  were  longing  for  home, 
looking  forward  to  the  delight  of  spending  the  great  share 
of  prize-money  which  would  fall  to  each.  The  sudden 
death  which  had  stricken  many  of  their  comrades  had,  too, 
cast  a  chill  on  the  expedition,  and  made  all  long  more 
eagerly  to  be  away  from  those  beautiful  but  deadly  shores. 
When,  therefore,  on  the  day  after  the  return  of  Captain 
Francis,  the  word  was  given  to  prepare  for  the  homeward 
voyage,  the  most  lively  joy  prevailed.  The  stores  were 
embarked,  the  Simeroons,  who  had  done  them  good  service, 
dismissed  with  rich  presents,  and  all  embarked  with  much 
joy  and  thankfulness  that  their  labors  and  dangers  were 
overpast.  They  were,  however,  extremely  shorthanded, 
and  were  scattered  among  the  three  or  four  prizes  which 
were  the  best  among  the  ships  which  they  had  taken.  Ned 

and  Gerald,  being  now  able  to  give  good  assistance  in  case 

• c 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  65 

of  need  to  the  sailors,  were  put  on  board  one  of  the  prizes 
with  four  seamen.  Captain  Drake  had  determined  to  keep 
for  a  time  the  prizes  with  him,  for  as  it  might  well  be  that 
they  should  meet  upon  their  way  a  great  Spanish  fleet,  he 
thought  that  by  keeping  together  with  the  flag  of  St. 
George  flying  on  all  the  ships  the  Spaniards  would  believe 
that  the  Pacha  had  been  joined  by  ships  from  England, 
and  so  would  assuredly  let  her  and  her  consorts  pass  at 
large.  At  the  last  land  at  which  they  touched  Captain 
Drake  intended  to  dismiss  all  but  one  of  the  prizes,  and  to 
sail  across  the  Atlantic  with  her  and  the  Pacha. 

This,  however,  was  not  to  be.  v 

One  day  shortly  after  their  departure  Ned  said  to  Gerald : 
"I  do  not  like  the. look  of  the  sky;  it  reminds  me  of  the 
sky  that  we  had  before  that  terrible  hurricane  when  we 
were  moored  Offf  the  Isle  of  Pines;  and  with  our  scanty 
crew  we  should  be  in  a  mightily  unfavorable  position 
should  the  wind  come  on  to  blow." 

In  that  wise  the  sailors  shared  Ned's  apprehensions,  and 
in  the  speediest  possible  time  all  sail  was  lowered  and  the 
ship  prepared  to  meet  the  gale.  It  was  not  long  before 
the  whole  sky  was  covered  with  black  clouds.  Captain 
Drake  signaled  to  the  vessels  that  each  was  to  do  its  best, 
and  if  separated  was  to  rendezvous  at  the  spot  before  agreed 
upon.  Then  all  having  been  done  that  could  be  thought 
of,  they  waited  the  bursting  of  the  storm. 

It  came  at  last,  with  the  suddenness  and  almost  the  force 
of  an  explosion.  A  faint  rumbling  noise  was  first  heard, 
a  white  line  of  foam  was  seen  in  the  distance,  and  then 
with  a  roar  and  a  crash  the  hurricane  was  upon  them. 
The  vessel  reeled  over  so  far  under  the  blow  that  for  a 
time  all  on  board  thought  that  she  would  capsize.  The 
two  sailors  at  the  helm,  however,  held  on  sturdily,  and  at 
last  her  head  drifted  off  on  the  wind,  and  she  flew  along 
before  its  force.  The  sea  rose  as  if  by  magic;  where  for 


66  UNDER  QUAKE'S  FLAG. 

weeks  scarcely  a  ripple  had  ruffled  the  surface  of  the  water 
now  great  waves  with  crested  tops  tore  along;  the  air  was 
full  of  blinding  foam  swept  from  the  tops  of  the  waves; 
and  it  was  difficult  for  those  on  board  even  to  breathe 
when  facing  the  force  of  the  wind. 

"This  is  tremendous,"  Ned  shouted  in  Gerald's  ears, 
"and  as  there  seem  to  be  islands  all  over  these  seas,  if  we 
go  on  at  the  rate  we  are  going  now  rnethinks  that  it  will 
not  be  long  before  we  land  on  one  or  another.  We  are, 
as  I  reckon,  near  Hispafiola,  but  there  is  no  saying  which 
way  we  may  drift,  for  these  storms  are  almost  always 
changeable,  and  while  we  are  running  south  at  pres- 
ent, an  hour  hence  we  may  be  going  in  the  opposite 
direction." 

For  twenty-four  hours  the  storm  continued  with  una- 
bated fury.  At  times  it  seemed  impossible  that  the  vessel 
could  live,  so  tremendous  were  the  seas  which  struck  and 
buffeted  her.  However,  being  light  in  the  water  and 
buoyant,  she  floated  over  it.  During  the  next  night  the 
wind  sensibly  abated,  and  although  still  blowing  with  tre- 
mendous force,  there  was  evidence  to  the  accustomed  eyes 
of  the  sailors  that  the  storm  was  well-nigh  blowing  itself 
out.  The  sea,  too,  sensibly  went  down,  although  still 
tremendous,  and  all  began  to  hope  that  they  would  weather 
the  gale,  when  one  of  the  sailors,  who  had  crawled  forward 
to  the  bow,  shouted: 

"  Breakers  ahead !" 

It  was  now  fortunately  morning,  although  the  darkness 
had  been  so  intense  since  the  storm  began  that  the  differ- 
ence between  night  and  day  was  faint  indeed;  still  it  was 
better,  if  danger  were  to  be  met  with,  that  there  should 
be  as  much  light  as  possible.  All  hands  looked  out  over 
the  bows  and  saw  before  them  a  steep  coast  rising  both  to 
the  right  and  left. 

"It  is  all  over  with  the  ship,"  Gerald  said  to  Ned,  "and 


UNDER  DHAKE'S  FLAG.  67 

I  do  not  think  that  there  is  a  chance,  even  for  you.  The 
surf  on  those  rocks  is  terrible." 

"We  must  do  our  best,"  said  Ned,  "and  trust  in  God. 
You  keep  close  to  me,  Gerald,  and  when  you  want  aid  I 
will  assist  you  as  far  as  I  can.  You  swim  fairly,  but  scarce 
well  enough,  unaided,  to  get  through  that  surf  yonder. 5> 

The  men,  seeing  that  what  appeared  to  be  certain  de- 
struction stared  them  in  the  face,  now  shook  hands  all 
round,  and  then  commending  their  souls  to  God,  sat  down 
and  waited  for  the  shock.  When  it  came  it  was  tremen- 
dous. The  masts  snapped  at  the  board  like  rotten  sticks, 
the  vessel  shivered  from  stem  to  stern,  and  drawing  back 
for  an  instant  was  again  cast  down  with  terrible  force  and, 
as  if  struck  by  lightning,  parted  amidships,  and  then 
seemed  to  fall  all  to  pieces  like  a  house  of  cards. 

Ned  and  Gerald  were  standing  hand  in  hand  when  the 
vessel  struck;  and  as  she  went  to  pieces  and  they  were 
precipitated  into  the  water  Ned  still  kept  close  to  his 
friend,  swimming  side  by  side  with  him.  They  soon, 
neared  the  edge  of  the  line  where  the  waves  broke  upon 
the  rocks.  Then  Ned  shouted  to  Gerald  to  coast  along 
outside  the  broken  water,  for  that  there  was  no  landing 
there  with  life.  For  upward  of  an  hour  they  swam  on 
outside  the  line  of  surf.  The  sea,  although  tremendously 
high,  did  not  break  till  it  touched  a  certain  point,  and  the 
lads  rose  and  fell  over  the  great  billows.  They  had  strip- 
ped oil  the  greater  portion  of  their  clothing  before  the  ship 
struck,  and  in  the  warm  water  had  no  sensation  of  chill, 
and  had  nothing  to  fight  against  but  fatigue.  When  they 
were  in  the  hollow  of  the  waves  their  position  was  easy 
enough,  and  they  could  make  each  other  hear  by  shouting 
loudly.  When,  however,  they  were  on  the  crest  of  one  of 
the  mountainous  waves,  it  was  a  hard  struggle  for  life. 
The  wind  blew  with  such  fury,  taking  the  top  of  the  water 
off  in  sheets  and  scattering  it  in  fine  spray,  that  the  boys 


68  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

were  nearly  drowned,  although  they  kept  their  backs  to 
the  wind  and  held  their  breath  as  if  diving,  except  when 
necessary  to  make  a  gasp  for  air. 

Gerald  became  weak  and  tired  at  the  end  of  the  hour, 
but  Ned  kept  up  his  courage,  and  aided  him  by  swimming 
by  his  side  and  letting  Gerald  put  his  hand  upon  his  shoul- 
der every  time  that  they  were  in  the  hollows  of  the  waves, 
so  that  he  got  a  complete  rest  at  these  periods.  At  last 
Ned  thought  he  saw  a  passage  between  two  of  the  big 
rocks,  through  which  it  might  be  possible,  he  thought, 
that  they  might  swim,  and  so  avoid  the  certain  death 
which  seemed  to  await  them  at  every  other  spot. 

The  passage  was  about  forty  feet  wide,  and  it  was  no 
easy  matter  to  calculate  upon  striking  this  in  so  wild  a  sea. 
Side  by  side  with  Gerald,  Ned  made  for  the  spot,  and  at 
last  swam  to  the  edge  of  the  surf,  then  a  great  wave  came 
rolling  in,  and  the  boys,  dizzy  and  confused,  half  smoth- 
ered and  choking,  were  hurled  with  tremendous  force 
through  the  great  rocks  into  comparatively  calm  water 
beyond.  Ned  now  seized  Gerald's  hair,  for  his  friend  was 
nearly  gone,  and  turning  aside  from  the  direct  line  of  the 
entrance  found  himself  speedily  in  calm  water  behind  the 
line  of  rocks.  A  few  minutes'  further  struggle  and  the 
two  boys  lay  on  the  beach  well-nigh  insensible  after 
their  great  exertions.  After  awhile  they  recovered  their 
strength,  and  with  staggering  feet  made  their  way  further 
inland. 

"I  owe  you  my  life,  Ned,"  Gerald  said.  "I  never  could 
have  struggled  ashore  nor  indeed  keep  myself  up  for  half 
that  time  had  it  not  been  for  your  aid." 

"I  am  glad  to  have  been  able  to  help  you,"  Ned  said 
simply.  "  We  may  thank  heaven  that  the  storm  had 
abated  a  little  in  its  force  before  the  vessel  struck,  for  had 
it  been  blowing  as  it  was  yesterday  we  could  not  have 
swum  five  minutes.  It  was  just  the  lowering  of  the  wind 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  69 

that  enabled  us  to  swim  without  being  drowned  by  the 
spray.  It  was  bad  enough  as  it  was  on  the  top  of  the 
waves,  but  yesterday  it  would  have  been  impossible." 

One  of  the  first  thoughts  of  the  boys  upon  fairly  recov- 
ering themselves  was  to  kneel  down  and  thank  God  for 
having  preserved  their  lives,  and  then  having  rested  for 
upward  of  an  hour  to  recover  themselves,  they  made  their 
way  inland. 

"Our  dangers  are  by  no  means  over,  Gerald,"  Ned  said. 
"If  this  island  is,  as  I  believe,  a  thickly  cultivated  one  and 
in  the  hands  of  the  Spaniards,  it  will  go  hard  with  us  if 
they  find  us,  after  all  the  damage  to  their  commerce  which 
we  have  been  inflicting  for  the  last  year." 

Upon  getting  to  some  rising  ground  they  saw  to  their 
surprise  a  large  town  lying  on  a  bay  in  front  of  them;  in- 
stinctively they  paused  at  the  sight,  and  both  sat  down  so 
as  to  be  out  of  view  of  any  casual  lookers-on. 

"What  are  we  to  do,  Ned?"  Gerald  said.  "If  we  stay 
here  we  shall  be  starved..  If  we  go  into  the  town  we  shall 
have  our  throats  cut.  Which  think  you  is  the  best?" 

"I  do  not  like  either  alternative,"  Ned  said.  "See, 
inland,  there  are  many  high  mountains,  and  even  close  to 
the  town  there  appear  to  be  thickets  and  woods.  There 
are  houses  here  and  there  and  no  doubt  plantations;  it 
seems  to  me  that  if  we  get  round  to  that  side  we  may  con- 
ceal ourselves,  and  it  is  hard  in  a  country  like  this  if  we 
cannot  at  any  rate  find  fruit  enough  to  keep  us  for  some 
time.  And  we  had  better  wait  till  dark;  our  white 
shoulders  will  be  seen  at  too  far  a  distance  by  this 
light." 

Creeping  into  a  thicket,  the  lads  lay  down  and  were 
soon  sound  asleep,  and  it  was  night  before  they  awoke  and 
looked  out.  All  signs  of  the  storm  had  passed.  The 
moon  was  shining  calmly,  the  stars  were  brilliant  and 
seemed  to  hang  like  lamps  in  the  sky,  an  effect  which  is 


70  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA& 

only  seen  in  tropical  climes.  There  were  lights  in  the 
town,  and  these  served  as  a  sort  of  guide  to  them.  Skirt- 
,ing  along  at  the  top  of  the  basin  in  which  the  town  lay 
they  passed  through  cultivated  estates,  picking  some  ears 
of  maize,  thus  satisfying  their  hunger,  which  was,  when 
they  started,  ravenous,  for  during  the  storm  they  had  been 
unable  to  open  the  hatchways  and  had  been  supported  only 
by  a  little  biscuit  which  happened  to  be  in  the  caboose  on 
deck. 

Toward  morning  they  chose  a  spot  in  a  thick  plantation 
of  trees  about  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  town,  and  here 
they  agreed  to  wait  for  awhile  until  they  could  come  to 
some  decision  as  to  their  course. 

Three  days  passed  without  any  change;  each  night  they 
stole  out  and  picked  maize,  pineapples,  and  melons  in  the 
plantations  for  their  subsistence,  and  as  morning  returned 
went  back  to  their  hiding-place.  Close  to  it  a  road  ran 
along  to  a  noble  house  in  some  grounds  at  about  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  their  grove.  Every  morning  they  saw  the 
owner  of  this  house,  apparently  a  man  of  distinction,  riding 
toward  the  town,  and  they  concluded  that  he  was  one  of 
the  great  merchants  of  the  place.  One  day  he  came  ac- 
companied by  a  young  lady  carried  in  a  litter  by  four 
slaves.  The  boys,  who  were  weary  of  their  solitude, 
pressed  to  the  edge  of  the  thicket  to  obtain  a  clear  view  of 
this  little  procession  which  broke  the  monotony  of  their 
day. 

"Gerald,"  Ned  exclaimed,  grasping  him  by  the  arm, 
"do  you  know,  I  believe  that  the  lady  is  the  girl  I  picked 
out  of  the  water  the  day  we  took  that  ship  three  months 
ago." 

"Do  you  think  so?"  Gerald  said;  "it  is  too  far  surely 
to  see." 

"I  do  not  know  for  certain,"  Ned  answered,  "but 
methinks  that  I  cannot  be  mistaken." 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  71 

"Perhaps  she  would  help  us  or  intercede  for  us,"  Gerald 
suggested. 

"Perhaps  so,"  Ned  said;  "at  any  rate  we  will  try.  To- 
night we  will  make  a  move  into  the  gardens  of  the  house 
she  came  from  and  will  hide  there  till  we  see  her  alone  in 
the  garden,  then  1  will  sally  forth  and  see  how  she  takes  it." 

Accordingly,  that  night  after  obtaining  their  supply  of 
fruit  the  boys  entered  the  inclosure.  When  morning 
broke  there  was  speedily  a  stir,  negroes  and  negresses  went 
out  to  the  fields,  servants  moved  hither  and  thither  in  the 
veranda  outside  the  house,  gardeners  came  out  and  set  to 
work  at  their  vocations.  It  was  evident  that  the  owner  or 
his  family  was  fond  of  gardening,  for  everything  was  kept 
with  beautiful  order  and  regularity.  Mixed  with  the 
cactus  and  other  gaudy  flowering  plants  of  Mexico  and 
South  America  were  many  European  plants  brought  out 
and  acclimatized.  Here  fountains  threw  up  dancing  waters 
in  the  air,  cool  shady  paths  and  bowers  afforded  protection 
from  the  heat  of  the  day,  and  so  carefully  was  it  clipped 
and  kept  that  a  fallen  leaf  would  have  destroyed  its 
perfection. 

The  point  which  the  boys  had  chosen  was  remote  from 
the  house,  for  it  was  of  importance  that  there  should  be 
no  witnesses  of  the  meeting.  Here,  in  a  spacious  arbor, 
were  chairs,  couches,  and  other  signs  that  some  of  the 
family  were  in  the  habit  of  taking  their  seats  there,  and 
although  the  boys  knew  that  it  might  be  days  before  they 
succeeded  in  carrying  out  their  object  yet  they  determined 
to  wait  and  watch  patiently,  however  long  it  might  be. 
Their  success,  however,  surpassed  their  expectations,  for 
it  was  but  an  hour  or  two  after  they  had  taken  up  their 
post,  and  soon  after  the  sun  had  risen,  that  they  saw,  walk- 
ing along  the  path,  the  young  lady  whom  they  so  desired 
to  meet. 

She  was  not  alone,  for  a  black  girl  walked  a  little  behind 


72  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

her  chatting  constantly  to  her  and  carrying  some  books, 
a  shawl,  and  various  other  articles.  When  they  reached 
the  arbor  the  attendant  placed  the  things  there,  and  then 
as  she  took  her  seat  the  young  lady  said  to  the  girl,  "Go 
in  and  fetch  me  my  coffee  here,  say  I  shall  not  come  in 
until  breakfast  time,  and  that  if  any  orders  are  required 
they  must  come  here  for  them." 

"  Will  you  want  me  to  read  to  you?" 

"No,"  the  young  lady  said;  "it  is  not  hot:  I  shall  take 
a  turn  round  the  garden  first  and  then  read  to  myself." 

The  black  girl  went  oif  at  a  trot  toward  the  house  and 
the  young  lady  strolled  round  and  round  that  portion  of 
the  garden  until  her  black  attendant  returned  with  a  tray 
containing  coffee,  lemonade,  and  fruits;  this  she  placed  on 
the  table,  and  then  in  answer  to  the  "  You  need  not  wait" 
of  the  lady,  again  retired. 

Now  was  the  time  for  the  boys  who  had  watched  these 
operations  with  keen  interest  and  anxiety.  It  was  uncer- 
tain whether  she  would  keep  the  black  attendant  by  her 
side,  and  all  depended  upon  that.  As  soon  as  she  was 
alone  Ned  advanced  from  their  hiding-place.  The  boys 
had  agreed  that  it  was  better  at  first  that  he  should  ap-  . 
proach  alone,  lest  the  sudden  appearance  of  the  two,  espe- 
cially as  Gerald  was  nearly  as  tall  as  a  man,  might  have 
caused  alarm,  and  she  might  have  flown  away  before  she 
had  identified  Ned  as  the  lad  who  had  jumped  into  the  ,- 
water  to  save  her. 

Ned  approached  the  arbor  with  hesitating  steps,  and  felt 
that  his  appearance  was  indeed  sorely  against  him.  He 
had  no  covering  to  his  head,  had  nothing  on,  indeed,  but 
a  pair  of  trousers.  He  was  shoeless  and  stockingless,  and 
presented  the  appearance  of  a  beggar  boy  rather  than  the 
smart  young  sailor  whom  she  had  seen  on  board  the  ship. 

The  lady  started  up  with  a  short  exclamation  on  seeing 
a  white  ragged  boy  standing  before  her. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  73 

"Who  are  yon?"  she  exclaimed,  "and  by  what  right  do 
you  enter  these  gardens?  A  white  boy  and  in  rags,  how 
comes  this?" 

"Our  ship  has  been  wrecked,"  Ned  said,  using  his  best 
Spanish.  "Do  you  not  remember  me?  I  am  the  boy  who 
picked  you  up  when  you  fell  overboard  on  the  day  when  the 
English  captured  the  ship  you  came  out  in,  some  four 
mouths  ago." 

"Are  you,  indeed?"  the  young  lady  said  in  surprise. 
"Yes,  and  now  that  I  look  close  at  you  I  recognize  your 
face.  Poor  boy,  how  have  you  got  into  a  strait  like  this?" 

Ned  understood  but  little  of  what  she  said,  as  he  only 
knew  a  few  words  in  Spanish.  It  was  with  difficulty  that 
he  could  understand  it  even  when  spoken  slowly,  while 
spoken  as  a  native  would  do  he  scarce  gathered  a  word. 
He  saw,  however,  from  her  attitude  that  her  meaning  was 
kind,  and  that  she  was  disposed  to  do  what  she  could  for 
him.  He,  therefore,  in  his  broken  Spanish,  told  her  how 
a  ship  on  which  he  and  five  of  his  comrades  were  embarked 
had  been  driven  ashore  in  the  hurricane,  and  all  lost  with 
the  exception  of  another  boy  and  himself. 

"It  is  lucky,  indeed,"  the  girl  said  to  herself  when  he 
had  finished,  "  that  I  found  that  my  father  had  left  Nombre 
de  Dios  and  had  come  down  to  his  house  here,  for,  assur- 
edly, the  people  would  have  made  short  work  of  these  poor 
lads  had  I  not  been  here  to  aid  them.  But,  after  all,  what 
can  I  do?  My  father  would,  I  know,  do  anything  for  my 
sake,  and  I  have  told  him  how  this  lad  jumped  overboard 
to  save  my  life,  but  there  is  one  here  greater  than  he,  that 
terrible  Inquisition.  These  boys  are  heretics,  and  it  will 
be  impossible  to  conceal,  for  any  time,  from  the  priests 
that  they  are  here.  Still,  at  any  rate,  for  a  time  we  might 
hide  them,  and  in  gratitude  only  I  would  do  all  in  my 
power  for  them." 

Ned  watched  her  face  as  these  thoughts  passed  through 


74  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

her  mind.  He  saw  at  once  that  she  was  willing  to  do  all 
in  her  power,  but  saw  also  that  there  were  difficulties  in 
the  way. 

"Poor  boy,"  she  said,  looking  at  him  kindly;  "you  must 
be  hungry,  indeed,"  and  taking  an  ivory  mallet  she  struck 
a  gong  which  hung  in  the  arbor,  and  made  signs  to  Ned 
to  retire  for  the  present.  The  little  black  girl  came 
running  out. 

"I  have  changed  rny  mind,"  her  mistress  said.  "Let 
my  breakfast  be  sent  out  here  to  me  instead  of  indoors, 
and  I  am  hungry;  tell  the  cook  to  be  sure  and  let  it  be  a 
good  one,  and  as  soon  as  possible." 

Much  surprised  by  these  orders  the  black  girl  again  left 
her. 

"  My  father  has  gone  to  town,"  she  said  to  the  boys  when 
they  joined  her;  "when  he  cornes  back  I  will  ask  him  what 
can  be  done.  It  will  not  be  easy  to  hide  you,  for  these 
negroes  chatter  like  so  many  parrots,  and  the  news  will 
spread  all  over  the  town  that  some  English  boys  are  here, 
and  in  that  case  they  will  take  you  away,  and  my  father 
would  be  powerless  as  I  to  help  you." 

The  black  cook  was  indeed  astonished  at  the  demolition 
of  the  breakfast  effected  by  her  young  mistress,  but  she 
put  it  down  to  the  fact  that  she  must  have  given  a  large 
portion  of  it  to  her  dogs,  of  which  one  or  more  were  gen- 
erally her  companions  in  the  garden. 

Fortunately  on  the  present  occasion  the  great  blood- 
hound Zeres  had  gone  down  into  the  town  with  his  master. 
Of  this,  however,  the  cook  knew  nothing,  and  muttered 
to  herself  somewhat  angrily  as  she  saw  the  empty  dishes 
which  were  brought  back  to  her,  "  that  it  was  a  sin  to  give 
to  that  creature  a  meal  which  was  sufficient  for  five  noble- 
men." 

When  Seiior  Sagasta  returned  to  his  beautiful  villa  in 
the  afternoon,  his  daughter  at  once  confided  to  him  what 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  75 

had  happened.  He  entered  warmly  into  her  scheme  for 
the  aid  and  protection  of  the  lads,  and  expressed  himself 
willing  to  do  anything  that  she  could  suggest.  "But,"  he 
said,  "you  know  as  well  as  I  do  that  if  the  news  gets  about 
that  two  boys  of  Captain  Drake's  band  are  here,  nothing 
will  save  them  from  the  rage  of  the  population ;  and  indeed 
if  the  people  and  the  military  authorities  were  disposed  to 
let  them  alone  the  Inquisition  would  be  too  strong  for 
them  and  would  claim  its  own,  and  against  the  Inquisition 
even  governors  are  powerless.  Therefore  if  they  are  to 
stop,  and  stop  they  must,  at  least  for  a  time,  it  must  be 
done  in  perfect  secrecy.  There  is  no  possibility  of  disguis- 
ing two  English  boys  to  look  like  negroes.  The  only  plan 
I  can  suggest  is  that  they  should  have  that  gardener's  hut. 
I  can  remove  the  man  who  lives  there  at  present,  and  will 
send  him  up  the  country  to  look  after  my  place  there. 
Then  you  must  take  old  David  into  our  confidence.  He 
and  his  wife  Flora  are  perfectly  faithful  and  can  be  trusted 
to  the  death.  It  is  lucky  that  she  is  cook,  for  she  will  be 
able  to  prepare  food  for  them.  The  hut  must  be  kept,  of 
course,  locked  up  at  all  times;  but  as  it  is  close  to  the 
fence,  and  the  window  indeed  looks  into  the  garden,  you 
can  go  there  of  a  day  and  speak  to  them  and  take  them 
books  and  lighten  their  captivity.  When  it  gets  dark  I 
will  go  with  you  down  the  garden  and  will  see  these  brave 
lads.  In  the  meantime  old  David  shall  get  some  shirts 
and  shoes  and  other  necessaries  for  them.  We  have  a 
plentiful  store  of  things  in  the  magazine,  and  he  can  rig 
them  up  there  perfectly.  1  will  at  once  get  the  gardener 
out  of  the  house,  and  will  give  David  instructions  to  carry 
the  things  there  as  soon  as  it  is  empty." 

That  evening  after  it  was  dark  the  boys,  who  had  been 
anxiously  listening  for  every  movement,  saw  in  the  dim 
light  the  white  figure  of  the  girl  advancing  with  her  father 
beside  her.  When  she  came  to  the  arbor  she  raised  her 
voice, 


76  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"Are  yon  here?"  she  cried.  "You  can  come  out  without 
fear."  And  as  they  advanced,  "My  father  will  do  all  in 
his  power  to  protect  the  saviour  of  his  daughter." 

The  merchant  shook  the  hands  of  the  boys  with  the 
stately  ceremony  of  the  Spaniard,  and  assured  them  that 
he  was  their  servant  indeed  for  their  treatment  of  his 
daughter,  and  that  his  house  and  all  that  it  contained  was 
at  their  disposal. 

Ned  and  Gerald  understood  little  enough  of  what  he 
was  saying,  but  his  manner  and  gestures  were  sufficient, 
and  they  thanked  him  heartily  for  his  kindness.  He  now 
led  the  way  along  many  winding  paths  till  they  reached  a 
low  fence  forming  the  border  of  the  garden,  and  distant  a 
long  way  from  the  house.  A  light  was  already  burning  in 
it,  and  a  black  servant  was  at  work  within.  There  was  a 
break  in  the  fence,  by  which  they  passed  through  without 
difficulty,  and  on  entering  the  hut  they  found  everything 
prepared  for  them. 

On  a  table  stood  a  dainty  supper,  the  rooms  were  swept, 
and  fresh  furniture  had  been  placed  in  them.  In  these 
countries  furniture  is  of  the  slightest  kind.  A  hammock 
to  swing  in  by  day  or  sleep  in  by  night,  a  couple  of  cane 
chairs,  and  a  mat  of  beautifully  woven  straw  for  the  floor. 
This  is  nearly  all  the  furniture  which  is  required  in  the 
tropics. 

First  the  negro  beckoned  the  boys  into  an  inner  room, 
and  there,  to  their  intense  delight,  they  saw  a  large  tub 
full  of  water,  and  two  piles  of  clothes  lying  beside  it. 

Don  Sagasta  and  his  daughter,  after  a  few  more  words, 
left  them,  assuring  them  that  they  would  be  safe  from 
observation  there,  but  that  they  must  not  stir  out  during 
the  day,  and  must  keep  the  door  securely  fastened,  and 
must  give  no  answer  to  any  one  who  might  come  and  knock 
or  call,  unless  to  themselves,  to  the  black  who  was  now 
with  them,  or  his  wife,  who  would  accompany  him  perhaps 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  77 

the  next  evening.  Donna  Anna  herself  promised  that  she 
would  come  and  see  them  the  next  morning,  and  that  she 
hoped  to  find  that  they  were  comfortable.  When  left 
alone  the  boys  luxuriated  in  the  bath,  and  then  having 
put  on  fresh  suits  they  felt  clean  and  comfortable  once 
again.  The  clothes  were  those  used  by  the  upper  class  of 
slaves  employed  as  overseers.  Don  Sagasta  had  determined 
to  get  them  some  clothes  of  a  superior  class,  but  he  felt 
that  it  was  better  that,  so  'long  as  they  were  in  hiding, 
they  should  be  dressed  in  a  costume  which  would,  should 
any  one  perchance  get  a  distant  look  at  them,  excite  no 
curiosity  or  surprise. 

The  boys  ate  a  hearty  supper,  and  then  throwing  them- 
selves into  the  swinging  hammocks  were  soon  fast  asleep* 
They  were  up  with  dawn  next  morning,  tidied  up  their 
-room,  and  made  all  ready  for  the  visit  of  Donna  Anna. 
She  soon  appeared,  having  got  rid  of  her  little  black  maid 
as  upon  the  morning  before.  She  brought  them  a  store 
of  books,  and  among  them  a  Spanish  dictionary  and  gram- 
mar; she  told  them  that  she  thought  it  would  be  of  assist- 
ance to  pass  away  their  time,  and  be  of  the  greatest  use 
for  them  to  learn  to  speak  as  much  Spanish  as  possible, 
and  that  she  was  willing,  when  she  could  spare  time  unob- 
served, to  teach  them  the  language.  Very  gratefully  the 
boys  accepted  her  offer,  and  day  by  day  for  the  next  mouth 
the  young  lady  came  every  morning,  and  for  an  hour 
taught  them  the  meaning  and  pronunciation  of  the  words, 
which  during  the  day  they  learned  by  heart.  They  found 
that  the  island  upon  which  they  had  been  cast  ashore  was 
Porto  Rico,  an  island  of  considerable  size  not  far  from 
Hispafiola, 


78  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG 


CHAPTER  VI. 

IK  THE  WOODS. 

IK  the  evening  Sefior  Sagasta  visited  the  lads,  and  had 
long  conversations  with  them.  He  promised  them  that 
upon  the  very  first  opportunity  which  should  occur  he 
would  aid  them  to  escape,  but  pointed  out  that  at  present 
there  was  no  possibility  of  their  getting  away.  "Captain 
Drake,"  he  said,  "has  left  the  seas,  and  until  he  comes 
back  again,  or  some  other  of  your  English  filibusters,  I  see 
no  chance  of  your  escape.  As  soon  as  I  hear  of  an  English 
ship  in  these  waters  I  will  have  a  small  boat,  well  fitted 
np  with  sails  and  all  necessaries,  conveyed  to  a  creek  on 
the  coast.  To  this  you  shall  be  taken  down,  and  make 
your  way  to  the  point  where  we  hear  that  the  vessel  is 
accustomed  to  rendezvous." 

This  appeared  to  the  boys  to  be  the  only  possible  plan, 
and  they  warmly  expressed  their  gratitude  to  their  host 
for  his  thoughtful  kindness. 

Another  month  passed,  and  then  one  evening  Don 
Sagasta  came  to  the  hut  with  a  certain  anxiety  in  his  face. 

"Is  there  anything  the  matter?"  Ned,  who  now  began 
to  speak  Spanish  with  some  fluency,  asked, 

"I  am  much  disturbed.  Since  you  have  been  here  I  am 
sure  that  no  one  has  got  a  sight  of  you,  and  I  can  rely  so 
implicitly  upon  David  and  Flora  that  I  am  sure  the  secret 
has  not  leaked  out  there.  But  from  what  I  hear  it  seems 
that  you  must  have  been  seen  during  the  time  that  you 


SHAKES  FLAG.  79 

were  wrecked  and  before  yon  came  here.  I  heard  in  the 
town  to-day  that  a  rumor  is  current  among  the  people  that 
two  white  men  were  seen  near  the  sea  upon  the  day  after 
the  great  storm.  Some  one  else,  too,  seems  to  have  said 
that  he  caught  sight  of  two  white  men  not  far  from  this 
house  just  before  daybreak  two  days  afterward.  This  re- 
port has,  it  seems,  been  going  from  mouth  to  mouth,  and 
has  at  last  reached  the  ears  of  the  governor.  The  portions 
of  a  wreck  which  were  driven  ashore  seem  to  confirm  the 
story,  and  unfortunately  the  board  with  the  name  of  the 
ship  was  washed  ashore,  and  it  is  known  to  be  that  of  one 
of  those  captured  by  Captain  Drake.  Putting  the  two 
things  together  it  is  supposed  that  misfortune  overtook  a 
portion  of  his  fleet,  and  that  two  of  his  men  managed  to 
save  their  lives,  and  are  now  lurking  somewhere  about  the 
neighborhood.  I  hear  that  the  governor  has  ordered  a 
strict  search  to  be  set  on  foot,  and  that  a  large  reward  is 
to  be  offered  for  the  discovery  of  any  signs  of  the  fugitives." 

The  next  day  the  boys  heard  that  the  persons  to  whom 
the  story  had  been  traced  had  been  taken  before  the  gov- 
ernor and  strictly  examined,  and  that  he  was  fully  con- 
vinced of  the  truth  of  the  story.  Three  days  afterward 
Don  Sagasta  brought  them  a  copy  of  a  notice  which  had 
been  placed  in  the  market-place,  offering  a  reward  of  one 
thousand  dollars  for  any  news  which  would  lead  to  the 
capture  of  the  English  pirates,  and  announcing  the  severest 
punishment  upon  any  who  should  dare  to  conceal  or  to 
assist  them.  Gerald  at  once  said  that  rather  than  be  a 
cause  of  anxiety  to  their  kind  host  and  his  daughter  they 
would  give  themselves  up.  This  offer  was,  however,  in- 
dignantly refused  by  Don  Sagasta. 

"No,  no,"  he  said;  "this  must  not  be.  I  might  take 
you  into  the  house,  but  I  fear  that  with  so  many  servants, 
some  of  whom  are  as  bigoted  as  any  of  us  -whites,  you 
would  be  sure  to  be  discovered,  and  they  would  either  re- 


gO  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

veal  in  confession  or  disclose  to  the  authorities  the  fact  of 
your  concealment.  The  only  plan  which  promises  to  offer 
safety  that  I  can  suggest  is  that  you  shall  take  to  the 
mountains.  There  are  many  runaways  there,  and  although 
sometimes  they  are  hunted  down  and  slain,  yet  they  have 
caverns  and  other  places  of  concealment  where  you  might 
remain  for  years.  I  will  speak  to  David  about  it  at  once." 

David  on  being  questioned  said  that  there  was  an  old 
native  woman  living  at  a  hut  a  little  way  off,  who  had  the 
reputation-  of  having  the  evil  eye,  and  who  was  certainly 
acquainted  with  the  doings  of  the  runaways.  If  any  slave 
•wished  to  send  a  message  to  one  of  his  friends  who  had 
taken  to  the  hills,  the  old  woman  would  for  a  present 
always  convey,  or  get  it  conveyed,  to  the  man  for  whom 
it  was  intended.  He  thought  that  it  would  be  absolutely 
necessary  that  some  such  means  should  be  taken  of  intro- 
ducing the  boys  to  the  runaways,  otherwise,  hunted  as 
these  were,  they  would  either  fly  when  they  saw  two  whites 
approaching,  or  would  surround  and  destroy  them. 

Don  Sagasta  at  once  accepted  the  suggestion,  and  David 
was  despatched  to  the  old  woman  with  offers  of  a  hand- 
some present  if  she  would  give  a  guide  to  the  boys  to  the 
mountains.  David  was  instructed  especially  to  tell  her 
that  they  were  English,  and  the  natural  enemies  of  the 
Spaniards,  that  they  had  done  them  much  harm  at  sea, 
and  that  if  caught  by  the  Spaniards  they  would  be  killed. 
He  returned  an  hour  later  with  news  that  the  old  Indian 
woman  had  at  once  upon  hearing  these  facts  promised  to 
get  them  passed  up  to  the  hiding-places  of  the  natives. 

"  You  think,"  Don  Sagasta  said,  "that  there  is  no  fear 
of  her  mentioning  the  fact  that  she  has  seen  my  friends  to 
any  of  the  searchers?" 

"Oh,  no,"  David  said;  "she  is  as  close  as  wax.  Over 
and  over  again,  when  she  has  been  suspected  of  assisting 
in  the  evasion  of  a  slave,  she  has  been  beaten  and  put  to 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  81 

torture,  but  nothing  was  ever  extracted  from  her  lips,  and 
it  is  certain  that  she  would  die  rather  than  reveal  a  secret." 

Donna  Anna  was  much  moved  when  she  said  adieu  to 
the  lads.  She  regarded  Ned  as  the  preserver  of  her  life, 
and  both  had  during  the  two  months  of  daily  intercourse 
much  endeared  themselves  to  her.  Don  Sagasta  brought 
to  them  a  handsome  pair  of  pistols  each  and  a  sword,  and 
then  giving  them  a  basket  of  provisions  and  a  purse  con- 
taining money,  which  he  thought  might  be  useful  even 
among  runaway  slaves,  he  and  his  daughter  bade  adieu  to 
them,  with  many  expressions  of  kindness  and  gratitude  on 
both  sides. 

"Do  not  hesitate,"  Don  Sagasta  said,  "to  let  me  know 
if  I  can  at  any  time  do  or  send  anything  for  you;  should 
it  be  possible  I  will  send  a  message  to  you  by  the  old 
woman  if  any  expedition  on  a  grand  scale  is  being  got  up 
against  the  runaways,  and  this  may  make  your  position 
more  comfortable  among  them." 

Under  the  guidance  of  David  they  then  started  for  the 
Indian  woman's  hut,  while  Flora  set  to  work  to  carry  away 
and  obliterate  all  signs  from  the  hut  of  its  late  residents. 
After  a  few  minutes'  walking  the  boys  arrived  at  the 
Indian  hut.  It  was  constructed  simply  of  boughs  of  trees 
thickly  worked  together.  On  hearing  their  footsteps  an 
old  woman — the  boys  thought  they  had  never  seen  any 
one  so  old — with  long  white  hair,  and  a  face  wrinkled  till 
it  hardly  seemed  like  the  face  of  a  human  being,  came  to 
the  door  with  a  torch  made  of  resinous  wood  held  aloft. 
She  peered  nnder  her  hand  at  the  boys,  and  said  a  few 
words  to  David,  which  he  translated  to  the  boys  to  be — 
"And  these  are  English,  the  people  of  whom  the  Spaniards 
are  as  afraid  as  my  people  are  of  them?  Two  Spaniards 
can  drive  fifty  Indians  before  them,  but  I  hear  that  a  dozen 
of  these  Englishmen  can  take  a  ship  with  a  hundred  Span- 
iards on  board.  It  is  wonderful;  they  look  something  like 


82  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&. 

our  oppressors,  but  they  are  fairer,  and  their  eyes  are  blue, 
and  they  look  honest,  and  have  not  that  air  of  pride  and 
arrogance  which  the  Spaniard  never  lays  aside.  I  have  a 
boy  here."  And  as  she  spoke  an  Indian  boy  of  some  thir- 
teen years  of  age  slipped  out  from  behind  her.  "He  will 
show  them  to  the  refuge-places  of  the  last  of  my  race. 
There  they  will  be  well  received,  for  I  have  sent  by  him  a 
message  to  their  chiefs,  and  it  may  be  that  these  lads, 
knowing  the  ways  of  white  warfare,  will  be  able  to  assist 
my  countrymen,  and  to  enable  them  to  resist  these  dogs  of 
Spaniards.  The  blessing  of  an  old  woman  be  upon  you. 
I  have  seen  many  changes.  I  have  seen  my  people  pos- 
sessors of  this  island,  save  a  small  settlement  which  they 
had  even  then  the  folly  to  allow  the  Spaniards  to  possess. 
I  have  seen  them  swept  away  by  the  oppressor;  my  hus- 
band tortured  and  killed,  my  brothers  burned  alive;  all 
that  I  loved  slain  by  the  Spaniards.  Now,  it  does  my  old 
eyes  good  to  see  two  of  the  race  who  will  in  the  future 
drive  those  dogs  from  these  fair  lands  as  they  have  driven 
my  people." 

So  saying,  she  returned  into  the  hut. 

The  boy  prepared  at  once  to  start,  and  the  lads,  wring- 
ing the  hand  of  the  black  who  had  been  so  kind  to  them, 
at  once  followed  their  guide  into  the  darkness.  For  some 
hours  they  walked  without  intermission,  sometimes  going 
at  a  sling  trot  and  then  easing  down  again.  Dark  as  was 
the  night  their  guide  trod  the  paths  without  hesitation  or 
pause.  The  boys  could  scarce  see  the  ground  upon  which 
they  trod,  but  the  eyes  of  the  native  were  keener  than 
theirs,  and  to  him  the  way  seemed  as  clear  as  in  broad 
daylight. 

After  traversing  for  some  miles  a  flat  level  country  they 
began  to  mount,  and  for  about  two  hours  ascended  a 
mountain  thickly  covered  with  forest.  Then  the  guide 
stopped  and  motioned  to  them  that  he  could  now  go  no 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  83 

further,  and  must  rest  for  the  present.  The  boys  were 
surprised  at  this  sudden  stop,  for  their  guide  had  gone 
along  so  quickly  and  easily  that  he  taxed  to  the  utmost 
their  powers  of  progression,  while  he  himself  never  breathed 
any  harder  than  when  walking  upon  the  level  ground. 
They  had,  however,  no  means  of  interrogating  him,  for  he 
spoke  no  language  which  they  understood.  Without  a 
word  the  lad  threw  himself  down  at  full  length,  an  exam- 
ple which  they  followed  without  hesitation. 
"I  wonder,"  Ned  said,  "why  he  stopped." 
"Because  he  is  tired,  I  expect,"  Gerald  replied,  "or  that 
he  does  not  know  the  exact  spot  upon  which  he  is  likely  to 
meet  the  band,  and  that  he  has  taken  us  so  far  along  the 
one  pafch  which  was  certain  to  lead  in  the  right  direction, 
but  for  the  precise  spot  he  must  wait  till  morning." 

It  was  not  many  minutes  before  the  three  lads  were  fast 
asleep,  but  with  the  first  gleam  of  daylight  the  Indian  boy 
awoke.  Touching  his  companions  he  sprang  to  his  feet, 
and  without  hesitation  turned  off  to  the  right,  and  climbed 
an  even  steeper  path  than  any  which  they  had  followed  in 
the  darkness.  The  trees  grew  thinner  as  they  advanced, 
and  they  were  soon  climbing  over  bare  rock.  They  saw 
now  that  they  were  near  the  extreme  summit  of  one  of  the 
hills.  The  boy,  as  they  passed  through  the  trees,  had 
gathered  some  dry  sticks  and  a  handful  or  two  of  green 
leaves.  Upon  reaching  the  top  he  placed  these  down  upon 
the  ground  and  looked  toward  the  east.  The  sun  would 
not  be  up  for  another  half  hour  yet.  The  boy  at  once 
began  with  steady  earnestness  to  rub  two  pieces  of  stick 
together,  according  to  their  way  of  kindling  a  fire.  It  was 
a  quarter  of  an  hour  before  the  sparks  began  to  drop  from 
the  wood;  these,  with  some  very  dry  leaves  and  tiny  chips 
of  wood,  the  Indian  boy  rapidly  blew  into  life,  and  then 
with  a  very  small  fire  of  dry  wood  he  sat  patiently  watch- 
ing the  east.  At  the  moment  that  the  sun  showed  above 


84  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

the  sea,  he  placed  the  little  fire  in  the  heart  of  the  pile  of 
wood  which  he  had  collected,  threw  the  green  leaves  upon 
it,  and  blew  vigorously  until  the  whole  caught  fire,  and  a 
wreath  of  smoke  ascended  above  them.  For  five  minutes 
only  he  allowed  the  fire  to  burn,  and  then  at  once  extin- 
guished it  carefully,  knocking  the  fire  from  each  individual 
brand.  When  the  last  curl  of  white  smoke  had  ceased  to 
ascend  he  stood  up  and  eagerly  looked  round  the  country. 

It  was  a  glorious  view.  On  the  one  hand  the  wood-clad 
hills  sloped  to  the  foot  of  the  plain,  covered  with  planta- 
tions, dotted  here  and  there  with  the  villages  of  the  slaves 
and  the  white  houses  of  the  overseers.  At  a  distance  could 
be  faintly  seen  the  towers  of  a  city,  while  beyond,  the  sea 
stretched  like  a  blue  wall,  far  as  the  eye  could  see.  Inland 
the  country  was  broken  and  mountainous,  the  hills  being 
in  all  cases  thickly  covered  with  trees.  From  two  points 
in  the  heart  of  these  hills  white  smoke  curled  up  as  soon 
as  the  smoke  of  their  fire  died  away.  These,  too,  in  a  short 
time  also  ceased  to  rise,  and  the  boys  knew  that  they  were 
signal -fires  in  response  to  that  which  their  guide  had  made. 
The  boy  hesitated  for  a  minute  or  two  as  to  the  direction 
which  he  should  take. 

As,  however,  one  of  the  fires  appeared  a  good  deal  nearer 
than  the  other,  this  probably  decided  him  in  its  favor,  and 
he  started  in  a  straight  line  toward  the  spot  where  the 
smoke  had  curled  up.  Another  two  hours'  walking  and 
they  entered  an  open  glade,  where  ten  or  twelve  natives 
and  two  or  three  negroes  were  gathered.  They  were 
greatly  surprised  at  seeing  two  white  men,  but  the  presence 
of  the  native  guide  apparently  vouched  for  these  visitors, 
and  although  one  or  two  of  the  men  sprang  up  and  at  a  rapid 
pace  proceeded  in  the  direction  from  which  the  newcomers 
had  arrived,  the  rest  simply  rose  to  their  feet,  and,  grasp- 
ing the  spears,  bows  and  arrows,  and  clubs  which  they 
carried,  waited  silently  to  hear  what  the  Indian  boy  had 
to  tell  them. 


UNDER  DRAKE* 8  FLAG,  S5 

He  poured  forth  an  animated  strain  of  words  for  a  few 
minutes,  and  the  faces  of  the  Indians  lit  up  with  pleasure. 
*The  one  among  them  who  appeared  to  be  the  chief  of  the 
party  advanced  at  once  to  the  boys  and  made  every  sign  of 
welcome.  One  of  the  negroes  also  approached,  and  in 
broken  Spanish  asked  them  if  they  could  speak  in  that 
language.  The  boys  were  able  now  to  reply  in  the  affirm- 
ative, and  quickly  supplemented  the  account  of  them 
which  had  been  given  by  their  guide,  by  their  own  descrip- 
tion of  the  manner  of  their  coming  there. 

The  negro,  after  explaining  to  the  rest  what  the  boys 
had  said,  then  assured  them  in  the  name  of  the  chief  that 
every  welcome  was  theirs,  and  that  they  hailed  among 
them  as  a  happy  incident  the  arrival  of  two  of  the  famous 
race  who  were  the  deadly  enemies  of  the  Spaniards. 

The  boys  on  their  part  assured  them  that  they  would 
endeavor  to  repay  the  hospitality  with  which  they  were 
received,  by  their  assistance  should  the  Spaniards  make 
any  attacks  upon  the  tribe  during  the  time  they  were 
there,  that  the  English  everywhere  were  the  friends  of 
those  who  were  oppressed  by  the  Spaniards,  and  that  their 
countrymen  were  moved  with  horror  and  indignation  at 
the  accounts  which  had  reached  them  of  the  diabolical 
treatment  to  which  the  Indians  were  exposed. 

The  party  now  pressed  still  further  into  the  forest,  and 
turning  up  a  ravine  followed  its  windings  for  some  distance, 
and  then  passing  through  an  exceedingly  narrow  gorge 
reached  a  charming  little  valley  in  which  were  some  rough 
huts,  showing  that  the  residence  of  at  least  a  portion  of 
the  runaways  had  been  reached. 

Here  for  some  time  life  passed  uneventfully  with  the 
boys.  Their  first  care  was  to  study  sufficient  of  the  lan- 
guage of  the  natives  to  enable  them  to  hold  converse  with 
them,  for  it  was  clear  to  them  that  they  might  have  to 
stop  there  for  some  considerable  time.  Their  food  con- 


86  TTNDE&  DHAK&S  FLAG. 

sisted  of  roots,  of  wild  fruit,  and  of  yams,  which  the 
natives  cultivated  fa  small  scattered  plots  of  ground. 
Many  birds,  too,  were  brought  in,  the  natives  bringing^ 
them  down  with  small  darts.  They  were  able  to  throw 
their  light  spears  with  extreme  precision  and  often  pierced 
the  larger  kinds  of  birds,  as  they  sat  upon  the  boughs  of 
trees,  with  these  weapons  before  they  could  open  their 
wings  for  flight.  With  bows  and  arrows,  too,  they  were 
able  to  shoot  with  great  accuracy,  and  the  boys  felt  sure 
that  if  properly  led,  they  wonld  be  able  to  make  a  stoat 
resistance  to  the  Spaniards. 

They  heard  several  times  during  the  first  three  weeks  of 
their  sojourn  there,  of  raids  made  by  small  parties  of  the 
Spaniards,  but  in  none  of  these  cases  were  the  searchers 
successful  in  finding  traces  of  the  fugitive  slaves,  nor  did 
they  come  into  the  part  of  the  wood  in  which  was  the  vil- 
lage which  served  as  headquarters  of  the  negroes.  At  the 
end  of  three  weeks  the  boys  accompanied  a  party  of  their 
friends  to  other  points  at  which  the  fugitives  were  gathered. 
Altogether  they  found  that  in  that  part  of  the  island  there 
were  some  hundreds  of  natives,  with  about  forty  or  fifty 
runaway  negroes.  Through  the  latter  the  boys  explained 
to  the  natives  that  they  ought  to  build  strong  places  to 
which,  in  case  of  necessity,  they  could  retreat,  and  where 
they  could  olfer  a  desperate  resistance  to  the  enemy.  The 
extreme  roughness  of  the  ground,  the  deep  ravines  and 
precipices,  were  all  favorable  for  defense,  and  although; 
they  could  not  hope  to  make  a  permanent  resistance  to  a 
large  armed  force,  yet  they  might  easily  resist  small  parties 
and  then  make  good  their  retreat  before  large  reinforce- 
ments could  arrive.  The  negroes  expressed  their  approval 
of  the  plans,  but  the  Indians  shook  their  heads  over  the 


,/""  These  men  have  no  courage,"  the  blacks  said  to  the 
boys;  "their  heart  is  broken;  they  fly  at  the  sound  of  a 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  87 

Spaniard's  voice.  What  good  do  you  expect  from  them? 
But  if  the  Spaniards  come,  we  fight.  Our  people  are  brave 
and  we  do  not  fear  death.  If  the  Spaniards  come  we  fight 
with  yon,  and  die  rather  than  be  taken  back  as  slaves." 

One  morning,  on  rising,  the  boys  heard  some  exclama- 
tions among  their  allies. 

"What  is  it?"  they  asked.  The  negroes  pointed  to 
films  of  smoke  rising  from  the  summits  of  two  hills  at  a 
short  distance  from  each  other. 

"What  is  that  a  sign  of?"  they  asked. 

"  It  is  a  sign  that  the  Spaniards  are  coming.  No  doubt 
in  pursuit  of  a  runaway;  perhaps  with  those  terrible  dogs. 
The  Spaniards  could  do  nothing  among  these  mountains 
without  them.  They  follow  their  game  through  the 
thickest  woods." 

"But,"  said  Ned,  "why  on  earth  do  not  the  negroes 
take  to  the  trees?  Surely  there  could  be  no  difficulty  in 
getting  from  tree  to  tree  by  the  branches  for  a  certain  dis- 
tance so  as  to  throw  the  hounds  off  the  scent." 

"Many  do  escape  in  that  way,"  the  uegro  said;  "but 
the  pursuit  is  often  so  hot,  and  the  dogs  so  close  upon  the 
trail,  that  there  is  little  time  for  maneuvers  of  this  sort, 
beside  which,  many  of  the  fugitives  are  half  mad  with 
fear.  I  know  myself  that  the  baying  of  those  horrible 
dogs  seems  to  freeze  the  blood,  and  in  my  case  I  only 
escaped  by  luckily  striking  a  rivulet.  Then  my  hopes 
rose  again,  and  after  following  it  for  a  time  I  had  the 
happy  thought  of  climbing  into  a  tree  which  overhung  it, 
and  then  dropping  down  at  some  little  distance  off,  and  so 
completely  throwing  the  dogs  off  the  trail." 

"Why  do  they  not  shoot  the  dogs?"  Ned  asked;  "I  do 
not  mean  the  men  whom  they  are  scenting,  but  their 
friends." 

"We  might  shoot  them,"  the  negro  said,  "if  they  were 
allowed  to  run  free,  but  here  in  the  woods  they  are  usually 


88  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

kept  on  the  chain,  so  that  their  masters  are  close  to  them. 
Listen,"  he  said,  "do  yon  not  hear  the  distant  baying?" 

Listening  attentively,  however,  the  boys  could  hear 
nothing;  their  ears  were  not  trained  so  well  as  that  of  the 
negro,  and  it  was  some  minutes  before  they  heard  a  distant 
faint  sound  of  the  deep  bark  of  a  dog.  A  few  minutes 
later  a  negro,  panting  for  breath,  bathed  in  perspiration, 
and  completely  exhausted,  staggered  into  the  glade  where 
they  were  standing;  the  other  negroes  gave  a  slight  cry  of 
alarm  at  the  proximity  of  so  dangerous  a  comrade. 

"Save  me,"  the  man  cried,  "I  am  pursued." 

"How  many  men  are  after  you?"  Ned  asked. 

The  negro  started  in  astonishment  at  seeing  a  white  face 
and  being  questioned  in  Spanish.  Seeing,  however,  that 
his  comrades  were  on  good  terms  with  his  questioner,  he 
answered  at  once,  "There  are  some  twenty  of  them,  with 
two  dogs." 

"  Let  us  give  them  a  sharp  lesson,"  Ned  said  to  the 
negroes  standing  round.  "We  have  made  preparations, 
and  it  is  time  that  we  began  to  show  our  teeth.  If  they 
find  that  they  cannot  come  with  impunity  into  our  woods 
they  will  not  be  so  anxious  to  pursue  single  men,  and  will 
leave  us  alone,  except  they  bring  all  the  force  of  the  island 
against  us." 

The  negroes  looked  doubtful  as  to  the  wisdom  of  taking 
the  initiative,  so  great  was  their  fear  of  the  Spaniards. 
However,  the  cheerfulness  with  which  the  two  English 
boys  proposed  resistance  animated  them,  and  with  sharp 
whistles  they  called  the  whole  of  their  comrades  to  the 
place. 

Ned  briefly  explained  their  intentions.  "There  is  no 
time  to  be  lost;  we  must  take  our  places  on  the  upper 
ground  of  that  narrow  valley,  and  tell  the  man  to  run 
straight  through;  we  have  plenty  of  stones  piled  there, 
and  may  give  the  Spaniards  a  warmer  reception  than  they 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  89 

expect.  We  could  not  have  a  better  opportunity,  for  with 
such  small  numbers  as  they  have,  they  certainly  would  not 
be  able  to  attack  us  with  any  hope  of  success  up  so  steep  a 
hillside. 

The  valley  which  Ned  indicated  was  not  one  of  those 
which  led  in  the  direction  of  their  stronghold,  but  it  was 
a  very  steep  gorge  which  they  had  remarked  as  being  par- 
ticularly well  fitted  for  checking  a  pursuing  party,  and  for 
that  end  had  prepared  piles  of  stones  on  the  upper  heights. 
The  negroes,  taking  with  them  the  sharpened  poles  which 
they  used  as  spears,  and  their  bows  and  arrows,  started 
under  Ned  and  Gerald  to  the  indicated  spot.  Gerald  had 
arranged  to  go  with  a  party  to  one  side  of  the  gorge,  Ned 
to  the  other,  but  they  decided  that  it  was  better  that  they 
should  keep  together,  the  more  to  encourage  the  natives, 
and  while  a  few  negroes  were  sent  to  one  side  of  the  gorge, 
the  main  body  under  the  two  English  lads  kept  together 
on  the  other. 

The  fugitive  had  already  gone  ahead  with  one  of  the 
negroes  to  show  him  the  way. 

Scarcely  had  they  taken  their  places  at  the  top  of  the 
gorge  when  the  baying  of  the  hounds,  which  had  been  in- 
creasing every  minute  in  volume,  became  so  loud  that  the 
Spaniards  were  clearly  close  at  hand.  In  another  three  or 
four  minutes  there  issued  from  the  wood  a  party  of  some 
twenty  men,  leading  two  dogs  by  chains.  The  creatures 
struggled  to  get  forward,  and  their  eyes  seemed  almost 
starting  out  of  their  heads  with  their  eagerness  to  reach 
the  object  of  their  pursuit.  Their  speed  was,  however, 
moderated  by  the  fact  that  the  band,  who  were  all  on 
horseback,  had  to  pick  their  way  through  the  great  boul- 
ders. The  wood  itself  was  difficult  for  horsemen,  but 
here  and  there  were  spaces,  and  they  had  been  able  to  ride 
at  a  fair  pace.  On  entering  the  mouth  of  the  gorge,  how- 
ever, they  were  obliged  to  fall  into  an  order  of  two  abreast, 


90  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

and  sometimes  even  to  go  in  Indian  file.  Huge  boulders 
strewed  the  bottom  of  the  chasm,  where  indeed  a  stream 
in  winter  poured  through.  The  sides  were  by  no  means 
perpendicular,  but  were  exceedingly  precipitous.  When 
the  Spaniards  had  fairly  got  into  the  gorge  Ned  gave  the 
signal,  and  a  shower  of  great  stones  came  leaping  down 
the  sides  of  the  rocks  upon  the  astonished  foes.  Several 
were  struck  from  their  horses;  many  of  the  horses  them- 
selves were  knocked  down,  and  a  scene  of  confusion  at 
once  took  place.  The  Spaniards,  however,  were  accus- 
tomed to  fighting,  and  the  person  in  command  giving  a 
few  orders,  led  ten  of  his  men  up  the  rocks  upon  the  side 
where  the  assailants  were  in  strongest  force,  while  the  rest 
of  the  party  seizing  the  horses'  heads,  drov«  the  frightened 
animals  back  through  the  ravine  to  the  mouth.  The  in- 
stant that  the  Spaniards  commenced  their  ascent  long 
habits  of  fear  told  upon  some  of  the  slaves,  and  these  took 
to  their  heels  at  once.  Many  others  stood  more  firmly, 
but  were  evidently  wavering.  Ned  and  Gerald,  however, 
kept  them  at  work  hurling  stones  down,  and  more  than 
one  of  the  Spaniards  was  carried  off  his  feet  by  these  mis- 
siles; still  they  bravely  ascended ;  then  Ned  taking  a  delib- 
erate aim  with  his  pistol  brought  down  one  of  the  leaders, 
and  this  greatly  surprised  and  checked  the  advance.  The 
pistol  shot  was  followed  by  that  of  Gerald,  and  the  Span- 
iards wavered  at  this  unexpected  addition  to  the  forces  of 
the  natives.  Then  Ned  in  English  shouted: 

"Now,  my  brave  Britons,  show  these  Spaniards  yon  can 
fight  as  well  on  land  as  at  sea." 

The  words  were  probably  not  understood  by  any  of  the 
Spaniards,  but  they  knew  that  the  language  was  not  Span- 
ish or  Indian,  and  the  thought  that  a  number  of  English 
Were  there  completely  paralyzed  them.  They  hesitated 
and  then  began  slowly  to  fall  back.  This  was  all  that  was 
needed  to  encourage  the  negroes.  With  a  shout  these  now 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  9] 

advanced  to  the  attack,  shooting  their  arrows  and  hurling 
stones,  and  the  retreat  of  the  enemy  was  rapidly  converted 
into  a  flight.  Their  blood  once  thoroughly  np,  the  negroes 
were  ready  for  anything.  Throwing  aside  their  bows  and 
arrows  they  charged  upon  the  Spaniards,  and,  in  spite  of 
the  superior  arms  and  gallant  defense  of  the  latter,  many 
of  them  were  beaten  down  and  killed  by  the  heavy  clubs 
and  pointed  staves  of  the  negroes;  more,  indeed,  would 
have  perished,  and  indeed  all  might  have  fallen,  had  not 
at  this  moment  a  formidable  reinforcement  of  strength 
reached  them.  The  men  from  below  having  got  the  horses 
fairly  out  of  the  gorge  left  but  two  of  their  number  with 
them  and  advanced  to  the  assistance  of  their  friends, 
bringing  with  them  the  two  bloodhounds. 

"Never  fear  the  hounds,"  Ned  shouted;  "we  can  beat 
them  to  death  as  easily  as  if  they  were  pigs.  Keep  a  bold 
front  and  attack  them,  and  I  warrant  you  they  are  no 
more  formidable  than  their  masters." 

Had  these  reinforcements  arrived  earlier  they  might 
have  changed  the  fight,  but  the  Spaniards  who  survived 
were  anxious  only  to  be  off,  and  the  negroes'  blood  was  so 
thoroughly  up,  that  under  the  leadership  of  the  boys  they 
were  prepared  to  face  even  these  terrible  dogs.  These 
threw  themselves  into  the  fray  with  all  the  ferocity  of 
their  savage  nature.  Springing  at  the  throats  of  two  of  the 
negroes,  they  brought  them  to  the  ground.  One  of  the  dogs 
was  instantly  disposed  of  by  Gerald,  who,  placing  his  pistol 
to  its  ear,  blew  out  its  brains.  Ned  fell  upon  the  other 
with  his  sword,  and  the  negroes  joining  him  speedily  beat 
it  down  and  slew  it.  The  diversion,  however,  had  enabled 
the  Spaniards  to  get  upon  their  horses,  and  they  now  gal- 
loped oif  at  full  speed  among  the  trees* 


92  UNDER  DRAKE  '8  FLA  Q. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

AN   ATTACK   IN   FORCE. 

THE  negroes  were  delighted  at  the  success  of  the  con- 
flict, as  were  the  Indians  who  soon  joined  them.  But  ten 
of  the  Spaniards  had  escaped,  the  rest  having  fallen  either 
in  the  gorge,  killed  by  the  rocks,  or  in  the  subsequent 
fight.  Ned  and  Gerald,  who  were  now  looked  upon  as  the 
leaders  of  the  party,  told  the  negroes  to  collect  the  arms  of 
the  fallen  men,  and  to  give  a  hasty  burial  to  their  bodies. 
The  boys  knew  too  well  the  savage  nature  of  the  war  which 
raged  between  the  black  and  the  white  to  ask  whether  any 
of  the  Spaniards  were  only  wounded.  They  knew  that  an 
instant  death  had  awaited  all  who  fell  into  the  hands  of 
their  late  slaves. 

"Now,"  Ned  said,  "my  friends,  you  must  not  suppose 
that  your  fighting  is  over.  The  Spaniards  will  take  the 
news  back  to  the  town,  and  it  is  likely  enough  that  we 
shall  have  a  large  force  upon  us  in  the  course  of  a  feyv 
days.  I  do  not  suspect  that  they  will  come  before  that 
time;  indeed  it  may  be  far  longer,  for  they  know  that  it 
will  require  a  very  large  force  to  search  these  woods,  and 
that  now  our  blood  is  up  it  will  be  no  trifle  to  overcome  us 
in  our  stronghold.  If  we  are  to  succeed  at  last,  labor,  dis- 
cipline, and  courage  will  all  be  required." 

The  negroes  now  besought  the  boys  formally  to  take  the 
command,  and  promised  to  obey  their  orders  implicitly. 

"Well,"  Ned  said,  "if  you  promise  this  we  will  lead  you, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  93 

My  friend  is  older  than  I,  and  he  shall  be  captain  and  I 
will  be  first  lieutenant." 

"No,  no,"  Gerald  said;  "this  must  not  be,  Ned;  I  am 
the  oldest,  it  is  true,  by  a  few  months,  but  you  are  far 
more  active  and  quick  than  I,  and  you  have  been  the  leader 
ever  since  we  left  the  ship;  I  certainly  will  not  take  the 
command  from  you." 

"Well,  we  will  be  joint-generals,"  Ned  said,  laughing, 
"and  I  do  not  think  that  our  orders  will  clash." 

He  then  explained  to  the  negroes  and  natives  the  course 
which  he  thought  that  they  ought  to  pursue.  First,  every 
point  at  which  the  enemy  could  be  harassed  should  be 
provided  with  missiles.  In  the  second  place,  all  signs  of 
footsteps  and  paths  leading  to  their  accustomed  dwelling- 
places  should  be  obliterated;  thirdly,  they  should  fight  as 
little  as  possible,  it  being  their  object  to  fight  when  pur- 
sued and  interfered  with  by  small  parties  of  Spaniards, 
but  to  avoid  conflicts  with  large  bodies. 

"Our  object,"  he  said,  "is  to  live  free  and  unmolested 
here;  and  if  the  Spanish  find  that  when  they  come  in 
large  numbers  they  cannot  overtake  us,  and  that  when 
they  corne  in  small  ones  they  are  defeated  with  loss,  they 
will  take  to  leaving  us  alone." 

All  agreed  to  this  policy,  and  it  was  arranged  that  the 
women,  children,  and  most  feeble  of  the  natives  should 
retire  to  almost  inaccessible  hiding-places  far  in  the  moun- 
tains, and  that  the  more  active  spirits  with  the  negroes, 
and  divided  into  five  or  six  bands  acting  to  some  extent 
independently  of  each  other  but  yet  in  accordance  with  a 
general  plan,  should  remain  to  oppose  the  passage  of  the 
enemy. 

This,  their  first  success  over  the  Spaniards,  caused  a 
wild  exultation  among  the  negroes  and  natives,  and  Ned 
and  Gerald  were  viewed  as  heroes.  The  lads  took  advan- 
tage of  their  popularity  to  impress  upon  the  negroes  the. 


94  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  \ 

necessity  of  organizing  themselves  and  undergoing  certain 
drill  and  discipline;  without  it,  as  they  told  them,  although 
occasionally  they  might  succeed  in  driving  back  the  Span- 
iards, yet  in  the  long  run  they  must  be  defeated.  It  was 
only  by  fighting  with  regularity  like  trained  soldiers  that 
they  would  make  themselves  respected  by  the  Spaniards, 
and  the  latter,  instead  of  viewing  them  as  wild  beasts  to 
be  hunted,  would  regard  them  with  respect. 

The  negroes,  fresh  from  a  success  gained  by  irregular 
means,  were  at  first  loath  to  undertake  the  trouble  and 
pains  which  the  boys  desired,  but  the  latter  pointed  out 
that  it  was  not  always  that  the  enemy  were  to  be  caught 
napping,  and  that  after  such  a  check  as  had  been  put  upon 
them  the  Spaniards  would  be  sure  to  come  in  greater 
numbers,  and  to  be  far  more  cautious  how  they  trusted 
themselves  into  places  where  they  might  be  caught  in  a 
trap.  The  weapons  thrown  away  or  left  upon  the  ground 
by  the  Spaniards  were  divided  among  the  negroes,  and 
these  and  the  natives  were  now  formed  into  companies, 
natives  and  negroes  being  mixed  in  each  company,  so  that 
the  latter  might  animate  the  former  by  their  example. 
Four  companies  of  forty  men  each  were  formed,  and  for 
the  next  fortnight  incessant  drill  went  on,  by  which  time 
the  forest  fugitives  began  to  have  a  fair  notion  of  the  rudi- 
mentary elements  of  drill.  When  the  boys  were  not 
engaged  upon  this,  in  company  with  one  of  the  native  . 
chiefs  they  examined  the  mountains,  and  at  last  fixed  « 
upon  a  place  which  should  serve  as  the  last  stronghold, 
should  they  be  driven  to  bay  by  the  enemy. 

It  was  three  weeks  before  there  were  any  signs  of  the 
Spaniards.  At  the  end  of  that  time  a  great  smoke  rising 
from  the  signal-hill  proclaimed  that  a  large  body  of  the 
enemy  were  approaching  the  forest.  This  was  expected, 
for  two  days  before  three  negro  runaways  had  taken  shelter 
with  them,  The  negroes  hud  beeu  armed  with  long  pikes 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  95 

of  tough  wood  sharpened  in  the  fire  and  capable  of  inflict- 
ing fully  as  deadly  a  wound  as  those  carried  by  the  Span- 
iards. Each  carried  a  club,  the  leaders  being  armed  with 
the  swords  taken  from  the  Spaniards,  while  there  were  also 
eight  arquebuses  which  had  been  gained  from  the  same 
source.  All  the  natives  bore  bows  and  arrows,  with  which 
they  were  able  to  shoot  with  great  accuracy.  The  negroes 
were  not  skilled  with  these  weapons,  but  were  more  useful 
from  their  greater  strength  for  hurling  down  rocks  and 
missiles  upon  the  Spaniards  when  below.  A  consultation 
had  been  previously  held  as  to  the  course  to  be  taken  in 
case  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy.  It  was  determined  as 
far  as  possible  to  avoid  fighting,  to  allow  the  Spaniards  to 
tramp  from  place  to  place,  and  then  to  harass  them  by 
falling  upon  them  in  the  night,  disturbing  their  sleep, 
cutting  down  sentries,  and  harassing  them  until  they  were 
forced  by  pure  exhaustion  to  leave  the  forest. 

These  tactics  were  admirably  adapted  to  the  nature  of 
the  contest,  the  only  thing  which  threatened  to  render 
them  nugatory  was  the  presence  of  the  fierce  dogs  of  the 
Spaniards.  Preparations  had  already  been  made  for  check- 
ing the  bloodhounds  in  pursuit  of  fugitive  slaves.  In  a 
narrow  place  in  one  of  the  valleys  at  the  entrance  of  the 
forest  a  somewhat  heavy  gallery  had  been  erected;  this 
was  made  of  wood  heaped  with  great  stones,  and  was  so 
arranged  that  any  animal  running  through  it  would  push 
aside  a  stick  which  acted  as  a  trigger,  this  would  release  a 
lever,  and  the  heavy  logs  above  would  fall,  crushing  to 
death  anything  beneath  it.  A  lookout  was  always  placed 
to  intercept  any  fugitive  slaves  who  might  enter  the  forest 
and  to  guide  them  through  this  trap,  which  was,  of  course, 
not  set  until  after  they  had  passed.  This  had  been  done 
in  the  case  of  the  two  negroes  who  had  arrived  the  previous 
day,  and  the  boys  felt  that  any  pursuit  of  them  by  blood- 
hounds would  at  once  be  cut  short  and  the  Spaniards  left 


00  UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG. 

to  their  own  devices.  This  anticipation  proved  correct; 
the  scouts  reported  that  they  could  hear  in  the  distance 
the  having  of  dogs,  and  that  undoubtedly  the  enemy  were 
proceeding  on  the  track  of  the  slaves. 

The  four  companies  were  each  told  off  to  positions  con- 
iderably  apart  from  each  other,  while  Ned  and  Gerald, 
>vith  the  cacique  or  chief  of  the  Indians,  one  negro,  and 
four  or  five  fleet-footed  young  men,  remained  to  watch  the 
success  of  the  trap.  This  was  all  that  they  had  hoped; 
the  Spaniards  were  seen  coming  up  the  glade,  a  troop  two 
hundred  strong.  The  leaders  were  on  horseback,  some 
fifteen  in  number,  and  after  them  marched  the  pikemen 
in  steady  array,  having  men  moving  at  a  distance  on  each 
flank  to  prevent  surprise. 

"This,"  said  JSfed,  "is  a  regular  military  enterprise. 
The  last  was  a  mere  pursuing  party  gathered  at  random. 
It  will  not  be  so  easy  to  deal  with  cautious  men  like  these." 

Three  hounds  ran  ahead  of  the  leaders  with  their  noses 
on  the  ground,  giving  now  and  then  the  deep  bay  peculiar 
to  their  kind.  They  reached  the  trap,  and  rushed  into 
the  gallery,  which  was  some  twelve  feet  in  length  and  of 
sufficient  height  to  enable  a  man  on  foot  to  march  through. 

The  leaders  on  seeing  the  trap  drew  in  their  horses  in 
doubt  what  this  structure  could  mean,  and  shouted  to  the 
hounds  to  stop;  but  the  latter  having  the  scent  strong  in 
their  nostrils  ran  on  without  pausing.  As  the  last  hound 
disappeared  in  the  gallery  a  crash  was  heard,  and  the 
whole  erection  collapsed,  crushing  the  hounds  beneath  it. 

A  cry  of  consternation  and  surprise  burst  from  the 
Spaniards.  The  artifice  was  a  new  one,  and  showed  that 
the  fugitives  were  assisted  by  men  with  intellect  far  in  ad- 
vance of  their  own.  The  pursuit  was  summarily  checked, 
for  the  guides  of  the  Spaniards  were  now  gone.  The 
enemy  paused,  and  a  consultation  took  place  among  the 
leaders.  It  was  apparently  determined  to  pursue  their 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  97 

way  alone,  taking  every  precaution  in  hopes  that  the  natives 
would  attack  them  as  they  had  done  the  previous  expedi- 
tion, when  they  hoped  to  inflict  a  decisive  blow  upon  them. 
That  they  would  themselves  be  able  to  find  the  runaway 
negroes  in  the  forest  they  had  but  small  hope,  but  they 
thought  it  possible  that  these  would  again  take  the  initia- 
tive. 

First,  under  the  guidance  of  one  who  had  evidently  been 
in  the  last  expedition,  they  took  their  way  to  the  valley 
where  the  fight  had  taken  place.  Here  all  was  still.  There 
were  no  signs  of  their  foes;  they  found  in  the  gorge  a  great 
cairn  of  stones  with  a  wooden  cross  placed  over  it,  and  the 
words  in  Spanish  cut  upon  it: 

"Here  lie  the  bodies  of  ten  Spaniards  who  sought  to 
attack  harmless  men  in  these  woods;  let  their  fate  be  a 
lesson  to  those  who  may  follow  their  example." 

This  inscription  caused  great  surprise  among  the  Span- 
iards, who  gathered  round  the  mound  and  conversed  earn- 
estly upon  it,  looking  round  at  the  deep  and  silent  woods, 
which  might,  for  aught  they  knew,  contain  foes  who  had 
proved  themselves  formidable. 

It  was  evident  that  the  soldiers,  brave  as  they  were,  yet 
felt  misgivings  as  to  the  task  upon  which  they  had  entered. 
They  knew  that  two  Englishmen,  a  portion  of  the  body 
which  under  Drake  had  rendered  themselves  so  feared, 
were  leaders  of  these  men,  and  so  great  was  the  respect  in 
which  the  English  were  at  that  time  held,  that  this  alone 
vastly  added  to  the  difficulties  and  dangers  which  the 
Spaniards  saw  awaiting  them.  However,  after  a  few  min- 
utes' consultation  the  party  moved  forward.  It  was  now 
formed  in  two  bodies  about  equally  strong,  one  going  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  ahead,  the  other  following  it. 

"What  have  these  men  divided  their  forces  for?"  the 
negro  asked  Ned. 

"It  seems  to  me,"  he  answered,  "that  they  hope  we 


98  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

shall  fall  upon  the  first  body  thinking  that  there  are  no 
more  behind,  and  that  the  others,  coming  np  in  the  midst 
of  the  fight,  will  take  us  by  surprise;  however,  we  will  let 
them  march.  Send  word  to  the  company,  which  lies 
somewhat  in  the  line  which  they  have  taken,  of  their  ap- 
proach, and  let  them  at  once  retire.  Tell  them  to  make 
circuits  in  the  hills,  but  to  leave  behind  them  sufficient 
traces  for  the  Spaniards  to  follow.  This  will  encourage 
them  to  keep  on,  and  by  nightfall  they  will  be  thoroughly 
tired  out.  Whenever  they  get  in  valleys  or  other  places 
where  advantages  may  be  taken  of  them,  two  of  the  com- 
panies shall  accompany  them  at  a  good  distance  on  their 
flanks,  and  pour  in  volleys  of  arrows  or  roll  stones  down 
upon  them.  I  will  take  command  of  one  of  these  com- 
panies, Gerald  of  the  other.  Do  you,"  he  said  to  the 
negro,  "follow  with  the  last.  Keep  out  of  their  reach, 
but  occasionally  after  they  have  passed  fire  arrows  among 
the  rear-guard.  Do  yon,  cacique,  make  your  way  to  the 
leading  column.  See  that  they  choose  the  most  difficult 
gorges,  and  give  as  far  as  possible  the  appearance  of  hurry 
to  their  flight,  so  as  to  encourage  the  Spaniards  to  follow." 

These  tactics  were  faithfully  carried  out.  All  day  the 
Spaniards  followed,  as  they  believed,  close  upon  the  foot- 
steps of  the  flying  foe,  but  from  time  to  time  from  strong 
advantage  spots  arrows  were  rained  upon  them,  great  rocks 
thundered  down,  and  wild  yells  rang  through  the  forest. 
Before,  however,  they  could  ascend  the  slopes  and  get 
hand  to  hand  with  their  enemy  these  had  retreated,  and 
all  was  silent  as  the  grave  in  the  woods. 

Perplexed,  harassed,  and  somewhat  awe-struck  by  these 
new  and  inexplicable  tactics,  and  having  lost  many  men 
by  the  arrows  and  stones  of  the  enemy,  the  two  troops 
gathered  at  nightfall  in  an  open  glade.  Here  a  bivouac 
was  formed,  branches  of  the  trees  cut  down,  and  the  pro- 
visions which  each  had  brought  with  him  produced.  A 


UXDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  99 

rivulet  ran  throngli  the  glade,  and  the  weary  troops  were 
soon  lying  on  the  grass,  a  strong  line  of  sentries  having 
been  placed  round.  Already  the  appearance  of  the  troop 
was  greatly  changed  from  that  of  the  body  which  had  en- 
tered the  wood.  Then  all  were  eager  for  the  fray,  confi- 
dent in  the  extreme  of  their  power  to  crush  with  ease  these 
unarmed  negroes  and  natives,  who  had  hitherto,  except  on 
the  last  occasion,  fled  like  hunted  deer  at  their  approach. 

Now,  however,  this  feeling  was  checked.  They  had 
learned  that  the  enemy  were  well  commanded  and  prepared, 
and  that  so  far  while  they  themselves  had  lost  several  men 
not  a  native  had  been  so  much  as  seen  by  them.  At 
nightfall  the  air  became  alive  with  mysterious  noises;  cries 
as  of  animals,  occasionally  Indian  whoops,  shouts  from  one 
voice  to  another  were  heard  all  around.  The  Spaniards 
stood  to  their  arms  and  gazed  anxiously  into  the  darkness. 

Soon  the  shouts  of  the  sentries  told  that  flights  of  arrows 
were  being  discharged  at  them  by  invisible  foes.  Volley 
after  volley  were  fired  from  the  musketoons  and  arquebuses 
into  the  wood.  These  were  answered  by  bursts  of  taunting 
laughter  and  mocking  yells,  while  the  rain  of  arrows 
continued. 

The  Spanish  troops,  whose  position  and  figures  could  be 
seen  by  the  blaze  of  the  lighted  fires,  while  a  dense  dark- 
ness reigned  within  the  forest,  began  to  suffer  severely 
from  the  arrows  of  these  unseen  foes.  Bodies  fifty  strong 
advanced  into  the  dark  forest  to  search  out  their  enemies, 
but  they  searched  in  vain.  The  Indians,  better  accus- 
tomed to  the  darkness,  and  knowing  the  forest  well,  easily 
retreated  as  they  advanced,  and  the  Spaniards  dared  not 
venture  far  from  their  fires,  for  they  feared  being  lost  in 
the  forest. 

The  officer  commanding,  an  old  and  experienced  soldier, 
soon  ceased  these  useless  sorties.  Calling  his  men  into  the 
center  of  the  glade,  he  ordered  them  to  stand  in  readiness 


100  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

to  repel  an  assault,  extinguished  every  fire,  and  allowed  half 
the  troop  at  once  to  lie  down  to  endeavor  to  snatch  some 
sleep.  This,  however,  was  impossible,  for  although  the 
Indians  did  not  venture  upon  an  attack,  the  chorus  of 
shouts  and  yells  was  so  terrible  and  continuous  and  the 
flights  of  arrows  at  times  fell  so  fast  that  not  one  of  the 
troop  ventured  to  close  an  eye.  From  time  to  time  vol- 
leys were  fired  into  the  darkness,  and  once  or  twice  a  loud 
cry  told  that  some  at  least  of  the  balls  had  taken  effect, 
but  the  opponents,  sheltered  each  behind  the  trunk  of  a 
tree,  suffered  comparatively  slightly,  while  many  of  the 
Spaniards  were  struck  by  their  missiles. 

Morning  dawned  upon  a  worn-out  and  dispirited  band, 
but  with  daylight  their  hopes  revived.  Vigorous  sorties 
were  made  into  the  wood,  and  though  these  discovered  in 
a  few  places  marks  of  blood  where  some  of  their  enemies 
had  fallen  and  signs  of  a  party  being  carried  away,  the 
woods  were  now  as  deserted  as  they  had  appeared  to  be  on 
the  previous  evening  when  they  first  halted.  There  was  a 
consultation  among  the  leaders,  and  it  was  determined  to 
abandon  the  pursuit  of  these  invisible  foes,  as  it  was  agreed 
that  nothing  short  of  a  great  effort  by  the  whole  available 
force  of  the  island  would  be  sufficient  to  cope  with  a  foe 
whose  tactics  were  so  bewildering  and  formidable. 

Upon  their  march  out  from  the  wood  the  troop  was  pur- 
sued with  the  same  persistence  with  which  it  had  been 
dogged  on  the  preceding  day;  and  when  at  length  it 
emerged  and  the  captain  counted  the  numbers  of  his  men, 
it  was  found  that  there  were  no  less  than  thirty  wounded, 
and  that  twenty  had  been  left  behind  dead. 

The  dwellers  of  the  wood  were  overjoyed  with  their  sue 
cess,  and  felt  that  a  new  existence  had  opened  before  them. 
Hitherto  they  had  been  fugitives  only,  and  no  thought  of 
resistance  to  the  Spaniards  had  ever  entered   their  minds. 
They  felt  now  that  so  long  as  they  remained  in  the  woods, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  101 

and  maintained  their  drill  and  discipline,  and  persisted  in 
the  tactics  which  they  had  adopted,  they  could  defy  the 
Spaniards,  unless,  indeed,  the  latter  came  in  overwhelming 
strength. 

Some  time  elapsed  before  any  fresh  effort  was  made  by 
the  Spaniards.  The  affair  caused  intense  excitement  in 
the  city,  and  it  is  difficult  to  say  whether  alarm  or  rage 
most  predominated.  It  was  felt  that  a  great  effort  must 
be  made  to  crush  the  men  of  the  forest,  for  unless  this 
were  done  a  vast  number  of  the  negro  slaves  would  escape 
and  join  them,  and  the  movement  would  become  more 
formidable  every  day.  Upon  the  part  of  those  in  the 
forest  great  consultations  took  place;  some  of  the  negroes 
were  for  sending  messages  to  the  slaves  to  rise  and  join 
them,  but  Ned  and  Gerald  strongly  opposed  this  course. 
There  were,  as  they  pointed  out,  no  means  whatever  in 
the  forest  for  supporting  a  larger  body  of  men  than  those 
gathered  there.  The  tree-clad  hills  which  constituted 
their  stronghold  were  some  thirty  miles  in  diameter,  and 
the  supply  of  fruits,  of  roots,  and  of  birds  were  sufficient 
for  their  wants,  but  it  would  be  very  different  were  their 
numbers  largely  increased.  Then  they  would  be  forced  to 
make  raids  upon  the  cultivated  ground  beyond,  and  here, 
however  strong,  they  would  be  no  match  for  the  Spaniards, 
whose  superior  arms  and  discipline  would  be  certain  to  give 
them  victory.  The  Indians  strongly  supported  the  rea- 
soning of  the  boys,  and  the  negroes,  when  they  fully 
understood  the  difficulties  which  would  arise,  finally  ac- 
quiesced in  their  arguments. 

Schemes  were  broached  for  making  sallies  from  the  forest 
at  night  and  falling  upon  the  plantations  of  the  Spaniards. 
This  offered  greater  chances  of  success,  but  the  boys  fore- 
saw that  all  sorts  of  atrocities  would  be  sure  to  take  place, 
and  that  no  quarter  would  be  given  to  Spaniards  of  either 
age  or  sex.  They  therefore  combated  vigorously  this  pro- 


102  UNDER  bRAKK'S  FLAG. 

posal  also;  they  pointed  out  that  so  long  as  they  remained 
quiet  in  the  forest,  and  were  not  joined  by  large  numbers 
of  fugitive  negroes,  the  Spaniards  might  be  content  to  let 
them  remain  unmolested;  but  upon  the  contrary,  were 
they  to  adopt  offensive  tactics,  not  only  would  every  Span- 
iard in  the  island  take  up  arms  against  them,  but  if  neces- 
sary they  would  send  for  help  to  the  neighboring  islands, 
and  would  assemble  a  force  sufficient  thoroughly  to  search 
the  woods,  and  to  annihilate  them.  The  only  case  in 
which  the  boys  considered  that  an  attack  upon  the  Span- 
iards would  be  lawful  would  be  in  the  event  of  fresh  expe- 
ditions being  organized.  In  that  case  they  were  of  opinion 
that  it  would  be  useful  to  destroy  one  or  two  large  man- 
sions and  plantations  as  near  as  possible  to  the  town,  send- 
ing at  the  same  time  a  message  to  the  Spaniards  that  if 
they  persisted  in  disturbing  them  in  the  forest,  a  similar 
fate  would  befall  every  Spanish  plantation  situated  beyond 
the  town. 

It  was  not  long  before  these  tactics  were  called  into  play. 
One  of  the  negroes  had,  as  was  their  custom,  gone  down 
to  the  town  to  purchase  such  articles  as  were  indispensable. 
Upon  these  occasions,  as  usual,  he  went  down  to  the  hut 
of  the  old  woman  who  acted  as  their  intermediary,  and 
remained  concealed  there  during  the  day  while  she  went 
into  the  town  to  buy  cotton  for  dresses  and  other  things. 
This  she  could  only  do  in  small  quantities  at  a  time,  using 
various  shops  for  the  purpose,  returning  each  time  with 
her  parcel  to  the  hut.  The  suspicion  of  the  Spaniards 
had  however  been  aroused,  and  orders  had  been  given  to 
watch  her  closely,  the  consequence  was  that,  after  pur- 
chasing a  few  articles,  she  was  followed,  and  a  band  of 
soldiers  surrounded  the  hut  after  she  had  entered.  The 
fugitive  was  there  found  concealed,  and  he  and  the  old 
woman  were  at  once  fastened  in  the  hut;  this  was  then  set 
alight,  and  they  were  burned  to  death  upon  the  spot. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  103 

When  the  news  reached  the  mountains  Ned  at  once  de- 
termined upon  a  reprisal.  The  negroes  and  natives  were 
alike  ready  to  follow  him,  and  the  next  night  the  whole 
party,  a  hundred  and  fifty  strong,  marched  down  from  the 
forest.  The  object  of  their  attack  was  a  handsome  palace 
belonging  to  the  military  governor  of  the  island  situated 
at  a  short  distance  from  the  town. 

Passing  through  the  cultivated  country  noiselessly  and 
without  detection,  they  reached  the  mansion  and  sur- 
rounded it.  There  were  here  a  guard  of  some  thirty  sol- 
diers, and  sentries  were  placed  at  the  entrance.  At  the 
signal  given  by  the  blowing  of  a  conch  shell,  the  attack 
commenced  on  all  sides.  The  sentries  were  at  once  shot 
down,  and  the  negroes  and  their  allies  speedily  penetrated 
into  the  building.  The  Spanish  guard  fought  with  great 
bravery,  but  they  were  overpowered  by  the  infuriated 
negroes.  Yells,  shrieks,  and  shouts  of  all  kinds  resounded 
through  the  palace. 

Before  starting  on  their  adventure  Ned  and  Gerald  had 
exacted  a  solemn  oath  from  each  of  the  men  who  were  to 
take  part  in  it,  that  on  no  account  would  he  lift  his  hand 
against  a  defenseless  person,  and  also  that  he  spare  every- 
body who  surrendered.  The  negroes  were  greatly  loath  to 
take  this  promise,  and  had  Ned  urged  them  to  do  so  purely 
for  the  sake  of  humanity,  the  oath  would  unquestionably 
have  been  refused,  for  in  those  days  of  savage  warfare  there 
was  little  or  no  mercy  shown  on  either  side.  It  was  only 
on  the  ground  of  expediency  and  the  extreme  necessity  of 
not  irritating  the  Spaniards  beyond  a  certain  point  that  he 
succeeded  in  obtaining  their  promise. 

In  the  principal  room  of  the  palace  they  found  the  gov- 
ernor himself;  his  sword  was  in  his  hand,  and  he  was  pre- 
pared to  defend  his  life  to  the  last.  The  boys,  however, 
rushed  forward  and  cried  to  him  to  throw  his  sword  down 
as  the  only  plan  by  which  his  life  could  be  saved.  The 


104  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

brave  officer  refused,  answering  by  a  vigorous  thrust.  In 
a  moment  the  two  lads  had  sprung  upon  him,  one  from 
each  side,  and  wrested  his  sword  from  his  hand.  The 
negroes  with  yells  of  triumph  were  rushing  upon  him  with 
drawn  swords,  but  the  boys  sternly  motioned  them  back, 
keeping  well  in  front  of  their  prisoner. 

"You  have  sworn,"  they  said,  "and  the  first  man  who 
breaks  his  oath  we  will  shoot  through  the  head."  Then 
turning  to  the  governor  they  said,  "Sir,  you  see  what 
these  men  whom  you  have  so  long  hunted  as  wild  beasts 
can  do.  Take  warning  from  this,  and  let  all  in  the  town 
know  the  determination  to  which  we  have  arrived.  If  we 
are  let  alone  we  will  let  others  alone.  We  promise  that 
no  serious  depredations  of  any  kind  shall  be  performed  by 
any  of  our  party  in  the  forest;  but  if  we  are  molested,  or 
if  any  of  our  baud  who  may  fall  into  your  hands  are  ill- 
treated,  we  swear  that  for  each  drop  of  blood  slain  we  will 
ravage  a  plantation  and  destroy  a  house.  On  this  occasion, 
as  you  see,  the  negroes  have  abstained  from  shedding  blood, 
but  our  influence  over  them  may  not  avail  in  future.  Now 
that  you  see  that  we  too  can  attack,  you  may  think  fit  to 
leave  us  alone.  In  case  of  serious  interference  with  us, 
we  will  lay  waste  the  land  up  to  the  houses  of  the  city, 
and  destroy  every  plantation  and  hacienda." 

Then  they  hurried  the  governor  to  a  back  entrance,  gave 
him  his  sword  again,  and  having  seen  him  in  safety  fairly 
beyond  the  reach  of  any  of  their  party  who  might  be  wan- 
dering about,  dismissed  him. 

Returning  to  the  palace  they  had  to  exert  themselves  to 
the  utmost  to  prevail  on  the  negroes  to  spare  all  who  were 
there,  indeed  one  man  who  refused  to  obey  Ned's  orders 
and  to  lower  his  club,  he  shot  down  at  once.  This  vigor- 
ous act  excited  for  a  moment  yells  of  indignation  among 
the  rest,  but  the  firm^bearing  of  the  two  young  English- 
men, and  the  knowledge  that  they  were  acting  as  they 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  105 

themselves  had  given  them  leave  to  act,  should  any  of  the 
party  break  their  oaths,  subdued  them  into  silence. 

The  palace  was  now  stripped  of  all  portable  and  useful 
articles.  Ned  would  not  permit  anything  to  be  carried 
away  of  a  merely  ornamental  or  valuable  character,  but 
only  such  as  kitchen  utensils,  crockery,  stoves,  arms, 
hangings,  and  articles  of  a  description  that  would  be  use- 
ful to  them  in  their  wild  life  in  the  forest.  The  quantity 
of  arms  taken  was  considerable,  as,  in  addition  to  those 
belonging  to  the  guard,  there  were  a  considerable  number 
piled  in  the  armory  in  readiness  for  any  occasion  when 
they  might  be  required. 

When  all  that  could  be  useful  to  them  was  removed, 
lights  were  applied  to  the  hangings  and  wooden  lattice 
work,  and  before  they  retired  they  saw  the  flames  take 
sufficient  possession  of  the  building  to  ensure  its  destruc- 
tion. 

Many  of  the  negroes  had  at  first  laden  themselves  with 
wine,  but  this  Ned  peremptorily  refused  to  allow  them  to 
carry  away.  He  knew  that  it  was  of  the  most  supreme 
necessity  that  good  fellowship  and  amity  should  run  be- 
tween the  members  of  the  bands,  and  that  were  wine  to  be 
introduced  quarrels  might  arise  which  would  in  the  end 
prove  fatal  to  all.  Ke  allowed,  however,  sufficient  to  be 
taken  away  to  furnish  a  reasonable  share  for  each  man  at 
the  feast  which  it  was  only  natural  they  would  wish  to 
hold  in  commemoration  of  their  victory. 


106  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


CHAPTEE  VIIL 

THEFOKEST     FASTNESS. 

IT  was  with  a  feeling  of  triumph,  indeed,  that  the 
negroes  after  gaining  their  own  fastness  looked  back  at 
the  sky  lighted  by  the  distant  conflagration.  They  had 
now  for  the  first  time  inflicted  such  a  lesson  upon  their 
oppressors  as  would  make  a  deep  mark.  They  felt  them- 
selves to  be  really  free,  and  knew  that  they  in  their  turn 
had  struck  terror  into  the  hearts  of  the  Spaniards.  Ketir- 
ing  to  the  depths  of  the  forest  great  fires  were  made,  sheep, 
fowls,  and  other  articles  of  provision  which  had  been 
brought  back  were  killed  and  prepared.  Huge  bonfires 
were  lit  and  the  party,  secure  that  for  twenty-four  hours 
at  least  the  Spaniards  could  attempt  no  retributive  meas- 
ures, sat  down  to  enjoy  the  banquet. 

They  had  driven  with  them  a  few  small  bullocks  and 
also  some  scores  of  sheep;  these,  however,  were  not  destined 
for  the  spit.  They  were  to  be  placed  in  the  heart  of  their 
country  so  that  unless  disturbed  by  the  Spaniards  they 
might  prove  a  source  of  future  sustenance  to  them.  There 
was  wild  feasting  that  night  with  dances  and  songs  of  tri- 
umph in  the  negro  and  native  dialects,  and  Ned  and  Gerald 
were  lauded  and  praised  as  the  authors  of  the  change  which 
had  taken  place  in  the  condition  of  the  fugitives. 

Even  the  stern  severity  of  Ned's  act  was  thoroughly 
approved  and  it  was  agreed  again  that  any  one  refusing  to 
obey  the  orders  of  the  white  chiefs  should  forfeit  his  life, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  107 

The  blow  which  the  negroes  had  struck  caused  intense 
consternation  throughout  Hispanola. 

The  younger  and  more  warlike  spirits  were  in  favor  of 
organizing  an  instant  crusade,  for  sending  to  the  other 
islands  for  more  troops,  for  surrounding  the  forest  country 
and  for  putting  the  last  of  the  negroes  to  the  sword.  More 
peaceful  counsels,  however,  prevailed,  for  it  was  felt  that 
the  whole  open  country  was,  as  Ned  had  told  the  governor, 
at  their  mercy,  that  the  damage  which  could  he  inflicted 
would  be  enormous,  and  the  satisfaction  of  putting  the 
fugitives  to  death,  even  if  they  were  finally  conquered, 
would  be  but  a  poor  recompense  for  the  blow  which  might 
be  given  to  the  prosperity  and  wealth  of  the  island.  All 
sorts  of  schemes  were  mooted  by  which  the  runaways  could 
be  beguiled  into  laying  down  their  arms,  bat  no  practicable 
plan  could  be  hit  upon. 

In  the  meantime,  in  the  mountains,  the  bands  improved 
in  drill  and  discipline.  They  had  now  gained  some  confi- 
dence in  themselves,  and  gave  themselves  up  heartily  to 
the  work.  Portions  of  land,  too,  were  turned  up,  and 
yams  and  other  fruits  on  a  larger  scale  than  had  hitherto 
been  attempted,  were  planted.  A  good  supply  of  goats 
was  obtained,  huts  were  erected,  and  the  lads  determined 
that,  at  least  as  long  as  the  Spaniards  allowed  it,  their 
lives  should  be  made  as  comfortable  as  possible.  Fugitive 
slaves  from  time  to  time  joined  the  party,  but  Ned  strongly 
discouraged  any  increase  at  present  from  this  cause.  He 
was  sure  that,  were  the  Spaniards  to  find  that  their  runa- 
ways were  sheltered  there,  and  that  a  general  desertion  of 
their  slaves  might  take  place,  they  would  be  obliged  in 
self-defense  to  root  out  this  formidable  organization  in 
their  midst.  Therefore  emissaries  were  sent  out  among 
the  negroes  stating  that  none  would  be  received  in  the 
mountains  save  those  who  had  previously  asked  permission, 
this  being  only  accorded  in  cases  where  such  extreme  brn- 


108  UNDER  D II A  RE'S  FLA  (?. 

taiity  and  cruelty  had  been  exercised  by  the  masters  as 
would  wholly  justify  the  flight  of  the  slave. 

For  some  months  a  sort  of  truce  was  maintained  between 
the  Spaniards  and  this  little  army  in  the  woods.  The 
blacks  observed  the  promises  which  Ned  had  made  with 
great  fidelity,  the  planters  found  that  no  depredations  took 
place,  and  that  the  desertions  among  their  slaves  were  no 
more  numerous  than  before,  and  had  it  depended  solely 
upon  them  no  further  measures  would  have  been  taken. 

The  case,  however,  was  different  among  the  military 
party  in  the  island.  To  them  the  failure  of  the  expedition 
into  the  forest  and  the  burning  of  the  governor's  house 
were  matters  which  seriously  affected  their  pride.  Defeat 
by  English  buccaneers  they  were  accustomed  to,  and  re- 
garding the  English  at  sea  as  a  species  of  demon  against 
whom  human  bravery  availed  little,  they  were  slightly 
touched  by  it;  but  that  they  should  be  defied  by  a  set  of 
runaway  slaves  and  of  natives,  whom  they  had  formerly 
regarded  with  contempt,  was  a  blow  to  their  pride.  Qui- 
etly, and  without  ostentation,  troops  were  drafted  into  the 
island  from  the  neighboring  posts,  until  a  formidable  force 
had  been  gathered  there.  The  foresters  had  now  plenty 
of  means  of  communication  with  the  negroes,  who  regarded 
them  as  saviours  to  whom  they  could  look  for  rescue  and 
shelter  in  case  of  their  master's  cruelty,  and  were  always 
ready  to  send  messengers  up  into  the  forest  with  news  of 
every  occurrence  which  took  place  under  their  observation. 
The  grown-up  slaves,  of  course,  could  not  leave  the  plan- 
tation, but  there  were  numbers  of  fleet-footed  lads  who, 
after  nightfall,  could  be  dispatched  from  the  huts  into  the 
mountains  and  return  before  daylight,  while,  even  should 
they  remain  until  the  next  night,  they  would  attract  no 
attention  by  their  absence. 

Thus,  then,  Ned  and  Gerald  learned  that  a  formidable 
body  of  Spaniards  were  being  collected  quietly  in  the  town, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  109 

and  every  effort  was  made  to  meet  the  coming  storm.  The 
various  gorges  were  blocked  with  high  barricades;  difficult 
parts  of  the  mountain  were,  with  great  labor,  scarped  so 
as  to  render  the  advance  of  an  armed  force  difficult  in  the 
extreme;  great  piles  of  stones  were  collected  to  roll  down 
into  the  ravines,  and  provisions  of  yams,  sweet-potatoes, 
and  other  food  were  stored  up. 

The  last  stronghold  had,  after  a  great  debate,  been  fixed 
upon  at  a  point  in  the  heart  of  one  of  the  hills.  This  was 
singularly  well  adapted  for  defense;  the  hill  itself  was  ex- 
tremely precipitous  on  all  sides,  on  one  side  it  fell  sheer 
down.  A  goat  track  ran  along  the  face  of  this  precipice  to 
a  point  where  the  hill  fell  back,  forming  a  sort  of  semicir- 
cular arena  on  the  very  face  of  the  precipice.  This  plateau 
was  some  two  acres  in  extent.  Here  quantities  of  forage 
were  heaped  up  in  readiness  for  the  food  of  such  auimals 
as  might  be  driven  in  there.  The  track  itself  was,  with 
great  labor,  widened,  platforms  of  wood  being  placed  at 
the  narrow  points,  and  steps  were  cut  in  the  hill  behind 
the  plateau  to  enable  them,  should  their  stronghold  be 
stormed,  to  escape  at  the  last  moment  up  to  the  hilltop 
above.  In  most  places  the  cliff  behind  the  plateau  rose  so 
steeply  as  to  almost  overhang  the  foot,  and  in  these  were 
many  gaps  and  crevices  in  which  a  considerable  number  of 
people  could  take  shelter  so  as  to  avoid  stones  and  other 
missiles  hurled  down  from  above.  At  one  point,  in  par- 
ticular, the  precipice  overhung,  and  under  this  a  strong 
erection  of  the  trunks  of  trees  was  made.  This  was  for 
the  animals  to  be  placed  in ;  the  heavy  roof  was  amply 
sufficient  to  keep  out  any  bullet  shots,  while  from  its  posi- 
tion no  masses  of  rock  could  be  dropped  upon  it.  It  was 
not  thought  probable  that  the  Spaniards  would  harass 
them  much  from  above,  for  the  ascent  to  the  summit  was 
everywhere  extremely  difficult,  and  the  hillside  was  per- 
fectly bare,  and  sloped  so  sharply  upward  from  the  edge 


HO  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

of  the  precipitous  cliff,  that  it  would  be  a  difficult  and 
dangerous  task  to  descend  so  as  to  fire  down  into  the 
arena;  and,  although  every  precaution  had  been  taken,  it 
was  felt  that  there  was  little  fear  of  any  attack  from  above. 

At  last  all  was  in  readiness  as  far  as  the  efforts  of  those 
in  the  forest  could  avail,  A  message  was  then  sent  in  to 
the  governor  to  ^he  effect  that  the  men  of  the  forest  desired 
to  know  for  what  purpose  so  many  soldiers  were  being 
assembled  in  the  island,  and  that,  on  a  given  day,  unless 
some  of  these  were  embarked  and  sent  off  they  would  con- 
sider that  a  war  was  being  prepared  against  them,  and  that 
the  agreement  that  the  outlying  settlements  should  be  left 
intact  was  therefore  invalid.  As  the  boys  had  anticipated 
the  Spaniards  answered  this  missive  by  an  instant 
movement  forward,  and  some  four  hundred  men  were 
reported  as  moving  out  toward  the  hills.  This  the  boys 
were  prepared  for,  and  simultaneously  with  the  movement 
the  whole  band — divided  into  parties  of  six,  each  of  which 
had  its  fixed  destination  and  instructions,  all  being  alike 
solemnly  pledged  to  take  no  life  in  cold  blood  and  to  ab- 
stain from  all  unnecessary  cruelties — started  quickly  from 
the  forest. 

That  night  the  Spanish  force  halted  near  the  edge  of 
the  forest,  but  at  midnight  a  general  consternation  seized 
the  camp  when,  from  fifty  different  points,  flames  were 
seen  suddenly  to  rise  on  the  plain.  Furious  at  this  mis- 
fortune the  general  in  command  put  his  cavalry  in  motion 
and  scoured  the  country,  only  to  find,  however,  that  the 
whole  of  the  haciendas  of  the  Spanish  proprietors  were  in 
flames,  and  that  fire  had  been  applied  to  all  the  standing 
crops.  Everywhere  he  heard  the  same  tale,  that  those 
who  had  resisted  had  been  killed,  but  that  no  harm  had 
been  inflicted  upon  defenseless  persons. 

This  was  so  new  a  feature  in  troubles  with  the  negroes 
that  the  Spaniards  could  not  but  be  surprised  and  filled 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  HI 

with  admiration  at  conduct  so  different  to  that  to  which 
they  were  accustomed.  The  sight  of  the  tremendous  de- 
struction of  property,  however,  roused  them  to  fury,  and 
this  was  still  further  heightened  when  toward  morning  a 
great  burst  of  flame  in  the  city  proclaimed  that  the  negroes 
had  fallen  upon  the  town  while  the  greater  portion  of  its 
defenders  were  withdrawn. 

This  was  indeed  a  masterly  stroke  on  the  part  of  the 
boys.  They  knew  that  even  deducting  those  who  had  set 
forth  there  would  still  be  an  amply  sufficient  force  in  the 
city  to  defeat  and  crush  their  band,  but  they  thought  that 
by  a  quick  stroke  they  might  succeed  in  inflicting  a  heavy 
blow  upon  them.  Each  of  the  bands,  therefore,  had  in- 
structions after  doing  its  allotted  share  of  incendiarism  to 
make  for  the  town,  and  to  meet  at  a  certain  point  outside 
it.  Then  quietly  and  noiselessly  they  had  entered.  One 
party  fell  upon  the  armory  and  another  attacked  with  fury 
the  governor's  house;  the  guards  there,  were,  as  had  hap- 
pened with  his  residence  in  the  country,  cut  down.  Fire 
was  applied  in  a  dozen  places,  and  before  the  astonished 
troops  and  inhabitants  could  rally  from  the  different  parts 
of  the  town,  the  negroes  were  again  in  the  country,  having 
fulfilled  their  object  and  carried  off  with  them  a  large 
additional  stock  of  arms. 

Before  the  cavalry  from  the  front  could  arrive  they  were 
again  far  in  the  country,  and,  making  a  long  detour,  gained 
their  fastness,  having  struck  a  terrible  blow,  with  the  cost 
to  themselves  of  only  some  eight  or  ten  lives. 

It  was  a  singular  sight,  as  they  looked  out  in  the  morn- 
ing from  their  hilltops;  great  masses  of  smoke  extended 
over  the  whole  country;  for  although  most  of  the  dwell- 
ings were  by  this  time  leveled  to  the  ground — for,  built  of 
the  lightest  construction,  they  offered  but  little  resistance 
to  the  flames — from  the  fields  of  maize  and  cane  clouds  of 
smoke  were  still  rising  as  the  conflagration  spread,  and  at 


112  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&. 

one  stroke  the  whole  agricultural  wealth  of  the  island  was 
destroyed.  The  boys  regretted  that  this  should  necessarily 
be  the  case,  but  they  felt  that  it  was  now  war  to  the  knife 
between  the  Spaniards  and  them,  and  that  such  a  defeat 
would  be  beneficial.  This,  indeed,  was  the  case,  for  the 
commander  drew  back  his  troops  to  the  town  in  order  to 
make  fresh  arrangements  before  venturing  upon  an  attack 
on  foes  who  showed  themselves  possessed  of  such  desperate 
determination. 

Another  six  weeks  elapsed,  indeed,  before  a  forward 
movement  was  again  commenced,  and  in  that  time  consid- 
erable acquisitions  of  force  were  obtained.  Strong  as  the 
bands  felt  themselves,  they  could  not  but  be  alarmed  at 
the  thought  of  the  tremendous  storm  gathering  to  burst 
over  their  heads.  The  women  had  long  since  been  sent 
away  to  small  native  villages  existing  on  the  other  side 
of  the  island  and  living  at  peace  with  their  neighbors. 
Thither  Ned  also  dispatched  several  of  the  party  whom  he 
believed  to  be  either  wanting  in  courage,  or  whose  con- 
stancy he  somewhat  doubted.  A  traitor  now  would  be 
the  destruction  of  the  party,  and  it  was  certain  that  any 
negro  deserting  to  the  enemy  and  offering  to  act  as  their 
guide  to  the  various  strongholds  of  the  defenders  would 
receive  immense  rewards.  Thus  it  was  imperative  that 
every  man  of  whose  fidelity  and  constancy  the  least  doubt 
was  entertained  should  be  carefully  sent  out  of  the  way  of 
temptation. 

All  the  baud  were,  indeed,  pledged  by  a  most  solemn 
oath,  and  death  by  torture  was  the  penalty  awarded  for 
any  act  of  treachery. 

The  greater  portion  of  the  force  were  now  provided  with 
European  arms;  the  negroes  had  musketoons  or  arque- 
buses, the  natives  still  retained  the  bow,  while  all  had 
pikes  and  spears.  They  were  undefended  by  protective 
armor,  and  in  this  respect  the  Spaniards  had  a  great  advsn- 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  113 

tage  in  the  fight;  but,  as  the  boys  pointed  out,  this  advan- 
tage was  more  than  counterbalanced  by  the  extra  facility 
of  movement  on  the  part  of  the  natives,  who  could  scale 
rocks  and  climb  hills  absolutely  inaccessible  to  their  heavily 
armed  and  weighty  opponents.  The  scouts  who  had  been 
stationed  on  the  lookout  at  the  edge  of  the  forest  brought 
word  that  the  Spaniards,  nigh  fifteen  hundred  strong,  had 
divided  in  six  bodies,  and  were  inarching  so  as  to  enter  the 
forest  from  six  different  and  nearly  equidistant  points. 
Each  band  was  accompanied  by  bloodhounds  and  a  large 
number  of  other  fierce  dogs  of  the  wolf-hound  breed  which 
the  Spaniards  had  imported  for  the  purpose  of  attacking 
negroes  in  their  hiding-places.  Of  these  animals  the  ne- 
groes had  the  greatest  dread,  and  even  the  bravest,  who 
were  ready  to  match  themselves  against  armed  Spaniards, 
yet  trembled  at  the  thought  of  the  encounter  with  these 
ferocious  animals. 

It  was  clear  that  no  repetition  of  the  tactics  formerly 
pursued  would  be  possible;  for,  if  any  attempt  at  night 
attacks  were  made  the  dogs  would  rush  out  and  attack 
them,  and  not  only  prove  formidable  enemies  themselves, 
but  guide  the  Spaniards  to  the  places  where  they  were 
stationed.  Ned  and  Gerald  would  fain  have  persuaded 
the  natives  that  dogs,  after  all,  however  formidable  they 
might  appear,  were  easily  mastered  by  well-armed  men, 
and  that  any  dog  rushing  to  attack  them  would  be  pierced 
with  spears  and  arrows,  to  say  nothing  of  being  shot  by 
the  arquebuses  before  he  could  seize  any  of  them.  The 
negroes,  however,  had  known  so  many  cases  in  which  fugi- 
tives had  been  horribly  torn,  and,  indeed,  frequently  killed 
by  these  ferocious  animals,  that  the  dread  of  them  was  too 
great  for  them  to  listen  to  the  boys'  explanations.  The 
latter,  seeing  that  it  would  be  useless  to  attempt  to  over- 
come their  fears  on  this  ground,  abstained  from  the 
attempt. 


114  UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG. 

It  had  been  agreed  that,  in  the  event  of  the  Spaniards 
advancing  from  different  quarters,  one  column  only  should 
be  selected  for  a  main  attack;  and  that,  while  the  others 
should  be  harassed  by  small  parties  who  should  cast  down 
rocks  upon  them  while  passing  through  the  gorges,  and  so 
inflict  as  much  damage  as  possible,  no  attempt  would  be 
made  to  strike  any  serious  blow  upon  them.  The  column 
selected  for  attack  was  naturally  that  whose  path  led 
through  the  points  which  had  been  most  strongly  prepared 
and  fortified.  This  baud  mustered  about  three  hundred, 
and  was  clearly  too  strong  to  be  attacked  in  open  fight  by 
the  forest  bands.  Gerald  and  Ned  had  already  talked  the 
matter  over  in  every  light,  and  decided  that  a  purely  de- 
fensive fight  must  be  maintained,  each  place  where  prepa- 
rations had  been  made  being  held  to  the  last,  and  a  rapid 
retreat  beaten  to  the  next  barricade.  The  Spaniards  ad- 
vanced in  heavy  column;  at  a  distance  of  a  hundred  yards 
on  each  side  marched  a  body  of  fifty  in  compact  mass, 
thereby  sheltering  the  main  body  from  any  sudden  attack. 
The  first  point  at  which  the  lads  had  determined  to  make 
a  stand  was  the  mouth  of  a  gorge.  Here  steep  rocks  rose 
perpendicularly  from  the  ground,  running  almost  like  a 
wall  along  that  portion  of  the  forest;  in  the  midst  of  this 
was  a  cleft  through  which  a  little  stream  ran.  It  was  here 
that  the  boys  had  made  preparations;  the  point  could  not 
be  turned  without  a  long  and  difficult  march  along  the 
face  of  the  cliff,  and  on  the  summit  of  this  sixty  men  di- 
vided into  two  parties,  one  on  each  side  of  the  fissure,  were 
stationed.  The  Spaniards  advanced  until  they  nearly 
reached  the  mouth  of  the  ravine. 

It  must  be  remembered  that,  although  the  forest  was 
very  thick  and  the  vegetation  luxuriant,  yet  there  were 
paths  here  and  there  made  by  the  constant  passing  to  and 
fro  of  the  occupants  of  the  wood.  Their  main  direction 
acted  as  a  guide  to  the  Spaniards,  and  the  hounds,  by 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  115 

their  sniffing  and  eagerness,  acted  as  a  guide  to  the  ad- 
vancing force.  They  paused  when  they  saw  opening  before 
them  this  entrance  to  the  rocky  gorge.  While  they  halted 
the  increased  eagerness  of  the  dogs  told  them  that  they 
•were  now  approaching  the  point  where  their  foes  were 
concealed,  and  the  prospect  of  an  attack  on  so  strong  a 
position  was  formidable  even  to  such  a  body. 

A  small  party  of  thirty  men  was  told  off  to  advance  and 
reconnoiter  the  position.  These  were  allowed  to  enter  the 
gorge  and  to  follow  it  for  a  distance  of  a  hundred  yards  to 
a  point  where  the  sides  were  approached  to  their  nearest 
point.  Then,  from  a  parapet  of  rock  piled  across  the 
ravine  came  a  volley  of  musketry,  and  simultaneously  from 
the  heights  of  either  side  great  stones  came  crashing  down. 
Such  of  the  party  as  did  not  fall  at  the  first  discharge  fired 
a  volley  at  their  invisible  assailants  and  then  hurried  back 
to  the  main  body. 

It  was  now  clear  that  fighting  and  that  of  a  serious 
character  was  to  be  undertaken.  The  Spanish  commander 
rapidly  reconnoitered  the  position,  and  saw  that  here  at 
least,  no  flanking  movement  was  possible.  He  therefore 
ordered  his  men  to  advance  for  a  direct  attack.  Being 
more  afraid  of  the  stones  from  above  than  of  the  defenders 
in  the  ravine,  the  Spaniards  prepared  to  advance  in  skir- 
mishing order;  in  that  way  they  would  be  able  to  creep  up 
to  the  barricade  of  rocks  with  the  least  loss  to  themselves 
from  the  fire  of  its  defenders,  while  the  stones  from  above 
would  prove  far  less  dangerous  than  would  be  the  case 
upon  a  solid  column.  With  great  determination  the 
Spanish  troops  advanced  to  the  attack;  as  they  neared 
the  mouth  of  the  gorge,  flights  of  arrows  from  above  were 
poured  down  upon  them,  and  these  were  answered  by  their 
own  musketeers  and  bowmen,  although  the  figures  occa- 
sionally exposed  above  offered  but  a  poor  mark  in  compari- 
son to  that  afforded  by  the  column  below.  The  men  on 


lie  UNDER  DRAKK'8  FLAG. 

the  ridge  were  entirely  natives,  the  boys  having  selected 
the  negroes,  on  whose  courage  at  close  quarters  they  could 
more  thoroughly  rely,  for  the  defense  of  the  ravine.  The 
firearms  in  those  days  could  scarcely  be  termed  arms  of 
precision;  the  bell-month  arquebuses  could  carry  a  large 
and  heavy  charge,  but  there  was  nothing  like  accuracy  in 
their  fire;  and  although  a  steady  fire  was  kept  up  from 
the  barricade,  and  many  Spaniards  fell,  yet  a  larger  num- 
ber succeeded  in  making  their  way  through  the  zone  of 
fire  by  taking  advantage  of  the  rocks  and  bushes,  and  these 
gathered  near  the  foot  of  the  barricade. 

The  stones  which  came  crashing  from  above  did  serious 
damage  among  them,  but  the  real  effect  of  these  was  more 
moral  than  physical.  The  sound  of  the  great  masses  of 
stone  plunging  down  the  hillside,  setting  in  motion  num- 
bers of  small  rocks  as  they  came,  tearing  down  the  bushes 
and  small  trees,  was  exceedingly  terrifying  at  first,  but  as 
block  after  block  dashed  down  doing  comparatively  little 
harm,  the  Spaniards  became  accustomed  to  them,  and 
keeping  under  the  shelter  of  masses  of  rock  to  the  last 
moment  prepared  all  their  energies  for  the  attack.  The 
Spanish  commander  found  that  the  greater  portion  of  his 
troop  were  within  striking  distance,  and  he  gave  the  com- 
mand to  those  gathered  near  the  barricade  to  spring  for- 
ward to  the  attack. 

The  gorge  at  this  point  was  some  fifteen  yards  wide. 
The  barricade  across  it  was  thirty  feet  in  height.  It  was 
formed  of  blocks  of  stone  of  various  sizes,  intermingled 
with  which  were  sharp  stakes  with  their  points  projecting, 
lines  of  hushes  and  arms  of  trees  piled  outward,  and  the 
whole  was  covered  loosely  with  sharp  prickly  creepers  cut 
from  the  trees  and  heaped  there.  A  more  difficult  place 
to  climb,  even  without  its  being  defended  from  above, 
would  be  difficult  to  find.  The  covering  of  thorny  creepers 
hid  the  rocks  below,  and  at  each  step  the  soldiers  put  their 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  117 

feet  into  deep  holes  between  the  masses  of  rock  and  fell 
forward,  lacerating  themselves  horribly  with  the  thorns  or 
coming  face  downward  on  one  of  the  sharp-pointed  stakes. 
But  if  without  any  resistance  from  above  the  feat  of  climb- 
ing this  carefully  prepared  barricade  was  difficult,  it  was 
terrible  when  from  the  ridge  above  a  storrn  of  bullets  swept 
down.  It  was  only  for  a  moment  that  the  negroes  exposed 
themselves  in  the  act  of  firing.  Behind,  the  barricade 
was  as  level  and  smooth  as  it  was  difficult  upon  the  outer 
side.  Great  steps,  some  three  feet  wide,  had  been  pre- 
pared of  wood  so  that  the  defenders  could  easily  mount, 
and  standing  in  lines  relieve  each  other  as  they  fired. 
The  stones  of  the  top  series  had  been  carefully  chosen  of  a 
form  so  as  to  leave,  between  each,  crevices  through  which 
the  defenders  could  fire  while  scarcely  exposing  themselves 
to  the  enemy.  The  Spaniards  behind  endeavored  to  cover 
the  advance  of  their  comrades  by  keeping  up  a  heavy  fire 
at  the  summit  of  the  barricade,  and  several  of  the  negroes 
were  shot  through  the  head  in  the  act  of  firing.  Their 
loss,  however,  was  small  in  comparison  to  that  of  the 
assailants,  who  strove  in  vain  to  climb  up  the  thorny  as- 
cent, their  position  being  the  more  terrible  inasmuch  as 
the  fire  from  the  parties  on  the  rocks  above  never  ceased, 
and  stones  kept  up  a  sort  of  bombardment  on  those  in  the 
ravine.  Even  the  fierce  dogs  could  with  difficulty  climb 
the  thorn-covered  barriers,  and  those  who  reached  the  top 
were  instantly  shot  or  stabbed. 

At  last,  after  suffering  very  considerable  loss,  the  Span- 
ish commander  drew  off  his  soldiers,  and  a  wild  yell  of  tri- 
umph rose  from  the  negroes.  The  combat,  however,  had, 
as  the  boys  were  aware,  scarcely  begun,  and  they  now 
waited  to  see  what  the  next  effort  of  the  Spaniards  would 
be.  It  was  an  hour  before  the  latter  again  advanced  to 
the  attack.  This  time  the  troops  were  carrying  large 
bundles  of  dried  grass  and  rushes,  and  although  again 


118  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

suffering  heavily  in  the  attack,  they  piled  these  at  the  foot 
of  the  barricade,  and  in  another  minute  a  flash  of  fire  ran 
up  the  side;  the  smoke  and  flame  for  a  time  separated  the 
defenders  from  their  foes,  and  the  fire  ceased  on  both  sides, 
although  those  above  never  relaxed  their  efforts  to  harass 
the  assailants. 

As  the  Spaniards  had  calculated,  the  flame  of  the  great 
heap  of  straw  communicated  with  the  creepers  and  burned 
them  up  in  its  fiery  tongue,  and  when  the  flames  abated 
the  rocks  lay  open  and  uncovered. 

The  Spaniards  now  with  renewed  hopes  advanced  again 
to  the  attack,  and  this  time  were  able,  although  with 
heavy  loss,  to  make  their  way  up  the  barricade.  When 
they  arrived  within  three  or  four  feet  of  the  top  Ned  gave 
the  word,  and  a  line  of  thirty  powerful  negroes,  each  armed 
with  a  long  pike,  suddenly  arose,  and  with  a  yell  threw 
themselves  over  the  edge  and  dashed  down  upon  the  Span- 
iards; the  latter  struggling  to  ascend,  with  unsteady  foot- 
ing on  the  loose  and  uneven  rocks,  were  unable  for  an 
instant  to  defend  themselves  against  this  assault. 

The  negroes,  barefooted,  had  no  difficulty  on  the  surface 
which  proved  so  fatal  to  the  Spaniards,  and  like  the  crest 
of  a  wave  they  swept  their  opponents  headlong  down  the 
face  of  the  barricade.  The  heavily  armed  Spaniards  fell 
over  each  other,  those  in  front  hurling  those  behind  back- 
ward in  wild  confusion,  and  the  first  line  of  negroes  being 
succeeded  by  another  armed  with  axes  who  completed  the 
work  which  the  first  line  had  begun,  the  slaughter  for  a 
minute  was  terrible. 

For  some  thirty  paces  the  negroes  pursued  their  advan- 
tage, and  then  at  a  loud  shout  from  Ned  turned,  and  with 
a  celerity  equal  to  that  of  their  advance  the  whole  were 
back  over  the  barricade  before  the  Spaniards  in  rear  could 
awaken  from  their  surprise,  and  scarcely  a  shot  was  fired 
as  the  dark  figures  bounded  back  into  shelter. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  119 

This  time  the  Spanish  officer  drew  back  his  men  sullenly; 
he  felt  that  they  had  done  all  that  could  be  expected  of 
them;  upward  of  sixty  men  had  fallen,  it  would  be  vain 
to  ask  them  to  make  the  assault  again.  He  knew  too  that 
by  waiting  the  other  columns  would  be  gradually  approach- 
ing, and  that  on  the  morrow  some  method  of  getting  in 
the  enemy's  rear  would  probably  be  discovered. 

In  the  meantime  he  sent  off  fifty  men  on  either  flank  to 
discover  how  far  its  rocky  wall  extended,  while  trumpeters 
under  strong  guards  were  sent  up  to  the  hilltops  in  the 
rear  and  sounded  the  call  lustily;  musketoons  heavily 
charged  so  as  to  make  as  loud  a  report  as  possible  were 
also  fired  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  other  columns. 

The  boys  were  perfectly  aware  that  they  could  not  hope 
finally  to  defend  this  position.  They  had,  however,  given 
the  Spaniards  a  very  heavy  lesson,  and  the  success  of  the 
defense  had  immensely  raised  the  spirit  and  courage  of 
their  men.  The  signal  was  therefore  given  for  a  retreat, 
and  in  half  an  hour  both  the  Indians  on  the  summit  of  the 
hill  and  the  negroes  behind  the  barricade  had  fallen  back, 
leaving  only  some  half-dozen  to  keep  up  the  appearance  of 
defense,  and  to  bring  back  tidings  of  the  doings  of  the 
enemy,  while  the  rest  hurried  off  to  aid  the  detached  par- 
ties to  inflict  heavy  blows  upon  the  other  columns.  It 
was  found  that  these  were  steadily  approaching,  but  had 
lost  a  good  many  men;  the  reinforcements  enabled  the 
natives  to  make  a  more  determined  resistance,  and  in  one 
or  two  places  the  columns  were  effectually  checked.  The 
reports  when  night  fell  were  that  the  Spaniards  had  alto- 
gether lost  over  two  hundred  men,  but  that  all  their  col- 
umns had  advanced  a  considerable  distance  toward  the 
center  of  the  forest  and  had  halted,  each  as  they  stood, 
and  bivouacked,  keeping  up  huge  fires  and  careful  watches. 

It  formed  no  part,  however,  of  the  boys'  plan  to  attack 
them  thus,  and  when  morning  dawned  the  whole  of  the 


120  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

defenders,  each  taking  different  paths,  as  far  as  possible, 
some  even  making  great  circuits  so  as  to  deceive  the  enemy, 
were  directed  to  make  for  the  central  fortress.  The  inter- 
mediate positions,  several  of  which  were  as  strong  as  the 
barricade  which  they  had  so  well  defended,  were  aban- 
doned, for  the  advance  from  other  quarters  rendered  it 
impossible  to  hold  these. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

BAFFLED. 

BY  midday  all  the  defenders  of  the  forest  were  assembled 
in  the  semicircular  plateau  on  the  face  of  the  hill,  and 
scouts  having  been  placed  near  the  entrance  they  awaited 
the  coming  of  the  enemy.  So  far  as  possible,  every  means 
had  been  taken  to  prevent  the  access  to  their  place  of  re- 
treat being  discovered.  A  stream  had  been  turned  so  as 
to  run  down  a  small  ravine  leading  to  its  approach,  trees 
which  had  been  blown  down  by  the  wind  had  been  previ- 
ously brought  from  a  considerable  distance,  and  these  were 
piled  in  careless  confusion  across  the  gorge  so  as  to  look  as 
if  they  had  fallen  there,  and  give  an  idea  that  no  one  could 
have  passed  that  way.  For  the  next  two  days  all  was 
quiet.  A  scout  upon  the  hilltop  and  others  who  were  told 
off  to  watch  the  Spaniards  reported  that  the  woods  below 
were  being  thoroughly  searched,  that  the  enemy  were  acting 
in  the  most  methodical  way,  the  columns  being  now  in 
close  connection  with  each  other,  the  intermediate  forest 
being  searched  foot  by  foot,  and  that  all  were  converging 
toward  the  central  mountains  of  the  position.  The  dogs 
had  proved  valuable  assistants,  and  these  were  tracking 
the  paths  used  by  them  and  steadily  leading  them  toward 
the  stronghold.  That  they  would  finally  escape  detection 
none  of  the  defenders  had  much  hope.  The  Spaniards 
would  be  sure  that  they  must  be  somewhere  within  their 
line;  and  after  the  loss  suffered  and  the  immense  prepara- 


122  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

tions  made  it  was  certain  that  they  would  not  retire  until 
they  had  solved  the  mystery,  and,  if  possible,  annihilated 
the  forest  bands.  On  the  fourth  day  after  entering  the 
wood  the  Spaniards  came  to  the  point  where  the  barricade 
of  trees  had  been  erected. 

So  skillfully  had  this  been  constructed  that  they  would 
have  retired,  believing  that  there  was  no  path  beyond  this 
little  gorge;  however,  the  restlessness  and  anger  of  the 
dogs  convinced  them  that  there  must  be  something  behind. 
Slowly  a  passage  was  cut  with  axes  through  the  virgin 
forest  on  either  side,  for  the  lesson  they  had  received  had 
checked  their  impetuosity.  They  came  down  at  the  side 
of  the  barricade,  and  thus  having  passed  it,  pressed  forward 
in  steady  array  until  they  came  to  the  foot  of  the  great 
cliff;  here  the  dogs  were  not  long  before  they  pointed  out 
to  the  assailants  the  narrow  path,  scarce  visible,  running 
along  its  face,  and  a  shout  of  satisfaction  from  the  Span- 
iards testified  that  they  now  felt  certain  that  they  had 
caught  their  enemies  in  a  trap. 

Parties  were  sent  off  to  positions  whence  they  could 
obtain  a  good  view  of  the  place,  and  these  soon  reported 
that  the  ledge  continued  to  a  great  opening  in  the  face  of 
the  precipice,  that  in  some  places  logs  had  been  fixed  to 
widen  the  path,  and  that  there  was  plenty  of  room  on  the 
plateau  formed  by  the  retirement  of  the  hill  face  for  a 
large  body  to  have  taken  refuge.  They  also  reported  that 
the  cliffs  rose  behind  this  amphitheater  almost,  if  not  quite 
perpendicularly  for  a  great  height,  and  that  still  higher 
the  bare  rock  fell  away  at  so  steep  an  angle  that  it  would 
be  difficult  in  the  extreme  to  take  up  such  a  position  from 
above  as  would  enable  them  to  keep  up  a  musketry  fire 
or  to  hurl  rocks  upon  the  defenders  of  the  amphitheater. 

When  the  reports  were  considered  by  the  Spauisii  leader 
he  saw  at  once  that  this  was  not  an  enterprise  to  be  under- 
taken rashly.  Men  were  sent  down  to  the  plain  below  to 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  123 

reconuoiter,  while  others  were  dispatched  round  the  moun- 
tain to  see  whether  the  path  extended  across  the  whole 
face  of  the  precipice,  and  also  to  discover,  if  possible, 
whether  the  recess  was  commanded  from  above.  Both  re- 
ports were  unfavorable;  from  the  valley  the  great  natural 
strength  of  the  position  was  manifest,  for  half  a  dozen 
men  could  defend  such  a  path  as  this  against  a  thousand 
by  placing  themselves  behind  an  angle  and  shooting  down 
all  who  turned  the  corner,  while  the  men  from  above  re- 
ported that  the  peak  shelved  so  rapidly  toward  the  top  of 
the  sheer  precipice  that  it  would  be  impossible  to  get  near 
enough  to  the  edge  to  see  down  into  the  amphitheater. 
They  reported,  however,  that  stones  and  rocks  set  going 
would  dash  down  below,  and  that  points  could  be  gained 
from  which  these  missiles  could  be  dispatched  on  their 
errand. 

A  council  of  war  was  held,  and  it  was  determined  in  the 
first  place  to  endeavor  to  force  the  position  by  direct  attack. 
Some  men  of  approved  courage  were  chosen  to  lead  the 
forlorn  hope,  a  number  of  marksmen  with  arrows  and  fire- 
arms were  placed  in  the  valley  to  keep  up  a  fire  upon  any 
who  might  show  themselves  on  the  path,  while  above, 
several  hundreds  of  men  were  sent  up  with  crowbars  to 
loosen  and  hurl  down  rocks. 

The  defenders  on  their  part  were  not  idle.  Two  spots 
had  been  chosen  in  the  pathway  for  the  defense;  at  each 
of  these  the  face  of  the  cliff  extended  sharply  out  in  an 
angle,  and  it  was  on  the  side  of  this  angle  next  to  the 
amphitheater  that  the  preparations  were  made.  Here 
barricades  of  stones  were  heaped  up  on  the  path,  which  at 
this  point  was  some  three  yards  wide;  six  of  the  steadiest 
and  most  courageous  negroes  were  placed  here  with  mus- 
kets and  pikes,  two  of  them  were  to  lie  with  their  guns 
pointed  at  the  protecting  angle,  so  that  the  instant  any 
one  showed  himself  round  the  corner  they  could  open  £re 


124  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

upon  him,  the  others  were  lying  in  readiness  to  assist  or 
to  relieve  those  on  guard.  Either  Gerald  or  Ned  remained 
with  them  always.  A  few  stones  were  thrown  up  on  the 
outside  edge  of  the  path  to  protect  the  defenders  from  the 
shots  of  those  in  the  valley  below,  not  indeed  that  the 
danger  from  this  source  was  very  great,  for  the  face  of  the 
precipice  was  some  eight  hundred  feet  high,  and  the  path 
ran  along  some  four  hundred  from  the  bottom.  With  the 
clumsy  arms  in  use  in  those  days  the  fear  of  any  one  being 
struck  from  below  was  by  no  means  great.  A  similar  bar- 
ricade was  erected  behind,  and  the  negroes  were,  in  case 
of  extreme  necessity,  to  fall  back  from  their  first  position. 
At  the  second  point  an  equal  number  of  men  were  placed. 
Lastly,  where  the  path  ended  at  the  amphitheater,  strong 
barricades  had  been  erected  in  a  sort  of  semicircle,  so  that 
anyone  after  having  forced  the  first  defenses,  would,  as 
he  showed  himself  at  the  entrance  to  the  amphitheater,  be 
exposed  to  the  fire  of  the  whole  of  its  defenders. 

The  position  was  so  strong  that  Ned  and  Gerald  had  no 
fear  whatever  of  its  being  forced.  As  the  time  approached 
when  Ned  expected  an  attack,  the  defenders  of  the  farthest 
barricade  were  strengthened  by  a  considerable  number 
lying  down  upon  the  path;  for  it  was  certain  that  for  the 
first  two  or  three  assaults  the  Spaniards  would  push  mat- 
ters to  the  utmost,  and  that  they  would  not  be  repulsed 
without  severe  fighting. 

So  indeed  it  proved.  Advancing  with  great  caution,1 
along  the  narrow  path  which  was  sometimes  seven  or  eight 
feet  wide,  sometimes  narrowing  to  a  few  inches,  the  leaders 
of  the  party  of  attack  made  their  way  along  until  they 
turned  the  projecting  point,  then  the  guns  of  the  two  men 
on  guard  spoke  out  and  the  two  leaders  fell,  shot  through 
the  body,  over  the  precipice.  Now  that  they  knew  the 
position  of  their  enemy  the  Spaniards  prepared  for  a  rush; 
gathering  themselves  as  closely  as  they  could  together, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  125 

they  pressed  round  the  corner.  Shot  after  shot  rang  out 
from  the  defenders  as  they  turned  it;  but  although  many 
fell,  the  others  pressed  forward  so  numerously  and  bravely 
that  they  could  be  said  fairly  to  have  established  them- 
selves round  the  corner.  The  barricade  now,  however, 
faced  them,  and  behind  this  were  gathered  the  bravest  of 
the  negroes,  led  by  the  boys.  The  barricade,  too,  had 
been  covered  with  thorny  branches  as  had  that  which  they 
had  defended  before,  and  the  Spaniards,  of  whom  only 
some  ten  or  twelve  could  find  fighting  room  round  the 
corner,  were  shot  down  before  they  could  make  any  im- 
pression whatever. 

Bravely  as  they  fought,  it  was  impossible  for  men  to 
maintain  so  unequal  and  difficult  a  fight  as  this,  and  after 
trying  for  an  hour  to  storm  the  barricade,  the  Spaniards 
fell  back,  having  lost  over  fifty  of  the  best  of  their  men. 

In  the  meantime,  with  a  thundering  sound  the  rocks 
were  rolling  down  from  the  summit  of  the  mountain. 
The  greater  portion  of  them  did  not  fall  in  the  amphithe- 
ater at  all,  but,  from  the  impetus  of  their  descent  down 
the  sloping  rocks  above,  shot  far  out  beyond  its  edge. 
Others,  however,  crashed  down  on  to  the  little  plateau; 
but  all  who  were  there  were  lying  so  close  to  the  face  of 
the  rock  that  the  missiles  from  above  went  far  beyond 
them.  From  below  in  the  valley  a  constant  fire  was  kept 
up,  but  this  was  as  innocuous  r.s  the  bombardment  from 
above;  and  when  the  Spaniards  fell  back,  only  three  of 
the  defenders  had  been  in  any  way  injured,  and  thesa  men 
were  hit  by  the  pistol  balls  fired  by  the  assailants  of  the 
barricade. 

When  the  Spaniards  retired,  all  except  the  men  told  off 
for  the  poses  at  the  barricades,  fell  back  to  the  amphithe- 
ater. The  negroes  and  natives  were  both  alike  delighted 
with  the  success  of  the  defense,  and  were  now  perfectly 
confident  of  their  ability  to  hold  out  as  long  as  their  pro- 


126  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

visions  lasted.  There  was  DO  fear  of  want  of  water,  for 
from  the  face  of  the  hill  a  little  stream  trickled  out.  Piles 
of  yams,  bauauas,  sweet-potatoes,  and  other  tropical  fruit 
had  been  collected,  and  a  score  of  sheep,  and  with  care  the 
boys  calculated  that  for  five  weeks  they  could  hold  out. 

The  Spaniards  were  furious  at  the  non-success  of  their 
enterprise,  but  after  reconnoitering  the  position  in  every 
way,  the  commanders  came  to  the  conclusion  that  it  was 
absolutely  impregnable,  and  that  the  only  plan  was  to 
starve  out  the  besieged.  It  did  not  appear  that  there  could 
be  any  other  way  of  retreat,  and  a  small  force  could  watch 
the  path,  as  it  would  be  as  difficult  for  the  besieged  to 
force  their  way  back  by  it  as  for  the  besiegers  to  find  an 
entry. 

The  greater  portion  of  the  force  was  therefore  marched 
home,  a  guard  of  two  hundred  men  being  set  to  watch  the 
point  where  the  path  along  the  precipice  started. 

The  incidents  of  the  five  weeks  which  elapsed  after  the 
siege  began  were  not  important.  It  was  soon  found  that 
the  Spaniards  had  abandoned  the  notion  of  attack;  but 
the  vigilance  of  the  defenders  was  never  relaxed,  for  it  was 
possible  that  at  any  moment  the  enemy,  believing  that 
they  had  been  lulled  into  carelessness,  might  renew  their 
attack. 

Twice,  indeed,  at  nightfall  the  Spaniards  advanced  and 
crept  round  the  point  of  defense,  but  were  each  time  re- 
ceived so  quickly  by  the  fire  of  the  defenders  of  the  barri- 
cade, that  they  were  finally  convinced  that  there  was  no 
hope  whatever  of  catching  them  napping. 

At  the  end  of  five  weeks  it  was  determined  that  the 
time  had  arrived  when  they  should  leave  their  fortress. 
The  Spaniards  had  placed  a  guard  of  fifty  men  near  the 
foot  of  the  precipice,  to  prevent  any  attempt  of  the  be- 
sieged to  descend  its  face  by  means  of  ropes,  but  above  no 
precautions  had  been  taken,  as  it  appeared  impossible  to 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  127 

any  one  looking  at  the  face  of  the  cliff  from  a  distance  that 
a  human  being  could  scale  it.  Thanks,  however,  to  the 
pains  which  had  been  taken  previously,  the  way  was  open. 
In  most  places,  rough  steps  had  been  cut,  in  others  where 
this  was  impossible,  short  stakes  had  been  driven  into 
crevices  of  the  rock  to  form  steps,  and  although  the  ascent 
was  difficult,  it  was  quite  possible  to  lightly  clad  and  active 
men.  The  time  chosen  for  the  attempt  was  just  after 
dusk  had  fallen,  when  it  was  still  light  enough  to  see  close 
at  hand,  but  dark  enough  to  prevent  those  in  the  valley 
observing  what  was  passing.  A  young  moon  was  already 
up,  giving  sufficient  light  to  aid  the  enterprise.  Some  of 
the  most  active  of  the  natives  first  ascended;  these  were 
provided  with  ropes  which  at  every  bend  and  turn  of  the 
ascent  they  lowered  so  as  to  give  assistance  to  those  mount- 
ing behind.  The  strictest  silence  was  enforced,  and  tho 
arms  were  all  wrapped  up  so  as  to  avoid  noise  should  they 
strike  the  rock.  One  by  one  the  men  mounted  in  a  steady 
stream;  all  were  barefooted,  for  Ned  and  Gerald  had  imi- 
tated the  example  of  the  natives,  and  upon  such  a  task  as 
this  the  bare  foot  has  an  infinitely  safer  hold  than  one  shod 
with  leather.  Although  the  cliff  looked  quite  precipitous 
from  a  distance,  in  reality  it  sloped  gently  backward,  and 
the  task  was  far  less  difficult  than  it  appeared  to  be.  The 
most  dangerous  part  indeed  was  that  which  followed  the 
arrival  at  the  top.  The  mountain  sloped  so  steeply  back 
that  it  was  like  climbing  the  roof  of  a  very  steep  house, 
and  hand  and  foot  were  alike  called  into  requisition  to 
enable  them  to  get  forward;  indeed  to  many  it  would  have 
been  impossible  had  not  the  leaders  lowered  their  ropes 
down  from  above,  affording  an  immense  assistance  to  those 
following. 

At  last  the  whole  body  reached  the  top  and  descending 
upon  the  other  side  plunged  into  the  forest.  They  diiected 
their  course  to  a  valley  ten  miles  distant,  where  consider- 


l£g          UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

able  supplies  of  provisions  had  been  stored  up,  and  where 
some  of  their  crops  had  been  planted  a  few  weeks  before 
the  arrival  of  the  Spaniards.  Here  for  two  days  they 
feasted,  secure  that  a  considerable  time  might  elapse  before 
the  Spaniards  discovered  that  they  had  vanished  from  the 
fortress.  Then  they  prepared  to  put  into  execution  the 
,'lan  upon  which  they  had  resolved.  They  knew  that  in 
the  town  there  would  be  no  watch  of  any  sort  kept,  for  all 
believed  them  cooped  up  without  a  chance  of  escape.  The 
four  troops  then,  commanded  as  before,  issued  from  the 
forest  as  the  sun  went  down,  and  marched  toward  the 
town.  It  was  soon  after  midnight  when  they  entered  the 
streets,  and  proceeding  noiselessly  through  them  advanced 
to  the  spot  assigned  to  each.  One  was  to  attack  the  gov- 
ernor's house  and  to  make  him  a  prisoner,  two  others  were 
to  fall  upon  the  barracks  and  to  do  as  much  harm  as  possi- 
ble, while  the  fourth  was  to  proceed  to  the  government 
magazines  of  stores  and  munitions  to  fire  these  at  a  great 
many  places. 

This  programme  was  carried  out  successfully.  The 
guards  at  the  governor's  house  were  overpowered  in  an 
instant,  and  as  it  had  been  surrounded  all  the  inmates 
were  captured.  Those  of  the  men  who  defended  them- 
selves were  cut  down,  but  Gerald  and  Ned  had  insisted 
that  no  unnecessary  slaughter  should  take  place.  The 
party  attacking  the  barracks  had  no  such  instructions;  it 
was  legitimate  for  them  to  inflict  as  much  loss  as  possible 
upon  the  soldiers,  and  when  with  terrible  shouts  the  ne- 
groes broke  in  upon  them,  the  Spaniards,  taken  by  surprise, 
offered  but  a  feeble  resistance.  Large  numbers  of  them 
were  cut  down  before  they  could  rally  or  open  fire  upon 
their  enemies.  As  soon  as  the  resistance  became  serious, 
the  negroes  and  Indians  vanished  as  quickly  as  they  had 
come.  In  the  meantime  the  whole  of  the  town  was  lit  up 
by  sheets  of  fire  rising  from  the  government  magazines. 


UNDER,  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  129 

The  alarm-bells  of  the  churches  tolled  out,  the  shouts  of 
the  frightened  inhabitants  mingled  with  the  yells  of  the 
natives,  and  the  report  of  firearmj  from  all  parts  of  the 
town,  and  the  townspeople  thought  that  a  general  sack 
and  slaughter  was  at  hand. 

The  negroes,  however,  entered  no  private  house,  but  in 
an  hour  from  their  tirst  appearance  they  had  retired  beyond 
the  town  and  were  making  their  way  in  a  solid  and  well- 
ordered  mass  for  the  forest,  bearing  in  their  center  the 
governor  and  two  of  his  sons. 

The  success  of  the  enterprise  had  been  complete.  They 
were  now,  Ned  thought,  in  a  position,  if  not  to  dictate 
terms  to  the  enemy,  at  least  to  secure  for  themselves  an 
immunity  from  attacks.  Day  was  breaking  when  they 
entered  the  hills,  and  an  hour  later  one  of  the  sons  of  the 
governor  was  sent  to  the  party  still  besieging  their  former 
stronghold  to  inform  them  that  the  besieged  had  all  es- 
caped, had  made  a  raid  upon  the  city,  and  had  carried  off 
the  governor,  whose  instructions  to  them  was  that  they 
were  to  at  once  fall  back  to  avoid  being  attacked  by  the 
negroes. 

The  officer  commanding  the  besiegers  was  glad  enough 
to  call  his  men  together  and  to  retire  unharmed  from  the 
forest,  which  now  began  to  inspire  an  almost  superstitious 
fear  in  the  Spaniards,  so  unexpected  and  mysterious  had 
been  the  defeats  inflicted  upon  them  there.  The  gov- 
ernor's son  accompanied  the  troops  back  to  the  city,  and 
was  the  bearer  of  a  missive  from  Ned  to  the  officer  com- 
manding the  troops  and  to  the  inhabitants.  Ned  offered 
upon  the  part  of  the  forest  men,  that  if  the  Spaniards 
would  consent  to  leave  them  unmolested  in  their  forest, 
they  upon  their  part  would  in  the  tirst  place  release  the 
governor,  and  in  the  second,  promise  that  no  acts  of  vio- 
lence or  raids  of  any  kind  should  be  made  beyond  its 
boundaries.  The  question  of  fugitive  slaves  who  might 


130  VNDtik  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

seek  refuge  among  them  was  to  be  discussed  at  a  meeting 
between  the  heads  of  each  party,  should  the  proposal  be 
accepted.  The  governor  sent  a  line  on  his  part  to  say  that 
he  was  well  treated,  that  he  authorized  them  to  enter  into 
any  negotiations  which  they  might  think  fit,  adding,  that 
in  case  they  should  decide  to  refuse  the  offer  made  them, 
no  thought  of  his  safety  should  be  allowed  for  an  instant 
to  sway  their  notions. 

It  was  two  days  before  the  messenger  returned.  Several 
stormy  meetings  had  taken  place  in  the  town.  The  offi- 
cers were  for  the  most  paft  anxious  to  renew  the  fighting. 
They  were  intensely  mortified  at  the  idea  of  the  forces  of 
Spain  being  compelled  to  treat  upon  something  like  even 
terms  with  a  handful  of  escaped  slaves,  and  would  have 
again  marched  the  troops  into  the  forest  and  renewed  the 
war.  The  townspeople,  however,  were  strongly  opposed 
to  this.  They  had  suffered  immensely  already  by  the  de- 
struction of  the  outlying  plantations  and  haciendas,  and 
the  events  of  the  attack  upon  the  town  showed  that  there 
was  no  little  danger  of  the  whole  place  being  burned  to 
the  ground.  They  were  therefore  eager  in  the  extreme  to 
make  terms  with  this  active  and  ubiquitous  enemy.  The 
troops,  too,  were  by  no  means  eager  to  attempt  another 
entry  into  the  forest.  They  had  fared  so  ill  heretofore 
that  they  shrank  from  another  encounter;  there  was  neither 
glory  nor  booty  to  be  obtained,  and  warfare  such  as  this 
was  altogether  unsuited  to  their  habits.  Their  discipline 
was  useless,  and  they  were  so  bewildered  by  the  tactics  of 
their  active  foes  that  there  was  a  very  strong  feeling 
among  them  in  favor  of  making  terms.  The  council  sat 
the  whole  day  and  finally  the  pacific  party  prevailed. 

The  deputation  consisting  of  the  officer  commanding 
the  troops,  of  the  ecclesiastic  of  highest  rank  in  the  town, 
and  of  one  of  the  principal  merchants,  proceeded  to  the 
forest.  When  they  were  seen  by  the  lookout  to  be  ap- 


UNDER  DRAKE  >S  tfLAQ.  131 

preaching,  Ned  and  Gerald  with  the  leading  native  and 
negro  proceeded  to  meet  them.  The  details  were  soon 
arranged  upon  the  basis  which  had  heen  suggested.  The 
forest  men  were  to  enjoy  their  freedom  unmolested.  They 
were  to  be  allowed  to  cultivate  land  on  the  edge  of  the 
forest,  and  it  was  forbidden  to  any  Spaniard  to  enter  their 
limits  without  previously  applying  for  a  pass.  They  on 
their  part  promised  to  abstain  from  all  aggression  in  any 
shape.  The  question  of  runaways  was  then  discussed. 
This  was  by  far  the  most  difficult  part  of  the  negotiations. 
The  Spaniards  urged  that  they  could  not  tolerate  that  an 
asylum  should  be  offered  to  all  who  chose  to  desert  from 
the  plantations.  The  boys  saw  the  justice  of  this,  and 
finally  it  was  arranged  that  the  case  of  every  slave  who 
made  for  the  forest  should  be  investigated,  that  the  owners 
should  themselves  come  to  lay  a  formal  complaint  of  their 
case,  that  the  slave  should  reply,  and  each  might  produce 
witnesses.  The  negro  was  to  be  given  up  unless  he  could 
prove  that  he  had  been  treated  with  gross  cruelty,  in  which 
case  he  was  to  be  allowed  protection  in  the  forest. 

These  preliminaries  settled,  a  short  document  embodying 
them  was  drawn  up  in  duplicate,  and  these  treaties  were 
signed  by  the  three  Spaniards  who  formed  the  deputation 
and  by  the  governor  on  the  one  side,  and  by  the  four  rep- 
resentatives of  the  forest  men  on  the  other. 

Thus  ended  the  first  successful  resistance  to  Spanish 
power  among  the  islands  of  the  western  seas. 

The  governor  and  his  son  then  left  for  the  city,  and  the 
forest  men  retired  to  what  was  now  their  country.  Ned 
and  Gerald  impressed  upon  their  allies  the  importance  of 
observing  strictly  the  conditions  of  peace,  and  at  the  same 
time  of  continuing  their  exercises  in  arms  and  maintaining 
their  discipline.  They  pointed  out  to  them  that  a  treaty 
of  this  kind,  extorted  as  it  were  from  one,  and  that  the 
strongest  of  the  contracting  powers,  was  certain  not  to 


132  UNDER  DHAKE'8  FLAG. 

have  long  duration.  The  Spaniards  would  smart  at  the 
humiliation  which  had  in  their  opinion  befallen  them,  and 
although  the  fugitive  clause  might  for  some  time  act  favor- 
ably, it  was  sure  sooner  or  later  to  be  a  bone  of  contention. 
They  impressed  upon  them  also  that  although  they  might, 
as  had  been  shown,  achieve  successes  for  a  time,  yet  that 
in  the  long  run  the  power  of  the  Spaniards  must  prevail, 
and  that  nothing  short  of  extermination  awaited  them; 
therefore  he  urged  the  strictest  adherence  to  the  treaty, 
and  at  the  same  time  a  preparedness  for  the  recommence- 
ment of  hostilities. 

Some  mouths  passed  without  incident,  and  the  relations 
between  the  little  community  in  the  mountains  and  the 
Spaniards  became  more  pacific.  The  latter  found  that 
the  natives  if  left  alone  did  them  no  damage.  Bad  masters 
learned  that  a  course  of  ill  treatment  of  their  slaves  was 
certain  to  be  followed  by  their  flight,  and  upon  the  bad 
treatment  being  proved,  these  found  shelter  among  the 
mountains.  Upon  the  other  hand,  the  owners  who  treated 
their  slaves  with  kindness  and  forbearance  found  that  if 
these  took  to  the  mountains  in  a  fit  of  restlessness,  a  shelter 
there  was  refused  them. 

Upon  the  edge  of  the  forest  patches  of  plantation  ground 
made  their  appearance,  and  the  treaty  was  upon  the  whole 
well  observed  on  both  sides. 

It  was  about  a  year  after  they  had  taken  to  the  hills 
that  news  reached  the  boys  that  an  English  ship  had  come 
into  those  waters.  It  was  brought  them  across  at  an  island 
by  some  Sirneroons  who  had  been  where  the  English  ship 
anchored.  They  said  that  it  was  commanded  by  Master  John 
Oxeuford.  The  boys  knew  him,  as  he  had  been  on  board 
Captain  Francis  Brake's  ship  during  the  last  expedition, 
and  they  determined  to  make  an  effort  to  join  him.  He 
had,  however,  left  the  island  before  the  natives  started 
with  the  news,  and  they  made  an  arrangement  with  them 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  133 

to  convey  them  across  to  that  place,  when  it  should  be 
learned  that  the  vessel  was  returning  or  was  again  there. 

It  was  not  long  before  they  were  tilled  with  grief  at  the 
news  that  reached  them,  although  they  felt  not  a  little 
thankful  that  they  had  not  been  able  to  join  Captain 
Oxenford  when  he  first  reached  the  islands. 

This  adventurous  seaman  had,  after  the  return  to  Eng- 
land of  Captain  Francis  Drake's  expedition,  waited  for 
some  time  on  shore,  and  then  fretting  under  forced  inac- 
tivity— for  Captain  Drake  had  for  the  time  abandoned  any 
project  which  he  had  entertained  of  a  return  to  the  Span- 
ish seas,  and  had  engaged  in  a  war  in  Ireland — determined 
to  equip  an  expedition  of  his  own  with  the  assistance  of 
several  of  those  who  had  sailed  in  the  last  voyage  with 
him,  and  of  some  Devonshire  gentlemen  who  thought  that 
a  large  booty  might  be  made  out  of  the  venture. 

He  equipped  a  sloop  of  one  hundred  and  forty  tons  bur- 
den and  sailed  for  Darien.  When  he  arrived  at  this  isth- 
mus he  laid  up  his  ship  and  marched  inland,  guided  by 
Indians.  After  traveling  twelve  leagues  among  the  moun- 
tains, he  came  to  a  small  river  running  down  into  the 
Pacific.  Here  he  and  his  comrades  built  a  boat,  launched 
it  in  the  stream,  and  dropped  down  into  the  bay  of  Panama, 
then  he  rowed  to  the  Isle  of  Pearls,  and  there  captured  a 
small  bark  from  Quito  with  sixty  pounds  of  gold.  This 
raised  the  spirits  of  the  adventurers,  and  six  days  later 
they  took  another  bark  with  a  hundred  and  sixty  pounds 
of  silver.  They  then  set  off  in  quest  of  pearls.  They 
searched  for  a  few  days,  but  did  not  find  them  in  propor- 
tion to  their  expectations;  they  therefore  determined  to 
return,  and  re-entered  the  mouth  of  the  river  they  had 
descended.  Here  they  loosed  the  prizes  they  had  taken 
and  let  them  go. 

The  delay  at  Pearl  Island  was  a  mistake  and  a  misfor- 
tune. Captain  Oxenford  should  have  known  that  the 


134  UNDER  DHA&&S  FLAG. 

Spanish  authorities  of  the  mainland  would,  when  they 
heard  that  a  single  boat's  load  of  Englishmen  was  ravaging 
their  commerce,  make  a  great  effort  to  capture  him,  and 
his  attack  should  have  been  swift  and  determined,  and  his 
retreat  made  without  a  halt.  The  fortnight  which  had 
been  allowed  to  slip  away  caused  his  ruin.  The  news  of 
their  presence  speedily  arrived  at  Panama.  Captain  Ortuga 
was  dispatched  with  four  barks  in  search  of  them,  and  fall- 
ing in  with  the  liberated  prizes  learned  the  course  that  the 
English  had  taken.  The  river  had  three  branches,  and 
the  Spaniard  would  have  been  much  puzzled  to  know 
which  to  ascend,  but  the  carelessness  of  the  adventurers 
gave  him  a  clew,  for  as  he  lay  with  his  boats,  wondering 
which  river  he  should  ascend,  he  saw  floating  on  the  water 
large  quantities  of  feathers.  These  were  sufficient  indica^ 
tions  of  a  camp  on  the  banks,  and  he  at  once  followed  that 
branch  of  the  stream. 

In  four  days  he  came  upon  the  boat,  which  was  hauled 
upon  the  sand,  with  only  six  men  with  her.  They  were 
lying  asleep  on  the  bank,  and  the  coming  of  the  Spaniards 
took  them  completely  by  surprise,  and  one  of  them  was 
killed  before  he  could  make  his  escape  into  the  woods. 
The  rest  got  off.  The  Spaniards  left  twenty  men  to  guard 
the  boat,  and  with  eighty  others  went  up  the  country. 
Half  a  league  away  they  found  some  huts,  and  in  these 
the  treasures  of  gold  and  silver  which  the  English  had 
captured  were  discovered. 

Satisfied  with  having  recovered  these,  Captain  Ortuga 
was  about  to  return  to  the  river  with  his  men  when  Oxen- 
ford  with  the  English  and  two  hundred  Simeroons  attacked 
them.  The  Spaniards  fought  bravely,  and  the  Simeroons 
would  not  stand  against  their  fire.  The  English  struggled 
desperately,  eleven  of  these  were  killed,  and  the  Simeroons 
took  to  their  heels.  Oxenford  and  a  few  of  his  companions 
escaped  and  made  their  way  back  toward  the  spot  where 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  135 

they  had  left  their  ship.  News  of  what  was  going  on  had, 
however,  been  sent  across  from  Panama  to  Nombre  de 
Dios,  and  four  barks  from  that  port  had  put  out,  and  had 
found  and  taken  Oxenford's  ship.  A  band  of  a  hundred 
and  fifty  men  scoured  the  mountains,  and  into  the  hands 
of  these  Captain  Oxenford  and  his  companions  fell.  All 
of  them  were  executed  on  the  spot  except  Oxeuford,  the 
master,  the  pilot,  and  five  boys.  These  were  taken  to 
Panama,  where  the  three  men  were  executed,  the  lives  of 
the  five  boys  being  spared. 

This  news  was  a  sore  blow  to  the  lads,  who  had  hoped 
much  to  be  able  to  reach  the  ship  and  to  return  to  England 
in  her.  The  delay,  however,  was  not  long,  for  a  few  weeks 
afterward  came  the  news  that  another  English  ship  was  in 
those  waters.  A  party  of  Simeroons  offered  to  take  Ned 
and  Gerald  thither  in  their  boat,  and  they  determined  to 
avail  themselves  of  the  offer. 

Great  was  the  lamentation  among  the  community  in  the 
forest  when  the  news  that  their  leaders  were  about  to  leave 
became  known.  The  simple  Indians  assembled  around 
them,  and  wept  and  used  every  entreaty  and  prayer  to 
change  their  resolution.  However,  the  boys  pointed  out 
to  them  that  they  had  already  been  absent  near  three  years 
from  home,  and  that,  as  the  settlers  were  now  able  to  de- 
fend themselves,  and  had  earned  the  respect  of  the  Span- 
iards, they  would,  if  they  continued  their  present  course 
of  avoiding  giving  any  cause  of  complaint  to  the  whites, 
no  doubt  be  allowed  to  live  in  peace.  They  had,  too,  now 
learned  the  tactics  that  should  be  pursued  in  case  of  diffi- 
culty, and  by  adhering  to  these,  the  boys  assured  them 
that  they  might  rely  upon  tiring  out  the  Spaniards.  Some 
of  the  negroes  were  in  favor  of  retaining  the  English 
leaders  by  force,  but  this  was  objected  to  by  the  majority. 
Many  of  the  Indians  possessed  gold  which  had  been  the 
property  of  their  ancestors  before  the  arrival  of  the  Span- 


136  UNDER  DRAKK'8  FLAG. 

iards,  and  some  of  these  treasures  were  now  dug  up  and 
the  boys  were  presented  with  a  great  store  of  pretty  orna- 
ments and  other  workmanship  of  the  natives.  Much  rough 
gold  was  also  placed  on  board  their  canoe,  and  a  great  por- 
tion of  the  dwellers  of  the  hills  marched  down  at  night 
with  them  to  the  point  of  embarkation,  a  lonely  creek  far 
from  the  settlement  of  the  Spaniards,  to  bid  them  farewell. 

The  boys  themselves  were  affected  by  the  sorrow  of  their 
friends,  and  by  the  confidence  which  these  had  placed  in 
them,  and  they  promised  that  should  they  return  to  those 
parts  they  would  assuredly  pay  a  visit  to  them  again  in  the 
hills.  Before  leaving  they  had  seen  that  two  of  the  worthi- 
est and  wisest  of  the  natives  were  chosen  as  leaders,  and  to 
these  all  the  rest  had  sworn  an  oath,  promising  to  obey  their 
orders  in  all  respects.  They  had  constantly  acted  with 
the  boys,  arid  had,  indeed,  been  their  chief  advisers  in  the 
matters  internal  to  the  tribe,  and  the  lads  had  little  doubt 
that  for  some  time  at  least  things  would  go  well  in  the 
mountains;  as  to  the  ultimate  power  of  the  refugees  to 
maintain  their  independence,  this  must,  they  felt,  depend 
upon  events  beyond  them.  If  the  Spaniards  were  left  at 
peace  and  undisturbed  by  English  adventurers  or  other 
troubles,  there  was  little  doubt,  sooner  or  later,  they  would 
destroy  the  whole  of  the  natives  of  this  island,  as  they  had 
destroyed  them  in  almost  every  place  where  they  had  come 
in  contact  with  them.  However,  the  boys  had  the  satis- 
faction of  knowing  that  they  had  been  the  means  of  at 
least  prolonging  the  existence  of  this  band,  and  of  putting 
off  the  evil  day,  perhaps  for  years  to  come. 

The  Simeroons  paddled  out  from  the  creek,  and  hoisting 
the  sail  the  boat  merrily  danced  over  the  water,  and  the 
boys  felt  their  spirits  rise  at  the  hope  of  seeing  their  coun- 
trymen and  hearing  their  native  tongue  again  after  eight- 
een months  passed  absolutely  separated  from  all  civilized 
communion.  After  two  days'  sailing  and  paddling  they 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  137 

reached  the  bay  where  the  natives  had  reported  the  Eng- 
lish ship  to  be  lying,  and  here,  to  their  great  delight,  they 
found  the  Maria,  Captain  Cliff,  lying  at  anchor. 

Ned  and  Gerald,  when  they  explained  who  they  were, 
were  received  with  great  joy  and  amazement.  The  story 
of  their  loss  had  been  told  in  England,  and  the  captain, 
who  came  from  the  neighborhood  where  Gerald's  father 
dwelt,  reported  that  the  family  had  Jong  mourned  him  as 
dead.  He  himself  was  bent,  not  upon  a  buccaneering  voy- 
age, although,  no  doubt,  if  a  rich  ship  had  fallen  into  his 
hands  he  would  have  made  no  scruple  in  taking  it,  but  his 
object  was  to  trade  with  the  natives,  and  to  gather  a  store 
of  such  goods  as  the  islands  furnished  in  exchange  for 
those  of  English  make.  He  had,  too,  fetched  slaves  from 
the  western  coast  of  Africa,  and  had  disposed  of  them  to 
much  advantage,  and  the  ship  was  now  about  to  proceed 
on  her  way  home,  each  man's  share  of  the  profits  of  the 
expedition  amounting  to  a  sum  which  quite  answered  his 
expectations. 

It  was  two  months  later  before  the  boys,  to  their  great 
delight,  again  saw  the  hills  behind  Plymouth.  None  who 
had  seen  them  embark  in  the  Swaune  would  have  recog- 
nized in  the  stalwart  young  fellows  who  now  stepped  ashore 
on  the  hove  the  lads  who  then  set  sail.  Nearly  three  years 
had  passed,  the  sun  of  the  tropics  had  burned  their  faces 
almost  to  a  mahogany  color;  their  habit  of  command 
among  the  natives  had  given  them  an  air  and  bearing  be- 
yond their  years;  and  though  Ned  was  but  eighteen,  and 
Gerald  a  little  older,  they  carried  themselves  like  men  of 
mature  years. 

It  had  been,  indeed,  no  slight  burden  that  they  had  en- 
dured. The  fighting  which  had  formed  the  first  epoch  of 
their  stay  in  the  island,  serious  as  it  had  been,  had  been 
less  wearing  to  them  than  the  constant  care  and  anxiety  of 
the  subsequent  quiet  time.  The  arrival  of  each  fugitive 


138  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

slave  was  a  source  of  fresh  danger,  and  it  had  often  needed 
all  their  authority  to  prevent  the  younger  and  wilder  spirits 
of  their  little  community  from  indulging  in  raids  upon  the 
crops  of  the  Spaniards. 

Once  in  Plymouth,  the  lads  said  good-by  to  each  other, 
promising  to  meet  again  in  a  few  days.  Each  then  pro- 
ceeded to  his  home.  Ned,  indeed,  found  that  he  had  a 
home  no  longer;  for  on  reaching  the  village  he  found  that 
his  father  had  died  a  few  months  after  his  departure  and  a 
new  pedagogue  had  taken  his  place  and  occupied  the  little 
cottage. 

The  shock  was  a  great  one  although  hardly  unexpected, 
for  his  father's  health  had  not  been  strong,  and  the  thought 
that  he  would  not  be  alive  when  lie  returned  had  often 
saddened  Ned's  mind  during  his  absence.  He  found, 
however,  no  lack  of  welcome  in  the  village.  There  were 
many  of  his  school  friends  still  there,  and  these  looked 
with  astonishment  and  admiration  on  the  bronzed,  military- 
looking  man,  and  could  scarce  believe  that  he  was  their 
playmate  the  "Otter."  Here  Ned  tarried  a  few  days,  and 
then,  according  to  his  promise  to  Gerald,  started  for  the 
part  of  the  country  where  he  lived,  and  received  a  most 
cordial  welcome  from  the  father  and  family  of  his  friend. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  139 


CHAPTER  X. 

SOUTHWARD   HO! 

UPON  making  inquiries  Ned  Hearne  found  that  Captain 
Drake  had,  upon  the  return  of  his  expedition,  set  aside 
the  shares  of  the  prize-money  of  Gerald  Summers,  himself, 
and  the  men  who  were  lost  in  the  wreck  of  the  prize,  in 
hopes  that  they  would  some  day  return  to  claim  them. 
Upon  the  evidence  given  hy  Gerald  and  himself  of  the 
death  of  the  others,  their  shares  were  paid  by  the  bankers 
at  Plymouth  who  had  charge  of  them  to  their  families, 
while  Ned  and  Gerald  received  their  portions. 

Owing  to  the  great  mortality  which  had  taken  place 
among  the  crews  each  of  the  lads  received  a  sum  of  nearly 
a  thousand  pounds,  the  total  capture  amounting  to  a  value 
of  over  a  million  of  money.  As  boys,  they  each  received 
the  half  of  a  man's  share,  the  officers  of  course  had  received 
larger  shares,  and  the  merchants  who  had  lent  money  to 
get  up  the  expedition,  gained  large  profits. 

Ned  thought  at  first  of  embarking  his  money  in  the 
purchase  of  a  share  in  a  trading  vessel,  and  of  taking  to 
that  service;  but  hearing  that  Captain  Drake  intended  to 
fit  out  another  expedition,  he  decided  to  wait  for  that 
event,  and  to  make  one  more  voyage  to  the  Spanish  main 
before  determining  on  his  future  course.  Having  there- 
fore his  time  on  his  hands  he  accepted  the  invitation  of 
the  parents  of  his  three  boy  friends,  Tom  Tressilis,  Gerald 
Summers,  and  Reuben  Gall.  He  was  most  warmly  wel- 


140  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

corned,  for  both  Tom  and  Gerald  declared  that  they  owed 
their  lives  to  him.  He  spent  several  weeks  at  each  of  their 
homes,  and  then  returned  to  Plymouth,  where  he  put 
himself  into  the  hands  of  a  retired  master  mariner  to  learn 
navigation  and  other  matters  connected  with  his  profession, 
and  occupied  his  spare  time  in  studying  the  usual  branches 
of  a  gentleman's  education. 

It  was  some  months  before  Captain  Francis  returned 
from  Ireland,  but  when  he  did  so  he  at  once  began  his 
preparations  for  his  next  voyage.  The  expedition  was  to 
be  on  a  larger  scale  than  that  in  which  he  had  formerly 
embarked,  for  he  had  formed  the  resolve  to  sail  round 
Cape  Horn,  to  coast  along  north  to  the  Spanish  settlements 
upon  the  great  ocean  he  had  seen  from  the  tree  top  in  the 
Isthmus  of  Darien;  and  then,  if  all  went  well,  to  sail  still 
further  north,  double  the  northern  coasts  of  America,  and 
to  find  some  short  way  by  which  English  ships  might  reach 
the  Pacific.  These  projects  were,  however,  known  to  but 
few,  as  it  was  considered  of  the  utmost  importance  to  pre- 
vent them  from  being  noised  abroad,  lest  they  might  come 
to  the  ears  of  the  Spaniards,  and  so  put  them  upon  their' 
guard. 

In  spite  of  the  great  losses  of  men  upon  the  former  ex- 
pedition, the  number  of  volunteers  who  came  forward 
directly  Captain  Drake's  intention  to  sail  again  to  the 
Indies  was  known,  was  greatly  in  excess  of  the  require,- 
ments.  All,  however,  who  had  sailed  upon  the  last  voyage, 
and  were  willing  again  to  venture,  were  enrolled,  and  Cap- 
tain Drake  expressed  a  lively  pleasure  at  meeting  Ned 
Hearne  and  Gerald  Summers,  whom  he  had  given  up  as 
lost.  The  expenses  of  the  expedition  were  defrayed  partly 
from  the  funds  of  Captain  Drake  and  his  officers,  partly 
by  moneys  subscribed  by  merchants  and  others  who  took 
shares  in  the  speculation.  These  were  termed  adventurers. 
Ned  embarked  five  hundred  pounds  of  his  prize-money  in 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  141 

the  venture,  as  did  each  of  his  three  friends.  He  was  now 
nineteen,  and  a  broad  strongly  built  young  fellow.  His 
friends  were  all  somewhat  older,  and  all  four  were  entered 
by  Captain  Francis  as  men,  and  ranked  as  "gentlemen 
adventurers,"  and  would  therefore  receive  their  full  share 
of  prize-money. 

On  the  12th  of  November,  1577,  the  fleet  sailed  out  of 
Plymouth  Sound  amid  the  salutes  of  the  guns  of  the  fort 
there.  It  consisted  of  five  ships  :  the  Pelican,  of  one 
hundred  tons,  the  flagship,  commanded  by  Captain- 
general  Francis  Drake;  the  Elizabeth,  eighty  tons,  Cap- 
tain John  Winter;  the  Marigold,  a  bark  of  thirty  tons, 
Captain  John  Thomas;  the  Swan,  a  flyboat  of  fifty  tons, 
Captain  John  Chester;  and  the  Christopher,  a  pinnace  of 
fifteen  tons,  Captain  Thomas  Moore. 

The  voyage  began  unfortunately,  for  meeting  a  head- 
wind they  were  forced  to  put -into  Falmouth,  where  a 
tempest  ill-treated  them  sorely.  Some  of  the  ships  had  to 
cut  away  their  masts,  and  the  whole  were  obliged  to  put 
back  into  Plymouth  to  refit,  entering  the  harbor  in  a  very 
different  state  to  that  in  which  they  had  left  it  a  fortnight 
before.  Every  exertion  was  made,  and  after  a  few  days' 
delay  the  fleet  again  set  sail. 

They  carried  an  abundance  of  stores  of  all  kinds,  together 
with  large  quantities  of  fancy  articles  as  presents  for  the 
savage  people  whom  they  might  meet  in  their  voyaging. 
The  second  start  was  more  prosperous  than  the  first,  and 
after  touching  at  various  points  on  the  west  coast  of  Africa 
they  shaped  their  way  to  the  mouth  of  the  La  Plata,  sail- 
ing through  the  Cape  de  Verde  Islands,  where  their 
appearance  caused  no  slight  consternation  among  the  Por- 
tuguese. However,  as  they  had  more  important  objects 
in  view  they  did  not  stop  to  molest  any  of  the  principal 
towns,  only  landing  at  quiet  bays  to  procure  a  fresh  supply 
of  water,  and  to  obtain  fruit  and  vegetables,  which  in 


142  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

those  days,  when  ships  only  carried  salt  provisions,  were 
absolutely  necessary  to  preserve  the  crews  in  health.  All 
were  charmed  with  the  beauty  and  fertility  of  these  islands, 
which  were  veritable  gardens  of  tropical  fruits,  and  they 
left  these  seas  with  regret. 

The  fleet  reached  the  La  Plata  in  safety,  but  made  no 
long  stay  there,  for  the  extreme  shallowuess  of  the  water 
and  the  frequency  and  abundance  of  the  shoals  in  the  river 
made  the  admiral  fear  for  the  safety  of  his  ships;  and  ac- 
cordingly, after  a  few  days'  rest,  the  anchors  were  weighed 
and  the  fleet  proceeded  down  the  coast.  For  some  time 
they  sailed  without  adventure,  save  that  once  or  twice  in 
the  storms  they  encountered,  one  or  other  of  the  ships 
were  separated  from  the  rest.  After  several  weeks'  sailing 
they  put  into  the  Bay  of  St.  Julian  on  the  coast  of  Pata- 
gonia. Here  the  crews  landed  to  obtain  water.  Soon  the 
natives  came  down  to  meet  them.  These  were  tall,  active 
men,  but  yet  far  from  being  the  giants  which  the  Spaniards 
had  represented  them,  few  of  them  being  taller  than  a  tall 
Englishman.  They  were  dressed  in  the  scantiest  clothing 
— the  men  wearing  a  short  apron  made  of  skin,  with  an- 
other skin  as  a  mantle  over  one  shoulder,  the  women 
wearing  a  kind  of  petticoat  made  of  soft  skin.  The  men 
carried  bows  and  arrows  and  spears,  and  were  painted 
strangely— one  half  the  head  and  body  being  painted  white, 
the  other  black.  Their  demeanor  was  perfectly  friendly, 
and  Captain  Drake,  fearing  no  harm,  walked  some  distance 
inland,  and  many  of  those  not  engaged  in  getting  water 
into  the  boats  also  strolled  away  from  the  shore.  Among 
those  who  rambled  farthest  were  Ned  and  Tom  Tressilis, 
together  with  another  gentleman  adventurer  named  Ar- 
buckle.  When  they  left  Captain  Francis,  the  armorer, 
who  had  brought  a  bow  on  shore  with  him,  was  showing 
the  natives  how  much  farther  our  English  bow  could  carry 
than  the  native  weapon. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  143 

Wondering  what  the  country  was  like  beyond  the  hills, 
the  little  party  ascended  the  slope.  Just  as  they  reached 
the  top  they  heard  a  shout.  Looking  back  they  saw  that 
all  was  confusion. 

The  string  of  the  armorer's  bow  had  snapped,  and  the 
natives,  knowing  nothing  of  guns,  believed  that  the  party 
were  now  unarmed.  As  the  armorer  was  restringing  his 
bow  one  of  the  natives  shot  an  arrow  at  him,  and  he  fell 
mortally  wounded.  One  standing  near  now  raised  his 
arquebus,  but  before  he  could  fire  he  too  was  pierced  by 
two  arrows  and  fell  dead.  The  admiral  himself  caught  up 
the  arquebus  and  shot  the  man  who  had  first  fired. 

The  little  party  on  the  hill  had  been  struck  with  amaze- 
ment and  consternation  at  the  sudden  outburst,  and  were 
recalled  to  a  sense  of  their  danger  by  the  whiz  of  an  arrow, 
which  struck  Master  Arbuckle  in  the  heart,  and  at  the 
same  moment  a  dozen  of  the  savages  made  their  appearance 
from  among  the  trees  below  them.  Seeing  the  deadliness 
of  their  aim,  and  that  he  and  Tom  would  be  shot  down  at 
once  before  they  could  get  to  close  quarters,  Ned  turned 
to  fly. 

"Quick,  Tom,  for  your  life!" 

Fortunately  they  stood  on  the  very  top  of  the  ascent,  so 
that  a  single  bound  backward  took  them  out  of  sight  and 
range  of  their  enemies.  There  was  a  wood  a  few  hundred 
yards  inland,  apparently  of  great  extent,  and  toward  this 
the  lads  ran  at  the  top  of  their  speed.  The  savages  had 
to  climb  the  hill,  and  when  they  reached  its  crest  the  fugi- 
tives were  out  of  bowshot  range. 

A  yell  broke  from  them  as  they  saw  the  lads,  but  these 
had  made  the  best  use  of  their  time  and  reached  the  wood 
some  two  hundred  yards  ahead  of  their  pursuers.  Ned 
dashed  into  the  undergrowth  and  tore  his  way  through  it, 
Tom  close  at  his  heels.  Sometimes  they  came  to  open 
spaces,  and  here  each  time  Ned  changed  the  direction  of 


144  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

their  flight,  choosing  spots  where  they  could  take  to  the 
underwood  without  showing  any  sign,  such  as  broken 
boughs,  of  their  entrance. 

After  an  hour's  running  the  yells  and  shouts,  which  had 
at  first  seemed  close  behind,  gradually  lessened,  and  were 
now  but  faintly  heard.  Then,  utterly  exhausted,  the  lads 
threw  themselves  on  the  ground. 

In  a  few  minutes,  however,  Ned  rose  again. 

"Come,  Tom,"  he  said,  "we  must  keep  on.  These  fel- 
lows will  trace  us  with  the  sagacity  of  dogs;  but  clever  as 
they  may  be,  it  takes  time  to  follow  a  track.  We  must 
keep  on  now.  When  it  gets  dark,  which  will  be  in  another 
hour  or  so,  they  will  be'  able  to  follow  us  no  longer,  and 
we  can  then  take  it  easily." 

"Do  as  you  think  best,  Ned;  you  are  accustomed  to  this 
kind  of  thing." 

Without  another  word  they  started  off  at  a  run  again, 
keeping  as  nearly  as  they  could  a  straight  course,  for  Ned's 
experience  in  forest  life  enabled  him  to  do  this  when  one 
unused  to  woodcraft  would  have  lost  all  idea  of  direction. 
The  fact,  however,  that  the  mosses  grew  on  the  side  of  the 
trees  looking  east,  was  guide  enough  for  him,  for  he  knew 
that  the  warm  breezes  from  the  sea  would  attract  them, 
while  the  colder  inland  winds  would  have  an  opposite  effect. 
Just  as  it  was  getting  dark  they  emerged  from  the  wood, 
and  could  see  stretching  far  before  them  an  undulating 
and  almost  treeless  country. 

"Fortunately  there  has  been  no  rain  for  some  time,  and 
the  ground  is  as  hard  as  iron,"  Ned  said.  "On  the  damp 
soil  under  the  trees  they  will  track  our  steps,  but  we  shall 
leave  no  marks  here;  and  in  the  morning,  when  they  trace 
us  to  this  spot,  they  will  be  at  fault." 

So  saying,  he  struck  off  across  the  country.  For  some 
hours  they  walked,  the  moon  being  high  and  enabling 
them  to  make  their  way  without  difficulty.  At  last  they 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&.  145 

came  upon  a  clump  of  bushes,  and  here  Ned  proposed  a 
halt.  Tom  was  perfectly  ready,  for  they  had  now  walked 
and  run  for  many  hours,  and  both  were  thoroughly  fa- 
tigued; for  after  so  long  a  voyage  in  a  small  ship  they 
were  out  of  condition  for  a  long  journey  on  foot. 

"The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  light  a  fire,"  Ned  said;  "for 
it  is  bitterly  cold." 

"But  how  do  you  mean  to  light  it?" 

"I  have  flint  and  steel  in  my  pouch,"  Ned  said,  "and  a 
flask  of  powder  for  priming  my  pistols  in  my  sash  here. 
It  is  a  pity,  indeed,  we  did  not  put  our  pistols  into  our 
belts  when  we  came  ashore.  But  even  if  I  had  not  had 
the  flint  and  steel  I  could  have  made  a  fire  by  rubbing  two 
dead  sticks  together.  You  forget  I  have  lived  among 
savages  for  a  year." 

"You  don't  think  that  it  is  dangerous  to  light  a  fire?" 

"Not  in  the  least.  It  was  dark  when  we  left  the  wood, 
and  they  must  have  halted  on  our  track  far  back  among 
the  trees  to  follow  it  up  by  daylight ;  besides,  we  have  walked 
five  hours  since  then,  and  must  be  twenty  miles  away,  and 
we  have  crossed  five  or  six  hills.  Find  a  few  dead  sticks 
and  I  will  pull  a  handful  or  two  of  dried  grass;  we  will 
soon  have  a  fire." 

Ned  made  a  little  pile  of  dried  grass,  scooped  out  a  slight 
depression  at  the  top,  and  placed  a  dead  leaf  in  it;  on  this 
he  poured  a  few  grains  of  powder,  added  a  few  blades  of 
dried  grass,  and  then  set  to  work  with  his  flint  and  steel. 
After  a  blow  or  two  a  spark  fell  into  the  powder;  it  blazed 
up,  igniting  the  blades  of  grass  and  the  leaf,  and  in  a 
minute  the  little  pile  was  in  a  blaze.  Dried  twigs  and 
then  larger  sticks  were  added,  and  soon  a  bright  fire 
burned  up. 

"Throw  on  some  of  the  green  bush,"  Ned  said;  "we  do 
not  want  a  blaze,  for  although  we  have  thrown  out  the 
fellows  in  pursuit  of  us  there  may  be  others  about." 


146  UNDEH  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"And  now,  Ned,"  Tom  said,  after  sitting  for  some  time 
gazing  into  the  red  fire,  "  what  on  earth  are  we  to  do  next?" 

"That  is  a  question  more  easily  asked  than  answered," 
Ned  said  cheerfully;  "we  have  saved  our  skins  for  the 
present,  now  we  have  got  to  think  out  what  is  the  best 
course  to  pursue." 

"I  don't  see  any  way  to  get  back  to  the  ship,"  Tom  said 
after  a  long  pause;  "do  you?" 

"No,"  Ned  replied,  "I  don't,  Tom.  These  savages 
know  that  they  have  cut  us  off,  and  will  be  on  the  watch, 
you  may  be  sure.  They  shoot  so  straight  with  those  little 
bows  and  arrows  of  theirs  that  we  should  be  killed  without 
the  least  chance  of  ever  getting  to  close  quarters.  Besides, 
the  admiral  will  doubtless  believe  that  we  have  been  slain, 
and  will  sail  away.  We  may  be  sure  that  he  beat  off  the 
fellows  who  were  attacking  him,  but  they  will  all  take  to 
the  woods,  and  he  would  never  be  able  to  get  any  distance 
among  the  trees;  besides,  he  would  give  up  all  hope  of 
finding  us  there.  As  to  our  getting  back  through  the 
wood,  swarming  with  savages,  it  seems  to  me  hopeless." 

"Then  whatever  is  to  become  of  us?"  Tom  asked  hope- 
lessly. 

"  Well,  the  lookout  is  not  bright,"  Ned  said  thought- 
fully, "but  there  is  a  chance  for  us.  We  may  keep  our- 
selves by  killing  wild  animals,  and  by  pushing  inland  we 
may  come  upon  some  people  less  treacherous  and  bloody 
than  those  savages  by  the  seashore.  Jf  so,  we  might  hunt 
and  live  with  them." 

Tom  groaned.  "I  am  not  sure  that  I  would  not  rather 
be  killed  at  once  than  go  on  living  like  a  savage." 

"The  life  is  not  such  a  bad  one,"  Ned  said;  "I  tried  it 
once,  and  although  the  negroes  and  Indians  of  Porto  Rico 
were  certainly  a  very  different  people  to  these  savages,  still 
the  life  led  on  these  great  plains  and  hills,  abounding  with 
game,  is  more  lively  than  being  cooped  up  in  a  wood  as  I 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  U7 

•was  then.  Beside,  I  don't  mean  that  we  should  be  here 
always.  I  propose  that  we  try  and  cross  the  continent. 
It  is  not  so  very  wide  here,  and  we  are  nearly  in  a  line 
with  Lima.  The  admiral  means  to  go  on  there,  and  ex- 
pects a  rich  booty.  He  may  be  mouths  before  he  gets 
round  the  Horn,  and  if  we  could  manage  to  be  there  when 
he  arrives  we  should  be  rescued.  If  not,  and  I  own  that  I 
have  not  much  hope  of  it,  we  could  at  least  go  down  to 
Lima  some  time  or  other.  I  can  talk  Spanish  now  very 
fairly,  and  we  shall  have  such  a  lot  of  adventures  to  tell 
that,  even  if  they  do  not  take  us  for  Spanish  sailors,  as  we 
can  try  to  feign,  they  will  not  be  likely  to  put  us  to  death. 
They  would  do  so  if  we  were  taken  in  arms  as  buccaneers, 
but  coming  in  peaceably  we  might  be  kindly  treated.  At 
any  rate,  if  we  get  on  well  with  the  Indians  we  shall  have 
the  choice  of  making,  some  day  or  other,  for  the  Spanish 
settlements  on  the  west  coast;  but  that  is  all  in  the  dis- 
tance. The  first  thing  will  be  to  get  our  living  somehow, 
the  second  to  get  further  inland,  the  third  to  make  friends 
with  the  first  band  of  natives  we  meet.  And  now  the  best 
thing  to  do  is  to  go  off  to  sleep.  I  shall  not  be  many 
minutes,  I  can  tell  you." 

Strange  as  was  the  situation,  and  many  the  perils  that 
threatened  them,  both  were  in  a  few  minutes  fast  asleep. 

The  sun  was  rising  above  the  hills  when  with  a  start 
they  awoke  and  at  once  sprang  to  their  feet,  and  instinc- 
tively looked  round  in  search  of  approaching  danger.  All 
was,  however,  quiet.  Some  herds  of  deer  grazed  in  the 
distance,  but  no  other  living  creature  was  visible.  Then 
they  turned  their  eyes  upon  each  other  and  burst  into  a 
simultaneous  shout  of  laughter.  Their  clothes  were  torn 
literally  into  rags  by  the  bushes  through  which  they  had 
forced  their  way,  while  their  faces  were  scratched  and 
stained  with  blood  from  the  same  cause. 

"The  first  thing  to  be  done,"  Ned  said,  when  the  laugh 


148  UNDER  DRAKE'S  PLAG. 

was  over,  "is  to  look  for  a  couple  of  long  springy  saplings 
and  to  make  bows  and  arrows.  Of  course  they  will  not 
carry  far,  but  we  might  knock  down  any  small  game  we 
come  across." 

Both  lads  were  good  shots  with  a  bow,  for  in  those  days, 
although  firearms  were  coming  in,  all  Englishmen  were 
still  trained  in  the  use  of  the  bow. 

"But  what  about  strings?"  Tom  asked. 

"I  will  cut  four  thin  strips  from  my  belt,"  Ned  said. 
"Each  pair  tied  together  will  make  a  string  for  a  five-foot 
bow,  and  will  be  fully  strong  enough  for  any  weapon  we 
shall  be  able  to  make." 

After  an  hour's  walk  they  came  to  a  small  grove  of  trees 
growing  in  a  hollow.  These  were  of  several  species,  and 
trying  the  branches  they  found  one  kind  which  was  at 
once  strong  and  flexible.  With  their  hangers,  or  short 
swords,  they  cut  down  a  small  sapling  of  some  four  inches 
in  diameter,  split  it  up,  pared  each  half  down,  and  manu- 
factured two  bows,  which  were  rough,  indeed,  but  suffi- 
ciently strong  to  send  an  arrow  a  considerable  distance. 
They  then  made  each  a  dozen  shafts,  pointed  and  notched 
them.  Without  feathers  or  metal  points  these  could  not 
fly  straight  to  any  distance,  but  they  had  no  thought  of 
long-range  shooting. 

"Now,"  Ned  said,  "we  will  go  back  to  that  bare  space 
of  rock  we  passed  a  hundred  yards  back;  there  were  dozens 
of  little  lizards  running  about  there,  it  will  be  hard  if  we 
cannot  knock  some  over." 

"Are  they  good  to  eat?"  Tom  asked. 

"1  have  no  doubt  they  are,"  Ned  said;  "as  a  rule  every- 
thing is  more  or  less  good  to  eat;  some  things  may  be  nicer 
than  others,  but  hardly  anything  is  poisonous.  I  have 
eaten  snakes  over  and  over  again,  and  very  good  they  are. 
I  have  been  keeping  a  lookout  for  them  ever  since  we 
started  this  morning." 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  149 

When  they  reached  the  rock  the  lizards  all  darted  off  to 
their  cracks  and  crevices,  but  Ned  and  Tom  lay  down  with 
their  bows  bent  and  arrows  in  place,  and  waited  quietly. 
Ere  long  the  lizards  popped  up  their  heads  again  and  be- 
gan to  move  about,  and  the  lads  now  let  fly  their  arrows. 
Sometimes  they  hit,  sometimes  missed,  and  each  shot  was 
followed  by  the  disappearance  of  the  lizards,  but  with 
patience  they  found  by  the  end  of  an  hour  that  they  had 
shot  a  dozen,  which  was  sufficient  for  an  ample  meal  for 
them. 

"How  will  you  cook  them,  Ned?" 

"  Skin  them  as  if  they  were  eels,  and  then  roast  them 
on  a  stick?" 

"I  am  more  thirsty  than  hungry,"  Tom  said. 

"Yes,  and  from  the  look  of  the  country  water  must  be 
scarce.  However,  as  long  as  we  can  shoot  lizards  and  birds 
we  can  drink  their  blood." 

The  fire  was  soon  lighted,  and  the  lizards  cooked;  they 
tasted  like  little  birds,  their  flesh  being  tender  and 
sweet. 

"Now  we  had  better  be  proceeding,"  Ned  said,  when 
they  had  finished  their  meal.  "We  have  an  unknown 
country  to  explore,  and  if  we  ever  get  across  we  shall  have 
materials  for  yarns  for  the  rest  of  our  lives." 

"  Well,  Ned,  I  must  say  you  are  a  capital  fellow  to  get 
into  a  scrape  with.  You  got  Gerald  and  me  out  of  one, 
and  if  any  one  could  get  through  this  I  am  sure  you  could 
do  so.  Gerald  told  me  that  he  always  relied  upon  you, 
and  found  you  always  right;  you  may  be  sure  that  I  will 
do  the  same.  So  I  appoint  you  captain-general  of  this 
expedition,  and  promise  to  obey  all  orders  unquestion- 
iugly." 

"Well,  my  first  order  is,"  Ned  said,  laughing,  "that  we 
each  make  a  good  pike.  The  wood  we  made  our  bows 
from  will  do  capitally,  and  we  can  harden  the  points  iu 


150  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

the  fire.      We  may  meet  some  wild   beasts,  and  a  good 
strong  six-foot  pike  would  be  better  than  our  swords." 

Two  hours'  work  completed  the  new  weapons,  and  with 
their  bows  slung  at  their  backs,  and  using  their  pikes  as 
walking  staves,  they  again  set  out  on  their  journey  across 
the  continent. 


UXDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  151 


CHAPTER  XL 

THE   MARVEL   OF   FIRE. 

"WHAT  are  those — natives?"  exclaimed  Tom  suddenly, 
Ned  looked  steadily  at  them  for  some  time. 

"No,  I  think  they  are  great  birds;  the  ostrich  abounds 
in  these  plains;  no  doubt  they  are  ostriches." 

"I  suppose  it  is  of  no  use  our  chasing  them?" 

"Not  a  bit.  They  can  run  faster  than  a  horse  can 
gallop." 

During  the  day's  walk  they  saw  vast  numbers  of  deer  of 
various  kinds,  but  as  they  were  sure  that  these  would  not 
allow  them  to  approach  they  did  not  alter  their  course, 
which  was,  as  nearly  as  they  could  calculate  by  the  sun, 
due  west.  The  sun  was  warm  during  the  day,  but  all  the 
higher  hilltops  were  covered  with  snow.  "If  the  worst 
comes  to  the  worst,"  Ned  said,  "we  must  go  up  and  get 
some  snow.  We  can  make  a  big  ball  of  it  and  bring  it 
down  with  us  in  one  of  our  sashes.  But  I  should  think 
there  must  be  some  stream  somewhere  about.  The  snow 
must  melt;  besides,  these  great  herds  of  deer  must  drink 
somewhere." 

Late  in  the  afternoon  they  came  on  the  crest  of  a  ridge. 

"There,"  Ned  said,  pointing  to  a  valley  in  which  were  a 
number  of  trees.  "We  shall  find  water  there,  or  I  am 
mistaken." 

An  hour's  tramp  brought  them  to  the  valley.  Through 
this  a  stream  ran  between  steep  banks.  They  followed  it 


152  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

for  half  a  mile  and  then  came  to  a  spot  where  the  banks 
sloped  away.  Here  the  ground  was  trampled  with  many 
feet  and  the  edge  of  the  stream  was  trodden  into  mud. 

"Hurrah,  Tom!  here  is  meat  and  drink  too.  It  is  hard 
if  we  do  not  kill  something  or  other  here.  Look  at  that 
clump  of  bushes  where  the  bank  rises.  If  we  hide  there 
the  deer  will  almost  touch  us  as  they  pass  to  water,  and 
we  are  sure  to  be  able  to  shoot  them  even  with  these  bows 
and  arrows.  But  first  of  all  for  a  drink.  Then  we  will 
cross  the  stream  and  make  a  camping  ground  under  the 
trees  opposite." 

The  stream  was  but  waist  deep,  but  very  cold,  for  it  was 
composed  of  snow-water. 

"  Shall  we  light  a  fire,  Ned ;  it  might  frighten  the  deer?" 

"No,  1  think  it  will  attract  them,"  Ned  said;  "they  are 
most  inquisitive  creatures,  and  are  always  attracted  by 
anything  strange." 

A  fire  was  soon  lighted,  and  after  it  got  quite  dark  they 
piled  up  dry  wood  upon  it,  recrossed  the  river,  and  took 
their  places  in  the  bushes. 

An  hour  passed,  and  then  they  heard  a  deep  sound.  In 
a  miuute  or  two  the  leading  ranks  of  a  great  herd  of  deer 
appeared  on  the  rise,  and  stood  looking  wonderingly  at  the 
fire.  For  some  little  time  they  halted,  and  then,  pushed 
forward  by  those  behind  and  urged  by  their  own  curiosity, 
they  advanced  step  by  step  with  their  eyes  fixed  on  the 
strange  sight.  So  crowded  were  they  that  as  they  advanced 
they  seemed  a  compact  mass,  those  outside  coming  along 
close  to  the  bushes  in  which  the  boys  lay.  Silently  these 
raised  their  bows,  bent  them  to  the  full  strain,  and  each 
launched  an  arrow.  The  deer  were  not  five  feet  from 
them,  and  two  stags  fell  pierced  through  and  through. 
They  leaped  to  their  feet  again,  but  the  boys  had  dashed 
out  with  their  swords  in  hand,  and  in  an  instant  had  cut 
them  down. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG,  153 

There  was  a  wild  rush  on  the  part  of  the  herd,  a  sound 
of  feet  almost  like  thunder,  and  then  the  boys  stood  alone 
by  the  side  of  the  two  deer  they  had  killed.  They  were 
small,  the  two  together  not  weighing  more  than  a  good- 
sized  sheep.  The  boys  lifted  them  on  their  shoulders 
rejoicing,  and  waded  across  the  stream.  One  they  hung 
up  to  the  branch  of  a  tree,  the  other  they  skinned  and  cut 
up,  and  were  soon  busy  roasting  pieces  of  its  flesh  over  the 
fire. 

They  had  just  finished  an  abundant  meal  when  they 
heard  a  roar  at  a  short  distance  which  brought  them  to 
their  feet  in  a  moment.  Ned  seized  his  pike  and  faced 
the  direction  from  which  the  sound  had  come. 

"Throw  on  fresh  sticks,  Tom;  all  animals  fear  fire." 

A  bright  blaze  soon  lit  up  the  wood. 

"Now,  Tom,  do  you  climb  the  tree;  I  will  give  you  the 
pieces  of  meat  up,  and  then  do  you  lift  the  other  stag  to 
a  higher  branch.  I  don't  suppose  the  brute  can  climb, 
but  he  may  be  able  to  do  so;  at  any  rate  we  will  sleep  in 
the  tree,  and  keep  watch  and  ward." 

As  soon  as  Tom  had  followed  these  instructions  Ned 
handed  him  up  the  bows  and  arrows  and  spears,  and  then 
clambered  up  beside  him.  As  the  fire  again  burned  low 
an  animal  was  seen  to  approach  cautiously. 

"A  lion!"  whispered  Tom. 

"I  don't  think  that  he  is  as  big  as  a  lion,"  Ned  said, 
"but  he  certainly  looks  like  one.  A  female,  I  suppose,  as 
it  has  got  no  mane." 

Of  course  the  lads  did  not  know,  nor  indeed  did  any  one 
else  at  that  time,  that  the  lion  is  not  a  native  of  America; 
the  animal  before  them  was  what  is  now  called  the  South 
American  lion,  or  puma. 

The  creature  walked  round  and  round  the  fire  snuffing, 
and  then  with  an  angry  roar  raised  itself  on  its  hind  legs 
and  scratched  at  the  trunk  of  the  tree.  Several  times  it 


154  ttNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

repeated  this  performance,  and  then  with  another  roar 
walked  away  into  the  darkness. 

"Thank  goodness  it  can't  climb!"  Ned  said;  "I  expect 
with  our  spears  and  swords  we  could  have  beaten  it  back  if 
it  had  tried,  still  it  is  just  as  well  not  to  have  had  to  do  it; 
besides  now  we  can  both  go  to  sleep.  Let  us  get  well  up 
the  tree,  so  that  if  anything  that  can  climb  should  come, 
it  will  fall  to  at  the  deer  to  begin  with;  that  will  be  cer- 
tain to  wake  us." 

They  soon  made  themselves  as  comfortable  as  they  could 
in  crutches  of  the  tree,  tied  themselves  with  their  sashes 
to  a  bough  to  prevent  a  fall,  and  were  soon  asleep. 

The  next  day  they  rested  in  the  wood,  made  fresh  bow- 
strings from  the  twisted  gut  of  the  deer,  cut  the  skins  up 
into  long  strips,  thereby  obtaining  a  hundred  feet  of  strong 
cord,  which  Ned  thought  might  be  useful  for  snares. 
Here,  too,  they  shot  several  birds,  which  they  roasted,  and 
from  whose  feathers,  tied  on  with  a  thread-like  fiber,  they 
further  improved  their  arrows.  They  collected  a  good 
many  pieces  of  fiber  for  further  use,  for,  as  Tom  said, 
when  they  got  on  to  rock  again  they  would  be  sure  to  find 
some  splinters  of  stone  which  they  could  fasten  to  the 
arrows  for  points,  and  would  be  then  able  to  do  good  exe- 
cution even  at  a  distance. 

They  cut  a  number  of  strips  of  flesh  off  the  deer  and 
hung  them  in  the  smoke  of  the  fire,  by  which  means  they 
calculated  that  they  would  keep  for  some  days,  and  could 
be  eaten  without  being  cooked,  which  might  be  an  advan- 
tage, as  they  feared  that  the  odor  of  cooking  might  attract 
the  attention  of  wandering  Indians. 

The  following  morning  they  again  started,  keeping  their 
backs  as  before  to  the  sun. 

"Look  at  these  creatures,"  Tom  said  suddenly  as  a  herd 
of  animals  dashed  by  at  a  short  distance;  "they  do  not 
look  like  deer," 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  155 

"No,  they  look  more  like  sheep  or  goats,  but  they  have 
much  longer  legs.  I  wonder  what  they  can  be!" 

During  the  day's  journey  they  came  across  no  water, 
and  by  the  end  of  the  tramp  were  much  exhausted. 

"We  will  not  make  a  fire  to-night,"  Ned  said;  "we 
must  be  careful  of  our  powder.  I  don't  want  to  be  driven 
to  use  sticks  for  getting  fire;  it  is  a  long  and  tedious  busi- 
ness. We  will  be  up  at  daybreak  to-morrow,  and  will 
push  on  till  we  find  water.  We  will  content  ourselves  for 
to-night  with  a  bit  of  this  smoked  venison." 

They  found  it  dry  work  eating  this  without  water,  and 
soon  desisted,  gathered  some  grass  to  make  a  bed,  and  were 
asleep  a  short  time  after  it  became  dark.  They  were  now 
in  an  open  district,  not  having  seen  a  tree  since  they 
started  in  the  morning,  and  they  had  therefore  less  fear  of 
being  disturbed  by  wild  beasts.  They  had  indeed  talked 
of  keeping  watch  by  turns,  but  without  a  fire  they  felt 
that  this  would  be  dull  work,  and  would  moreover  be  of 
little  avail,  as  in  the  darkness  the  stealthy  tread  of  a  lion 
would  not  be  heard,  and  they  would  therefore  be  attacked 
as  suddenly  as  if  no  watch  had  been  kept.  If  he  should 
announce  his  coming  by  a  roar  both  would  be  sure  to  awake 
quickly  enough.  So  lying  down  close  together  with  their 
spears  at  hand,  they  were  soon  asleep,  with  the  happy 
carelessness  of  danger  peculiar  to  youth. 

With  the  first  streak  of  daybreak  they  were  up  and  on 
their  way.  Until  midday  they  came  upon  no  water,  their 
only  excitement  being  the  killing  of  an  armadillo.  Then 
they  saw  a  few  bushes  in  a  hollow,  and  making  toward  it 
found  a  small  pool  of  water.  After  a  hearty  drink,  leaves 
and  sticks  were  collected,  a  fire  made,  and  slices  of  the 
smoked  deer's  meat  were  soon  broiling  over  it. 

"This  is  jolly,"  Torn  said.  "I  should  not  mind  how 
long  I  tramped  if  we  could  always  find  water." 

"And  have  venison  to  eat  with  it,"  Ned  added,  laughing. 


156  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"We  have  got  a  stock  to  last  a  week,  that  is  a  comfort, 
and  this  armadillo  will  do  for  supper  arid  breakfast.  But 
I  don't  think  we  need  fear  starvation,  for  these  plains 
swarm  with  animals,  and  it  is  hard  if  we  can't  manage  to 
kill  one  occasionally  somehow  or  other." 

"How  far  do  you  think  it  is  across  to  the  other  coast?" 

"I  have  not  an  idea,"  Ned  said.  "I  don't  suppose  any 
Englishman  knows,  although  the  Spaniards  can  of  course 
tell  pretty  closely.  We  know  that  after  rounding  Cape 
Horn  they  sail  up  the  coast  northwest,  or  in  that  direction, 
so  that  we  have  got  the  base  of  a  triangle  to  cross;  but 
beyond  that  I  have  no  idea  whatever.  Halloo!" 

Simultaneously  the  two  lads  caught  up  their  spears  and 
leaped  to  their  feet.  Well  might  they  be  alarmed,  for 
close  by  were  a  party  of  some  twenty  Indians  who  had, 
quietly  and  unperceived,  come  down  upon  them.  They 
were  standing  immovable,  and  their  attitude  did  not  be- 
token hostility.  Their  eyes  were  fixed  upon  them,  but 
their  expression  betrayed  wonder  rather  than  enmity. 

"Lay  down  your  spear  again,  Tom;"  Ned  said,  "let  us 
receive  them  as  friends." 

Dropping  their  spears  the  lads  advanced  a  pace  or  two 
holding  out  their  hands  in  token  of  amity.  Then  slowly, 
step  by  step,  the  Indians  advanced. 

"They  look  almost  frightened,"  Ned  said.  "What  can 
they  be  staring  so  fixedly  at?" 

"It  is  the  fire!"  Ned  exclaimed;  "it  is  the  fire!  I  do 
believe  they  have  never  seen  a  fire  before." 

It  was  so,  as  Sir  Francis  Drake  afterward  discovered 
when  landing  on  the  coast,  the  Patagonian  Indians  at  that 
time  were  wholly  unacquainted  with  fire.  When  the  In- 
dians came  down  they  looked  from  the  fire  to  the  boys, 
and  perceived  for  the  first  time  that  they  were  creatures 
of  another  color  from  themselves.  Then  simultaneously 
they  threw  themselves  on  their  faces. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  157 

"  They  believe  that  we  are  gods  or  superior  beings  of 
some  kind,"  Ned  said;  "they  have  clearly  never  heard  of 
the  Spaniards.  What  good  fortune  for  us!  Now  let  us 
reassure  them." 

So  saying  he  stooped  over  the  prostrate  Indians,  patted 
them  on  the  head  and  shoulders,  and  after  some  trouble 
he  succeeded  in  getting  them  to  rise.  Then  he  motioned 
them  to  sit  down  round  the  fire,  put  on  some  more  meat, 
and  when  this  was  cooked,  offered  a  piece  to  each,  Tom 
and  himself  setting  the  example  of  eating  it. 

The  astonishment  of  the  natives  was  great.  Many  of 
them,  with  a  cry,  dropped  the  meat  on  finding  it  hot,  and 
an  excited  talk  went  on  between  them.  Presently,  how- 
ever, the  man  who  appeared  to  be  the  chief  set  the  example 
of  carefully  tasting  a  piece.  He  gave  an  exclamation  of 
satisfaction,  and  soon  all  were  engaged  upon  the  food. 

When  they  had  finished  Ned  threw  some  more  sticks  on 
the  fire,  and  as  these  burst  into  flame  and  then  consumed 
away,  the  amazement  of  the  natives  was  intense.  Ned 
then  made  signs  to  them  to  pull  up  some  bushes  and  cast 
on  the  fire.  They  all  set  to  work  with  energy,  and  soon 
a  huge  pile  was  raised  on  the  fire.  At  first  great  volumes 
of  white  smoke  only  poured  up,  then  the  leaves  crackled, 
and  presently  a  tongue  of  flame  shot  up,  rising  higher  and 
higher  till  a  great  bonfire  blazed  away  far  above  their 
heads.  This  completed  the  wonder  and  awe  of  the  natives, 
who  again  prostrated  themselves  with  every  symptom  of 
worship  before  the  boys.  These  again  raised  them  and  by 
signs  intimated  their  intention  of  accompanying  them. 

With  lively  demonstrations  of  gladness  and  welcome  the 
Indians  turned  to  go,  pointing  to  the  west  as  the  place 
where  their  abode  lay. 

"We  may  as  well  leave  our  bows  and  arrows,"  Ned  said. 
"Their  bows  are  so  immensely  superior  to  ours  that  it  will 
make  us  sink  in  their  estimation  if  they  see  that  our  work- 
manship is  so  inferior  to  thyir  own." 


158  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

The  Indians,  who  were  all  very  tall,  splendidly  made 
men,  stepped  out  so  rapidly  that  the  lads  had  the  greatest 
difficulty  in  keeping  up  with  them,  and  were  sometimes 
obliged  to  break  into  a  half  trot,  seeing  which  the  chief 
said  a  word  to  his  followers,  and  they  then  proceeded  at  a 
more  reasonable  rate.  It  was  late  in  the  evening  before 
they  reached  the  village,  which  lay  in  a  wooded  hollow  at 
the  foot  of  some  lofty  hills.  The  natives  gave  a  loud  cry, 
which  at  once  brought  out  the  entire  population,  who  ran 
up  and  gazed,  astonished,  at  the  newcomers.  The  chief 
said  a  few  words,  when  with  every  mark  of  awe  and  sur- 
prise all  prostrated  themselves  as  the  men  had  before  done. 

The  village  was  composed  of  huts  made  of  sticks  closely 
intertwined,  and  covered  with  the  skins  of  animals.  The 
chief  led  them,  to  a  large  one,  evidently  his  own,  and  in- 
vited them  to  enter.  They  found  that  it  was  also  lined 
with  skins,  and  others  were  laid  upon  the  floor.  A  pile  of 
skin  served  as  a  mat  and  bed.  The  chief  made  signs  that 
he  placed  this  at  their  disposal,  and  soon  left  them  to 
themselves.  In  a  short  time  he  again  drew  aside  the  skin 
which  hung  across  the  entrance,  and  a  squaw  advanced, 
p^:;^uiy  in  deep  terror,  bearing  some  raw  meat.  Ned 
received  it  graciously,  and  then  said  to  Tom,  "Now  we 
will  light  a  fire  and  astonish  them  again." 

So  saying,  the  boys  went  outside,  picked  up  a  dry  stick 
or  two,  and  motioned  to  the  Indians  who  were  gathered 
round  that  they  needed  more.  The  whole  population  at 
once  scattered  through  the  grove,  and  soon  a  huge  pile  of 
dead  wood  was  collected.  The  boys  now  made  a  little 
heap  of  dried  leaves,  placed  a  few  grains  of  powder  in  a 
hollow  at  the  top,  and  the  flint  and  steel  being  put  into 
requisition,  the  flame  soon  leaped  up  amid  a  cry  of  aston- 
ishment and  awe  from  the  women  and  children;  wood  was 
now  laid  on,  and  soon  a  great  fire  was  blazing.  The  men 
gathered  round  and  sat  down,  and  the  women  and  children 


VNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  159 

gradually  approached  and  took  their  places  behind  them. 
The  evening  was  cold,  and  as  the  natives  felt  the  grateful 
heat,  fresh  exclamations  of  pleasure  broke  from  them,  and 
gradually  a  complete  babel  of  tongues  broke  out.  Then 
the  noise  was  hushed,  and  a  silence  of  expectation  and  atten- 
tion reigned  as  the  lads  cut  off  slices  of  the  meat,  and  spit- 
ting them  on  pieces  of  green  wood,  held  them  over  the 
fire.  Tom  made  signs  to  the  chief  and  those  sitting  round 
to  fetch  meat  and  follow  their  example;  some  of  the  Indian 
women  brought  meat,  and  the  men  with  sharp  stone  knives 
cut  off  pieces  and  stuck  them  on  green  sticks  as  they  had 
seen  the  boys  do.  Then  very  cautiously  they  approached 
the  fire,  shrinking  back  and  exhibiting  signs  of  alarm  at 
the  fierce  heat  it  threw  out  as  they  approached  near  to  it. 

The  boys,  however,  reassured  them,  and  they  presently 
set  to  work.  When  the  meat  was  roasted  it  was  cut  up 
and  distributed  in  little  bits  to  the  crowd  behind,  all  of 
whom  were  eager  to  taste  this  wonderful  preparation.  It 
was  evident  by  the  exclamations  of  satisfaction  that  the 
new  viand  was  an  immense  success,  and  fresh  supplies  of 
meat  were  soon  over  the  fire. 

An  incident  now  occurred  which  threatened  to  mar  the 
harmony  of  the  proceedings.  A  stick  breaking,  some  of 
the  red-hot  embers  scattered  round.  One  rolled  close  to 
Ned's  leg,  and  the  lad,  with  a  quick  snatch,  caught  it  up 
and  threw  it  back  upon  the  fire.  Seeing  this,  a  native 
near  grasped  a  glowing  fragment  which  had  fallen  near 
him,  but  dropped  it  with  a  shriek  of  astonishment  and 
pain. 

All  leaped  to  their  feet  as  the  man  danced  in  his  agony. 
Some  ran  away  in  terror,  others  instinctively  made  for 
their  weapons,  all  gesticulated  and  yelled.  Ned  at  once 
went  to  the  man  and  patted  him  assuringly.  Then  he  got 
him  to  open  his  hand,  which  was  really  severely  burned. 
Then  he  got  a  piece  of  soft  fat  and  rubbed  it  gently  upon 


160  VNDEH  DRAKE' 8  FLAG. 

the  sore,  and  then  made  signs  that  he  wanted  something 
to  bandage  it  with.  A  woman  brought  some  large  fresh 
leaves  which  were  evidently  good  for  hurts,  and  another  a 
soft  thong  of  deer  hide.  The  hand  was  soon  bandaged 
up,  and  although  the  man  must  still  have  been  in  severe 
pain  he  again  took  his  seat,  this  time  at  a  certain  distance 
from  the  fire. 

This  incident  greatly  increased  the  awe  with  which  the 
boys  were  viewed,  as  not  only  had  they  the  power  of  pro- 
ducing this  new  and  astonishing  element,  but  they  could, 
nnhurt,  take  up  pieces  of  wood  turned  red  by  it,  which 
inflicted  terrible  agony  on  others. 

Before  leaving  the  fire  and  retiring  to  their  tent,  the 
boys  made  signs  to  the  chief  that  it  was  necessary  that 
some  one  should  be  appointed  to  throw  on  fresh  wood  from 
time  to  time  to  keep  the  fire  alight.  This  was  hardly 
needed,  as  the  whole  population  were  far  too  excited  to 
think  of  retiring  to  bed.  After  the  lads  had  left  they 
gathered  round  the  fire,  and  each  took  delight  in  throwing 
on  pieces  of  wood  and  in  watching  them  consume,  and 
several  times,  when  they  woke  during  the  night,  the  boys 
saw  by  the  bright  light  streaming  in  through  the  slits  in 
the  deerskin,  that  the  bonfire  was  never  allowed  to  wane. 

In  the  morning  fresh  meat  was  brought  to  the  boys, 
together  with  raw  yams  and  other  vegetables.  There  were 
now  other  marvels  to  be  shown.  Ned  had  learned  when 
with  the  negroes  how  to  cook  in  calabashes,  and  he  now 
got  a  gourd  from  the  natives,  cut  it  in  half,  scooped  its 
contents  out,  and  then  filled  it  with  water.  From  the 
stream  he  then  got  a  number  of  stones,  and  put  them  into 
the  fire  until  they  became  intensely  hot.  Then  with  two 
sticks  he  raked  them  out  and  dropped  them  into  the  water. 
The  natives  yelled  vith  astonishment  as  they  saw  the  water 
fizz  and  bubble  as  the  stones  were  thrown  in.  More  were 
added  until  the  water  boiled.  Then  the  yams,  cut  into 


DRAKE'S  FLA&.  161 

pieces,  were  dropped  in,  more  hot  stones  added  to  keep 
the  water  boiling,  and  when  cooked,  the  yams  were  taken 
out.  When  sufficiently  cooled,  the  boys  distributed  the 
pieces  among  the  chiefs,  and  again  the  signs  of  satisfaction 
showed  that  cooked  vegetables  were  appreciated.  Other 
yams  were  then  cut  up  and  laid  among  the  hot  embers  to 
bake. 

After  this  the  boys  took  a  few  half-burned  sticks,  carried 
them  to  another  spot,  added  fresh  fuel  and  made  another 
fire,  and  then  signed  to  the  natives  to  do  the  same.  In  a 
short  time  a  dozen  fires  were  blazing,  and  the  whole  popu- 
lation were  engaged  in  grilling  venison,  and  in  boiling  and 
baking  yams.  The  boys  were  both  good  trenchermen,  but 
they  were  astounded  at  the  quantity  of  food  which  the 
Patagonians  disposed  of. 

By  night  the  entire  stock  of  meat  in  the  village  was  ex- 
hausted, and  the  chief  motioned  to  the  boys  that  in  the 
morning  he  should  go  out  with  a  party  to  lay  in  a  great  stock 
of  venison.  To  this  they  made  signs  that  they  would  ac- 
company the  expedition.  While  the  feasting  had  been 
going  on,  the  lads  had  wandered  away  with  two  of  the 
Indian  bows  and  arrows.  The  bows  were  much  shorter 
than  those  to  which  they  were  accustomed,  and  required 
far  less  strength  to  pull.  The  wood  of  which  the  bows 
were  formed  was  tough  and  good,  and  as  the  boys  had 
both  the  handiness  of  sailors  and,  like  all  lads  of  that 
period,  had  some  knowledge  of  bow-making,  they  returned 
to  the  camp  and  obtained  two  more  of  the  strongest  bows 
in  the  possession  of  the  natives.  They  then  set  to  work 
with  their  knives,  and  each  taking  two  bows  cut  them  up, 
fitted  and  spliced  them  together. 

The  originals  were  but  four  feet  long,  the  new  ones  six. 
The  halves  of  one  bow  formed  the  two  ends,  the  middle 
being  made  of  the  other  bow  doubled.  The  pieces  were 
spliced  together  with  deers'  sinews,  and  when,  after  some 


162  UNDEH  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

hours'  work,  they  were  completed,  the  boys  found  that 
they  were  as  strong  and  tough  as  the  best  of  their  home- 
made bows,  and  required  all  their  strength  to  draw  them 
to  the  ear.  The  arrows  were  now  too  short,  but  upon 
making  signs  to  the  natives  that  they  wanted  wood  for 
arrows,  a  stock  of  dried  wood,  carefully  prepared,  was  at 
once  given  them,  and  of  these  they  made  some  arrows  of 
the  regulation  cloth -yard  length.  The  feathers,  fastened 
on  with  the  sinews  of  some  small  animals,  were  stripped 
from  the  Indian  arrows  and  fastened  on,  as  were  the  sharp- 
pointed  stones  which  formed  their  heads,  and  on  making 
a  trial  the  lads  found  that  they  could  shoot  as  far  and  as 
straight  as  with  their  own  familiar  weapons. 

"  We  can  reckon  on  killing  a  stag,  if  he  will  stand  still, 
at  a  hundred  and  fifty  yards,"  Ned  said,  "or  running,  at 
a  hundred;  don't  yon  think  so?" 

"Well,  six  times  out  of  seven  we  ought  to  at  any  rate," 
Tom  replied,  "or  our  Devonshire  archership  has  deserted 
us." 

When  they  heard,  therefore,  that  there  was  to  be  a  hunt 
upon  the  following  day  they  felt  that  they  had  another 
surprise  for  the  natives,  whose  short  bows  and  arrows  were 
of  little  use  at  a  greater  distance  than  fifty  yards,  although 
up  to  that  distance  deadly  weapons  in  their  hands. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  163 


CHAPTER  XII. 

ACROSS  A   CONTINENT. 

THE  work  upon  which  the  boys  were  engaged  passed 
unnoticed  by  the  Indians,  who  were  too  mueh  absorbed  by 
the  enjoyment  of  the  new  discovery  to  pay  any  attention 
to  other  matters.  The  bows  and  arrows  had  been  given 
to  them,  as  anything  else  in  camp  for  which  they  had  a 
fancy  would  have  been  given,  but  beyond  that  none  had 
observed  what  was  being  done.  There  were  then  many 
exclamations  of  astonishment  among  them  when  Ned  and 
Tom  issued  from  their  hut  in  the  morning  to  join  the 
hunting  party,  carrying  their  new  weapons.  The  bows 
were  of  course  unstrung,  and  Ned  handed  his  to  the  chief, 
who  viewed  it  with  great  curiosity.  It  was  passed  from 
hand  to  hand  and  then  returned  to  the  chief.  One  or  two 
of  the  Indians  said  something,  and  the  chief  tried  its 
strength.  He  shook  his  head.  Ned  signed  to  him  to 
string  it,  but  the  chief  tried  in  vain,  as  did  several  of  the 
strongest  of  the  Indians.  Indeed,  no  man,  however  power- 
ful, could  string  an  old  English  bow  unless  trained  to  its 
use. 

When  the  Indians  had  given  up  the  attempt  as  hopeless, 
the  two  lads  strung  their  bows  without  the  slightest  diffi- 
culty, to  the  intense  surprise  of  the  natives.  These  again 
took  the  bows,  but  failed  to  bend  them  even  to  the  length 
of  their  own  little  arrows.  The  lads  then  took  out  their 
newly-made  shafts  and  took  aim  at  a  young  tree  of  a  foot 


164  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

diameter,  standing  at  about  two  hundred  yards'  distance, 
and  both  sent  their  arrows  quivering  into  the  trunk. 

The  Indians  gave  a  perfect  yell  of  astonishment. 

"It  is  not  much  of  a  mark,"  Tom  said;  "Hugh  Wil- 
loughby  of  our  village  could  hit  a  white  glove  at  that  dis- 
tance every  time,  and  the  fingers-  of  a  glove  five  times  out 
of  six;  it  is  the  length  of  the  shots,  not  the  accuracy, 
which  astounds  these  fellows.  However,  it  is  good  enough 
to  keep  up  our  superiority." 

The  party  now  started  on  their  hunt.  There  was  but 
little  difficulty  in  finding  game,  for  numerous  herds  could 
be  seen  grazing;  the  task  was  to  get  within  shot.  The 
boys  watched  anxiously  to  see  the  course  which  the  Indians 
would  adopt.  First  ascertaining  which  way  the  wind  was 
blowing,  the  chief,  with  ten  others,  accompanied  by  the 
boys,  set  off  to  make  a  circuit  so  as  to  approach  one  of  the 
herds  up  wind.  When  they  had  reached  the  point  desired 
all  went  down  upon  their  bellies  and  crawled  like  snakes 
until  they  reached  a  clump  of  low  bushes  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  from  the  herd.  Then  they  lay  quiet,  waiting  for 
their  comrades,  whose  turn  it  now  was  to  act.  These  also 
making  a  circuit,  but  in  the  opposite  direction,  placed 
themselves  half  a  mile  to  windward  of  the  deer  in  a  long 
line.  Then  they  advanced  toward  the  herd,  making  no 
effort  to  conceal  themselves. 

Scarcely  had  they  risen  to  their  feet  than  the  herd 
winded  them.  For  a  minute  or  two  they  stood  motionless, 
watching  the  distant  figures,  and  then  turning,  bounded 
away.  The  chief  uttered  an  exclamation  of  disgust,  for  it 
was  evident  at  once  that  from  the  direction  that  they  were 
taking  the  herd  would  not  pass,  as  he  hoped,  close  by  the 
bushes.  The  lads,  however,  were  well  satisfied,  for  the 
line  would  take  them  within  a  hundred  and  fifty  yards. 
As  m  a  closely-packed  body  they  came  along  Ned  and 
Tom  rose  suddenly  to  their  feet,  drew  their  bows  to  their 


tttfDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  165 

cars,  and  launched  their  arrows.  Each  had,  according  to 
the  custom  of  English  archers,  stuck  two  arrows  into  the 
ground  by  the  spot  where  they  would  stand  up,  and  these 
they  also  discharged  before  the  herd  was  out  of  shot. 
With  fair  shooting  it  was  impossible  to  miss  so  large  a 
mark,  and  five  of  the  little  deer  rolled  over,  pierced  through 
by  the  arrows,  while  another,  hit  in  a  less  vital  spot,  car- 
ried off  the  weapon. 

The  Indians  raised  a  cry  of  joy  and  surprise  at  shooting 
which  to  them  appeared  marvelous  indeed,  and  when  the 
others  came  up  showed  them  with  marks  of  astonishment 
the  distance  at  which  the  animals  had  fallen  from  the  bush 
from  which  the  arrows  had  been  aimed.  Two  more  beats 
were  made.  These  were  more  successful,  the  herds  pass- 
ing close  to  the  places  of  concealment,  and  upon  each 
occasion  ten  stags  fell.  This  was  considered  sufficient. 

The  animals  were  not  all  of  one  kind.  One  herd  was 
composed  of  deer  far  larger  than,  and  as  heavy  as  good- 
sized  sheep,  while  the  others  were  considerably  smaller, 
and  the  party  had  as  much  as  their  united  efforts — except 
those  of  Ned  and  Tom,  whose  offer  to  assist  was  peremp- 
torily declined — could  drag  back  to  the  village,  where  the 
feasting  was  at  once  renewed. 

The  lads,  when  the  natives  had  skinned  the  deer,  took 
some  of  the  smaller  and  finer  skins,  intending  to  dry  them, 
but  the  natives,  seeing  their  intention,  brought  them  a 
number  of  the  same  kind,  which  were  already  well  cured 
and  beautifully  supple.  Fashioning  needles  from  small 
pieces  of  bone,  with  sinews  for  thread,  and  using  their 
own  tattered  clothes  as  patterns,  the  two  lads  set  to  work, 
and  by  the  following  evening  had  manufactured  doublets 
and  trunks  of  deerskin,  which  were  a  vast  improvement 
upon  their  late  ragged  apparel,  and  had  at  a  short  distance 
the  appearance  of  being  made  of  a  bright  brownish-yellow 
cloth. 


166  VtfDEE  DRAK&8  FLAG. 

By  this  time  the  Indians  had  become  quite  accustomed 
to  them.  The  men,  and  sometimes  even  the  women,  came 
to  the  hut  and  sat  down  and  tried  to  talk  with  them.  The 
boys  did  their  best  to  learn,  asking  the  name  of  every  arti- 
cle and  repeating  it  until  they  had  thoroughly  learned  it, 
the  Indians  applauding  like  children  when  they  attained 
the  right  pronunciation. 

The  next  morning  they  saw  a  young  Indian  starting 
alone  with  his  bow  and  arrow.  Anxious  to  see  how  he 
was  going  to  proceed  by  himself  the  boys  asked  if  they 
might  accompany  him.  He  assented  and  together  they 
started  off.  After  an  hour's  walking  they  arrived  at  an 
eminence  from  which  an  extensive  view  could  be  obtained. 
Here  their  companion  motioned  to  them  to  lie  down  and 
watch  his  proceedings.  They  did  so,  and  saw  him  make 
a  wide  circuit  and  work  up  toward  the  herd  of  deer. 

"They  will  be  off  long  before  he  can  get  within  bow- 
shot," Tom  said,  "look,  they  are  getting  fidgety  already, 
they  scent  danger,  and  he  is  four  hundred  yards  away. 
They  will  be  off  in  a  minute.  Look,  what  on  earth  is  he 
doing?" 

The  Indian  was  lying  on  his  back,  his  body  being  almost 
concealed  by  the  grass,  which  was  a  foot  high.  In  the  air 
he  waved  his  legs  to  and  fro,  twisting  and  twining  them. 
The  boys  could  not  help  laughing  at  the  curious  appear- 
ance of  the  two  black  objects  waving  slowly  about.  The 
herd  of  deer  stood  staring  stupidly  at  the  spectacle.  Then, 
as  if  moved  by  a  common  impulse  of  curiosity,  they  began 
slowly  to  approach  in  order  to  investigate  more  closely  this 
singular  phenomenon.  Frequently  they  stopped,  but  only 
to  continue  their  advance,  which  was  made  with  a  sort  of 
circling  movement,  as  if  to  see  the  object  from  all  sides. 
Nearer  and  nearer  they  approached,  until  the  leaders  were 
not  more  than  fifty  yards  away,  when  the  native  leaped  to 
his  feet  and  discharged  his  arrows  with  such  rapidity  and 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  16? 

accuracy  that  two  of  the  animals  fell  before  they  could 
dart  away  out  of  range.  The  lads  soon  joined  the  native, 
and  expressed  their  approval  of  his  skill.  Then  while  he 
threw  one  carcass  over  his  shoulder  they  divided  the  weight 
of  the  other  between  them,  and  so  accompanied  him  into 
camp. 

The  next  day  Ned  and  Tom,  walking  to  an  eminence 
near  the  camp,  saw  in  the  distance  some  ostriches  feeding. 
Returning  to  the  huts  they  found  the  young  hunter  whom 
they  had  accompanied  on  the  preceding  day,  and  beckoned 
to  him  to  accompany  them.  When  they  reached  the  spot 
from  which  the  ostriches  were  visible  they  motioned  to 
him  to  come  out  and  shoot  them.  He  at  once  nodded. 

As  they  were  about  to  follow  him  back  to  camp  for  their 
bows  and  arrows,  he  shook  his  head  and  signed  to  them  to 
stay  where  they  were,  and  going  off  by  himself  returned 
with  his  bow  and  arrow,  and,  to  the  surprise  of  the  boys, 
the  skin  of  an  ostrich. 

To  show  the  lads  what  he  intended  to  do  he  put  on  the 
skin,  sticking  one  arm  up  the  long  neck,  his  black  legs 
alone  showing.  He  now  imitated  the  motions  of  the  bird, 
now  stalking  along,  now  picking  up  bits  of  grass,  and  this 
with  such  an  admirable  imitation  of  nature  that  Ned  and 
Tom  shouted  with  laughter.  The  three  then  set  off  to- 
gether, taking  a  line  which  hid  them  from  the  view  of  the 
ostriches.  The  Indian  at  last  led  them  to  a  small  eminence 
and  signed  to  them  to  ascend  this,  and  there  to  lie  down 
and  watch  the  result.  On  arriving  at  their  post  they 
found  themselves  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  group 
of  great  birds. 

It  seemed  a  long  time  before  they  could  see  any  signs  of 
the  native,  who  had  to  make  a  long  detour  so  as  to  approach 
the  birds  up  wind.  About  a  hundred  and  fifty  yards  from 
the  spot  where  they  were  feeding  was  a  clump  of  bushes, 
and  presently  the  lads  suddenly  beheld  an  ostrich  feeding 
quietly  beside  this  clump 


168  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"  There  was  no  bird  near  those  bushes  two  minutes  ago," 
Tom  said;  "it  must  be  the  Indian." 

Very  quietly  and  by  degrees  the  ostrich  approached  the 
group.  When  within  four  yards  of  them,  the  ostrich,  as 
if  by  magic,  vanished,  and  an  Indian  stood  in  his  place. 
In  another  moment  his  bow  twanged  and  the  ostrich  next 
to  him  fell  over,  pierced  through  with  an  arrow;  while 
the  rest  of  the  flock  scattered  over  the  plain  at  an  immense 
speed.  Ned  and  Tom  now  rose  to  their  feet  and  ran  down 
the  slope  to  the  Indian,  who  was  standing  by  the  dead 
bird.  He  pulled  out  the  tail  feathers  and  handed  them  to 
them,  cut  off  the  head  and  legs,  opened  and  cleaned  the 
body,  and  then  putting  it  on  his  shoulder  started  again 
for  the  camp. 

For  another  week  they  remained  in  the  Indian  village, 
and  in  that  time  picked  up  a  good  many  native  words. 
They  then  determined  that  they  must  be  starting  on  their 
westward  journey.  They  therefore  called  upon  the  chief 
and  explained  to  him  by  signs  eked  out  with  a  few  words, 
that  they  must  leave  him  and  go  toward  the  setting  sun. 
The  grief  of  the  chief  was  great,  as, was  that  of  the  tribe 
when  he  communicated  the  tidings  to  them.  There  was 
great  talking  among  the  groups  round  the  fire  that  night, 
and  Ned  saw  that  some  question  was  being  debated  at 
great  length.  The  next  morning  the  chief  and  several  of 
the  leading  men  came  into  their  hut,  and  the  chief  made 
a  speech  accompanied  with  great  gesticulation.  The  lad* 
gathered  that  he  was  imploring  them  not  to  leave  them, 
and  pointing  out  that  there  would  be  hostile  Indians  on 
the  road  who  would  attack  them.  Then  the  chief  led 
them  to  the  fires  and  signed  that  if  they  went  out  the 
tribe  would  be  cold  again,  and  would  be  unable  to  cook 
their  food. 

Already,  indeed,  on  one  occasion  after  a  great  feast  the 
tribe  had  slept  so  soundly  that  all  the  fires  were  out  before 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  169 

morning,  and  Ned  had  been  obliged  to  have  recourse  to 
his  flint  and  steel.  After  this  two  fires  had  been  kept 
constantly  burning  night  and  day;  others  were  lighted  for 
cooking,  but  these  were  tended  constantly,  and  Ned  saw 
that  there  was  little  chance  of  their  ever  going  out  together 
so  long  as  the  tribe  remained  in  the  village. 

Now,  however,  he  proceeded  to  show  them  how  to  carry 
fire  with  them.  Taking  one  blazing  stick  and  starting 
out  as  for  a  journey  he  showed  that  the  fire  gradually  went 
out.  Then  he  returned  to  the  fire  and  took  two  large 
pieces,  and  started,  keeping  them  so  crossed  that  the  parts 
on  fire  were  always  in  contact.  In  this  way,  as  he  showed 
them,  fire  could  be  kept  in  for  a  very  long  time;  an<^  that 
if  two  brands  were  taken  from  each  fire  there  would  be 
little  difficulty  in  keeping  fire  perpetually. 

Finally,  he  showed  them  how  in  case  of  losing  fire  in 
spite  of  all  these  precautions,  it  could  be  recovered  by 
means  of  friction.  He  took  two  pieces  of  dried  wood; 
one  being  very  hard  grained  and  the  other  much  softer. 
Of  the  former  he  cut  a  stick  of  about  a  foot  long  and  an 
inch  round,  and  pointed  at  both  ends.  In  the  other  he 
made  a  small  hole.  Then  he  unstrung  one  end  of  a  bow- 
string, twisted  it  once  round  the  stick,  and  strung  it  again. 
Then  he  put  one  point  of  the  stick  in  the  hole  in  the  other 
piece  of  wood,  which  he  laid  upon  the  ground.  Round 
the  hole  he  crumbled  into  dust  some  dry  fungus.  On  the 
upper  end  of  the  short  stick  he  placed  a  flat  stone,  which 
he  bade  one  of  the  natives  press  with  moderate  force. 
Now  working  the  bow  rapidly  backward  and  forward  the 
stick  was  spun  round  and  round  like  a  drill.  The  Indians, 
who  were  unable  to  make  out  what  Ned  was  doing,  watched 
these  proceedings  with  great  attention.  When  a  little 
smoke  began  to  curl  up  from  the  heated  wood  they  under- 
stood at  once,  and  shouted  with  wonder.  In  a  few  minutes 
sparks  began  to  fly  from  the  stick,  and  as  these  fell  on  the 


1 70  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA  G. 

dried  fungus  they  rapidly  spread.  Tom  knelt  down  and 
blew  gently  upon  them,  adding  a  few  dried  leaves,  and  in 
another  minute  a  bright  flame  sprang  up. 

The  natives  were  delighted;  they  had  now  means  of 
making  fire,  and  could  in  future  enjoy  warmth  and  cooked 
food,  and  their  gratitude  to  the  lads  was  unbounded. 
Hitherto  they  had  feared  that  when  these  strange  white 
beings  departed  they  would  lose  their  fires,  and  return  to 
their  former  cheerless  existence,  when  the  long  winter 
evenings  had  to  be  spent  in  cold  arid  darkness.  That 
evening  the  chief  intimated  to  his  visitors  that  he  and  a 
portion  of  the  men  of  the  tribe  would  accompany  them  for 
some  distance,  the  women  remaining  behind  with  the  rest 
of  the  fighting  men  as  their  guard.  This  decision  pleased 
the  young  men  much,  for  they  could  not  hope  to  go  far 
without  meeting  other  tribes,  and  although,  as  had  been 
found  in  the  present  instance,  the  gift  of  fire  would  be 
sure  to  propitiate  the  Indians,  it  was  probable  that  they 
might  be  attacked  on  the  march  and  killed  without  having 
an  opportunity  of  explanation.  Their  friends,  however, 
would  have  the  power  of  at  once  explaining  to  all  comers 
the  valuable  benefits  which  they  could  bestow. 

During  the  time  that  they  had  been  staying  in  the  vil- 
lage they  had  further  improved  their  bows  by  taking  them 
to  pieces,  fitting  the  parts  more  accurately  together,  and 
gluing  them  with  glue  prepared  by  boiling  down  sinews 
of  animals  in  a  gourd.  Then  rebiuding  them  with  fine 
sinews,  they  found  that  they  were  in  all  respects  equal  to 
their  English  weapons.  They  had  now  no  fear  as  to  their 
power  of  maintaining  themselves  with  food  on  the  way, 
and  felt  that,  even  when  their  new  friends  should  leave 
them,  they  would  have  a  fair  chance  of  defending  them- 
selves against  attack,  as  their  bows  would  carry  more  than 
thrice  as  far  as  those  of  the  natives. 

The  following  morning  the  start  was  made.     The  chief 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  171 

and  twenty  picked  warriors  accompanied  them,  together 
with  six  young  Indians,  two  of  whom  carried  lighted 
brands;  the  others  dragged  light  sleighs,  upon  which  were 
piled  skins  and  long  poles  for  making  tents  at  night,  for 
the  temperature  was  exceedingly  cold  after  sundown.  The 
whole  village  turned  out  to  see  the  party  off,  and  shouts 
of  farewell  and  good  wishes  rang  in  the  air. 

For  the  first  three  days  no  adventures  were  met  with. 
The  party  had  no  difficulty  in  killing  game  sufficient  for 
their  needs,  and  at  night  they  halted  at  streams  or  pools. 
Ned  observed,  however,  that  at  the  last  halting-place  the 
chief,  who  had  hitherto  taken  no  precaution  at  night,  gave 
some  orders  to  his  followers,  four  of  whom,  when  the  rest 
lay  down  to  rest,  glided  off  in  different  directions  into  the 
darkness. 

Ned  pointed  to  them  inquiringly,  and  the  chief  intimated 
that  they  were  now  entering  the  hunting-grounds  of  another 
tribe.  The  following  day  the  band  kept  closely  together. 
A  vigilant  lookout  on  the  plains  was  kept  up,  and  no 
straggling  was  allowed.  They  had  sufficient  meat  left 
over  from  their  spoils  of  the  day  before  to  last  for  the  day, 
and  no  hunting  was  necessary. 

The  next  evening,  just  as  they  had  retired  to  rest,  one 
of  the  scouts  came  in  and  reported  that  he  heard  sounds 
around  which  betokened  the  presence  of  man.  The  calls 
of  animals  were  heard  on  the  plain,  and  a  herd  of  deer 
which  had  evidently  been  disturbed,  had  darted  past  at 
full  speed. 

The  chief  now  ordered  great  quantities  of  dried  wood  to 
be  thrown  into  the  fire,  and  a  vast  blaze  soon  shot  up  high, 
illuminating  a  circle  of  a  hundred  yards  in  diameter.  Ad- 
vancing to  the  edge  of  this  circle  the  chief  held  out  his 
arms  to  show  that  he  was  unarmed,  and  then  shouted  at 
the  top  of  his  voice  to  the  effect  that  he  invited  all  within 
hearing  to  come  forward  in  peace.  The  strange  appear- 


172  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

ance  that  they  saw  was  a  boon  given  to  the  Indian  people 
by  two  great  white  beings  who  were  in  his  camp,  and  that 
by  its  aid  there  would  be  no  more  cold. 

Three  times  he  shouted  out  these  words,  and  then  re- 
tired to  the  fire  and  sat  down.  Presently  from  the  circle 
of  darkness  a  number  of  figures  appeared,  approaching 
timidly  and  with  an  awe-struck  air  until  within  a  short 
distance  of  the  fire. 

Then  the  chief  again  rose  and  bade  them  welcome. 
There  were  some  fifty  or  sixty  of  them,  but  Ned  and  his 
friend  had  no  fear  of  any  treachery,  for  they  were  evi- 
dently under  the  spell  of  a  sense  of  amazement  greater 
than  that  which  had  been  excited  among  those  they  first 
met,  and  this  because  they  first  saw  this  wonder  by  night. 

When  the  newcomers  had  taken  their  seats  the  chief 
explained  to  them  the  qualities  of  their  new  discovery. 
That  it  made  them  warm  and  comfortable  their  own  feel- 
ings told  them ;  and  on  the  morrow,  when  they  had  meat, 
he  would  show  them  how  great  were  its  effects.  Then  he 
told  them  of  the  dancing  water,  and  how  it  softened  and 
made  delicious  the  vegetables  placed  in  it.  At  his  com- 
mand one  of  his  followers  took  two  brands,  carried  them 
to  a  distance,  and  soon  lighted  another  fire. 

During  the  narrative  the  faces  of  the  Indians  lighted  up 
with  joy,  and  they  cast  glances  of  reverence  and  gratitude 
toward  the  young  white  men.  These  finding  that  amity 
was  now  established  retired  to  sleep  to  the  little  skin  tents 
which  had  been  raised  for  them,  while  the  Indians  remained 
sitting  round  the  fire  engrossed  with  its  wonders. 

The  young  men  slept  late  next  morning,  knowing  that 
no  move  could  be  made  that  day.  When  they  came  out 
of  the  tents  they  found  that  the  natives  had  lost  no  time. 
Before  daybreak  hunting  parties  had  gone  out,  and  a  store 
of  game  was  piled  near  the  fire,  or  rather  fires,  for  a  dozen 
were  now  burning,  and  the  strangers  were  being  initiated 
in  the  art  of  cooking  by  their  hosts. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  173 

Two  days  were  spent  here,  and  then  after  much  talk 
the  tribe  at  which  they  had  now  arrived  arranged  to  escort 
and  pass  the  boys  on  to  their  neighbors,  while  the  first 
party  returned  to  their  village.  Ned  and  Tom  were  con- 
sulted before  this  matter  was  settled,  and  approved  of  it. 
It  was  better  that  they  should  be  passed  on  from  tribe  to 
tribe  than  that  they  should  be  escorted  all  the  way  by  a 
guard  who  would  be  as  strange  as  themselves  to  the  coun- 
try, and  who  would  naturally  be  longing  to  return  to  their 
homes  and  families. 

For  some  weeks  the  life  led  by  the  travelers  resembled 
that  which  has  been  described.  Sometimes  they  waited 
for  a  few  days  at  villages  where  great  festivities  were  held 
in  their  honor.  The  news  of  their  coming  in  many  cases 
preceded  them,  and  they  and  their  convoy  were  often  met 
at  the  stream,  or  other  mark  which  formed  the  acknowl- 
edged boundary  between  the  hunting-grounds,  by  large 
bodies  eager  to  receive  and  welcome  them. 

They  had  by  this  time  made  considerable  progress  in. 
the  language,  knew  all  the  names  of  common  objects,  and 
could  make  themselves  understood  in  simple  matters.  The 
language  of  savage  people  is  always  simple;  their  range  of 
ideas  is  narrow;  their  vocabulary  very  limited,  and  conse- 
quently easily  mastered.  Ned  knew  that  at  any  time  they 
might  come  across  people  in  a  state  of  active  warfare  with 
each  other,  and  that  his  life  might  depend  upon  the  ability 
to  make  himself  understood,  consequently  he  lost  no  op- 
portunity of  picking  up  the  language.  On  the  march 
Tom  and  he,  instead  of  walking  and  talking  together,  each 
went  with  a  group  of  natives  and  kept  up  a  conversation, 
eked  out  with  signs,  with  them,  and  consequently  they 
made  very  considerable  progress  with  the  language. 


174  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

THROUGH  THE   CORDILLERAS. 

AFTER  three  months  of  steady  travel,  the  country,  which 
had  become  more  and  more  hilly  as  they  advanced  toward 
the  west,  assumed  a  different  character.  The  hills  became 
mountains,  and  it  was  clear  that  they  were  arriving  at  a 
great  range  running  north  and  south.  They  had  for  some 
time  left  the  broad  plains  behind  them,  and  game  was  very 
scarce.  The  Indians  had  of  late  been  more  and  more  dis- 
inclined to  go  far  to  the  west,  and  the  tribe  with  whom 
they  were  now  traveling  told  them  that  they  could  go  no 
farther.  They  signified  that  beyond  the  mountains  dwelt 
tribes  with  whom  they  were  unacquainted,  but  who  were 
fierce  and  warlike.  One  of  the  party,  who  had  once 
crossed,  said  that  the  people  there  had  fires  like  those 
which  the  white  men  had  taught  them  to  make. 

"You  see,  Tom,"  Ned  said,  "they  must  have  been  in 
contact  with  the  Spaniards,  or  at  least  with  tribes  who 
have  learned  something  from  the  Spaniards.  In  that  case 
our  supernatural  power  will  be  at  an  end,  and  our  color 
will  be  against  us,  as  they  will  regard  us  as  Spaniards,  and 
so  as  enemies.  At  any  rate  we  must  push  on  and  take  our 
chance." 

From  the  Indian  they  learned  that  the  track  lay  up  a 
valley  before  them,  that  after  a  day's  walking  they  would 
have  to  begin  the  ascent.  Another  day's  journey  would 
take  them  to  a  neck  between  two  peaks,  and  the  passage 
of  this  would  occupy  at  least  a  day.  The  native  described 


VNDSH  DHARWS  FLAG.  175 

the  cold  as  great  here  even  in  summer,  and  that  in  winter 
it  was  terrible.  Once  across  the  neck  the  descent  on  the 
other  side  began. 

*'  There  can  be  no  snow  in  the  pass  now,  Tom ;  it  is  late 
in  December,  and  the  hottest  time  of  the  year;  and  al- 
though we  must  be  a  very  great  height  above  the  sea,  for 
we  have  been  rising  ever  since  we  left  the  coast,  we  are 
not  so  very  far  south,  and  I  cannot  believe  the  snow  can 
now  lie  in  the  pass.  Let  us  take  a  good  stock  of  dried 
meat,  a  skin  for  water — we  can  fill  it  at  the  head  of  the 
valley — and  make  our  way  forward.  I  do  not  think  the 
sea  can  lie  very  far  on  the  other  side  of  this  range  of 
mountains,  but  at  any  rate  we  must  wait  no  longer.  Cap- 
tain Drake  may  have  passed  already,  but  wo  may  still  be 
in  time." 

The  next  morning  they  bade  adieu  to  their  companions, 
with  whom  they  had  been  traveling  for  a  fortnight. 
These,  glad  again  to  turn  their  faces  homeward,  set  off  at 
once,  and  the  lads,  shouldering  their  packs,  started  up  the 
valley.  The  scenery  was  grand  in  the  extreme,  and  Ned 
and  Tom  greatly  enjoyed  it.  Sometimes  the  sides  ap- 
proached in  perpendicular  precipices,  leaving  barely  room 
for  the  little  stream  to  find  its  way  between  their  feet,  at 
others  it  was  half  a  mile  wide.  When  the  rocks  were  not 
precipitous  the  sides  were  clothed  with  a  luxuriant  foliage, 
among  which  the  birds  maintained  a  concert  of  call  and 
song.  So  sheltered  were  they  that,  high  as  it  was  above 
the  sea,  the  heat  was  very  oppressive,  and  when  they 
reached  the  head  of  the  valley  late  in  the  afternoon  they 
were  glad  indeed  of  a  bath  in  a  pool  of  the  stream. 

Choosing  a  spot  of  ground  near  the  stream,  the  lads 
soon  made  a  fire,  put  their  pieces  of  venison  down  to  roast, 
and  prepared  for  a  quiet  evening. 

"It  seems  strange  to  be  alone  again,  Torn,  after  so  many 
months  with  those  Indians,  who  were  ever  on  the  watch 


176  UNDER  DRAKE* a 

for  every  movement  and  word,  as  if  they  were  inspired. 
It  is  six  months  now  since  we  left  the  western  coast,  and 
one  almost  seems  to  forget  that  one  is  English.  We  have 
picked  up  something  of  half  a  dozen  Indian  dialects;  we 
can  use  their  weapons  almost  as  well  as  they  can  them- 
selves; and  as  to  our  skins,  they  are  as  brown  as  that  of 
the  darkest  of  them.  The  difficulty  will  be  to  persuade 
the  people  on  the  other  side  that  we  are  whites." 

"How  far  do  you  think  the  sea  lies  on  the  other  side  of 
this  range  of  giant  mountains?"  Tom  asked. 

"I  have  no  idea,"  Ned  replied,  "and  I  do  not  suppose 
that  any  one  else  has.  The  Spaniards  keep  all  matters 
connected  with  this  coast  a  mystery;  but  I  believe  that  the 
sea  cannot  be  many  days'  march  beyond  the  mountains." 

For  an  hour  or  two  they  chatted  quietly,  their  thoughts 
naturally  turning  again  to  England  and  the  scenes  of  their 
boyhood. 

"  Will  it  be  necessary  to  watch,  think  you?"  Tom  asked. 

"I  think  it  would  be;  safer,  Tom;  one  never  knows.  I 
believe  that  we  are  now'  beyond  the  range  of  the  natives  of 
the  Pampas.  They  evidently  have  a  fear  of  approaching 
the  hills;  but  that  only  shows  that  the  natives  from  the 
other  side  come  down  over  here.  I  believe  that  they  were, 
when  the  Spaniards  lauded,  peaceable  people,  quiet  and 
gentle.  So  at  least  they  are  described.  But  those  who 
take  to  the  mountains  must  be  either  escaped  slaves,  or 
fugitives  from  the  cruelty  of  the  Spaniards,  and  even  the 
gentlest  man,  when  driven  to  desperation,  becomes  savage 
and  cruel.  To  these  men  our  white  skins  would  be  like  a 
red  rag  to  a  bull.  They  can  never  have  heard  of  any  white 
people  save  the  Spaniards,  and  we  need  expect  little  mercy 
if  we  fall  into  their  hands.  I  think  we  had  better  watch, 
turn  about;  I  will  take  the  first  watch,  for  I  am  not  at  all 
sleepy,  and  my  thoughts  seem  busy  to-night  with  home.*' 

Tom  was  soon  fast  asleep,  and  Ned  sat  quietly  watching 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


the  embers  of  the  fire,  occasionally  throwing  on  fresh 
sticks,  until  he  deemed  that  nearly  half  the  night  was 
gone.  Then  he  aroused  his  companion  and  lay  down  him- 
self, and  was  soon  fast  asleep. 

The  gray  light  was  just  beginning  to  break  when  he  was 
aroused  by  a  sudden  yell,  accompanied  by  a  cry  from  Tom. 
He  leaped  to  his  feet  just  in  time  to  see  a  crowd  of  natives 
rush  upon  himself  and  his  comrade,  discharging  as  they 
did  so  numbers  of  small  arrows,  several  of  which  pierced 
him  as  he  rose  to  his  feet.  Before  they  could  grasp  their 
bows  or  any  other  weapons  the  natives  were  upon  them. 
Blows  were  showered  down  with  heavy  clubs,  and  although 
the  lads  made  a  desperate  resistance  they  were  beaten  to 
the  ground  in  a  short  time.  The  natives  at  once  twisted 
strong  thongs  round  their  limbs,  and  then  dragging  them 
from  the  fire,  sat  down  themselves  and  proceeded  to  roast 
the  remains  of  the  boys'  deer-meat. 

"This  is  a  bad  business  indeed,  Tom,"  Ned  said. 
"These  men  doubtless  take  us  for  Spaniards.  They  cer- 
tainly must  belong  to  the  other  side  of  the  mountains,  for 
their  appearance  and  language  are  altogether  different  to 
those  of  the  people  we  have  been  staying  with.  These 
men  are  much  smaller,  slighter,  and  fairer.  Kunaways 
though  no  doubt  they  are,  they  seem  to  have  more  care 
about  their  persons,  and  to  be  more  civilized  in  their  ap- 
pearance and  weapons,  than  the  savages  of  the  plains.  " 

"  What  do  you  think  they  will  do  with  us,  Ned?" 

"I  have  no  doubt  in  the  world,  Tom,  that  their  inten- 
tion is  either  to  put  us  to  death  with  some  horrible  torture, 
or  to  roast  us.  The  Spaniards  have  taught  them  these 
things  if  they  did  not  know  them  before,  and  in  point  of 
atrocities  nothing  can  possibly  exceed  those  which  the 
Spaniards  have  inflicted  upon  them  and  their  fathers." 

Whatever  were  the  intentions  of  the  Indians  it  was  soon 
evident  that  there  would  be  .some  delay  in  carrying  them 


178  UNDER  bHAK&S  FLAG. 

out.  After  they  had  finished  their  rneal  they  rose  from 
the  fire.  Some  amused  themselves  by  making  arrows  from 
the  straight  reeds  that  grew  by  the  stream.  Others  wan- 
dered listlessly  about.  Some  threw  themselves  upon  the 
ground  and  slept,  while  others  coming  up  to  the  boys, 
poured  torrents  of  invective  upon  them,  among  which  they 
could  distinguish  in  Spanish  the  words  "dog"  and  "Span- 
iard," varying  their  abuse  by  violent  kicks.  As,  however, 
these  were  given  by  the  naked  feet,  they  did  not  seriously 
inconvenience  the  boys. 

"What  can  they  be  waiting  for?"  Tom  said.  "Why 
don't  they  do  something  if  they  are  going  to  do  it," 

"I  expect,"  Ned  answered,  "that  they  are  waiting  for 
some  chief,  or  for  the  arrival  of  some  other  band,  and  that 
we  are  to  be  kept  for  a  grand  exhibition." 

So  it  proved.  Three  days  passed,  and  upon  the  fourth 
another  band,  smaller  in  numbers,  joined  them.  Upon 
the  evening  of  that  day  the  lads  saw  that  their  fate  was 
about  to  be  brought  to  a  crisis.  The  fire  was  made  up 
with  huge  bundles  of  wood ;  the  natives  took  their  seats 
around  it  with  gravity  and  order;  and  the  boys  were  led 
forward  by  four  natives  armed  with  spears.  Then  began 
what  was  a  regular  trial.  The  boys,  although  they  could 
not  understand  a  word  of  the  language,  could  yet  follow 
the  speeches  of  the  excited  orators.  One  after  another 
arose  and  told  the  tale  of  the  treatment  that  he  had  expe- 
rienced. One  showed  the  wheals  which  covered  his  back. 
Another  held  up  his  arm  from  which  the  hand  had  been 
lopped.  A  third  pointed  to  the  places  where  his  ears  once 
had  been.  Another  showed  the  sear  of  a  hot  iron  on  his 
arms  and  legs.  Some  went  through  a  pantomime  which 
told  its  tale  of  an  attack  upon  some  solitary  hut,  the 
slaughter  of  the  old  and  infirm,  and  the  dragging  away  of 
the  men  and  women  into  slavery.  Others  spoke  of  long 
periods  of  labor  in  a  bent  position  in  a  mine  under  the 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  179 

Cruel  whip  of  the  taskmaster.  All  had  their  tale  of  bar- 
barity and  cruelty  to  recite,  and  as  each  speaker  contrib- 
uted his  quota  the  anger  and  excitement  of  the  rest  rose. 

"Poor  devils!"  Ned  said;  "no  wonder  that  they  are 
savage  against  us.  See  what  they  have  suffered  at  the 
hands  of  the  white  men.  If  we  had  gone  through  as 
much,  you  may  be  sure  that  we  should  spare  none.  Our 
only  chance  is  to  make  them  understand  that  we  are  not 
Spanish,  and  that,  I  fear,  is  beyond  all  hope." 

This  speedily  proved  to  be  the  case.  Two  or  three  of 
the  natives  who  spoke  a  few  words  of  Spanish  came  to 
them,  calling  them  Spanish  dogs.  Ned  shook  his  head 
and  said,  "  Not  Spanish."  For  all  reply  the  natives  pointed 
to  the  uncovered  portions  of  their  body,  pulled  back  the 
skins  which  covered  their  arms,  and  pointing  to  the  white 
flesh,  laughed  incredulously. 

"White  men  are  Spaniards,  and  Spaniards  are  white 
men,"  Tom  groaned,  "and  that  we  shall  have  to  die  for 
the  cruelty  which  the  Spaniards  have  perpetrated  is  clear 
enough." 

"Well,  Ned,  we  have  had  more  good  fortune  than  we 
could  have  expected.  We  might  have  been  killed  on  the 
day  when  we  landed,  and  we  have  spent  six  jolly  months 
in  wandering  together  as  hunters  on  the  plain.  If  we 
must  die,  let  us  behave  like  Englishmen  and  Christians. 
It  may  be  that  our  lives  have  not  been  as  good  as  they 
should  have  been;  but  so  far  as  we  know,  we  have  both 
done  our  duty,  and  it  may  be  that,  as  we  die  for  the  faults 
of  others,  it  may  come  to  be  considered  as  a  balance  against 
our  own  faults." 

"We  must  hope  so,  Tom.  I  think  we  have  both  done, 
I  won't  say  our  best,  but  as  well  as  could  be  expected  in 
so  rough  a  life.  We  have  followed  the  exhortations  of  the 
good  chaplain  and  have  never  joined  in  the  riotous  ways 
of  the  sailors  in  general.  We  must  trust  that  the  good 


180  UNDER  DMAXE'S  FLAG. 

God  will  forgive  us  our  sins,  and  strengthen  tis  to  go 
through  this  last  trial." 

While  they  had  been  speaking  the  natives  had  made  an 
end  of  their  deliberation.  Tom  was  now  conducted  by 
two  natives  with  spears  to  a  tree  and  was  securely  fastened. 
Ned,  under  the  guard  of  the  other  two,  was  left  by  the 
fire.  The  tree  was  situated  at  a  distance  of  some  twenty 
yards  from  it,  and  the  natives  mostly  took  their  places  near 
the  fire.  Some  scattered  among  the  bushes  and  presently 
reappeared  bearing  bundles  of  dry  wood.  These  were  laid 
in  order  round  the  tree  at  such  a  distance  that  the  flames 
•would  not  touch  the  prisoner,  but  the  heat  would  gradu- 
ally roast  him  to  death. 

As  Ned  observed  the  preparations  for  the  execution  of 
his  friend  the  sweat  stood  in  great  drops  on  his  forehead, 
and  he  would  have  given  anything  to  be  able  to  rush  to 
his  assistance  and  to  die  with  him.  Had  his  hands  been 
free  he  would,  without  hesitation,  have  snatched  up  a  bow 
and  sent  an  arrow  into  Tom's  heart  to  release  him  from 
the  lingering  death  which  awaited  him,  and  he  would  then 
have  stabbed  himself  with  a  spear.  But  while  his  hands 
were  sufficiently  free  to  move  a  little,  the  fastenings  were 
too  tight  to  admit  of  his  carrying  out  any  plan  of  that  sort. 

Suddenly  an  idea  struck  him,  and  he  began  nervously 
to  tug  at  his  fastenings.  The  natives  when  they  seized 
them  had  bound  them  without  examining  their  clothes. 
It  was  improbable  that  men  in  savage  attire  could  have 
about  them  any  articles  worth  appropriating.  The  knives, 
indeed,  which  hung  from  their  belts  had  been  cut  off;  but 
these  were  the  only  articles  which  had  been  touched.  Just 
as  a  man  approached  the  fire,  and,  seizing  a  brand,  stooped 
forward  to  light  the  pyre,  Ned  succeeded  in  freeing  his 
hands  sufficiently  to  seize  the  object  which  he  sought. 
This  was  his  powder-flask,  which  was  wrapped  in  the  folds 
of  the  cloth  round  his  waist.  With  little  difficultv  he 


VtfDEH  DRAKE'S  FLA&.  181 

succeeded  in  freeing  it,  and,  moving  a  step  closer  to  the 
fire,  he  cast  it  into  the  midst  of  it  at  the  very  moment  the 
man  with  the  lighted  brand  was  approaching  Tom.  Then 
he  stepped  back  as  far  as  he  could  from  the  fire. 

The  natives  on  guard  over  him,  not  understanding  the 
movement,  and  thinking  he  meditated  flight,  closed  around 
him. 

An  instant  later  there  was  a  tremendous  explosion.  The 
red-hot  embers  were  flaming  in  all  directions,  and  both 
Ned  and  the  savages  who  stood  by  him  were,  with  many 
others,  struck  to  the  ground.  As  soon  as  he  was  able  Ned 
struggled  up  again. 

Not  a  native  was  in  sight.  A  terrific  yell  had  broken 
from  them  at  the  explosion,  which  sounded  to  them  like 
one  of  the  cannons  of  their  Spanish  oppressors,  and  smart- 
ing with  the  wounds  simultaneously  made  by  the  hot 
brands,  each,  without  a  moment's  thought,  had  taken  to 
his  heels.  Tom  gave  a  shout  of  exultation  as  Ned  rose. 
The  latter  at  once  stooped  and  with  difficulty  picked  up 
one  of  the  still  blazing  brands  and  hurried  toward  the 
tree. 

"If  these  fellows  will  remain  away  for  a  couple  of  min- 
utes, Tom,  you  shall  be  free,"  he  said,  "and  I  don't  think 
they  will  get  over  their  scare  as  quickly  as  that." 

So  saying,  he  applied  the  end  of  the  burning  brand  to 
the  dry  withes  with  which  Tom  was  bound  to  the  tree. 
These  at  once  took  fire  and  flared  up,  and  the  bands  fell 
to  the  ground. 

"Now,  Tom,  do  me  the  same  service." 

This  was  quickly  rendered,  and  the  lads  stood  free. 

"Now  let  us  get  our  weapons." 

A  short  search  revealed  to  them  their  bows  laid  carefully 
aside,  while  the  ground  was  scattered  with  the  arms  which 
the  natives  in  their  panic  had  dropped. 

"Pick  them  all  up,  Tom,  and  toss  them  on  the  fire. 


182  tttTDm  DRAKE'S  PL  A  6. 

We  will  take  the  sting  out  of  the  snake,  in  case  it  tries  to 
attack  us  again." 

In  a  minute  or  two  a  score  of  bows,  spears,  and  other 
weapons  were  thrown  on  the  fire,  and  the  boys  then,  leaving 
the  place  which  had  so  nearly  proved  fatal  to  them,  took 
their  way  up  the  mountain  side. 

It  was  a  long  pull,  the  more  so  that  they  had  the  food, 
water,  and  large  skins  for  protection  from  the  night  air  to 
carry.  Steadily  as  they  kept  on,  with  only  an  occasional 
halt  for  breath,  it  was  late  before  they  emerged  from  the 
forest  and  stood  upon  a  plateau  between  two  lofty  hills. 
This  was  bare  and  treeless,  and  the  keen  wind  made  them 
shiver  as  they  met  it. 

"We  will  creep  among  the  trees,  Tom,  and  be  off  at 
daybreak  to-morrow.  However  long  the  journey,  we  must 
get  across  the  pass  before  we  sleep,  for  the  cold  there  would 
be  terrible."  A  little  way  down  the  crest  it  was  so  warm 
that  they  needed  no  fire,  while  a  hundred  feet  higher,  ex- 
posed to  the  wind  from  the  snow-covered  peaks,  the  cold 
was  intense.  They  kept  careful  watch,  but  the  night 
passed  quietly.  The  next  morning  they  were  on  foot  as 
soon  as  the  voices  of  the  birds  proclaimed  the  approach  of 
day.  As  they  emerged  from  the  shelter  of  the  trees  they 
threw  their  deerskins  round  them  to  act  as  cloaks,  and 
stepped  out  at  their  best  pace.  The  dawn  of  day  was  yet 
faint  in  the  east,  the  stars  burning  bright  as  lamps  over- 
head in  the  clear  thin  air,  and  the  cold  was  so  great  that 
it  almost  stopped  their  breathing.  Half  an  hour  later  the 
scene  had  changed  altogether.  The  sun  had  risen,  and 
the  air  felt  warm.  The  many  peaks  on  either  side  glis- 
tened in  the  flood  of  bright  light.  The  walking  was  easy 
indeed  after  the  climb  of  the  previous  day,  and  their  bur- 
dens were  ranch  lightened  by  their  consumption  of  food 
and  water.  The  pass  was  of  irregular  width,  sometimes 
but  a  hundred  yards,  sometimes  fully  a  mile  across.  Long 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  183 

habit  and  practice  with  the  Indians  had  immensely  im- 
proved their  walking  powers,  and  with  long  elastic  strides 
they  put  mile  after  mile  behind  them.  Long  before  the 
sun  was  at  its  highest  a  little  stream  ran  beside  them,  and 
they  saw  by  the  course  of  its  waters  that  they  had  passsd 
the  highest  part  of  the  pass  through  the  Cordilleras. 

Three  hours  later  they  suddenly  emerged  from  a  part 
where  the  hills  approached  nearer  on  either  side  than  they 
had  done  during  the  day's  walk,  and  a  mighty  landscape 
opened  before  and  below  them.  The  boys  gave  simultane- 
ously a  loud  shout  of  joy,  and  then  dropped  on  their  knees 
in  thanks  to  God,  for  far  away  in  the  distance  was  a  dark 
level  blue  line,  and  they  knew  the  ocean  was  before  them. 

"How  far  oS  should  you  say  it  was,  Ned?"  Tom  asked 
when  they  had  recovered  a  little  from  their  first  outburst 
of  joy. 

"A  long  way  off,"  Ned  said;  "I  suppose  we  must  be 
fifteen  thousand  feet  above  it,  and  even  in  this  transparent 
air  it  looks  an  immense  distance  away.  I  should  say  it 
must  be  a  hundred  miles." 

"That's  nothing!"  Tom  said;  "we  could  do  it  in  two 
days,  in  three  easily." 

"Yes,  supposing  we  had  no  interruption  and  a  straight 
road,"  Ned  said.  "But  we  must  not  count  our  chickens 
yet.  This  vast  forest  which  we  see  contains  tribes  of 
natives  bitterly  hostile  to  the  white  man,  maddened  by 
the  cruelties  of  the  Spaniards,  who  enslave  them  and  treat 
them  worse  than  dogs.  Even  when  we  reach  the  sea  we 
may  be  a  hundred  or  two  hundred  miles  from  a  large 
Spanish  town,  and  however  great  the  distance,  we  must 
accomplish  it,  as  it  is  only  at  large  towns  that  Captain 
Drake  is  likely  to  touch." 

"Well,  let  us  be  moving,"  Tom  said;  "I  am  strong  for 
some  hours'  walking  yet,  and  every  day  will  take  us  nearer 
to  the  sea," 


184  TINDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"We  need  not  carry  our  deerskins  any  farther,"  Ned 
said,  throwing  his  down.  "We  shall  be  sweltering  under 
the  heat  to-morrow  below  there." 

Even  before  they  halted  for  the  night  the  vegetation  had 
assumed  a  tropical  character,  for  they  had  already  de- 
scended some  five  thousand  feet. 

"I  wish  we  could  contrive  to  make  a  fire  to-night,"  Ned 
said. 

"Why?"  Tom  asked;  "I  am  bathed  in  perspiration 
now." 

"We  shall  not  want  it  for  heat,  but  the  chances  are 
that  there  are  wild  beasts  of  all  sorts  in  this  forest." 

Ned's  premises  turned  out  correct  for  scarcely  had  night 
fallen  when  they  heard  deep  roarings,  and  lost  no  time  in 
ascending  a  tree  and  making  themselves  fast  there  before 
they  went  to  sleep. 

In  the  morning  they  proceeded  upon  their  journey. 
After  walking  a  couple  of  hours  Ned  laid  his  arm  upon 
Tom's  shoulder. 

"Hush!"  he  whispered;  "look  there." 

Through  the  trees,  at  a  short  distance  off,  could  be  seen 
a  stag.  He  was  standing  gazing  intently  at  a  tree,  and 
did  not  appear  to  have  heard  their  approach. 

"What  can  he  be  up  to?"  Tom  whispered.  "He  most 
have  heard  us." 

"He  seems  paralyzed,"  Ned  said.  "Don't  you  see  how 
he  is  trembling?  There  must  be  some  wild  beast  in  the 
tree." 

Both  gazed  attentively  at  the  tree,  but  could  see  nothing 
to  account  for  the  attitude  of  the  deer. 

"Wild  beast  or  no,"  Ned  said,  "he  will  do  for  our  din- 
ner." So  saying,  he  unsluug  his  bow,  and  fitted  an  arrow; 
there  was  a  sharp  twang,  and  the  deer  rolled  over,  struck 
to  the  heart.  There  was  no  movement  in  the  tree,  but 
Ned  placed  another  arrow  in  place;  Tom  had  done  the 
game. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  185 

They  stood  silent  for  a  few  minutes,  but  all  was  still. 

"Keep  your  eyes  on  the  tree  and  advance  slowly,"  Ned 
said. 

"Have  your  sword  ready  in  case  of  need.  I  cannot  help 
thinking  there  is  something  there,  though  what  it  is  I 
can't  make  out." 

Slowly,  and  with  the  greatest  caution,  they  approached 
the  tree.  All  was  perfectly  still. 

"No  beast  big  enough  to  hurt  us  can  be  up  there,"  Ned 
said  at  last;  "none  of  the  branches  are  thick  enough  to 
hide  him.  Now  for  the  stag." 

Ned  bent  over  the  carcass  of  the  deer,  which  lay  a  few 
feet  only  from  the  tree.  Then  suddenly  there  was  a  rapid 
movement  among  the  creepers  which  embraced  the  trunk, 
something  swept  between  Ned  and  Tom,  knocking  the 
latter  to  the  ground,  while  a  cry  of  alarm  and  astonishment 
rose  from  Ned. 

Confused  and  surprised  Tom  sprang  to  his  feet,  instinc- 
tively drawing  his  sword  as  he  did  so.  For  a  moment  he 
stood  paralyzed  with  horror.  A  gigantic  snake  had  wound 
its  coils  round  Ned's  body.  Its  head  towered  above  his, 
while  its  eyes  flashed  menacingly,  and  its  tongue  vibrated 
with  a  hissing  sound  as  it  gazed  at  Tom;  its  tail  was 
wound  round  the  trunk  of  the  tree. 

Ned  was  powerless,  for  his  arms  were  pinioned  to  his 
side  by  the  coils  of  the  reptile.  It  was  but  a  moment  that 
Tom  stood  appalled.  He  knew  that  at  any  instant  by  the 
tightening  of  its  folds  the  great  boa  could  crush  every  bone 
of  Ned's  body;  while  the  very  closeness  of  its  embrace 
rendered  it  impossible  for  him  to  strike  at  it  for  fear  of 
injuring  its  captive.  There  was  not  an  instant  to  be  lost. 
Already  the  coils  were  tightening,  and  a  hoarse  cry  broke 
from  Ned.  With  a  rapid  spring  Torn  leaped  beyond  his 
friend,  and  with  a  blow,  delivered  with  all  his  strength, 
severed  the  portion  of  the  tail  coiled  round  the  tree  from 
the  rest  of  the  body. 


186  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

Unknowingly  he  had  taken  the  only  course  to  save  Ned's 
life.  Had  he,  as  his  first  impulse  had  been,  struck  at  the 
head  as  it  raised  itself  above  that  of  Ned,  the  convulsion 
of  the  rest  of  the  body  would  probably  have  crushed  the 
life  out  of  him;  but  by  cutting  off  the  tail  he  separated 
the  body  from  the  tree  which  formed  the  fulcrum  upon 
which  it  acted. 

As  swiftly  as  they  had  inclosed  him  the  coils  fell  from 
Ned  a  writhing  mass  upon  the  ground,  and  a  second  blow 
from  Tom's  sword  severed  the  head  from  the  body.  Even 
now  the  folds  writhed  and  twisted  like  an  injured  worm ; 
but  Tom  struck  and  struck  until  the  fragments  lay,  with 
only  a  slight  quivering  motion  in  them,  on  the  ground. 

Then  Tom,  throwing  down  his  cutlass,  raised  Ned,  who, 
upon  being  released  from  the  embrace  of  the  boa,  had  fallen 
senseless.  Alarmed  as  Tom  was  at  his  comrade's  insensi- 
bility, he  yet  felt  that  it  was  the  shock  and  the  revulsion 
of  feeling  which  caused  it,  and  not  any  serious  injury 
which  he  had  received.  No  bones  had  been  heard  to  crack, 
and  although  the  compression  had  been  severe,  Tom  did 
not  think  that  any  serious  injury  had  been  inflicted. 

He  dashed  some  water  from  the  skins  over  Ned's  face, 
rubbed  his  hands,  spoke  to  him  in  a  loud  voice,  and  ere 
long  had  the  satisfaction  of  seeing  him  open  his  eyes. 

"Thank  God!"  Tom  exclaimed  fervently.  "There, 
don't  move,  Ned,  take  it  quietly,  it's  all  right  now. 
There,  drink  a  little  water." 

He  poured  a  few  drops  down  Ned's  throat,  and  the 
latter,  whose  eyes  had  before  had  a  dazed  and  wondering 
expression,  suddenly  sat  up  and  strove  to  draw  his  sword. 
"Gently,  Ned,  gently;  the  snake  is  dead,  chopped  up  into 
pieces.  It  was  a  near  shave,  Ned." 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  187 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

ON  THE   PACIFIC   COAST. 

"A  CLOSE  shave  indeed,"  Ned  said,  raising  himself  with 
difficulty  from  the  ground.  "Another  moment  and  I 
think  my  ribs  would  have  given  in.  It  seemed  as  if  all 
the  blood  in  my  body  had  rushed  to  rny  head," 

"Do  you  feel  badly  hurt?"  Tom  asked  anxiously. 

"No,"  Ned  said,  feeling  himself  all  over.  "Horribly 
bruised,  but  nothing  broken.  To  think  of  our  net  seeing 
that  monstrous  boa!  I  don't  think,"  he  continued,  "that 
I  can  walk  any  farther  to-day.  I  feel  shaken  all  over." 

"  Then  we  will  camp  where  we  are,"  Tom  said  cheerfully. 
"We  have  got  a  stag,  and  he  will  last  us  for  some  days,  if 
necessary.  There  is  plenty  of  fruit  to  be  picked  in  the 
forest,  and  on  this  mountain  side  we  are  sure  to  be  able  to 
find  water  within  a  short  distance." 

Lighting  a  fire,  the  deer  was  soon  cut  up,  and  the  lads 
prepared  to  spend  a  quiet  day,  which  was  all  the  more 
welcome  inasmuch  as  for  the  last  three  weeks  they  had 
traveled  without  intermission. 

The  next  day  Ned  declared  himself  well  enough  to  pro- 
ceed on  his  journey;  but  his  friend  persuaded  him  to  stop 
for  another  day. 

Late  in  the  evening  Ned  exclaimed,  "What  is  that, 
Tom,  behind  that  tree?" 

Tom  seized  his  bow  and  leaped  to  his  feet. 

"I  see  nothing,"  he  said. 


188  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

"It  was  either  a  native  or  a  gigantic  monkey.  I  saw 
him  quite  plainly  glide  along  behind  the  tree." 

Tom  advanced  cautiously,  but  on  reaching  the  tree  he 
found  nothing. 

"You  are  sure  you  were  not  mistaken"  he  asked. 

"Quite  certain,"  Ned  said.  "We  have  seen  enough  of 
Indians  by  this  time  to  know  them.  We  must  be  on  the 
lookout  to-night.  The  natives  on  this  side  are  not  like 
those  beyond  the  mountains.  They  have  been  so  horribly 
ill-treated  by  the  Spaniards  that  they  must  hate  any  white 
face,  and  would  kill  us  without  hesitation  if  they  got  a 
chance.  We  shall  have  difficulty  with  the  Spaniards  when 
we  fall  into  their  hands,  but  they  will  at  least  be  more 
reasonable  than  these  savages." 

All  night  they  kept  up  their  fire  and  sat  up  by  turns  on 
watch.  Several  times  they  thought  that  they  heard  slight 
movements  among  the  fallen  leaves  and  twigs;  but  these 
might  have  been  caused  by  any  prowling  beast.  Once  or 
twice  they  fancied  that  they  detected  forms  moving  cau- 
tiously just  beyond  the  range  of  the  firelight,  but  they 
could  not  be  certain  that  it  was  so. 

Just  as  morning  was  breaking  Ned  sprang  to  his  feet. 

"Wake  up,  Tom!"  he  exclaimed;  "we  are  attacked;" 
and  as  he  spoke  an  arrow  quivered  in  the  tree  just  over  his 
head. 

They  had  already  discussed  whether  it  would  be  better 
to  remain,  if  attacked,  in  the  light  of  the  fire  or  to  retreat 
into  the  shadow,  and  concluding  that  the  eyes  of  the 
natives  would  be  more  accustomed  to  see  in  darkness  than 
their  own,  they  had  determined  to  stay  by  the  fire,  throw- 
ing themselves  down  on  their  faces,  and  to  keep  the  natives 
at  bay  beyond  the  circle  of  the  light  of  the  flames  till  day- 
light. They  had  in  readiness  heaped  a  great  pile  of 
brushwood,  and  this  they  now  threw  upon  the  fire,  mak- 
ing a  huge  pyramid  of  flame  which  lit  the  wood  around 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG,  189 

for  a  circle  of  sixty  yards.  As  the  light  leaped  up  Ned 
discharged  an  arrow  at  a  native  whom  he  saw  within  the 
circle  of  light,  and  a  shrill  cry  proclaimed  that  it  had 
reached  its  mark.  There  was  silence  for  awhile  in  the 
dark  forest,  and  each  moment  that  passed  the  daylight 
became  stronger  and  stronger. 

"In  ten  minutes  we  shall  be  able  to  move  on,"  Ned  said, 
"and  in  the  daylight  I  think  that  the  longer  range  of  our 
bows  will  enable  us  to  keep  them  off.  The  question  is 
how  many  of  them  are  there." 

A  very  short  time  sufficed  to  show  that  the  number  of 
the  savages  was  large,  for  shrill  cries  were  heard  answering 
each  other  in  the  circle  around  them,  and  numbers  of  black 
figures  could  be  seen  hanging  about  the  trees  in  the 
distance. 

"I  don't  like  the  look  of  things,  Ned,"  Tom  said.  "It 
is  all  very  well;  we  may  shoot  a  good  many  before  they 
reach  us,  and  in  the  open  no  doubt  we  might  keep  them 
off.  But  by  taking  advantage  of  the  trees  they  will  be 
able  to  get  within  range  of  their  weapons,  and  at  short 
distances  they  are  just  as  effective  as  are  our  bows." 

As  soon  as  it  was  broad  daylight  the  lads  started  through 
the  forest,  keeping  up  a  running  fight  with  the  natives. 

"It  is  clear,"  Tom  said,  "we  cannot  stand  this  much 
longer.  We  must  take  to  a  tree." 

They  were  on  the  point  of  climbing  when  Ned  exclaimed: 
"Listen!  I  can  hear  the  sound  of  bells." 

Listening  intently  they  could  make  out  the  sound  of 
little  bells  such  as  are  carried  by  horses  or  mules. 

"It  must  be  a  train  to  one  of  the  mines.  If  we  can 
reach  that  we  shall  be  safe." 

Laying  aside  all  further  thought  of  fighting,  the  boys 
now  ran  at  headlong  pace  in  the  direction  of  the  sounds. 

The  natives,  who  were  far  fleeter  of  foot,  gained  fast 
upon  them,  and  the  arrows  were  flying  round  them,  and 


190  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

several  had  inflicted  slight  wounds,  when  they  heard  ahead 
of  them  the  cry  of  "  Soldiers  on  guard.  The  natives  are 
at  hand;  fire  in  the  bushes." 

The  boys  threw  themselves  upon  their  faces  as  from  the 
thickets  ahead  a  volley  of  musketry  was  heard. 

"Load  again,"  was  the  order  in  Spanish.  "These  black 
rascals  must  be  strong  indeed  to  advance  to  attack  us  with 
so  much  noise." 

Crawling  forward  cautiously,  Ned  exclaimed  in  Spanish, 
"Do  not  fire,  sefiors;  we  are  two  Spaniards  who  have  been 
carried  away  from  the  settlements,  and  have  for  long  been 
prisoners  among  the  natives." 

A  cry  of  surprise  was  heard,  and  then  the  Spaniard  in 
command  called  them  to  advance  fearlessly.  This  they 
did.  Fortunately  they  had  long  before  settled  upon  the 
story  that  they  would  tell  when  they  arrived  among  the 
Spaniards.  To  have  owned  themselves  Englishmen,  and 
as  belonging  to  the  dreaded  buccaneers,  would  have  been  to 
ensure  their  imprisonment,  if  not  execution.  The  imper- 
fection of  Ned's  Spanish,  and  the  fact  that  Tom  was  quite, 
ignorant  of  the  language,  rendered  it  difficult  for  them  to 
pass  as  Spaniards.  But  they  thought  that  by  giving  out" 
that  they  had  been  carried  away  in  childhood — Tom  at  an 
earlier  age  than  Ned—their  ignorance  of  the  language 
would  be  accounted  for. 

It  had  been  a  struggle  with  both  of  them  to  decide  upon 
telling  an  untruth.  This  is  a  point  upon  which  differences 
of  opinion  must  always  arise.  Some  will  assert  that  under 
no  circumstances  can  a  falsehood  be  justified.  Others  will 
say  that  to  deceive  an  enemy  in  war  or  to  save  life,  deceit 
is  justifiable,  especially  when  that  deceit  injures  no  one.  It 
was  only  after  very  great  hesitation  that  the  boys  had  over- 
come their  natural  instincts  and  teaching,  and  agreed  to 
conceal  their  nationality  under  false  colors.  Ned,  indeed, 
held  out  for  a  long  timej  but  Tom  had  cited  many  exam* 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  101 

pies  from  ancient  and  modern  history,  showing  that  people 
of  all  nations  had,  to  deceive  an  enemy,  adopted  such  a 
course,  and  that  to  throw  away  their  lives  rather  than  tell 
a  falsehood  which  conld  hurt  no  one  would  be  an  act  of 
folly.  Both,  however,  determined  that  should  it  become 
necessary  to  keep  up  their  character  as  Spaniards  by  pre- 
tending to  be  true  Catholics,  they  would  disclose  the  truth. 

The  first  sight  of  the  young  men  struck  the  captain  of 
the  Spanish  escort  with  astonishment.  Bronzed  to  the 
darkest  brown  by  the  sun  of  the  plains  and  by  the  hard- 
ships they  had  undergone,  dressed  in  the  skins  of  animals, 
and  carrying  weapons  altogether  uncouth  and  savage  to 
the  Spanish  eye,  he  found  it  difficult  to  believe  that  these 
figures  were  those  of  his  countrymen.  His  first  question, 
however,  concerned  the  savages  who  had,  as  he  supposed, 
attacked  his  escort.  A  few  words  from  Ned,  however, 
explained  the  circumstances,  and  that  the  yells  he  had 
heard  had  been  uttered  by  the  Indians  pursuing  them,  and 
had  no  reference  whatever  to  the  convoy.  This  consisted 
of  some  two  hundred  mules,  laden  with  provisions  and 
implements  on  its  way  to  the  mines.  Guarded  by  a  hun- 
dred soldiers  were  a  large  number  of  natives,  who,  fastened 
together  as  slaves,  were  on  their  way  up  to  work  for  their 
cruel  taskmasters. 

When  the  curiosity  of  the  captain  concerning  the  natives 
was  allayed,  he  asked  Ned  where  he  and  his  comrade  had 
sprung  from.  Ned  assured  him  that  the  story  was  a  very 
long  one  and  that  at  a  convenient  opportunity  he  would 
enter  into  all  details.  In  the  first  place  he  asked  that 
civilized  clothes  might  be  given  to  them,  for,  as  he  said, 
they  looked  and  felt  at  present  rather  as  wild  men  of  the 
woods  than  as  subjects  of  the  King  of  Spain. 

"You  speak  a  very  strange  Spanish,"  the  captain  said. 

"I  only  wonder,"  Ned  replied,  "that  I  speak  in  Spanish 
at  all.  I  was  but  a  child  when  I  was  carried  away,  and 


192  UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG. 

since  that  time  I  have  scarcely  spoken  a  word  of  my  native 
tongue.  When  I  reached  the  village  to  which  my  captors 
conveyed  me  I  found  my  companion  here,  who  was,  as  I 
could  see  a  Spaniard,  but  who  must  have  been  carried  off 
as  an  infant,  as  he  even  then  could  speak  no  Spanish  what- 
ever. He  has  learned  now  from  me  a  few  words;  but 
beyond  that  is  wholly  ignorant." 

"This  is  a  strange  story,  indeed,"  the  captain  said. 
"Where  was  it  chat  yonr  parents  lived?" 

"I  know  not  the  place,"  Ned  said.  "But  it  was  far  to 
the  rising  sun  across  on  the  other  ocean." 

As  it  seemed  perfectly  possible  that  the  boys  might  have 
been  carried  away  as  children  from  the  settlements  near 
Vera  Cruz,  the  captain  accepted  the  story  without  the 
slightest  doubt  and  at  once  gave  a  warm  welcome  to  the 
lads,  who  had,  as  he  supposed,  escaped  after  so  many  weary 
years  of  captivity. 

"I  am  going  np  now,"  he  said,  "to  the  mines,  and  there 
must  remain  on  duty  for  a  fortnight,  when  I  shall  return 
in  charge  of  treasure.  It  will  be  dangerous,  indeed,  for 
you  to  attempt  to  find  your  way  to  the  coast  without  escort. 
Therefore  you  had  better  come  on  with  me  and  return 
under  my  protection  to  the  coast." 

"  We  should  be  glad  of  a  stay  with  you  in  the  moun- 
tains," Ned  said.  "We  feel  so  ignorant  of  everything 
European  that  we  should  be  glad  to  learn  from  you  a  little 
of  the  ways  of  our  countrymen  before  we  venture  down 
among  them.  What  is  the  nearest  town  on  the  coast?" 

"Arica,"  the  captain  said,  "is  the  port  from  which  we 
have  come.  It  is  distant  a  hundred  and  thirty  miles  from 
here,  and  we  have  had  ten  days'  hard  journeying  through 
the  forest." 

For  the  next  fortnight  the  lads  remained  at  the  mines. 
These  were  worked  by  the  Spaniards  entirely  by  slave 
labor.  Nominal  wages  were  indeed  given  to  the  unfortu- 


VNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  193 

nates  who  labored  there.  But  they  were  as  much  slaves 
as  if  they  had  been  sold.  The  Spaniards,  indeed,  treated 
the  whole  of  the  natives  in  the  provinces  occupied  by  them 
as  creatures  to  be  used  mercilessly  for  labor,  and  as  having 
no  more  feeling  than  the  lower  animals.  The  number  of 
these  unfortunates  who  perished  in  the  mines  from  hard 
work  and  cruel  treatment  is  beyond  all  calculation.  But 
it  may  be  said  that  of  the  enormous  treasures  drawn  by  Spain 
from  her  South  American  possessions  during  the  early  days 
of  her  occupation,  every  doubloon  was  watered  with  blood. 
The  boys,  who  had  for  nearly  six  months  lived  among  the 
Indians  and  had  seen  their  many  fine  qualities,  were  hor- 
rified at  the  sights  which  they  witnessed;  and  several  times 
had  the  greatest  difficulty  to  restrain  their  feelings  of  in- 
dignation and  horror.  They  agreed,  however,  that  it 
would  be  worse  than  useless  to  give  vent  to  such  opinions. 
It  would  only  draw  upon  them  the  suspicion  of  the  Span- 
iards, and  would  set  the  authorities  at  the  mine  and  the 
captain  of  the  escort  against  them,  and  might  prejudice 
the  first  report  that  would  be  sent  down  to  Arica  concern- 
ing them. 

During  the  first  few  days  of  their  stay  the  boys  acted 
their  parts  with  much  internal  amusement.  They  pre- 
tended to  be  absolutely  ignorant  of  civilized  feeding,  seized 
the  meat  raw  and  tore  it  with  their  fingers;  sat  upon  the 
ground  in  preference  to  chairs;  and  in  every  way  behaved 
as  persons  altogether  ignorant  of  civilization.  Gradually, 
however,  they  permitted  themselves  to  be  taught,  and  de- 
lighted their  entertainers  by  their  docility  and  willingness. 
The  Spaniards  were  indeed  somewhat  surprised  by  the 
whiteness  of  their  skin  where  sheltered  from  the  sun,  and 
by  the  lightness  of  their  hair  and  eyes.  The  boys  could 
hear  many  comments  upon  them,  and  wondering  remarks 
why  they  should  be  so  much  fairer  than  their  countrymen 


194  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

in  general.  As,  however,  it  was  clearly  useless  to  ask 
them,  none  of  the  Spaniards  thought  of  doing  so. 

The  end  of  the  fortnight  arrived,  and  under  the  charge 
of  the  escort  the  lads  set  out,  together  with  twenty  mules 
laden  with  silver  for  the  coast.  They  had  no  longer  any 
fear  of  the  attacks  of  the  natives,  or  any  trouble  connected 
with  their  food  supply,  an  ample  stock  of  provisions  being 
carried  upon  spare  mules.  They  themselves  were  mounted, 
and  greatly  enjoyed  the  journey  through  the  magnificent 
forests.  They  were,  indeed,  a  little  uneasy  as  to  the  ex- 
amination which  they  were  sure  to  have  to  undergo  at 
Arica,  and  which  was  likely  to  be  very  much  more  severe 
and  searching  than  that  to  which  the  good-natured  captain 
had  subjected  them.  They  longed  to  ask  him  whether 
any  news  had  been  heard  of  the  arrival  of  an  English 
squadron  upon  the  western  coast.  But  it  was  impossible 
to  do  this  without  giving  rise  to  suspicion,  and  they  had 
the  consolation  at  least  of  having  heard  no  single  word 
concerning  their  countrymen  uttered  in  the  conversations 
at  the  mine.  Had  Captain  Francis  Drake  and  his  com- 
panions arrived  upon  the  coast,  it  was  almost  certain  that 
their  presence  there  would  be  the  all-absorbing  topic  among 
the  Spanish  colonists. 

Upon  their  arrival  at  Arica  the  boys  were  conducted  at 
once  to  the  governor — a  stern  and  haughty-looking  Span- 
iard, who  received  the  account  given  by  the  captain  with 
an  air  of  incredulity. 

"This  is  a  strange  tale  indeed,"  he  said,  "and  passes  all 
probability.  Why  should  these  children  have  been  kid- 
naped on  the  eastern  coast  and  brought  across  the  conti- 
nent. It  is  more  likely  that  they  belong  to  this  side. 
However,  they  could  not  be  malefactors  who  have  escaped 
into  the  forest,  for  their  age  forbids  any  idea  of  that  kind. 
They  must  have  been  stolen.  But  I  do  not  recall  any 
such  event  as  the  carrying  off  of  the  sons  of  Spaniards 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&.  195 

here  for  many  years  back.  However,  this  can  be  inquired 
into  when  they  learn  to  speak  our  language  well.  In  the 
meantime  they  had  better  be  assigned  quarters  in  the  bar- 
racks. Let  them  be  instructed  in  military  exercises  and 
in  our  language." 

"And,"  said  an  ecclesiastic  who  was  sitting  at  the  table, 
"in  our  holy  religion,  for  methinks,  stolen  away  as  they 
were  in  their  youth,  they  can  be  no  better  than  pagans." 

Tom  had  difficulty  in  repressing  a  desire  to  glance  at 
Ned  as  these  words  were  spoken.  But  the  eyes  of  the 
governor  were  fixed  so  intently  upon  them  that. he  feared 
to  exhibit  any  emotion  whatever.  He  resolved  mentally, 
however,  that  his  progress  in  Spanish  should  be  exceedingly 
small,  and  that  many  months  should  elapse  before  he  could 
possibly  receive  even  rudimentary  instruction  in  religious 
matters. 

The  life  in  the  barracks  at  Anca  resembled  pretty  closely 
that  which  they  had  led  so  long  on  board  ship.  The  sol- 
diers received  them  with  good  feeling  and  camaraderie, 
and  they  were  soon  completely  at  home  with  them.  They 
practiced  drill,  the  use  of  the  pike  and  rapier,  taking  very 
great  care  in  all  these  exercises  to  betray  exceeding  clum- 
siness. With  the  bow  alone  they  were  able  to  show  how 
expert  they  were.  Indeed  the  Spaniards  were  in  no  slight 
degree  astonished  by  the  extraordinary  power  and  accuracy 
of  their  shooting.  This  Ned  accounted  for  to  them  by 
the  long  practice  that  he  had  had  among  the  Indians,  de- 
claring that  among  the  tribes  beyond  the  mountains  he 
was  by  no  means  an  exceptionally  good  shot — which,  in- 
deed, was  true  enough  at  short  distances,  for  at  these  the 
Indians  could  shoot  with  marvelous  dexterity. 

"By  San  Josef!"  exclaimed  one  of  the  Spanish  officers, 
after  watching  the  boys  shooting  at  a  target  two  hundred 
yards  distant  with  their  powerful  bows,  "it  reminds  me  of 
the  way  that  those  accursed  English  archers  draw  their 


196       UNDER. DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

bows  and  send  their  arrows  singing  through  the  air.  In 
faith,  too,  these  men  with  their  blue  eyes  and  their  light 
hair  remind  one  of  these  heretic  dogs." 

"Who  are  these  English?"  Ned  asked  carelessly.  "I 
have  heard  of  no  such  tribe.  Do  they  live  near  the  sea- 
coast,  or  among  the  mountains?" 

"They  are  no  tribe,  but  a  white  people  like  ourselves," 
the  captain  said.  "Of  course  you  will  not  have  heard  of 
them.  And,  fortunately,  you  are  not  likely  ever  to  see 
them  on  this  coast;  but  if  you  had  remained  where  you 
were  born,  on  the  other  side,  you  would  have  heard  little 
else  talked  of  than  the  doings  of  these  pirates  and  scoun- 
drels, who  scour  the  seas,  d^efy  the  authority  of  his  sacred 
majesty,  carry  off  our  treasures  under  our  noses,  burn  our 
towns,  and  keep  the  whole  coast  in  an  uproar." 

"But,"  said  Ned,  in  assumed  astonishment,  "how  is  it 
that  so  great  a  monarch  as  the  King  of  Spain  and  Emperor 
of  the  Indies  does  not  annihilate  these  ferocious  sea  rob- 
bers? Surely  so  mighty  a  king  could  have  no  difficulty  in 
overcoming  them." 

"They  live  in  an  island,"  the  officer  said,  "and  are  half 
fish,  half  men." 

"  What  monsters !"  Ned  exclaimed.  "  Half  fish  and  half 
men!  How  then  do  they  walk?" 

"  Not  really ;  but  in  their  habits.  They  are  born  sailors, 
and  are  so  ferocious  and  bloodthirsty  that  at  sea  they  over- 
come even  the  soldiers  of  Spain,  who  are  known,"  he  said, 
drawing  himself  up,  "to  be  the  bravest  in  the  world.  On 
land,  however,  we  should  teach  them  a  very  different  les- 
son; but  on  the  sea  it  must  be  owned  that,  somehow,  we 
are  less  valiant  than  on  shore." 

Every  day  a  priest  came  down  to  the  barracks,  and  for 
an  hour  endeavored  to  instil  the  elements  of  his  religion 
into  the  minds  of  the  now  civilized  wild  men.  Ned,  al- 
though progressing  rapidly  in  other  branches  of  his  Spanish 


UNDfiR  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  19? 

education,  appeared  abnormally  dull  to  the  explanations 
of  the  good  father,  while  Tom's  small  stock  of  Spanish 
was  quite  insufficient  to  enable  him  to  comprehend  more 
than  a  word  here  and  there. 

So  matters  might  have  remained  for  months  had  not  an 
event  occurred  which  disclosed  the  true  nationality  of  the 
lads. 

One  day  the  ordinarily  placid  blue  sky  was  overclouded. 
The  wind  rose  rapidly,  and  in  a  few  hours  a  tremendous 
storm  was  blowing  on  the  coast.  Most  of  the  vessels  in 
the  harbor  succeeded  in  running  into  shelter.  But  later 
in  the  day  a  ory  arose  that  a  ship  had  just  rounded  the 
point  of  the  bay,  and  that  she  would  not  be  able  to  make 
the  port.  The  whole  population  speedily  gathered  upon 
the  mole,  and  the  vessel,  a  small  one  employed  in  the 
coasting  trade,  was  seen  struggling  with  the  waves,  which 
were  rapidly  bearing  her  toward  a  reef  lying  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  from  the  shore.  The  sea  was  at  this  time  running 
rith  tremendous  force.  The  wind  was  howling  in  a  fierce 
gale,  and  when  the  vessel  struck  upon  the  rocks,  and  her 
masts  at  once  went  by  the  board,  all  hope  of  safety  for  the 
crew  appeared  at  an  end. 

"Cannot  a  boat  be  launched,"  said  Ned  to  the  soldiers 
standing  round,  "to  effect  the  rescue  of  these  poor  fellows 
in  that  wreck?" 

"Impossible!"  they  all  said;  "no  boat  could  live  in  that 
sea." 

After  chatting  for  a  time  Tom  and  Ned  drew  a  little 
apart  from  the  rest  of  the  crowd,  and  watched  the  ill-fated 
vessel. 

" It  is  a  rough  sea,  certainly,"  Ned  said;  "but  it  is  all 
nonsense  to  say  that  a  boat  could  not  live.  Come  along, 
Tom.  Let  us  push  that  shallop  down.  There  is  a  shel- 
tered spot  behind  that  rock  where  we  may  launch  her,  and 
methinks  that  our  arms  can  row  her  out  to  yonder  ship." 


198  VNnEHbRAKE'S  FLAG. 

Throwing  oil  their  doublets,  the  young  men  put  their 
shoulders  to  the  boat  and  soon  forced  it  into  the  water. 
Then,  taking  their  seats  and  putting  out  the  oars,  they 
rowed  round  the  corner  of  the  sheltering  rock,  and  breasted 
the  sea  which  was  rolling  in.  A  cry  of  astonishment  broke 
from  the  crowd  on  the  mole  as  the  boat  made  its  appear- 
ance, and  the  astonishment  was  heightened  when  it  was 
declared  by  the  soldiers  that  the  two  men  on  board  were 
the  wild  men  of  the  wood,  as  they  were  familiarly  called 
among  themselves. 

It  was  a  long  struggle  before  the  boys  reached  the  wreck, 
and  it  needed  all  their  strength  and  seamanship  to  avoid 
being  swamped  by  the  tremendous  seas.  At  last,  however, 
they  neared  it,  and  catching  a  line  thrown  to  them  by  the 
sailors,  brought  the  boat  up  under  the  lee  of  the  ship,  and 
as  the  captain,  the  four  men  who  composed  his  crew,  and 
a  passenger,  leaped  one  by  one  from  the  ship  into  the  sea, 
they  dragged  them  on  board  the  boat,  and  then  turned 
her  head  to  shore. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  199 


CHAPTER  XV. 

THE  PRISON  OF  THE  INQUISITION". 

AMONG  the  spectators  on  the  mole  were  the  governor 
and  other  principal  officers  of  Arica. 

"It  seems  almost  like  a  miracle  from  heaven,"  the  priest, 
who  was  standing  next  the  governor,  exclaimed. 

The  governor  was  scowling  angrily  at  the  boat. 

"If  there  be  a  miracle,"  he  said,  "good  father,  it  is  that 
our  eyes  have  been  blinded  so  long.  Think  you  for  a  mo- 
ment that  two  lads  who  have  been  brought  up  among  the 
Indians  from  their  childhood  could  manage  a  boat  in  such 
a  sea  as  this?  Why,  if  their  story  were  true  they  could 
neither  of  them  ever  have  handled  an  oar,  and  these  are 
sailors,  skillful  and  daring  beyond  the  common,  and  have 
ventured  a  feat  that  none  of  our  people  here  on  shore  were 
willing  to  undertake.  How  they  got  here  I  know  not; 
but  assuredly  they  are  English  sailors.  This  will  account 
for  their  blue  eyes  and  light  hair,  which  have  so  puzzled 
us,  and  for  that  ignorance  of  Spanish  which  they  so  craftily 
accounted  for." 

Although  the  assembled  mass  of  people  on  the  beach 
had  not  arrived  at  the  conclusions  to  which  the  governor 
had  jumped,  they  were  filled  with  astonishment  and  admi- 
ration at  the  daring  deed  which  had  been  accomplished, 
and  when  the  boat  was  safely  brought  round  behind  the 
shelter  of  the  rock,  and  its  occupants  landed  on  the  shore, 
loud  cheers  broke  from  the  crowd,  and  the  lads  received  a 


200  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

perfect  ovation,  their  comrades  of  the  barracks  being  espe- 
cially enthusiastic.  Presently  the  crowd  were  severed  by 
two  soldiers  who  made  their  way  through  it,  and  approach- 
ing Ned  and  Tom,  said : 

"  We  have  the  orders  of  the  governor  to  bring  you  to 
him." 

The  lads  supposed  that  the  governor  desired  to  thank 
them  for  saving  the  lives  of  the  shipwrecked  men,  for  in 
the  excitement  of  the  rescue  the  thought  that  they  had 
exposed  themselves  by  their  knowledge  of  seamanship  had 
never  crossed  their  minds.  The  crowd  followed  tumultu- 
ously,  expecting  to  hear  a  flattering  tribute  paid  to  the 
young  men  who  had  behaved  so  well.  But  the  aspect  of 
the  governor,  as,  surrounded  by  his  officers,  he  stood  in  one 
of  the  batteries  on  the  mole,  excited  a  vague  feeling  of 
astonishment  and  surprise. 

"You  are  two  English  seamen, n  he  said,  when  the  lads 
approached.  "It  is  useless  lying  any  longer.  Your 
knowledge  of  seamanship  and  your  appearance  alike  con- 
vict you." 

For  an  instant  the  boys  were  too  surprised  to  reply,  and 
then  Tom  said  boldly,  "  We  are,  sir.  We  have  done  no 
wrong  to  any  man,  and  we  are  not  ashamed  now  to  say  we 
are  Englishmen.  Under  the  same  circumstances,  I  doubt 
not  that  any  Spaniard  would  have  similarly  tried  to  escape 
recognition.  But  as  chance  has  betrayed  us,  any  further 
concealment  were  unnecessary." 

"Take  them  to  the  guardhouse,"  the  governor  said, 
"and  keep  a  close  watch  over  them;  later,  I  will  interro- 
gate them  myself  in  the  palace." 

The  feelings  of  the  crowd  on  hearing  this  unexpected 
colloquy  were  very  mixed.  In  many,  the  admiration  which 
the  boys'  conduct  had  excited  swallowed  up  all  other  feel- 
ing. But  among  the  less  enthusiastic  minds  a  vague  dis- 
trust and  terror  was  at  once  excited  by  the  news  that 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  201 

English  sailors  were  among  them.  No  Englishman  had 
ever  been  seen  on  that  coast,  and  they  had  inflicted  such 
terrible  losses  on  the  West  Indian  Islands  and  on  the 
neighboring  coast,  that  it  is  no  matter  for  surprise  that 
their  first  appearance  on  the  western  shores  of  South 
America  was  deemed  an  omen  of  terrible  import. 

The  news  rapidly  spread  from  mouth  to  mouth,  and  a 
large  crowd  followed  in  the  rear  of  the  little  party,  and 
assembled  around  the  governor's  house.  The  sailors  who 
had  been  rescued  had  many  friends  in  the  port,  and  those 
took  up  the  cause  of  the  boys,  and  shouted  that  men  who 
had  done  so  gallant  a  deed  should  be  pardoned,  whatever 
their  offense.  Perhaps,  on  the  whole,  this  party  were  in 
the  majority.  But  the  sinister  whisper  that  circulated 
among  the  crowd,  that  they  were  spies  who  had  been 
landed  from  English  ships  on  the  coast,  gradually  cooled 
even  the  most  enthusiastic  of  their  partisans,  and  what  at 
one  time  appeared  likely  to  become  a  formidable  popular 
movement  gradually  calmed  down  and  the  crowd  dispersed. 

When  brought  before  the  governor  the  boys  affected  no 
more  concealment;  but  the  only  point  upon  which  they 
refused  to  give  informatin  was  respecting  the  ships  on 
which  they  had  sailed,  and  the  time  at  which  they  had 
been  left  upon  the  eastern  coast  of  America.  Without 
absolutely  affirming  the  fact,  they  led  to  the  belief  that 
they  had  passed  some  years  since  they  left  their  vessels. 

The  governor  presently  gazed  sharply  upon  them  and  de- 
manded: "Are  you  the  two  whites  who  headed  the  negro 
revolt  in  Porto  Rico,  and  did  so  much  damage  to  our  pos- 
sessions in  that  island?" 

Ned  would  have  hesitated  as  to  the  answer,  but  Tom  at 
once  said  firmly,  "We  are  not  those  two  white  men,  sir, 
but  we  know  them  well;  and  they  were  two  gallant  and 
loyal  Englishmen  who,  as  we  know,  did  much  to  restrain 
the  atrocities  of  the  Indians.  We  saw  them  when  they 
regained  their  ships." 


202  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

It  was  Incky,  indeed,  that  the  governor  did  not  put  the 
question  separately  instead  of  saying,  "Were  you  two  the 
leaders?"  for  in  that  case  Ned  would  have  been  forced  to 
acknowledge  that  he  was  one  of  them.  The  outspoken*- 
iiess  of  Tom's  answer  allayed  the  governor's  suspicions. 
A  great  portion  of  his  questioning  was  directed  to  discov- 
ering whether  they  really  had  crossed  the  continent,  for 
he  as  well  as  the  populace  outside  had  at  first  conceived 
the  idea  that  they  might  have  been  landed  on  the  coast  as 
spies.  The  fact,  however,  that  they  were  captured  far  up 
among  the  Cordilleras,  their  dress  and  their  appearance, 
and  their  knowledge  of  the  native  tongues — which  he 
tested  by  bringing  in  some  natives,  who  entered  into  con- 
versation with  them — convinced  him  that  all  this  portion 
of  their  story  was  true.  As  he  had  no  fear  of  their  escap- 
ing he  said  that  at  present  he  should  not  treat  them  as 
prisoners,  and  that  their  gallant  conduct  in  rowing  out  to 
save  the  lives  of  Spaniards  in  danger  entitled  them  to  every 
good  treatment;  but  that  he  must  report  their  case  to  the 
authorities  at  Lima,  who  would  of  course  decide  upon  it. 
The  priest,  however,  urged  upon  the  governor  that  he 
should  continue  his  instructions  to  them  in  the  Catholic 
religion;  and  the  governor  then  pointed  out  to  Ned,  who 
alone  was  able  to  converse  fluently  in  Spanish,  that  they 
had  now  been  so  long  separated  from  their  countrymen 
that  they  might  with  advantage  to  themselves  become  nat- 
uralized as  Spaniards,  in  which  case  he  would  push  their 
fortunes  to  the  utmost,  and  with  his  report  in  their  favor 
they  might  rise  to  positions  of  credit  and  honor;  whereas, 
if  they  insisted  upon  maintaining  their  nationality  as  Eng- 
lishmen, it  was  but  too  probable  that  the  authorities  at 
Lima  would  consider  it  necessary  to  send  them  as  prisoners 
to  Spain.  He  said,  however,  that  he  would  not  press 
them  for  an  answer  at  once. 

Greatly  rejoiced  at  finding  that  they  were  not  at  present 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  203 

to  be  thrown  into  prison,  but  were  to  be  allowed  to  con- 
tinue their  independent  life  in  the  barracks,  the  lads  took 
their  departure  from  the  governor's  house,  and  were  most 
cordially  received  by  their  comrades.  For  a  short  time 
everything  went  smoothly.  The  suspicion  that  they  were 
spies  had  now  passed  away,  and  the  remembrance  of  their 
courageous  action  made  them  popular  among  all  classes  in 
the  town.  A  cloud,  however,  began  to  gather  slowly 
round  them.  Now  that  they  had  declared  their  national- 
ity, they  felt  that  they  could  no  longer  even  pretend  that 
it  was  likely  that  they  might  be  induced  to  forsake  their 
religion,  and  they  accordingly  refused  positively  to  submit 
any  longer  to  the  teaching  of  the  priests.  Arguments 
were  spent  upon  them  in  vain,  and  after  resorting  to  these, 
threats  were  not  obscurely  uttered.  They  were  told,  and 
with  truth,  that  only  two  or  three  months  before  six  per- 
sons had  been  burned  alive  at  Lima  for  defying  the  author- 
ity of  the  church,  and  that  if  they  persisted  in  their  heret- 
ical opinions  a  similar  fate  might  fall  upon  them. 

English  boys  are  accustomed  to  think  with  feelings  of 
unmitigated  horror  and  indignation  of  the  days  of  the 
Inquisition,  and  in  times  like  these,  when  a  general  toler- 
ation of  religious  opinion  prevails,  it  appears  to  us  almost 
incredible  that  men  should  have  put  others  to  death  in  the 
name  of  religion.  But  it  is  only  by  placing  ourselves  in 
the  position  of  the  persecutors  of  the  middle  ages  that  we 
can  see  that  what  appears  to  us  cruelty  and  barbarity  of 
the  worst  kind  was  really  the  result  of  a  zeal  in  its  way  as 
earnest,  if  not  as  praiseworthy,  as  that  which  now  impels 
missionaries  to  go  with  their  lives  in  their  hands  to  regions 
where  little  but  a  martyr's  grave  can  be  expected.  Nowa- 
days we  believe — at  least  all  right-minded  men  believe — • 
that  there  is  good  in  all  creeds,  and  that  it  would  be  rash 
indeed  to  condemn  men  who  act  up  to  the  best  of  their 
lights,  even  though  those  lights  may  not  be  our  own,  In 


204  UNDP:R  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

the  middle  ages  there  was  no  idea  of  tolerance  scnh  as  this. 
Men  believed  fiercely  and  earnestly  that  any  deviation  from 
the  creed  to  which  they  themslves  belonged  meant  an 
eternity  of  nnhappiness.  Such  being  the  case,  the  more 
earnestly  religions  a  man  was,  the  more  he  desired  to  save 
those  around  him  from  this  fate.  The  inquisitors  arid 
those  who  supported  them  cannot  be  charged  with  wanton 
cruelty.  They  killed  partly  to  save  those  who  defied  the 
power  of  the  church,  and  partly  to  prevent  the  spread  of 
their  doctrines.  Their  belief  was  that  it  was  better  that 
one  man  should  die,  even  by  the  death  of  fire,  than  that 
hundreds  should  stray  from  the  pale  of  the  church,  and  so 
incur  the  loss  of  eternal  happiness.  In  the  Indies,  where 
the  priests  in  many  cases  showed  a  devotion  and  heroic 
qualities  equal  to  anything  which  has  ever  been  displayed 
by  missionaries  in  any  part  of  the  world,  persecution  was 
yet  hotter  than  it  ever  was  in  civilized  Europe.  These 
men  believed  firmly  that  it  was  their  bounden  duty  at  any 
cost  to  force  the  natives  to  become  Christians;  and  how 
ever  we  may  think  that  they  were  mistaken  and  wrong, 
however  we  may  abhor  the  acts  of  cruelty  which  they, 
committed,  it  would  be  a  mistake  indeed  to  suppose  that 
these  were  perpetrated  from  mere  lightness  of  heart  and 
wanton  bloodthirstiness.  The  laws  of  those  days  were  in 
all  countries  brutally  severe.  In  England,  in  the  reign  of 
Henry  VIII.,  the  loss  of  an  ear  was  the  punishment  in- 
flicted upon  a  man  who  begged.  The  second  time  he 
offended  his  other  ear  was  cut  off.  A  third  repetition  of 
the  offense,  and  he  was  sold  into  slavery;  and  if  he  ran 
away  from  his  master  he  was  liable  to  be  put  to  death  by 
the  first  person  who  met  him.  The  theft  of  any  article 
above  the  value  of  three  shillings  was  punishable  by  death, 
and  a  similar  code  of  punishment  prevailed  for  all  kinds 
of  offenses.  Human  life  was  then  held  in  such  slight 
regard  that  we  must  remember  that,  terrible  as  the  doings 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  205 

of  the  Inquisition  were,  they  were  not  so  utterly  foreign 
to  the  age  in  which  they  were  perpetrated  as  would  appear 
to  us  living  in  these  days  of  moderate  punishment  and 
general  humanity. 

By  the  boys,  however,  brought  up  in  England,  which  at 
that  time  was  bitterly  and  even  fiercely  anti-catholic— a 
state  of  things  which  naturally  followed  the  doings  in  the 
reign  of  Queen  Mary,  arid  the  threatening  aspect  main- 
tained by  Spain  toward  this  country — popery  was  held  in 
utter  abhorrence,  and  the  Inquisition  was  the  bugbear  with 
which  mothers  frightened  their  children  when  disobedient. 
The  thought,  therefore,  of  falling  into  the  hands  of  this 
dreaded  tribunal  was  very  terrible  to  the  boys.  They  de- 
bated between  themselves  whether  it  would  not  be  better 
for  them  to  leave  Arica  secretly,  to  make  for  the  moun- 
tains, and  to  take  up  their  lot  for  life  among  the  natives 
of  the  plains,  who  had  so  hospitably  received  them.  They 
had,  indeed,  almost  arrived  at  the  conclusion  that  this 
would  be  their  best  plan  of  procedure. 

They  lingered,  however,  in  the  hope,  daily  becoming 
fainter,  of  the  arrival  of  Drake's  fleet,  but  it  seemed  that 
by  this  time  it  must  have  failed  in  its  object  of  doubling 
the  Horn.  Nearly  six  months  had  elapsed  since  they  had 
been  left  on  the  eastern  coast,  and  according  to  their  cal- 
culation of  distance  two  months  should  have  amply  sufficed 
to  enable  them  to  make  the  circuit  of  Southern  America. 
They  could  not  tell  that  the  fleet  had  been  delayed  by  ex- 
trordinary  accidents.  When  off  the  Cape  they  had  met 
with  storms  which  continued  from  the  7th  of  September 
to  the  28th  of  October  without  intermission,  and  which 
the  old  chronicler  of  the  expedition  describes  as  being 
"more  violent  and  of  longer  continuance  than  anything 
since  Noah's  flood."  They  had  to  waste  much  time,  owing 
to  the  fact  that  Captain  Winter  with  one  of  the  ships  had, 
missing  his  consorts  in  the  storm,  sailed  back  to  England, 


206  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

that  two  other  ships  were  lost,  and  that  Captain  Drake 
with  his  flagship,  which  alone  remained,  had  spent  much 
time  in  searching  for  his  consorts  in  every  inlet  and  island. 

Among  those  saved  in  the  boat  from  the  Spanish  ship 
was  a  young  gentleman  of  rank  and  fortune,  and  owner  of 
large  estates  near  Lima,  who  had  come  down  upon  some 
business.  He  took  a  great  affection  for  the  young  Eng- 
lishmen, and  came  each  day  to  visit  them,  there  being  no 
let  or  hindrance  on  the  part  of  the  governor.  This  gen- 
tleman assured  them  that  he  possessed  great  influence  at 
Lima,  and  that  although  he  doubted  not  that  the  military 
authorities  would  treat  them  with  all  courtesy  after  the 
manner  in  which  they  had  risked  their  lives  to  save  sub- 
jects of  his  majesty,  yet  that,  should  it  be  otherwise,  he 
would  move  heaven  and  earth  in  their  favor.  "  There  is 
but  one  thing  I  dread,"  he  said,  and  a  cloud  came  over  his 
handsome  face. 

"You  need  hardly  say  what  it  is,"  Ned  said  gravely. 
"You  mean,  of  course,  the  Inquisition." 

The  Spaniard  signified  his  assent  by  a  silent  movement 
of  the  head. 

"  We  dare  not  speak  above  our  breath  of  that  dreaded- 
tribunal,"  he  said.  "The  very  walls  appear  to  have  ears, 
and  it  is  better  to  face  a  tiger  in  his  den  than  to  say  aught 
against  the  Inquisition.  There  are  many  Spaniards  who, 
like  myself,  loathe  and  abhor  it;  but  we  are  powerless. 
Their  agents  are  everywhere,  and  one  knows  not  in  whom 
he  dare  confide.  Even  in  our  families  there  are  spies,  and 
this  tyranny,  which  is  carried  on  in  the  name  of  religion,  is 
past  all  supporting.  But  even  should  the  'holy  office'  lay 
its  hands  upon  you,  keep  up  heart.  Be  assured  that  I  will 
risk  all  that  I  am  worth,  and  my  life  to  boot,  to  save  you 
from  it. 

"Would  you  advise  us  to  fly?"  Ned  said.  "We  can 
without  doubt  escape  from  here,  for  we  are  but  lightly 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  207 

guarded,  and  the  governor,  I  am  sure,  is  friendly  toward 
us." 

"Whither  would  you  fly?"  asked  the  young  Spaniard. 

"We  would  cross  the  mountains  to  the  plains,  and  join 
the  Indians  there." 

"It  would  be  a  wretched  life,"  the  Spaniard  said,  "and 
would  cut  you  off  from  all  kindred  and  friends.  I  can 
give  you  no  advice.  To  me,  I  confess,  death  would  be 
preferable,  even  in  its  worst  forms.  But  to  you,  fond  of 
exercise,  and  able  to  cause  yourselves  to  be  respected  and 
feared  by  the  wild  Indians  of  the  Pampas,  it  might  be 
different.  However,  you  need  not  decide  yet.  I  trust 
that  even  should  the  worst  befall  you,  I  may  be  able  at  the 
last  moment  to  give  you  the  opportunity  of  choosing  that 
life  in  preference  to  death  in  the  dungeons  of  the  Inquisi- 
tion." 

It  was  about  ten  days  from  the  date  of  the  governor's 
writing  that  a  ship  came  in  from  Lima,  and  the  same 
evening  the  governor  came  in  to  them  with  a  grave  face. 
He  was  attended  by  two  officials  dressed  in  the  deepest 
black. 

"Sefiors,"  he  said,  "it  is  my  duty,  in  the  first  place,  to 
inform  you  that  the  governor  of  Lima,  acting  upon  the 
report  which  I  sent  him  of  the  bravery  which  you  mani- 
fested in  the  matter  of  the  wreck  here,  has  agreed  to  with- 
draw all  question  against  you  touching  your  past  connec- 
tion with  the  English  freebooters,  and  to  allow  you  free- 
dom, without  let  or  hindrance,  and  to  further  your  passage 
to  such  place  as  opportunity  may  afford,  and  where  you 
may  be  able  to  meet  with  a  ship  from  your  own  country. 
That  is  all  I  have  to  say  to  you." 

Then  the  men  in  black  stepped  forward  and  said,  "We 
arrest  you  in  the  name  of  the  holy  Inquisition  on  the 
charge  of  heresy." 

The  young  men  glanced  at  the  governor,  believing  that 


208  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

he  was  sufficiently  their  friend  to  give  them  a  sign  if 
resistance  would  be  of  any  avail.  He  replied  to  the  un- 
spoken question  by  an  almost  imperceptible  shake  of  the 
head,  and  it  was  well  that  the  boys  abandoned  the  idea, 
for  the  door  opened  and  a  guard  of  six  men,  armed  to  the 
teeth,  although  in  plain  dark  clothes,  entered.  These 
were  the  alguazils  of  the  holy  office,  the  birds  of  night 
whose  appearance  was  dreaded  even  by  the  most  bigoted 
Spaniards,  and  at  whose  approach  mothers  clasped  their 
children  closer  to  their  breast,  and  men  crossed  themselves 
at  the  thought  that  their  passage  boded  death  to  some  un- 
happy victim.  For  it  must  be  remembered  that  the 
Inquisition,  framed  at  first  only  for  the  discovery  and  pun- 
ishmeut  of  heresy,  later  became  an  instrument  of  private 
vengeance.  Men  denounced  wives  of  whom  they  wished 
to  be  rid,  wives  husbands,  no  relations  of  kin  were  suffi- 
cient to  ensure  safety.  The  evidence,  sometimes  true, 
was  more  often  manufactured  by  malice  and  hate,  until  at 
last  even  the  most  earnest  and  sincere  Catholics  trembled 
when  they  thought  that  at  any  moment  they  might  be 
deuouuced  and  flung  into  the  dungeons  of  the  Inquisition. 

Brave  as  the  lads  were,  they  could  not  avoid  a  thrill  of 
horror  at  the  presence  of  the  familiars  of  this  dreaded 
body.  They  were,  however,  cheered  by  the  thought  of 
the  promises  of  the  young  Spaniard,  in  whose  honesty  and 
honor  they  had  great  faith;  and  with  a  few  words  of  adieu 
to  the  governor,  and  thanks  to  him  for  what  he  had  done 
in  their  behalf,  they  followed  the  officers  of  the  Inquisition 
along  the  streets  of  Arica,  and  suffered  themselves  to  be 
placed  on  board  the  boat  which  lay  alongside  the  mole. 

Although  it  was  late  in  the  evening,  their  passage  was 
not  unobserved.  Many  of  the  soldiers  recognized  in  the 
two  men  marching,  surrounded  by  the  black  guard  of  the 
Inquisition,  their  late  comrades,  and,  confident  in  their 
numbers,  these  did  not  hesitate  to  lift  their  voices  in  loud 


UNDEH  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  209 

protest  against  this  seizure  of  men  who  had  behaved  so 
gallantly.  In  the  darkness,  too,  they  feared  not  that  their 
faces  would  be  recognized,  and  their  curses  and  threats 
rose  loud  in  the  air.  People  looking  out  from  their  doors 
to  hear  the  cause  of  the  uproar  were  variously  affected. 
Some  joined  in  the  movement  of  the  soldiers;  but  more 
shrank  back  with  dread  into  their  houses  rather  than  be 
compromised  with  so  dreaded  a  body.  The  threats,  how- 
ever, did  not  proceed  to  open  violence,  and  as  the  young 
men  themselves  gave  no  sign  of  attempting  an  effort  for 
freedom,  their  comrades  contented  themselves  with  many 
shouts  of  good  wishes,  mingled  with  curses  upon  their 
captors,  and  the  lads  were  embarked  without  the  alguazils 
having  to  use  the  swords  which  they  had  drawn  in  readi- 
ness for  the  expected  fray. 

"You  are  witness,  senor  officer,"  Ned  said,  "that  we 
came  without  resistance,  and  that,  had  we  chosen,  we 
could  with  the  assistance  of  the  soldiers  have  easily  broken 
from  the  hold  of  your  men.  We  are  willing,  however,  to 
proceed  with  you  to  Lima,  where  we  doubt  not  -that  the 
justice  of  our  judges  will  result  in  our  acquittal.  No  one 
can  blame  us  that  we  are  of  the  religion  of  our  fathers. 
HaJ  we  been  born  Catholics  and  then  relapsed  into  heresy, 
it  would  have  been  reasonable  for  you  to  have  considered 
our  case;  but  as  we  but  hold  the  religion  which  we  have 
been  taught,  and  know  indeed  of  no  other,  we  see  not  how 
in  any  man's  eyes  blame  can  rest  upon  us." 

"I  take  note,"  the  officer  said,  "of  the  docility  with 
which  you  have  remained  in  our  hands,  and  will  so  far 
testify  in  your  favor.  Touching  the  other  matter,  it  is 
beyond  my  jurisdiction." 

The  vessel  in  which  the  boys  were  embarked  was  a  slow 
one,  and  two  days  after  leaving  Arica  they  saw  a  small 
sailing  craft  pass  them  at  no  great  distance,  sailing  far 
more  rapidly  than  they  themselves  were  going.  The  boys 


£10  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG 

gave  TIO  thought  to  this  occurrence  until  they  arrived  afc 
the  harbor  of  Lima.  A  large  number  of  ships  were  here 
anchored,  and  after  the  solitude  of  the  sea  which  they  had 
endured  during  their  voyage  from  England,  this  collection 
of  fine  galleons  greatly  pleased  the  boys,  who  had  never 
seen  so  large  a  number  of  ships  collected  together,  there 
being  nigh  forty  sail  then  in  harbor. 

As  the  officers  of  the  Inquisition  scarcely  ever  pass 
through  the  streets  in  the  daytime,  owing  to  the  known 
hostility  of  the  mass  of  the  population,  no  attempt  at  a 
landing  was  made  until  nightfall.  The  officer  in  charge 
was,  however,  surprised,  upon  reaching  the  landing-place, 
to  rind  a  large  crowd  assembled,  who  saluted  his  party 
with  hisses  and  groans,  and  loud  cries  of  "shame!"  Those 
behind  pressed  forward,  and  those  in  front  were  forced 
into  the  ranks  of  the  alguazils,  and  it  seemed  at  one  time 
as  if  the  prisoners  would  be  separated  from  their  guards. 
A  man  in  a  rough  peasant's  dress  was  forced  in  contact 
with  Ned,  and  said  hastily  in  a  low  voice  to  him,  "Keep 
up  your  heart;  when  preparations  are  made  I  will  act." 

Ned  recognized  the  voice  of  the  young  Spanish  gentle- 
man whom  he  had  left  at  Arica,  and  guessed  immediately 
that  he  had  taken  passage  in  the  swift-sailing  caravel,  in 
order  to  be  able  to  reach  Lima  before  the  vessel  containing 
the  prisoners. 

Ned  had  in  confidence,  in  his  talks  with  him,  informed 
him  that  he  still  hoped,  although  his  hopes  had  now  fallen 
almost  to  zero  from  the  long  tarrying  of  the  fleet,  that  the 
English  admiral  would  arrive,  and  that  he  should  be  able 
to  go  on  board  and  so  rejoin  his  countrymen.  This  expec- 
tation, indeed,  it  was  which  had  prevented  Ned  and  Tom 
making  their  escape  when  they  could  have  done  so  and 
taking  to  the  mountains,  for  it  was  certain  that  some  time 
at  least  would  elapse  before  stringent  measures  would  be 
taken  against  them.  Another  effort  would  without  doubt 


VNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  211 

be  made  to  persuade  them  to  abandon  tbeir  religion,  and 
every  day  might  bring  with  it  the  arrival  of  the  English 
vessels. 

The  young  men  were  conducted  to  a  dark  and  somber 
building  which  bore  the  appearance  of  a  vast  monastery. 
The  interior  was  even  more  dismal  in  its  appearance  than 
the  walls  without.  A  solitary  figure  met  them  at  the 
doorway;  their  guards  entered,  and  the  gates  were  closed 
behind.  The  officer  in  charge  handed  to  the  newcomer  a 
paper,  and  the  latter,  receiving  it,  said,  "I  accept  the 
charge  of  the  prisoners,  and  your  duties  are  at  an  end 
concerning  them." 

Motioning  them  to  follow,  he  led  them  through  some 
long  dark  corridors  into  a  room  much  better  furnished  and 
provided  than  they  had  expected.  Here,  placing  a  lamp 
upon  the  table  and  pointing  to  two  manchets  of  bread  and 
a  vessel  of  water  which  stood  on  the  table,  and  to  two 
truckle-beds  in  the  corner  of  the  room,  he  left  them  with- 
out a  word.  Ned  had  already  agreed  with  his  companion 
that  they  would  not,  when  once  within  the  building,  say  a 
word  to  each  other  which  they  would  not  have  heard  by 
their  jailers,  for  they  were  well  aware  that  these  buildings 
were  furnished  with  listening  places,  and  that  every  word 
which  prisoners  said  would  be  overheard  and  used  against 
them.  They  comforted  themselves,  therefore,  with  gen- 
eral observations  as  to  their  voyage,  and  to  the  room  in 
which  they  now  were,  and  to  the  hopes  which  they  enter- 
tained that  their  judges  would  take  a  favorable  view  of 
their  conduct.  Then  with  a  sincere  prayer  to  God  to 
spare  them  through  the  dangers  and  trials  which  they 
might  have  to  undergo,  they  lay  down  for  the  night,  and, 
such  is  the  elasticity  and  strength  of  youth,  they  were,  in 
spite  of  the  terrible  position  in  which  they  were  placed,  in 
a  few  minutes  fast  asleep. 

The  next  day  the  door  of  the  apartment  opened  and  two 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

attendants,  dressed  in  black  from  head  to  foot  and  bearing 
white  wands,  entered,  and  motioned  to  them  to  follow 
them.  Through  more  long  corridors  and  passages  they 
went  until  they  stopped  at  some  thick  curtains  overhanging 
a  door.  These  were  drawn  aside,  the  door  behind  them 
was  opened,  other  curtains  hanging  on  the  inside  were 
separated,  and  they  entered  a  large  apartment  lighted  arti- 
ficially by  lamps  from  above.  At  a  table  at  the  end  of  the 
room  were  seated  three  men,  also  in  black.  They  were 
writing,  and  for  some  time  did  not  look  up  from  their 
work.  The  attendants  stood  motionless  by  the  side  of  the 
lads,  who,  in  spite  of  their  courage,  could  not  but  shudder 
at  the  grim  silence  of  this  secret  tribunal.  At  last  the 
chief  inquisitor  laid  down  his  pen,  and  lifting  his  eyes 
toward  them  said,  "Your  names  are  Edward  Hearne  and 
Thomas  Tressilis.  You  are  English  sailors,  who,  having 
crossed  from  the  other  side  of  the  continent,  made  your 
way  to  Arica,  where  you  did,  as  I  am  told,  a  brave  action 
in  saving  the  lives  of  some  Spanish  sailors." 

Tom  assented  gravely  to  the  address. 

"You  are  accused,"  the  inquisitor  went  on,  "of  being 
steeped  in  the  errors  of  heresy,  and  of  refusing  to  listen  to 
the  ministrations  of  the  holy  father  who  tried  to  instruct 
you  in  the  doctrines  of  the  true  church.  What  have  you 
to  say  to  this?" 

"It  is  true, -sir,"  Ned  said,  "every  word.  We  were  born 
Protestants,  and  were  brought  up  in  that  church.  Had 
we  been  born  in  Spain  we  should  no  doubt  have  been  true 
members  of  your  church.  But  it  is  hard  that  men  once 
ingrained  in  a  faith  should  change  it  for  another.  It  were 
like  asking  a  tiger  to  become  a  leopard.  We  are  unlearned 
men,  and  in  no  way  skilled  in  the  exercises  of  theology. 
We  accepted  what  we  were  taught,  and  would  fain  die  in 
the  same  belief.  Doubtless  your  priests  could  give  us 
arguments  which  we  should  be  unable  to  refute,  whatever 


UNDEH  DHAKE'8  FLA 0,  %] 3 

might  be  done  by  learned  men  of  our  church,  and  we 
would  pray  you  to  suffer  us  to  hold  to  the  creed  in  which 
we  have  been  reared." 

"It  is  impossible,"  the  inquisitor  said,  "that  we  should 
permit  you  to  go  on  straightway  in  the  way  of  damnation. 
Your  bodies  are  as  nothing  to  the  welfare  of  your  souls, 
and  to  save  the  one  it  were  indeed  for  your  good  that  the 
other  were  tormented.  We  will  not,  however,  press  you 
now  to  recant  your  errors.  You  shall  be  attended  by  a 
minister  of  the  true  religion,  who  will  point  out  to  you 
the  error  of  your  courses,  and  in  three  days  we  shall  expect 
an  answer  from  you.  If  you  embrace  the  faith  of  the  Holy 
Church  you  may,  if  you  choose  to  remain  here,  rise  to 
posts  of  honor  and  wealth,  for  we  have  heard  good  things 
of  your  courage  and  prudence.  If,  however,  you  remain 
stubborn,  we  shall  find  means  to  compel  you  to  do  that 
which  we  would  fain  that  you  should  do  of  your  free-will; 
and  if  you  still  defy  at  once  the  kindness  and  the  chas- 
tisement of  the  church,  you  will  receive  that  doom  which 
awaits  all  who  defy  its  authority." 

The  attendants  now  touched  the  lads  on  the  arm  in 
token  that  the  audience  was  over,  and  led  them  back  to 
the  room  in  which  they  had  first  been  confined.  When 
left  alone  the  boys  examined  this  closely,  although  seeming 
to  be  looking  without  motive  at  the  walls.  The  windows 
were  placed  high  up  from  the  ground,  far  beyond  their 
reach,  and  were  thickly  barred.  The  door  was  of  massive 
oak,  and  the  room,  although  in  appearance  but  an  ordinary 
apartment,  was  truly  a  dungeon  as  safe  and  as  difficult  to 
break  out  of  as  if  far  below  the  surface  of  the  earth.  Later 
on  when  an  attendant  came  in  with  the  bread  and  water 
which  formed  the  substance  of  each  meal,  as  he  placed  it 
on  the  table  he  said  in  a  low  muttered  whisper,  "Hope 
always.  Friends  are  working."  This  intimation  greatly 
raised  the  spirits  of  the  prisoners,  as  they  felt  that  their 


214  UNDER  DHA&E'S  FLAG. 

friend  the  Spaniard  had  already  succeeded  in  corrupting 
some  at  least  of  the  familiars  of  the  Inquisition,  and  that 
no  means  would  be  spared  to  secure  their  escape  should 
the  worst  occur. 

For  three  days  they  were  visited  for  many  hours  daily 
hy  a  priest,  who  endeavored  to  explain  to  Ned  the  points 
of  difference  between  the  two  religious,  and  to  convince 
him  of  the  errors  of  that  of  England.  Ned,  however, 
although  but  a  poor  theologist,  gave  answer  to  all  his 
arguments,  that  he  could  in  no  way  reply  to  the  reasonings 
of  the  priest,  but  that  he  was,  nevertheless,  convinced  of 
their  error,  and  sure  that  a  divine  of  his  church  would 
have  found  replies  to  difficulties  to  which  he  could  see  no 
outlet.  The  priest  strove  earnestly  with  him,  but  at  the 
end  of  the  third  day  he  retired  exasperated,  saying  angrily 
that  he  now  left  them  to  other  hands. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  215 


CHAPTER  XVL 

THE    RESCUE. 

THE  next  day  they  were  again  brought  before  the  tribu- 
nal, and  the  grand  inquisitor,  without  this  time  entering 
into  any  length  of  speech,  informed  them  briefly  that  he 
gave  them  another  three  days,  and  that  if,  at  the  end  of 
the  third  day,  their  obstinacy  did  not  yield,  he  would  use 
the  means  at  his  disposal,  and  he  pointed  to  various  instru- 
ments hanging  on  the  walls  or  ranged  on  the  table.  Of 
these,  although  the  lads  were  ignorant  of  their  uses,  they 
entertained  no  doubt  whatever,  that  they  were  the  instru- 
ments of  torture  of  which  they  had  heard — thumbscrews, 
iron  gags,  the  boot,  the  rack,  and  other  devilish  inventions. 
They  made  no  reply  to  the  address,  and  were  taken  away 
this  time  down  several  winding-stairs  to  a  black  and  noxious 
dungeon  far  below  the  general  level  of  the  earth.  No 
ray  of  light  entered  this  cell.  The  walls  were  damp  with 
moisture.  In  the  corner  the  boys  discovered  by  the  sense 
of  feeling  a  small  pile  of  rotten  straw  which  had,  without 
doubt,  formed  the  bed  of  some  other  unfortunate  who  had 
before  tenanted  the  prison.  Here,  at  least,  they  had  no 
fear  of  being  overheard;  but  as  the  ingenuity  of  the  inquis- 
itors was  well  known  they  agreed  to  say  no  word  of  the 
hopes  they -still  cherished,  but  to  talk  of  other  matters 
purely  personal  to  themselves.  Here,  as  hour  after  hour 
passed,  they  strengthened  each  other  in  their  resolutions 
by  an  agreement  that  no  torture  should  wring  from  them 


216  UNDER  DRAKK'S  FLAG. 

a  recantation  of  their  faith,  and  by  many  prayers  for 
strength  and  support  from  above. 

Once  a  day  the  door  opened  and  an  attendant  brought 
in  bread  and  water,  which  he  placed  in  silence  on  the 
ground.  The  second  day,  as  he  did  so,  he  placed  a  bundle 
by  the  side  of  the  bread,  and  whispering,  "Be  prudent: 
use  these  only  as  the  last  resource:  friends  are  preparing 
to  help  you,"  retired  as  noiselessly  as  usual.  When  left  in 
darkness  again  the  lads  seized  upon  the  parcel.  It  was 
large  and  heavy,  and,  to  their  great  delight,  they  found 
that  it  contained  two  daggers  and  two  brace  of  heavy 
pistols. 

"I  wonder,"  .Ned  said,  in  a  whisper  to  Tom,  "that  our 
friend  does  not  contrive  to  get  us  passed  through  the 
prison.  But  I  suppose  that  he  finds  that  only  one  or  two, 
perhaps,  of  the  attendants  are  corruptible,  and  that  our 
jailer,  although  he  might  free  us  from  this  cell,  could  not 
pass  us  through  the  corridors  and  out  of  the  building." 

"Let  us  see,"  Tom  said,  "if  we  can  make  our  way  into 
any  cell  which  may  adjoin  this.  If  it  is  empty  we  might 
perchance  make  our  escape." 

All  night  the  boys  labored  with  their'  daggers,  having 
first  tapped  the  wall  all  round  to  hear  if  any  difference  of 
sound  gave  an  intimation  that  a  hollow  space  was  behind. 
They  could  not  perceive  this,  but  fancying  that  upon  the 
one  side  there  was  some  very  slight  difference,  they  at- 
tempted to  remove  the  stones  there.  All  through  the 
night  and  next  day  they  continued  their  label1,  and  suc- 
ceeded with  great  difficulty  in  removing  two  of  the  stones 
of  the  wall.  Behind  these,  however,  was  a  mass  of  rubble, 
formed  of  cement  so  hard  that  the  daggers  failed  to  make 
any  impression  whatever  upon  it,  and  after  laboring 
through  the  whole  day  they  were  forced  to  abandon  the 
design,  and  replace  the  stones  as  they  had  before  been, 
rilling  up  the  interstices  with  the  mortar  which  they  had 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  217 

dug  out,  so  that  no  trace  of  the  task  upon  which  they 
\vere  employed  should  remain. 

That  night  when  the  door  opened,  two  figures,  as  before, 
presented  themselves,  and  they  knew  that  their  summons 
before  the  dreaded  court  was  at  hand.  With  their  daggers 
and  pistols  concealed  within  their  vests  they  followed  their 
guides;  each  with  a  grasp  of  his  hand  assuring  the  other 
of  his  steadfastness  and  faith.  They  had  resolved  that, 
sooner  than  submit  to  torture,  which  would  cripple  them 
for  life,  they  would  right  to  the  last  and  die  resisting. 

This  time  they  found  in  the  audience  hall,  in  addition 
to  the  three  judges,  four  men  clothed  also  in  black,  but 
evidently  of  an  inferior  order.  These  were  standing  ranged 
along  by  the  wall,  in  readiness  to  obey  the  orders  of  the 
judges.  Their  attendants  fell  back  to  the  door,  and  the 
prisoners  remained  standing  alone  in  the  center  of  the 
room. 

"  Acting  in  all  kindness,"  the  judge  said,  "  we  have  given 
you  ample  time  to  retract  and  to  consider  your  position, 
and  we  now  call  upon  you  to  consent  formally  to  abandon 
your  accursed  heresies,  and  to  embrace  the  offer  which  the 
holy  church  kindly  makes  to  you,  or  to  endure  the  pains 
which  it  will  be  necessary  that  we  should  inflict,  in  order 
to  soften  your  hardness  of  heart." 

"We  are  perfectly  resolved,"  Ned  said,  "to  maintain 
the  religion  of  our  fathers.  As  Englishmen  we  protest 
against  this  outrage.  When  your  countrymen  fall  into 
our  hands  no  man  dreams  of  endeavoring  to  compel  them 
to  abandon  their  faith.  They  are  treated  as  honorable 
prisoners;  and  if  any  outrage  be  attempted  upon  our 
bodies,  sooner  or  later,  be  assured,  the  news  of  it  will  come 
to  the  ears  of  our  English  captains;  and  for  every  drop  of 
blood  of  ours  shed  a  Spanish  life  will  answer." 

"You  are  insolent,"  the  inquisitor  said  coldly.  "It  is 
rash  to  threaten  men  in  whoso  power  you  are.  These 


218  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

walls  reveal  no  secrets,  and  though  the  town  were  full  of 
your  English  pirates,  yet  would  your  doom  be  accomplished 
without  a  pessibility  of  rescue,  and  without  your  fate  ever 
becoming  known  beyond  these  four  walls.  Bethink  you," 
he  said,  "before  you  compel  me  to  use  the  meaus  at  my 
disposal;  for  men  have  spoken  as  bravely  and  as  obstinately 
as  yon,  but  they  have  changed  their  minds  when  they  felt 
their  bones  cracking  under  the  torture.  We  would  fain 
abstain  from  injuring  figures  as  manly  as  yours;  but,  if 
needs  be,  we  will  so  reduce  them  to  wrecks  that  you  will 
envy  the  veriest  cripple,  who  crawls  for  alms  on  the  steps 
of  the  cathedral  here." 

The  boys  remained  silent,  and  the  inquisitor,  with  an 
air  of  angry  impatience,  motioned  to  the  men  ranged  along 
by  the  wall  to  seize  their  prisoners. 

The  lads  saw  that  the  time  for  action  was  come.  Each 
produced  his  pistol  from  his  breast,  the  one  leveling  his  at 
the  head  of  the  grand  inquisitor,  while  the  other  faced  the 
foremost  of  those  advancing  toward  them. 

"One  step  nearer,"  Ned  said,  "and  the  two  of  you  are 
dead  men." 

A  silence  as  of  death  fell  in  the  chamber.  The  judges 
were  too  astonished  even  to  rise  from  their  seats,  and  the 
familiars  paused  in  their  advance. 

"You  see,"  Ned  said  to  the  grand  inquisitor,  "that  you 
are  not  masters  of  the  situation.  One  touch  upon  my 
trigger  and  the  death  with  which  you  threaten  me  is 
yours.  Now,  write,  as  I  order  you,  a  pass  by  which  we 
may  be  allowed  to  quit  these  accursed  walls  without 
molestation." 

Without  hesitation  the  judge  wrote  on  a  piece  of  paper 
the  required  order. 

"Now,"  Ned  said,  "you  must  come  with  us,  for  I  put 
no  faith  whatever  in  your  promises,  for  I  know  the  ways 
of  your  kind,  that  promises  made  to  heretics  are  not  con- 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  219 

sidered  sacred.  Yon  are  yourself  my  best  safeguard,  for 
be  assured  that  the  slightest  interruption  to  us  upon  our 
way,  and  I  draw  my  trigger  and  send  you  to  that  eternity 
to  which  you  have  dispatched  so  many  victims." 

The  judge  rose  to  his  feet,  and  Ned  could  see  that,  quiet 
as  he  appeared,  he  was  trembling  with  passion.  Tom  had 
at  the  first  alarm  retreated  to  the  door  so  as  to  prevent  the 
escape  of  the  attendants  stationed  there,  or  of  any  of  the 
others,  to  give  the  alarm.  He  now  opened  it,  and  Ned 
was  about  to  pass  out  with  the  inquisitor  when,  glancing 
round,  he  saw  that  one  of  the  other  judges  had  disappeared, 
doubtless  by  some  door  placed  behind  the  arras  at  the  end 
of  the  room. 

"Treachery  is  intended,"  he  muttered  to  the  inquisitor; 
"but  remember  that  you  will  be  the  first  victim." 

Slowly  Ned  passed  along  the  corridors,  the  inquisitor 
between  the  two  Englishmen,  the  attendants  following  in 
a  group  behind,  uncertain  what  course  to  pursue,  and 
without  orders  from  their  superior,  when  at  last  they  came 
to  a  door.  This  was  locked,  and  Ned  ordered  the  inquisitor 
to  have  it  opened. 

"I  have  not  the  keys,"  he  said;  "they  are  in  the  hands 
of  the  attendant  whose  duty  it  is  to  attend  to  this  portion 
of  the  building." 

"Call  them,"  Ned  said  impatiently. 

The  inquisitor  struck  on  the  closed  door  with  his  hands 
and  called  aloud,  but  no  answer  was  returned. 

"Bid  these  men  behind  you  to  force  it  in,"  Ned  said. 

The  men  advanced,  but  as  they  did  so  a  small  side  door 
in  the  passage,  behind  Ned,  opened  noiselessly,  and  sud- 
denly a  thick  blanket  was  thrown  over  his  head,  while  an 
arm  struck  up  the  hand  which  had  the  pistol.  He  drew 
the  trigger,  however,  and  the  grand  inquisitor  with  a  groan 
sank  to  the  ground.  At  the  same  instant  a  number  of 
men  rushed  through  the  door  and  threw  themselves  upon 


220  UNDER  DRAKE 'S  FLA G. 

the  lads,  and  were  joined  by  the  attendants  standing  be- 
hind. A  desperate  struggle  ensued.  Tom  shot  the  two 
first  men  who  sprang  upon  him,  and  for  some  minutes  the 
lads  maintained  a  desperate  struggle.  Again  and  again 
the  crowd  of  their  assailants  pulled  one  or  other  of  them 
to  the  ground;  but  it  was  not  until  their  strength  was 
utterly  exhausted  by  their  struggles  that  both  were  secured 
and  bound  hand  and  foot.  Then  at  th«  order  of  one  of 
the  other  judges,  who,  now  that  all  danger  was  over,  ap- 
peared upon  the  scene,  they  were  lifted  bodily,  carried 
back  to  their  dungeon,  and  cast  upon  the  ground. 

Panting  and  breathless,  the  lads  lay  for  some  time  too 
exhausted  to  speak. 

"I  am  afraid  that  I  missed  that  rascally  chief  inquisitor," 
Ned  said;  "did  you  notice,  Tom?" 

"I  scarcely  saw,  for  at  the  same  moment  I  was  struck 
from  behind;  but  I  fancy  that  he  fell  when  your  pistol 
exploded." 

"In  that  case,"  Ned  said,  "we  may  have  a  respite  for  a 
day  or  two.  He  will  feel  inclined  to  be  present  at  the 
ceremony  of  torturing  himself.  On  one  thing  I  am  de- 
termined. We  will  not  be  taken  by  the  men  in  black  and 
submit  to  having  our  limbs  wrenched  without  an  effort. 
I  should  think  that  if  we  snatch  up  some  of  the  iron  in- 
struments lying  about,  we  can  manage  to  make  such  a 
resistance  that  they  will  have  to  kill  us  before  we  are  over- 
come. If  I  could  kill  myself  I  certainly  would  do  so.  I 
do  not  think  I  am  a  coward,  Tom,  but  1  confess  that  the 
sight  of  those  horrible  instruments  makes  my  blood  run 
cold." 

"I  feel  with  you,  Ned;  death  itself  were  nothing;  but 
to  be  torn  limb  from  limb  is  something  horrible." 

The  day  passed  without  any  visit  being  paid  to  them. 
No  food  was  brought  in,  and  they  were  left  as  if  forgotten 
by  their  jailers.  Thus  they  were  unable  to  tell  the  hour, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  221 

and  as  it  was  perfectly  dark  it  was  by  guesswork  that  they 
at  last  lay  down  to  sleep  on  the  damp  stones. 

Presently  they  were  awoke  by  the  tramp  of  numerous 
footsteps.  Then  there  was  a  tremendous  battering  at  the 
door. 

"  What  on  earth  are  they  doing?"  Ned  exclaimed. 
"  Have  they  lost  the  key,  and  are  they  going  to  break 
open  the  door  and  finish  with  us  now?  Get  ready;  we 
will  make  a  fight  at  once,  and  try  and  end  it." 

Presently  the  door  gave  way  before  the  heavy  blows 
which  were  struck  upon  it,  and  to  the  astonishment  of  the 
lads  a  band  of  Indians,  naked  to  the  waist  and  holding 
torches,  burst  into  the  cell. 

"Here  they  are!"  exclaimed  one  of  them  in  Spanish. 
"Quick!  there  is  not  a  moment  to  be  lost.  Follow  us;" 
and,  stooping  down,  he  cut  the  cords  which  bound  them. 

Bewildered  and  confused  with  the  sudden  light,  and  by 
the  unexpected  interruption,  the  boys  followed  the  speaker, 
and,  closely  surrounded  by  the  Indians,  made  their  way 
down  the  passages  and  out  into  the  courtyard.  There  was 
no  resistance  or  interference.  The  familiars  had,  appar- 
ently, fled  at  the  sudden  attack  upon  the  jail,  and  no  one 
appeared  to  bar  their  exit.  The  great-  gutes  of  the  court- 
yard stood  iiuiiijured:  but  'he  postern  door  had  been  bat- 
tered in.  Another  body  o*  natives,  armed  with  spears  and 
bows  and  arrows,  were  standing  round  the  entrance;  and 
a  good  ma«y  of  the  people  of  the  neighborhood,  roused  by 
the  sudden  tumult,  were  standing  at  the  doors.  These 
looked  on  apparently  with  mere  curiosity,  and  with  no 
desire  to  interfere  with  what  was  going  on.  Indeed,  the 
Inquisition  was  never  popular  with  the  great  body  of  the 
Spaniards,  over  whom  its  secret  proceedings  and  terrible 
cruelties  hung  like  a  dark  cloud,  as  none  could  ever  say 
that  they  might  not  be  the  objects  of  denunciation. 

It  was  clear  that  the  Indian  were  acting  upon  a  fixed 


222  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

plan,  for  the  moment  that  these  from  within  the  prison 
sallied  out,  all  formed  in  a  compact  body,  and  at  a  brisk 
slinging  trot  started  down  the  street,  the  lads  being  kept 
well  in  the  center,  so  as  to  conceal  them  from  the  gaze 
of  the  public.  Not  a  word  was  spoken  till  they  had  issued 
from  the  town.  For  another  quarter  of  a  mile  their  hur- 
ried march  continued,  and  then,  without  a  word,  the  whole 
of  the  escort,  with  the  exception  of  one  man,  turned  up  a 
crossroad  and  vanished  into  the  darkness. 

"Heaven  be  praised  that  I  have  saved  you,  senors!"  said 
the  Indian  who  remained.  "Do  you  not  recognize  me?  I 
am  Don  Estevan,  whose  life  you  saved  at  Arica.  I  feared 
that  I  might  be  too  late  to  find  you  unharmed;  but  it  re- 
quired time  to  get  the  necessary  force  together.  You 
recognized  me,  of  course,  on  the  pier  when  you  landed. 
The  instant  I  heard  of  your  arrest  I  chartered  a  swift- 
sailing  country  craft,  and  arrived  here  the  day  before  you. 
I  was  the  bearer  of  a  letter,  signed  by  many  of  the  soldiers 
in  garrison  at  Arica,  to  their  comrades  here,  saying  how 
bravely  you  had  behaved,  and  that  you  had  become  good 
comrades  in  the  regiment,  and  urging  them  to  do  anything 
in  their  power  to  save  you  from  the  Inquisition.  This  I 
thought  might  be  useful,  as  they  would  be  sure  to  be  called 
out  in  case  of  an  attack  upon  the  Inquisition,  and  I  prayed 
them  to  be  as  slow  as  possible  in  their  movements,  in  case 
of  any  sudden  alarm.  This  will  account  for  the  fact  that 
none  of  them  arrived  upon  the  spot  before  we  had  finished 
our  business  just  now.  But  there  is  not  a  moment  to 
delay.  I  have  horses  two  miles  away  in  readiness,  and  we 
must  make  for  there.  They  will  be  sure  to  put  on  blood- 
hounds in  pursuit,  and  we  may  have  to  ride  for  it." 

The  boys  briefly  expressed  their  intense  gratitude  to 
their  preserver  for  his  efforts  in  their  behalf,  Ned  adding, 
"I  fear,  Don  Estevan,  that  your  generous  deed  of  to-night 
will  involve  you  in  fearful  danger." 


VXDEH  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


"I  have  taken  every  precaution,"  the  young  Spaniard 
said.  "I  did  not  charter  the  vessel  in  my  own  name,  and 
came  up  in  disguise.  All  my  friends  believe  me  to  be  still 
at  Arica,  and  no  one,  so  far  as  I  know,  has  recognized  me 
here.  I  was  obliged  to  go  to  my  estate,  which  lies  a  hun- 
dred miles  up  the  country.  There  I  armed  my  peons  and 
vaqueros,  and  a  number  of  Indians  who  were  living  near, 
to  whom  I  have  always  shown  kindness.  None  of  them 
knew  that  it  was  the  dungeon  of  the  Inquisition  which 
they  were  to  attack,  but  believed  that  it  was  merely  a 
prison  they  were  about  to  force,  for  the  power  .of  supersti- 
tion is  very  great  in  this  country,  and  although  a  great 
many  of  the  men  may  lead  wild  and  godless  lives,  they 
tremble  at  the  thought  of  lifting  their  hands  against  that 
mysterious  and  awful  body,  the  Inquisition.  News  travels 
slowly  indeed  in  this  country,  and  it  is  not  likely  that  the 
fact  that  the  prison  of  the  Inquisition  has  been  broken 
open  will  ever  reach  the  men  on  my  estate.  The  priest  of 
the  village  is  a  worthy  man,  and  he  has,  I  know,  no  sym- 
pathy with  bigotry  and  cruelty.  Consequently,  if  any  of 
them  should  in  their  confession  tell  him  that  they  have 
been  engaged  in  breaking  a  prison,  he  will  perchance  guess 
what  prison  it  was,  and  may  imagine  that  I  had  a  hand  in 
it.  But  I  feel  sure  that  the  knowledge  so  gained  would 
go  no  further.  I  might,  had  1  chosen,  have  had  the  horses 
brought  to  the  point  where  we  separated  from  my  men. 
But  in  that  case  the  hounds  might  have  followed  upon  the 
main  body,  and  so  some  clue  would  have  been  gained  as  to 
the  direction  from  which  they  came.  As  it  is,  they  will 
follow  us  up  at  any  rate  until  we  take  horses.  We  will 
make  our  track  visible  for  some  distance,  so  that  the  pur- 
suit may  be  carried  on.  Before  it  is  over  they  will  have 
lost  all  track  of  the  rest  of  their  assailants,  and  will  not 
indeed  be  able  to  trace  the  direction  in  which  they  went. 
They,  too,  have  horses  at  a  short  distance,  and  will  speedily 
regain  the  estate." 


UNDER  DRAKES  FLA&. 

"How  did  yon  know  in  which  cell  we  were  confined?" 

"Through  the  jailer.  The  man  who  attended  yon  was 
once  employed  by  my  father.  I  met  him  the  day  I  arrived 
from  Arica,  and  bribed  him  to  convey  the  arms  to  you 
with  which  I  thought  that,  should  they  bring  you  to  trial 
and  torture  before  I  could  collect  my  force,  you  might 
make  a  resistance,  for  I  judged  that  you  would  rather  die 
than  suffer  mutilation  and  agony.  When  you  disclosed 
your  arms  to-day  he  slipped  at  once  from  the  building,  as 
he  knew  that  he  would  be  suspected.  Changing  his  clothes 
in  a  house  near,  he  mounted  his  horse  and  rode  to  meet 
us,  conveying  the  news  that  the  crisis  had  arrived.  How 
it  ended  he  could  not  tell;  but  he  hoped  that  some  delay 
might  occur  in  resuming  proceedings  against  you." 

By  this  time  they  had  reached  their  horses,  which  were 
tied  in  a  clump  of  trees  at  a  short  distance  from  the  road. 

"They  are  fine  animals,"  Don  Estevan  said,  "and  we 
may  reckon  upon  showing  our  heels  to  any  of  those  who 
pursue  us;  for  I  can  assure  you  that  the  chase  is  likely  to 
be  a  hot  one." 

"  Whither  do  you  intend  to  go?" 

"  I  am  thinking  of  making  for  Arica.  Before  we  reach 
that  town  you  can,  if  you  choose,  strike  to  the  hills  and 
join  the  natives  beyond,  as  you  proposed 'when  at  Arica; 
or,  should  you  prefer  it,  you  can,  in  disguises,  enter  Arica 
and  remain  there  for  a  time  until  all  possibility  of  your 
friends  appearing  before  that  place  be  at  an  end.  My 
absence  will  not  have  been  noticed,  for  I  mentioned  to 
friends  there  that  I  was  going  into  the  interior  to  investi- 
gate a  mine,  of  whose  existence  I  had  heard  from  some 
Indians.  When  I  return,  therefore,  I  shall  say  that  the 
mine  was  not  sufficiently  promising  in  appearance  for  me 
to  care  about  asking  for  a  concession  from  the  government. 
I  shall,  of  course,  pretend  to  be  extremely  vexed  at  the 
time  that  has  been  wasted,  and  I  do  not  see  that  any  sus- 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  225 

picion  can  fall  upon  me  as  having  been  concerned  in  the 
affair  at  Lima.  We  will  walk  our  horses  at  a  slow  pace, 
in  order  to  save  them  as  far  as  possible,  and  to  ascertain 
whether  our  pursuers  have  correctly  followed  our  steps. 
When  we  once  hear  them  we  can  then  put  on  our  best 
speed;  and  as  they  will  not  know  that  we  are  but  a  short 
distance  ahead,  they  will  go  at  a  moderate  pace.  Besides, 
the  speed  of  bloodhounds  when  tracking  is  by  no  means 
great." 

An  hour  later  they  heard  a  faint  sound  in  the  distance. 
Instinctively  they  checked  their  horses,  and  again  in  the 
darkness  of  the  night  the  deep  distant  bay  of  a  hound  was 
heard. 

"Just  as  I  thought!"  Don  Estevan  exclaimed.  "They 
have  got  the  bloodhounds,  and  I  should  think  by  the 
sound,  that  they  must  have  just  reached  the  spot  where 
we  mounted.  The  hounds  will  be  puzzled  now;  but  the 
sagacity  of  these  creatures  is  so  great  that  I  am  by  no 
means  sure  that  they  will  be  unable  to  follow  us  by  the 
track  of  the  horses.  Now  let  us  set  spur." 

For  the  next  four  or  five  hours  they  proceeded  at  a 
steady  gallop  toward  the  south.  The  country  was  flat, 
the  road  sandy,  but  even,  and  the  cool  night  air  was  ex- 
hilarating indeed  after  the  confinement  in  the  dark  and 
noisome  dungeon  at  Lima.  So  rejoiced  were  the  boys 
with  their  newly-recovered  freedom  that  it  was  with  diffi- 
culty they  restrained  themselves  from  bursting  into  shouts 
of  joy.  But  they  were  anxious  that  no  sounds  should  be 
heard  by  the  villagers  of  the  little  hamlets  lying  along  the 
road.  The  sound  of  the  horses'  hoofs  on  the  sandy  track 
would  scarcely  arouse  a  sleeping  man;  and  the  fact  that 
their  tracks  would  be  plainly  visible  in  the  sand  when  day- 
light came  caused  them  no  concern,  as,  so  far,  they  had 
made  no  effort  to  deceive  their  pursuers. 

Soon  after  daylight  arrived  they  found  themselves  upon 


UNDEH  1)HAKE>S  FLAG. 

a  stream  which  ran  down  from  the  mountains  and  crossed 
the  road. 

"Now,"  Don-Estevan  said,  "it  is  time  to  begin  to  throw 
thorn  off  our  track.  They  will  believe  that  the  party  con- 
sists solely  of  Indians,  and  our  turning  east  will  seem  as  if 
we  intended  to  take  refuge  in  the  mountains.  Let  us  then 
strike  up  the  river  for  awhile,  land  at  a  spot  where  the 
horses'  hoofs  will  be  clearly  visible,  and  then  pursue  a 
comse  to  the  southeast,  taking  us  nearer  and  nearer  to  the 
hills.  Three  leagues  hence  is  another  stream.  This  we 
will  enter,  and  they  will  make  sure  that  we  have  pursued 
our  former  tactics— that  we  have  followed  it  up  and  again 
struck  for  the  hills.  Instead  of  doing  this  we  will  follow 
it  down  for  a  mile  or  two,  and  quit  it  at  some  spot  where 
the  bank  is  firm,  and  will  leave  no  marks  of  our  footsteps. 
Then  we  will  strike  across  the  country  and  regain  the  road 
some  seven  or  eight  leagues  further  south." 

The  plan  appeared  a  capital  one,  and  was  followed  out 
as  arranged.  Late  in  the  evening  they  were  again  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  southern  road.  In  their  wallets  was  a  plen- 
tiful supply  of  provisions,  and  they  had  filled  their  water 
bottles  at  the  last  stream  which  they  had  crossed,  Enter- 
ing a  grove  of  trees,  they  unsaddled  their  horses  and  allowed 
them  to  crop  the  foliage  and  shrubs,  while  they  threw 
themselves  down  upon  the  soft  earth,  stiff  and  wearied 
with  their  long  journey. 

"  We  will  travel  by  night  always,"  Don  Estevan  said. 
"I  do  not  think  that  any  suspicion  whatever  will  arise  that 
we  have  again  struck  south;  but  should  any  inquiry  be 
made,  it  is  as  well  that  no  one  along  the  road  shall  have 
seen  three  mounted  men." 

For  another  two  days  they  journeyed  as  proposed  by 
night,  resting  by  day  in  quiet  places,  and,  so  far  as  they 
knew,  without  having  been  seen  by  any  of  the  scattered 
population.  It  was  in  the  middle  of  the  third  night,  as 


DRAKE'S  FLAB.  227 

they  were  cantering  slowly  along,  that  they  heard  the  tread 
of  a  horse  at  full  gallop  approaching  from  the  south. 

"You  had  better  withdraw  from  the  road,"  Don  Estevan 
said,  "so  that  but  one  horseman  will  be  met.  I  will  stop 
the  rider  and  hear  why  he  gallops  so  fast.  It  may  be  that 
news  has  preceded  us,  and  it  is  as  well  to  gather  what  in- 
telligence we  can." 

The  boys  withdrew  from  the  road,  Don  Estevan  pro- 
ceeding ahead.  They  heard  the  sound  of  the  galloping 
hoofs  pause  as  their  rider  met  the  Spaniard.  There  was  a 
talk  for  a  few  minutes,  and  then  the  horseman  again  rode 
forward  at  full  speed.  Don  Estevan  paused  for  a  little 
while  to  allow  him  to  get  beyond  earshot,  and  then  re- 
joined his  companions. 

"I  have  great  news,"  he  said,  "and  it  is  for  yon  to  de- 
cide whether  it  will  alter  your  plan  of  proceeding.  The 
man  whom  I  have  just  met  is  a  messenger  dispatched  by 
the  governor  of  Arica  to  Lima  to  warn  the  governor  there 
that  an  English  ship,  under  the  noted  freebooter  Francis 
Drake,  has  put  into  that  harbor,  and  has  started  again, 
sailing  for  the  north,  after  exacting  certain  contributions, 
but  otherwise  refraining  from  injuring  the  town." 

The  boys  gave  a  shout  of  joy,  for  they  had  began  to  fear 
that  the  expedition  must  have  met  with  some  disaster  in 
doubling  Cape  Horn,  and  been  compelled  to  return. 

"What  will  you  do?"  the  Spaniard  asked. 

"Return  to  Lima!"  the  boys  exclaimed  simultaneously. 
"  We  shall  be  there  before  the  admiral  can  arrive,  and  can 
then  rejoin  our  comrades." 

"That  will  indeed  be  your  best  plan,"  Don  Estevan  said; 
"but  you  must  be  disguised  thoroughly.  However,  you 
are  not  likely  to  be  so  closely  investigated  as  you  otherwise 
would  be  at  Lima;  for  you  may  be  sure  that  when  the 
messenger  arrives  there  the  town  will  be  in  such  a  ferment 
of  excitement  at  the  approach  of  your  countrymen 


228  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

that  our  little  affair  will  for  the  time  be  entirely  for- 
gotten. " 

"I  trust,"  Ned  said,  "that  we  shall  he  able  to  do  some- 
thing to  render  your  security  more  perfect;  for,  if  1  mis- 
take not,  when  the  admiral  hears  of  the  doings  of  the  offi- 
cials of  the  Inquisition,  how  many  people  they  have  burned 
to  death  lately  at  Lima,  and  what  frightful  cruelties  they 
have  perpetrated  in  that  ghastly  prison,  he  will  burn  the 
place  to  the  ground  and  hang  up  the  judges,  in  which 
case  we  may  be  sure  that  no  further  inquiry  will  ever  be 
thought  of  concerning  the  attack  on  the  prison.  What 
do  you  advise  us  to  do,  seiior,  for  it  is  clear  that  your  best 
course  is  to  return  to  Arica  direct?" 

"I  cannot  think  of  doing  that,"  the  generous  young 
Spaniard  replied.  "A  few  days'  longer  absence  will  pass 
unnoticed,  especially  as  people  will  have  plenty  of  other 
matters  to  think  and  talk  about.  I  do  not  see  how  you 
can  possibly  obtain  disguises  without  my  assistance,  and  as 
our  pursuers  will  long  since  have  been  thrown  off  our  track 
and  will  probably  have  given  up  the  search  and  have  re- 
turned to  Lima,  convinced  that  we  already  have  crossed 
the  mountains  and  are  beyond  their  reach,  I  think  that 
there  is  little  danger  in  my  nearing  the  city.  Come,  let 
us  turn  our  horses'  heads  at  once." 

In  a  few  minutes  they  were  returning  by  the  route  they 
had  hitherto  traveled.  They  were  already  dressed  as  young 
Spaniards.  The  disguises  had  been  brought  by  their  res- 
cuer, and  assumed  at  the  first  halt.  He  himself  had  also 
washed  the  paint  from  his  face  and  hands,  and  had  assumed 
European  garb,  in  order  that  any  inquiry  about  three 
mounted  Indians  might  be  baffled. 

"There  is  now,"  he  said,  "no  longer  any  occasion  for  us 
to  ride  by  night.  We  are  journeying  north,  and  any  in- 
quiries which  may  ever  be  set  on  foot  will  certainly  point 
only  to  men  going  south,  and  whereas  our  Indian  disguises 


UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG.  229 

might  have  been  suspected,  I  am  now  in  my  proper  char- 
acter and  my  passing  through  can  excite  no  rumor  or 
comment." 

Don  Estevan  had,  indeed,  assumed  the  garb  of  a  Spanish 
proprietor  of  rank,  while  the  boys  were  dressed  as  vaqueros; 
and  as  they  passed  through  villages  in  the  daytime  kept 
their  horses  half  a  length  behind  that  of  their  leader. 
They  avoided  on  their  ride  back  putting  up  at  any  of  the 
posadas  or  village  inns  on  their  road,  sleeping  as  before  in 
the  woods.  Their  marches  were  long,  but  were  performed 
at  a  much  slower  rate  of  speed,  as  they  were  certain  that 
they  would  reach  Lima  long  before  the  admiral's  ship, 
even  should  he  not  pause  at  any  place  on  the  way. 

It  was  upon  the  sixth  day  after  their  rescue  from  prison 
that  they  again  approached  Lima.  After  much  consulta- 
tion they  had  agreed  to  continue  in  their  Spanish  dresses, 
taking  only  the  precaution  of  somewhat  staining  their 
faces  and  hands  to  give  them  the  color  natural  to  men  who 
spend  their  lives  on  the  plains.  Don  Estevan  himself  de- 
termined to  enter  the  city  with  them  after  nightfall,  and 
to  take  them  to  the  house  of  a  trusty  friend,  where  they 
should  lie  concealed  until  the  news  arrived  that  the  Eng- 
lish ship  was  off  the  port.  He  himself  would  at  once 
mount  his  horse  and  retrace  his  steps  to  Arica. 

The  programme  was  carried  out  successfully.  No  one 
glanced  at  the  hidalgo  as  with  his  vaqueros  he  rode  through 
the  streets  of  Lima.  There  were  no  lights  in  those  days 
save  those  which  hung  before  shrines  by  the  roadside,  or 
occasionally  a  dim  oil  lamp  suspended  before  the  portico 
of  some  mansion  of  importance. 

The  friend  to  whom  Don  Estevan  assigned  them  was  a 
young  man  of  his  own  age,  a  cousin,  and  one,  like  himself, 
liberal  in  his  opinions,  free  from  bigotry,  and  hating  the 
cruelties  perpetrated  in  the  name  of  religion  by  the  Inqui- 
sition. He  heard  with  surprise  the  narrative  which  Don 


UNDER  'DRAKE'S  FLA&. 

Estevan  related,  for  the  latter  had  not  visited  him  during 
his  short  stay  in  the  city,  and  was  supposed  still  to  be  at 
Arica.  Great  was  his  astonishment  indeed  when  he  found 
that  the  attack  upon  the  prison  of  the  Inquisition,  which 
had  caused  such  intense  excitement  in  the  city,  had  been 
planned  and  executed  by  his  cousin;  and  his  expressions 
of  approval  of  the  deed  were  warm  and  frequent.  He 
assured  the  boys  that  he  would  do  everything  in  his  power 
to  make  them  comfortable  until  the  arrival  of  the  English 
ship.  A  discussion  took  place  as  to  whether  it  was  better 
that  they  should  appear  as  friends  of  his  who  had  come  in 
from  their  country  estate,  or  whether  they  should  continue 
their  disguise  as  vaqueros.  There  were  objections  to  either 
plan.  In  the  first  place,  the  attendants  in  waiting  would 
detect  the  shortcomings  in  Ned's  Spanish,  and  would  be 
astonished  at  the  silence  of  his  companion.  Upon  the 
other  hand,  it  would  seem  strange  that  they  should  be 
kept  apart  from  the  servitors  of  the  house.  Finally,  it 
was  agreed  that  they  should  appear  as  men  of  rank,  but 
that  Tom  should  feign  sickness  and  therefore  keep  his 
room;  Ned  for  the  most  part  remaining  shut  up  with  him 
and  taking  his  meals  there.  This  course  was  followed  out, 
and  when  the  arrangement  was  complete  they  took  a  hearty 
leave  of  the  noble  young  Spaniard,  who  at  once  remounted 
his  horse  and  started  on  his  weary  ride  back  again  to  Aricn. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 


CHAPTER   XVII. 

THE    "GOLDEN    HIND." 

THE  lads  were  all  anxiety  to  know  what  course  had 
been  determined  upon  with  reference  to  the  arrival  of  the 
English  vessel.  They  were  told  that  a  large  fleet  was 
assembled  in  the  harbor,  but  that  great  dissension  existed 
among  the  authorities  as  to  whether  resistance  should  he 
offered  or  not. 

"Surely, "Ned  said,  "they  will  never  allow  one  vessel 
to  enter  a  harbor  thronged  with  shipping,  and  with  a 
strong  garrison  on  shore  ready  to  take  part  in  the  defense?" 

Their  host  flushed  a  little,  and  said,  "You  English  must 
form  but  a  poor  opinion  of  Spanish  courage.  On  shore, 
however,  we  have  proved  on  the  battlefields  of  the  Conti- 
nent that  we  can  hold  our  own  against  all  comers.  But  I 
own  to  you  that  your  sea-dogs  have  caused  such  a  panic 
among  our  sailors  of  the  western  isles  that  they  are  looked 
upon  as  invincible,  and  our  men  appear  to  be  paralyzed  at 
the  very  name  of  the  English  buccaneers." 

"Why  we  are  particularly  anxious  to  know,"  Ned  said, 
"is  that  if  resistance  is  to  be  offered,  it  is  clear  that  we 
must  be  ready  to  embark  in  a  canoe  and  to  join  the  ship 
before  she  arrives  off  the  harbor,  as  otherwise,  if  she  is 
beaten  off  we  may  have  no  opportunity  whatever  of  regain- 
ing heir." 

"I  think,"  the  Spaniard  said,  "that  when  the  time 
comes  it  is  probable  that  no  resistance  may  be  offered,  and 


232  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

that  the  valor  of  those  who,  so  long  as  the  ship  is  at  a  dis- 
tance, are  anxious  to  fight,  will  evaporate  very  rapidly. 
The  citizens,  too,  are  for  the  most  part  opposed  to  resist- 
ance, for  they  argue  that  if  the  English  conquer  they  are 
likely  to  lay  the  town  in  ruins;  whereas  if  unopposed  they 
may  content  themselves  with  certain  exactions  upon  the 
richer  citizens,  as  has  been  their  custom  in  the  west." 

During  the  days  that  elapsed,  many  arguments  took 
place  between  the  Spaniard  and  Ned  as  to  the  lawfulness 
of  the  war  which  the  English  buccaneers  carried  on  with 
the  colonies  of  a  nation  at  peace  with  their  own,  the  Span- 
iard saying  that  they  approached  very  nearly  to  the  verge  of 
piracy.  Ned  had  never  given  the  subject  much  consider- 
ation before.  He  had  done  as  others  did,  and  had  regarded 
the  Spaniards  as  lawful  prey,  their  cruelty  toward  the 
natives  forming,  in  the  eyes  of  the  English  sailors,  a  justi- 
fication for  any  treatment  which  they  might  inflict  upon 
them.  He  was,  however,  forced  to  confess,  that  now  the 
other  side  was  presented  to  him,  the  conduct  of  his  coun- 
trymen was  really  indefensible,  and  he  blushed  as  he 
thought  of  the  various  acts  of  sacrilege  in  churches  and 
other  deeds  of  plunder  in  which  he  had  taken  part.  He 
assured  his  friend  that  in  the  future  neither  he  nor  his 
companion  would  ever  share  in  such  deeds  again. 

It  was  upon  the  evening  of  the  15th  of  February,  two 
days  after  their  return  to  Lima,  that  their  host  entered 
with  the  news  that  a  ship  was  seen  in  the  distance  ap- 
proaching the  port,  and  that  it  was  the  general  opinion  of 
the  mariners  that  she  was  the  dreaded  English  pirate.  He 
had  already  made  arrangements  that  a  small  boat  should 
be  lying  at  one  end  of  the  mole.  He  told  them  that  he 
could  not  venture  to  engage  rowers,  as  the  fact  of  the 
escape  of  two  white  men  from  the  town  might  be  noticed 
and  inquiries  made.  The  boys  assured  him,  however,  that 
they  were  perfectly  able  to  row  themselves,  and  that  the 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  233 

smaller  the  number  in  the  boat,  the  less  chances  there 
would  be  of  their  being  received  by  a  random  shot  from 
their  friends. 

It  was  just  nightfall  when  the  English  ship  entered  the 
harbor,  where  thirty  Spanish  vessels  were  lying  all  prepared 
for  defense.  The  Golden  Hind  entered  the  port  and  drop- 
ped her  anchor  in  the  midst,  and  the  quiet  resolution  and 
confidence  which  this  act  betrayed  struck  such  a  panic 
into  the  minds  of  the  Spanish  captains,  that  not  one  dared 
be  the  first  to  fire  a  gun  at  the  intruder.  Half  an  hour 
after  the  Golden  Hind  came  to  anchor  a  boat  was  seen  ap- 
proaching and  was  met  by  the  hail,  "Who  goes  there?" 

The  joyful  shout  of  "Friends,  your  comrades,  Ned 
Hearue  and  Tom  Tressilis,"  was  received  by  a  cry  of  in- 
credulity and  astonishment  by  those  on  board  the  English 
vessel.  Two  minutes  later  the  lads  were  on  deck  receiving 
the  hearty  embraces  and  congratulations  of  all  the  mess-, 
mates,  Reuben  Gale  and  Gerald  Summers  being  almost 
beside  themselves  with  joy  at  the  return  to  them  of  the 
comrades  they  believed  to  be  so  long  ago  dead.  The  ad- 
miral himself  was  greatly  moved  at  seeing  them ;  for  their 
gallantry  during  the  preceding  voyage,  and  their  eager 
zeal  to  do  all  in  irheir  power  for  the  expedition,  had  greatly 
raised  them  in  his  affections. 

They  were  soon  seated  in  the  cabin,  which  was  thronged 
by  as  many  of  the  officers  and  gentlemen  adventurers  as 
could  find  room  there.  A  brief  narrative  was  given  of 
their  adventures  since  leaving  the  fleet  upon  the  other  side 
of  the  continent,  and  loud  were  the  expressions  of  surprise 
and  approval  at  the  manner  in  which  they  had  gone 
through  the  various  dangers  and  difficulties  which  they 
had  encountered,  Tom  insisting  generously  that  the  credit 
was  entirely  due  to  the  sagacity  and  coolness  of  his  friend. 
When  the  story  of  the  scene  in  the  dungeons  of  the  Inqui- 
sition was  told,  and  Captain  Drake  was  informed  that 


234  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

large  numbers  of  persons  had  been  burned  alive  in  Lima 
by  the  Inquisition,  he  was  filled  with  fury,  and  at  once 
dispatched  two  boat-loads  of  men,  armed  to  the  teeth,  to 
the  shore,  with  orders  to  burn  down  the  prison,  to  release 
any  prisoners  found  there  and  to  offer  them  a  safe  passage 
to  Europe,  and  also  to  hang  all  officials  who  might  be 
found  within  the  walls.  Ned  acted  as  guide.  The  streets 
of  Lima  were  deserted  as  the  news  of  the  landing  of  a  party 
from  the  English  ship  spread  through  the  town;  shops 
were  closed  and  windows  barred,  and  it  was  as  through  a 
city  of  the  dead  that  the  band  passed  rapidly  along  until 
they  reached  the  prison  of  the  inquisition.  Here  the  doors 
were  broken  down,  and  the  English  sailors  entered  the 
ghastly  prison.  The  cells  were  found  to  be  tenanted  only 
by  natives,  most  of  them  men  who  had  been  captured  in 
the  hills  and  who  had  refused  to  accept  the  Catholic  relig- 
ion. These  were  all  loosed  and  allowed  to  depart  in  free- 
dom for  the  mountains,  taking  with  them  a  store  of  such 
provisions  for  the  way  as  could  be  found  within  the  walls. 
The  sight  of  the  torture-room  roused  the  fury  of  the  sailors 
to  the  utmost  pitch,  and  breaking  into  the  part  wherein  ; 
dwelt  the  principal  inquisitors,  these  were  seized  and  hung 
from  their  windows.  The  contents  of  the  various  rooms  * 
were  then  heaped  together,  a  light  applied,  and  in  a  few 
minutes  a  glow  of  flame  told  the  people  of  Lima  that  the 
dreaded  prison  of  the  Inquisition  was  no  more. 

The  party  then  returned  through  the  streets  to  the  ship,  r 
and  took  part  in  the  further  operations  commanded  by  the 
admiral.  Proceeding  from  vessel  to  vessel,  they  took  out 
all  goods  which  they  fancied,  and  which  were  either  valu- 
able, or  might  be  useful  to  them  in  their  further  voyaging. 
They  hewed  down  the  masts  of  all  the  largest  ships,  and 
cutting  their  cables  allowed  them  to  drift  on  shore.  No 
more  astonishing  scene  was  ever  witnessed  than  that  of 
thirty  ships,  backed  by  a  garrison  and  considerable  popu- 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  235 

lation  on  shore,  allowing  themselves  to  be  thus  despoiled 
and  wrecked  by  the  crew  of  one,  and  this  a  vessel  inferior 
in  size  and  in  the  numerical  strength  of  her  crew  to  many 
of  those  within  the  harbor. 

The  next  day  a  party  landed  and  stripped  many  of  the 
churches  of  their  valuables,  and  also  levied  a  contribution 
upon  the  principal  inhabitants.  Ned  and  Tom,  not 
thinking  it  worth  while  at  this  time  to  enter  into  a  contro- 
versy with  the  comrades  to  whom  they  had  been  so  recently 
restored  as  to  the  legality  of  their  acts,  simply  declined  to 
make  part  of  the  party  who  landed,  alleging  that  they  had 
had  enough  of  the  shore  of  the  South  American  continent 
for  the  rest  of  their  lives. 

The  15th  of  February,  the  date  upon  which  the  Golden 
Hind  arrived  at  the  port  of  Lima,  was  indeed  one  to  be 
remembered  throughout  the  lives  of  the  rescued  seamen. 
Their  future  had  appeared  well-nigh  hopeless.  On  the 
one  side  the  dungeon  of  the  Inquisition  and  probably  a 
death  by  fire.  On  the  other,  a  life  passed  in  the  midst  of 
savages,  away  from  all  possibility  of  ever  rejoining  their 
friends  or  returning  to  their  country.  Now  they  were 
once  again  among  those  delighted  to  see  them,  and  proudly 
trod  the  decks  of  the  Golden  Hind  as  gentlemen  adven- 
turers, having  a  good  share  in  the  booty  as  well  as  in  the 
honor  which  would  accrue  to  all  on  board.  So  far,  indeed, 
the  plunder  had  been  but  small.  Upon  their  way  down 
to  the  Cape  they  had  gleaned  nothing,  and  since  rounding 
it  they  had  only  touched  at  Valparaiso,  where  they  had 
taken  all  that  they  required  in  the  way  of  wines,  stores, 
and  provisions  of  all  kinds,  besides  much  gold  and,  it  is 
sad  to  say,  the  rich  plunder  of  the  churches,  including 
golden  crosses,  silver  chalices,  and  altar-cloths. 

Nowadays  it  gives  one  a  positive  shock  to  hear  of  Eng- 
lish sailors  rifling  churches;  but  in  those  rough  times  acts 
of  sacrilege  of  this  kind  awakened  but  little  reprobation. 


236  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

The  following  day  they  hove  the  anchor  and  sailed 
northward.  In  the  port  they  had  obtained  news  that,  on 
the  evening  before  they  arrived,  a  ship  laden  with  much 
treasure  from  Panama  had  appeared,  but  receiving  news 
of  the  approach  of  the  English,  had  again  set  sail.  All 
determined  that,  if  possible,  the  treasures  on  board  the 
Cacafuego  should  pass  into  the  hold  of  the  Golden  Hind. 
Spreading  all  sail,  they  pressed  northward.  On  the  20th 
of  February  they  touched  at  the  port  of  Paita,  but  did 
not  find  her  there.  On  the  24th  they  passed  the  port  of 
Guayaquil,  and  on  the  28th  crossed  the  line.  On  the  1st 
of  March  a  sail  was  descried  ahead,  and,  sailing  toward 
her,  they  found  that  she  was  indeed  the  vessel  of  which 
they  were  in  search,  and  of  which  they  had  heard  not  only 
at  Lima,  but  from  a  ship  which  they  took  at  Paita,  laden 
with  wine;  and  from  another,  on  board  of  which  they 
found  eighty  pounds  weight  in  gold,  in  Guayaquil.  The 
Cacafuego  had  no  thought  that  the  solitary  ship  which 
was  seen  approaching  was  that  of  Captain  Drake;  but 
taking  her  for  a  Spaniard,  made  no  effort  to  fly.  When, . 
upon  her  coming  close  and  hailing  her  to  surrender,  they 
discovered  their  mistake,  the  captain  made  a  bold  fight. 
Hastily  loading  his  carronades,  he  poured  a  volley  into  the 
Golden  Hind,  and  did  not  surrender  his  ship  until  one  of 
his  masts  had  fallen  by  the  board  and  he  himself  was 
wounded.  Then,  finding  further  resistance  useless,  he; 
hauled  down  his  flag. 

The  booty  taken  was  even  greater  than  had  been  ex- 
pected. Of  gold  and  silver  alone  there  was  on  board  her 
to  the  value  of  £750,000,  equal  to  a  vastly  larger  sum  in 
these  days;  beside  immense  quantities  of  precious  stones, 
silver  vessels,  and  other  valuables.  For  six  days  they  lay 
alongside  the  Cacafuego,  transferring  her  cargo  to  the 
Golden  Hind;  and  at  parting  Captain  Drake  was  consid- 
erate enough  to  give  the  captain  a  letter  to  Captain  Winter, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  237 

or  any  of  the  other  captains  of  the  fleet,  should  they  come 
north  and  meet  her,  begging  that  she  should  be  allowed  to 
pass  without  interruption;  or  that  should  they  have  need 
of  any  of  the  few  articles  left  on  board  her,  they  would 
pay  double  the  value.  He  also,  in  exchange  for  the  valu- 
ables transferred,  was  good  enough  to  bestow  upon  the 
master  a  little  linen  and  some  other  commodities. 

As  it  was  now  certain  that  the  whole  coast  would  be 
thoroughly  alarmed,  and  the  governor-general  at  Panama 
would  be  prepared  with  a  powerful  fleet  to  resist  the  Golden 
Hind  should  she  stir  in  that  direction,  Captain  Francis 
determined  to  sail  boldly  out  to  sea  and  then  to  shape  his 
course  so  as  to  strike  the  coast  again  far  north  of  the 
Spanish  possessions.  His  object  in  thus  undertaking  a 
voyage  which  would  seem  likely  to  yield  but  little  profit 
was,  that  he  hoped  he  might  find  a  passage  round  the 
north  of  America,  and  so  not  only  shorten  his  own  return, 
journey  home,  but  open  a  most  valuable  country  for  trade 
for  his  own  countrymen. 

On  the  7th  of  March,  before  putting  out  to  sea,  he 
touched  at  the  island  of  Cano,  oif  the  coast  of  Nicaragua. 
Here  they  had  an  alarm  which  startled  even  the  boldest. 
As  they  lay  at  anchor  they  felt  the  shock  of  a  terrible 
earthquake,  which  almost  brought  down  the  masts  of  the 
ship,  and  for  a  moment  all  thought  that  she  had  been 
struck  by  some  hostile  machine,  or  had  fallen  down  on  a 
rock.  The  pumps  were  manned,  and  it  was  happily  found 
that  she  made  no  water.  Here  they  made  their  last  prize 
on  the  American  coast — a  ship  which  had  come  across 
from  China.  She  was  laden  with  linen,  China  silk,  and 
China  dishes.  Among  the  spoil  is  enumerated  a  falcon  made 
of  gold,  with  a  great  emerald  set  in  his  breast.  It  was  not 
until  the  15th  of  April  that  they  again  touched  the  land, 
and  landed  at  Guatulco,  whence,  after  a  stay  of  a  few 
hours,  they  departed;  "not  forgetting,"  the  chronicler 


238  UNDfiH  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

says,  "to  take  with  them  a  certain  pot  of  about  a  bushel 
in.drigness,  full  of  royals  of  plate,  together  with  a  chain  of 
gold,  and  some  other  jewels  which  we  entreated  a  gentle- 
man Spaniard  to  leave  behind  him  as  he  was  flying  out  of 
town."  They  then  steered  out  to  sea,  and  did  not  see  the 
land  again  until,  after  sailing  fourteen  hundred  leagues, 
they  came,  on  June  3d,  in  sight  of  laud  in  forty-two  degrees 
north  latitude. 

Before  going  further,  the  adventures  of  the  fleet  must 
be  briefly  related  from  the  day,  being  the  21st  of  June, 
when  the  attack  was  made  upon  them  by  the  Patagonians 
and  the  boys  were  driven  into  the  wood.  Captain  Francis 
and  those  of  the  crew  on  shore  with  him  soon  beat  off  the 
natives,  inflicting  some  loss  upon  them.  These  took  to 
the  woods,  in  which  they  could  not  be  followed,  and  Cap- 
tain Francis,  mourning  for  the  loss  of  his  three  adven- 
turers, and  of  the  gunner  killed  by  his  side,  and  despairing 
of  ever  recovering  the  bodies  of  those  who  wore,  as  he  be- 
lieved, cut  off  and  murdered,  embarked  on  board  ship  and 
sailed  down  the  coast.  A  few  clays  later  he  put  into 
another  bay,  and  there  remained  some  time. 

Here  a  strange  scene  was  enacted,  which  has  cast  a 
shadow  over  tjie  reputation  of  the  great  sea  captain. 
Calling  his  officers  together,  he  accused  one  of  them,  Cap- 
tain Doughty,  of  treachery.  He  alleged  that  the  plots 
against  him  were  commenced  before  leaving  Plymouth, 
and  yet,  as  he  had  promoted  Captain  Doughty  to  the  com- 
mand of  one  of  the  ships  when  upon  the  voyage,  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  understand  how  he  can  at  that  time  have  believed 
that  he  was  unfaithful.  Nor,  again,  does  it  appear  in 
what  way  his  treachery  could  have  injured  the  admiral, 
for  as  all  the  officers  and  crew  were  devoted  to  him,  Cap- 
tain Doughty  might  have  tried  in  vain  to  lead  them  aside 
from  his  authority.  He  professed  indeed  the  highest  re- 
gard for  the  man  he  accused,  and  spoke  to  the  captains  of 


DRAKE'S  FLAG.  239 

fi 

the  great  good-will  and  inward  affection,  even  more  than 
brotherly,  which  he  held  toward  him.  And  yet  he  averred 
that  it  was  absolutely  necessary  that  Captain  Doughty 
should  be  put  upon  his  trial. 

Captain  Doughty,  it  is  said,  stricken  with  remorse  at 
his  conduct,  acknowledged  himself  to  have  deserved  death, 
for  that  he  had  conspired,  not  only  for  the  overthrow  of 
the  expedition,  but  for  the  death  of  the  admiral  who  was 
not  a  stranger,  but  a  dear  and  true  friend  to  him,  and  he  be- 
sought the  assembly  to  take  justice  into  their  hands  in  order 
to  save  him  from  committing  suicide. 

The  forty  officers  and  gentlemen  who  formed  the  court, 
after  examining  the  proofs,  judged  that  "he  had  deserved 
death,  and  that  it  stood  by  no  means  with  their  safety  to 
let  him  live,  and  therefore  they  remitted  the  matter  thereof, 
with  the  rest  of  the  circumstances,  to  the  general."  Then 
Captain  Drake  offered  to  the  prisoner  either  that  he  should 
be  executed  there  and  then,  or  that  lie  should  be  left  alone 
when  the  fleet  sailed  away,  or  that  he  should  be  sent  back 
to  England,  there  to  answer  his  deeds  before  the  lords  of 
her  majesty's  council.  Captain  Doughty  asked  for  twenty- 
four  hours  to  consider  his  decision,  and  then  announced 
his  preference  for  instant  execution,  saying  that  death  were 
better  than  being  left  alone  in  this  savage  land,  and  that 
the  dishonor  of  being  sent  back  to  England  would  be 
greater  than  he  could  survive. 

The  next  day  Mr.  Francis  Fletcher,  the  pastor  and 
preacher  of  the  fleet,  held  a  solemn  service.  The  general 
and  the  condemned  man  received  the  sacrament  together, 
after  which  they  dined  "also  at  the  same  table  together  as 
cheerful  in  sobriety  as  ever  in  their  lives  they  had  done  afore- 
time, each  cheering  the  other  up  and  taking  their  leave  by 
drinking  each  to  other,  as  if  some  journey  only  had  been 
in  hand."  After  dinner,  Captain  Doughty  came  forth, 
kneeled  down  at  the  block,  and  was  at  once  beheaded  by 
the  provost-marshal. 


£40  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

Such  is  the  story  of  this  curious  affair  as  told  by  the 
chroniclers.  But  it  must  be  remembered  that  these  were 
favorable  to  Captain  Drake,  and  it  certainly  seeras  extraor- 
dinary that  upon  such  a  voyage  as  this  Captain  Doughty 
could  not  have  been  deprived  of  his  command  and  reduced 
to  the  rank  of  a  simple  adventurer,  in  which  he  could,  one 
would  think,  have  done  no  harm  whatever  to  the  expedi- 
tion. 

At  the  island  where  this  execution  took  place  the  fleet 
abode  two  months,  resting  the  crews,  wooding,  watering, 
and  trimming  the  ships,  and  bringing  the  fleet  into  a  more 
compact  compass;  destroying  the  Mary,  a  Portuguese 
prize,  and  arranging  the  whole  of  the  crews  in  three  ships, 
so  that  they  might  the  more  easily  keep  together.  On 
August  the  17th  they  set  sail,  and  on  the  20th  reached  the 
entrance  to  the  Straits,  Cape  Virgins.  Here  the  admiral 
caused  his  fleet,  in  homage  to  the  queen,  to  strike  their 
foresails,  acknowledging  her  to  have  the  full  interest  and 
honor  in  the  enterprise,  and  further,  in  remembrance  of 
his  honored  patron,  Sir  Christopher  Hatton,  he  changed 
the  name  of  the  ship  in  which  he  himself  sailed  from  the 
Pelican  to  the  Golden  Hind,  this  animal  forming  part  of 
the  chancellor's  armorial  bearings. 

They  now  entered  the  narrow  Straits  of  Magellan,  which 
are  in  many  places  no  wider  than  a  river;  and  in  the  night 
passed  a  burning  mountain,  which  caused  no  little  surprise 
to  those  who  had  never  beheld  anything  of  the  kind. 
Here  all  were  astonished  by  the  sight  of  huge  numbers  of 
penguins,  which  were  then  for  the  first  time  discovered  by 
Englishmen.  These  strange  birds,  with  their  long  bodies, 
short  necks,  and  absence  of  wings,  greatly  astonished  them, 
and  were  so  tame  that  in  the  course  of  an  hour  or  two  they 
killed  no  less  than  three  thousand  of  them,  and  found 
them  to  be  excellent  food.  One  of  these  islands  the  ad- 
miral christened  St.  George.  Sailing  on  for  some  days 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  241 

they  came  to  a  bay  in  which  they  found  many  natives, 
who  came  out  in  a  canoe,  whose  beauty  and  form  were 
considered  by  all  to  be  far  superior  to  anything  that  they 
had  hitherto  beheld,  which  was  the  more  singular,  inas- 
much as  these  people  were  of  a  very  low  type.  However, 
they  appear  in  those  days  to  have  been  more  advanced  in 
civilization  than  their  descendants  now  are. 

On  the  6th  of  September  they  entered  the  South  Sea, 
Drake  having  been  the  fourth  commander  who  had  sailed 
through  the  Straits.  The  first  passage  was  made  by  Ma- 
gellan in  1520,  the  second  by  Loyasa  in  1526,  the  third  by 
Juan  de  Ladrilleros  from  the  Pacific  side.  In  this  voyage 
the  English  commander  had  far  better  weather  than  had 
been  experienced  by  his  predecessors,  accomplishing  in  a 
fortnight  a  voyage  which  had  taken  them  some  months. 
His  good  fortune,  however,  here  deserted  them,  for  upon 
the  very  day  after  they  entered  the  South  Sea  a  contrary 
wind  fell  upon  them,  and  increased  to  a  powerful  hurri- 
cane. This  augmented  rather  than  decreased  in  force, 
and  on  the  night  of  September  the  30th  the  Marygold, 
Captain  John  Thomas,  was  separated  from  the  rest  of  the 
fleet,  and  was  never  heard  of  after.  Until  the  7th  of 
October  they  did  not  again  see  land,  being  driven  far  to 
the  south.  They  then  discovered  an  island,  and  entering 
a  harbor  came  to  anchor.  The  shelter,  however,  was  a 
poor  one,  and  the  gale  blew  so  furiously  that  in  the  night 
the  Elizabeth  was  blown  from  her  anchors  and  lost  sight 
of  the  Golden  Hind.  It  is  a  question  whether  this  event 
was  not  partly  caused  by  the  captain,  Winter,  who  cer- 
tainly behaved  as  if  he  had  the  fixed  intention  of  returning 
to  England.  He  never  made  any  serious  effort  to  rejoin 
,the  Golden  Hind,  but  after  remaining  for  some  little  time 
in  those  quarters  he  sailed  for  England,  reaching  home  in 
safety  some  months  afterward. 

They  christened  the  bay  "  The  Parting  of  .Friends,"  and 


242  UNitm  DttAK&S  FLAG. 

the  Golden  Hind  was  driven  down  again  into  fifty-five 
degrees  south  latitude.  Fresh  gales  fell  upon  them,  and, 
as  has  been  said,  it  was  not  till  October  28th,  after  fifty-two 
days  of  almost  unexampled  bad  weather,  that  the  sky 
cleared,  and  they  were  able  to  renew  their  journey.  They 
searched  the  islands  in  all  directions  for  their  missing 
friends,  and  in  remembrance  of  them  the  admiral  gave 
them  the  name  of  the  Elizabethedes. 

Hoping  that  Captain  Winter  had  sailed  north,  the 
Golden  Hind's  head  was  turned  in  that  direction,  with 
great  hope  that  they  might  meet  her  in  latitude  thirty 
degrees,  which  had  been  before  appointed  as  a  place  of 
rendezvous  should  the  fleet  happen  to  be  separated. 
Touching  at  many  points,  they  inquired  everywhere  of 
the  natives,  but  could  hear  no  word  of  any  ship  having 
been  seen  before.  At  the  island  of  Mocha  they  had  a 
misadventure.  The  island  was  thickly  inhabited  by  many 
Indians,  whom  the  cruel  conduct  of  the  Spaniards  had 
driven  from  the  mainland.  With  these  people  the  admiral 
hoped  to  have  traffic,  and  the  day  after  his  landing  they 
brought  down  fruit  and  vegetables  and  two  fat  sheep,  re- 
ceiving in  return  many  little  presents.  They  seemed  to 
be  well  content,  and  the  next  morning  early,  all  being 
ready  for  a  general  traffic,  the  admiral  repaired  to  the 
shore  again  with  two-thirds  of  his  men  with  water-barrels 
to  fill  up  the  ship.  As  they  were  peaceably  engaged  in 
this  task  the  natives,  to  the  number  of  five  hundred,  sud~; 
denly  sprang  from  an  ambush,  and  with  their  arrows  shot 
very  grievously  at  the  English.  The  general  himself  was 
struck  in  the  face,  under  his  right  eye  and  close  by  his 
nose.  Nine  other  persons  of  the  party  were  all  wounded 
grievously.  The  rest  gained  the  boats,  and  all  put  off. 
None  of  the  wounded  died,  which,  considering  that  there 
was  no  surgeon  on  board  the  ship,  was  looked  upon  by  the 
mariners  as  a  special  miracle  in  their  favor.  There  was  a 


VNDEH  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  243 

great  talk  of  returning  to  shore  to  punish  the  men  who 
had  so  treacherously  attacked  them.  But  the  admiral, 
seeing  that  many  of  the  men  were  hurt,  and  believing  that 
the  attack  had  been  the  result  of  the  cruel  treatment  be- 
stowed upon  the  natives  by  the  Spaniards,  with  whom  they 
had  naturally  confounded  our  men,  determined  to  leave 
them  alone,  and  the  same  night  sailed  north,  seeking  some 
convenient  spot  where  the  men  could  land  and  obtain  a 
supply  of  fresh  provisions. 

Such  a  place  they  found  at  Philip's  Bay,  in  latitude 
thirty-two  degrees.  Here  they  came  to  an  anchor;  and  an 
Indian,  described  as  a  comely  personage  of  a  goodly  stature, 
his  apparel  being  a  white  garment  reaching  scarcely  to  his 
knees,  came  on  board  in  a  canoe.  His  arms  and  legs  were 
naked ;  his  hair  upon  his  head  very  long,  and  without  a 
beard;  of  very  gentle,  mild,  and  humble  nature,  and  tract- 
able to  learn  the  use  of  everything.  He  was  courteously 
entertained,  and  receiving  gifts,  returned  to  the  shore, 
where  his  companions,  being  much  pleased  with  his  recep- 
tion, at  once  did  all  that  they  could  for  the  fleet,  and 
brought  down  provisions  and  other  things  desired.  The 
natives  also  offered  to  guide  them  to  a  better  harbor,  where, 
the  people  being  more  numerous,  they  could  obtain  a 
greater  store  of  the  things  desired.  The  offer  was  accepted, 
and  on  the  4th  of  December,  piloted  by  him,  they  carne  to 
a  harbor  in  such  a  place  as  was  wished  for. 

This  was  the  Spanish  harbor  of  Valparaiso,  and  here, 
indeed,  they  found  all  that  they  desired,  and  that  without 
payment.  The  Spaniards,  having  no  idea  of  the  English 
being  in  the  vicinity,  received  them  with  all  honor;  but 
as  soon  as  the  mistake  was  discovered  they  fled,  and  the 
town  fell  into  their  hands.  In  a  ship  in  the  harbor,  called 
the  Grand  Captain,  eighteen  hundred  jars  of  wine  and  a 
large  quantity  of  gold  were  found.  The  churches  were 
plundered  of  their  ornaments  and  relics,  and  the  store- 


244  UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG. 

houses  of  the  city  laid  under  contribution  of  all  things 
desired. 

Sailing  again  on  the  19th  of  December,  they  touched  to 
the  southward  of  the  town  of  Coquimbo,  where  fourteen 
of  them  landed.  The  Spaniards  here,  however,  appeared 
to  be  bolder  than  their  comrades  in  other  towns,  for  a 
hundred  of  them,  all  well  mounted,  with  three  hundred 
natives,  came  up  against  them.  Th;s  force  being  descried, 
the  English  retreated,  first  from  the  mainland  to  a  rock 
within  the  sea,  and  thence  to  their  boat.  One  man,  how- 
ever, Richard  Minnioy,  refused  to  retire  before  the  Span- 
iards, and  remained  defying  the  advancing  body  until  they 
arrived.  He,  of  course,  fell  a  victim  to  his  obstinacy,  and 
the  Spaniards,  having  beheaded  the  body,  placed  it  against 
a  post,  and  used  it  as  a  target  for  the  Indians.  At  night- 
fall they  left  it,  and  the  English  returned  to  shore  in  their 
boat  and  buried  it.  The  next  day,  finding  a  convenient 
place,  they  remained  for  a  month  refitting  the  ships  and 
resting  the  crews,  obtaining  an  abundance  of  fish  and  other 
provisions  such  as  they  required,  fresh  water,  however, 
being  absent. 

Sailing  along,  they  came  to  Iquique,  and  landing  here 
they  lighted  upon  a  Spaniard  who  lay  asleep,  and  had  lying 
by  him  thirteen  bars  of  silver.  Thinking  it  cruel  to 
awaken  him,  they  removed  the  money  and  allowed  him  to 
take  his  sleep  out  in  security.  Continuing  their  search 
for  water,  they  landed  again,  and  near  the  shore  met  a 
Spaniard  with  an  Indian  boy  driving  eight  "Peruvian 
sheep,"  as  the  chronicler  calls  them,  these  being,  of  course, 
the  llamas,  which  were  used  as  beasts  of  burden.  Each 
sheep  bore  two  leathern  bags,  in  each  of  which  was  fifty 
pounds  weight  of  refined  silver.  The  chronicler  says, 
"  We  could  not  endure  to  see  a  gentleman  Spaniard  turned 
carrier  so,  and  therefore,  without  entreaty,  we  offered  our 
services,  and  became  drivers,  only  his  directions  were  not 


FLAG.  £45 

so  perfect  that  we  could  keep  the  way  which  he  intended, 
for  almost  as  soon  as  he  was  parted  from  us  we,  with  our 
new  kind  of  carriages,  were  come  unto  our  boats." 

Beyond  this  cape  lay  certain  Indian  towns,  and  with 
the  natives  of  these,  who  came  out  on  frail  rafts,  they 
trafficked  knives,  beads,  and  glasses,  for  dried  fish.  Here 
they  saw  more  of  the  llamas,  which  are  described  at  great 
length  by  the  historians  of  the  expedition,  who  considered, 
and  rightly,  that  they  were  extraordinary  and  most  useful 
animals.  If,  however,  this  assertion,  that  upon  one  of 
their  backs  "did  sit  at  one  time  three  well-grown  and  tall 
men  and  one  boy"  be  trues  they  must  have  been  considera- 
bly larger  in  those  days  than  at  present.  It  was  but  a  few 
days  later  that  they  arrived  at  Arica,  at  which  place  also 
they  gleaned  considerable  booty,  and  thence  proceeded  to 
Lima,  which  they  reached  seven  days  after  leaving  Arica. 

After  their  long  voyage  out  to  sea  they  again  bore  north, 
and  reached  the  land  at  the  Bay  of  San  Francisco.  Here 
they  complained  bitterly  of  the  cold,  which  is  not  a  little 
singular,  inasmuch  as  the  time  of  the  year  was  June,  a 
period  at  which  the  heat  at  San  Francisco  is  at  present 
excessive.  It  must  be  assumed,  therefore,  that  some  alto- 
gether exceptional  season  prevailed  during  this  portion  of 
the  voyage.  Here  they  were  well  north  of  the  Spanish 
possessions,  and  fell  among  a  people  who  knew  nothing  of 
the  white  man.  A  native  in  a  canoe  speedily  came  out  to 
the  ship  as  soon  as  she  cast  anchor,  and,  standing  at  a  long 
distance,  made  delivery  of  a  very  prolix  oration,  with  many 
gestures  and  signs,  moving  his  hand,  turning  and  twisting 
his  head  and  body,  and  ending  with  a  great  show  of  rever- 
ence and  submission.  He  returned  to  shore.  Again,  and 
for  a  third  time,  he  came  out  and  went  through  the  same 
ceremony;  after  which  he  brought  a  little  basket  of  rushes 
filled  with  an  herb  which  is  called  there  tambac,  which  he 
threw  into  the  boat.  Then  he  again  returned  to  shore. 


246  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA  G. 

The  people  came  out,  many  of  them  in  boats,  but  would 
not  approach  the  vessel ;  and  upon  the  third  day  the  ves- 
sel, having  received  a  leak  at  sea,  was  brought  to  anchor 
nearer  the  shore,  and  preparations  were  made  to  land  her 
stores. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  347 


CHAPTER   XVIII. 

SAN    FRANCISCO    BAY. 

AFTER  his  experience  of  the  treachery  of  the  natives, 
the  admiral  determined  to  build  a  fort  to  protect  the  party 
on  shore.  The  people,  seeing  these  preparations,  appeared 
in  large  numbers  and  approached,  but  their  attitude  ex- 
pressed astonishment  rather  than  hostility.  They  then, 
laying  down  their  arms,  gathered  round  the  little  party  of 
white  men;  but  as  they  brought  their  women  with  them, 
the  admiral  concluded  that  no  hostility  was  intended,  and 
allowed  them  freely  to  mix  with  the  whites.  Their  atti- 
tude and  deportment  showed  that  they  looked  upon  them 
as  gods,  paying  worship  in  the  most  abject  manner.  In 
order  to  show  them  that  his  men  were  but  human,  the 
admiral  ordered  them  to  eat  and  drink,  that  the  people 
might  observe  that  they  were  but  men  as  they.  Even  this 
failed  to  convince  them,  and  during  the  whole  time  that 
they  remained  there  they  were  treated  as  being  creatures 
of  celestial  origin. 

Two  days  later  the  natives  returned  in  great  numbers. 

A  leader  at  their  head  again  delivered  a  long  and  tedious 
oration,  "to  which,"  according  to  the  chronicler,  "these 
people  appear  to  he  much  addicted."  This  oration  was 
delivered  with  strange  and  violent  gestures,  the  speaker's 
voice  being  extended  to  the  uttermost  strength  of  nature, 
and  his  words  falling  so  thick,  one  in  the  neck  of  another, 
that  he  could  hardly  fetch  his  breath  again.  When  he 


248  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

had  concluded  the  people  bowed  to  the  earth,  giving  a 
long  cry  of  "Oh,"  which  appears  to  have  answered  to  our 
"Amen."  Then  the  men  came  forward,  and  the  women 
went  through  a  number  of  exercises,  which  appear  to  have 
shocked  and  appalled  our  seamen.  "As  if  they  had  been 
desperate,  they  used  violence  against  themselves,  crying 
and  shrieking  piteously,  tearing  their  flesh  with  their  nails 
from  their  cheeks  in  a  monstrous  mariner,  the  blood 
streaming  down  over  their  bodies.  Then,  holding  their 
hands  above  their  heads  so  that  they  might  not  save  their 
bodies  from  harm,  they  would  with  fury  cast  themselves 
upon  the  ground,  never  respecting  whether  it  were  clean 
or  soft,  but  dash  themselves  in  this  manner  on  hard  stones, 
knobby  hillocks,  stocks  of  wood,  and  prickly  bushes,  or 
whatever  else  were  in  their  way,  iterating  the  same  course 
again  and  again  some  nine  or  ten  times  each,  others  hold- 
ing out  for  fifteen  or  sixteen  times  till  their  strength  failed 
them."  The  admiral,  horrified  by  this  cruel  exhibition  of 
reverence,  ordered  his  men  to  fall  to  prayers,  and  signified 
to  them  that  the  God  whom  we  did  serve  did  not  approve 
of  such  measures  as  they  had  taken.  Three  days  later, 
the  king  himself  came  down,  and  the  ceremonies  were  re- 
peated. The  king  then  offered  to  the  admiral  the  mon- 
archy of  that  land,  and  perceiving  that  this  would  please 
them,  and  having  in  mind  the  honor  and  glory  of  her 
majesty,  Captain  Francis  accepted  the  crown,  and  with' 
many  ceremonies  was  installed  king  of  that  country,  taking 
possession  of  the  land  in  the  name  of  the  queen.  It  is 
not  a  little  singular  that  this,  one  of  the  richest  and  most 
valuable  portions  of  the  United  States,  should  thus  have 
become  by  right  alike  of  discovery  and  of  free  gift  of  the 
people,  a  possession  of  England. 

For  some  days  the  people  continued  their  cruel  exercises 
upon  themselves,  and  so  fixed  were  they  in  their  idolatry 
that,  even  when  forcibly  prevented  acting  this  way  (hey 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  249 

would,  immediately  they  were  released,  set  to  with  even 
redoubled  fury  to  cut  and  injure  themselves.  After  a  time 
their  worship  took  a  new  form.  All  the  people  of  the 
country  having  wounds,  shrunken  limbs,  or  diseases  of 
any  kind  were  brought  down  to  be  cured,  and  the  people 
were  much  grieved  that  an  instantaneous  cure  could  not 
be  effected,  but  that  our  men  proceeded  by  the  application 
of  lotions,  plasters,  and  unguents  to  benefit  those  who  had 
anticipated  immediate  remedy. 

Altogether,  the  account  given  by  the  voyagers  of  the 
people  of  this  part  of  America  is  most  favorable.  They 
appear  to  have  been  of  a  tractable,  free,  and  loving  nature, 
without  guile  or  treachery.  They  were  finely  built  men, 
and  one  of  them  could  carry  easily  uphill  and  down  a 
weight  which  two  or  three  Englishmen  could  scarcely  lift. 
They  were  swift  at  running,  and  could  catch  a  fish  in  the 
sea  if  it  were  in  water  within  their  depth.  When  the  ship 
was  repaired,  the  admiral,  with  many  of  his  officers,  made 
a  journey  into  the  interior,  and  found  that  it  was  a  goodly 
country  with  a  very  fruitful  soil.  There  were  many  thou- 
sands of  large  and  fair  deer  grazing  in  herds.  This  coun- 
try was  christened  by  the  admiral,  Albion,  partly  from  the 
color  of  its  cliffs,  partly  in  remembrance  of  his  country. 
On  the  shore  a  monument  was  set  up,  and  on  it  a  plate  of 
brass  was  affixed  engraven  with  the  queen's  name,  the 
date  of  the  arrival  of  the  ship,  and  of  the  free  giving  up 
of  the  province  and  kingdom  into  her  majesty's  hand,  and 
a  piece  of  current  English  money  was  fastened  beneath  a 
hole  made  in  the  brass  plate,  so  that  it  might  remain  as  a 
proof  that  the  English  had  taken  possession  of  this  land 
to  which  the  Spaniards  had  never  approached. 

As  the  stores  were  being  taken  on  board  again,  and  the 
natives  saw  the  preparations  for  embarkation,  the  joy  with 
which  the  arrival  of  these  white  beings  had  been  received 
was  changed  into  sorrow,  and  all  the  people  went  about 


250  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

mourning  and  crying.  For  many  days  this  continued, 
and  the  parting  when  the  ship  set  sail  on  the  23d  of  July 
was  a  very  sorrowful  one,  the  people  climbing  to  the  top 
of  the  hills  so  as  to  keep  the  ship  in  sight  as  long  as  they 
could,  and  making  great  fires  and  burning  thereon  sacri- 
fices to  the  departing  gods. 

The  admiral  had  now  made  up  his  mind  to  abandon  the 
search  for  a  passage  round  the  north  of  America.  The 
cold  had  become  even  greater  while  they  remained  in  the 
bay.  The  natives  themselves  were  wrapped  in  black  cloths 
and  huddled  together  for  warmth,  and  those  in  the  ship 
suffered  exceedingly.  Moreover,  the  shores  of  the  country 
trended  far  more  to  the  west  than  had  been  expected,  and 
the  admiral  concluded  that  far  to  the  north  the  shores  of 
America  and  Asia  must  unite.  He  thought,  too,  that  in 
that  country  must  be  very  lofty  mountains  covered  with 
snow,  for  so  alone  could  he  account  for  the  exceeding  cold- 
ness of  the  wind.  Believing,  therefore,  that  no  passage 
could  be  made  in  that  way,  and  seeing  that  the  ship  had 
already  gone  through  heavy  tempests,  and  the  men,  al- 
though still  of- good  heart,  yet  were  longing  for  a  return 
home  after  their  great  labors,  he  steered  to  the  west, 
making  the  Moluccas  his  aim. 


During  the  voyage  from  Lima,  along  the  coast  of  South 
America,  the  boys  had  met  with  no  special  adventures. 
Upon  the  day  after  they  came  on  board  ship  Ned  and  Torn 
were  called  by  the  admiral  into  his  cabin,  and  there  re- 
counted to  him  at  great  length  all  the  adventures  that 
they  had  gone  through.  He  wondered  greatly  at  their 
recital,  and  commended  them  exceedingly  for  the  prudence 
and  courage  which  they  had  shown.  The  account  of  the 
strange  places  never  before  trodden  by  the  foot  of  white 
men  which  they  had  seen,  he  ordered  his  secretary  to  writo 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  25! 

down  at  full  length,  that  it  might  be  delivered  to  her  gra- 
cious majesty,  together  with  the  record  of  the  voyage  of 
the  Golden  Hind,  and  he  predicted  that  the  queen  would 
take  great  pleasure  in  this  record  of  the  first  journey  across 
the  continent. 

"As  to  you,"  he  said,  turning  to  Ned,  "you  seem  to  be 
fated  to  get  into  adventures,  and  to  find  your  way  out  of 
them.  I  have  not  forgotten  the  strange  passage  in  the 
island  of  Porto  Eico,  and  I  predict  that  if  you  go  on  as 
you  have  begun  you  will  come  to  great  things." 

Warmly,  also,  did  he  praise  Ned's  companion  on  the 
journey;  but  the  latter  modestly  ascribed  all  the  success 
which  had  attended  their  journey  to  the  knowledge  of 
native  life  which  Ned  had  gained  among  the  negroes,  and 
to  his  courage  and  prudence. 

"Nevertheless,"  said  the  admiral,  "there  is  praise  due 
also  to  you,  for  yon  have  known  when  to  subordinate  your- 
self to  one  younger  in  years,  although  older  in  experience. 
This  virtue  is  rare  and  very  commendable,  and  I  doubt 
not  that  had  you  not  so  freely  given  up  your  own  wishes 
and  inclinations  to  those  of  your  comrade,  you  might  both 
have  perished  miserably." 

He  further  expressed  his  high  opinion  of  Ned's  bravery 
and  discretion  by  giving  him  a  command  in  the  ship  as 
third  officer,  finding,  on  inquiry,  that  he  had  learned  how 
to  take  the  altitude  of  the  sun  and  to  do  other  things  nec- 
essary for  the  discovery  of  the  position  of  the  ship.  These 
signs  of  good- will  on  the  part  of  the  admiral  caused,  as 
might  have  been  expected,  some  jealousy  among  a  consid- 
erable portion  of  the  equipage.  Many,  indeed,  were  glad 
at  the  position  which  Ned  had  gained  by  his  enterprise 
and  courage.  Others,  however,  grumbled,  and  said  that 
it  was  hard  that  those  who  had  done  their  duty  on  board 
the  ship  should  be  passed  over  in  favor  of  mere  youngsters 
who  had  been  wandering  on  their  own  account  on  land. 


252  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

Ned  himself  felt  that  there  was  some  reason  for  this  jeal- 
ousy upon  the  part  of  those  who  had  borne  the  burden  of 
all  the  great  labors  which  those  on  board  the  Golden  Hind 
had  undergone,  and  he  spoke  to  the  admiral  and  expressed 
his  willingness,  nay  more,  his  desire,  to  remain  as  a  private 
gentleman  and  adventurer  on  board  the  ship.  This,  how- 
ever, Captain  Francis  would  not  hear  of. 

"Merit  has  to  be  rewarded,"  he  said,  "wheresoever  it  is 
found.  These  men  have  done  their  duty.  All  indeed  on 
board  the  ship  have  wrought  nobly  for  their  own  safety 
and  for  the  honor  of  her  majesty  the  queen.  But  you 
have  gone  beyond  this,  and  have  by  your  journey  across 
the  continent  brought  fame  and  credit  to  the  country.  It 
is  right  that  men  who  discover  strange  lands  into  which, 
some  day,  the  power  of  Christianity  and  civilization  may 
enter,  should  receive  honor  and  credit  of  their  countrymen. 
Of  those  who  seek  to  do  these  things  many  perish,  and 
those  who  survive  should  be  held  in  honor." 

Most  of  all  delighted  at  the  success  and  honor  which 
had  befallen  Ned,  were  his  three  friends.  Two  of  them 
considered  that  they  owed  their  lives  to  him.  All  re- 
garded him  as  their  leader  as  well  as  their  comrade.  But 
Reuben  Gale  grumbled  much  that  he  had  had  no  share  in 
the  adventures  which  had  befallen  his  three  friends. 

"  You  have  all  three  strange  histories  to  tell.  You  have 
seen  wonderful  things  and  have  journeyed  and  fought 
with  wild  men  and  Spaniards;  while  I  with  equal  good- 
will have  never  had  the  chance  of  doing  more  than  join  in 
the  taking  of  Spanish  caravels,  where  the  resistance  was  so 
poor  that  children  might  have  done  the  business." 

Ned  laughed,  and  promised  him  that  the  next  adventure 
he  got  into  he  would,  if  possible,  have  him  as  his  comrade. 

"We  have  a  long  voyage  yet,"  he  said.  "We  have  not 
gone  much  more  than  a  third  of  the  circumference  of  the 
world,  and  before  we  reach  England  strange  things  may 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  253 

happen  yet.  We  left  Plymouth  with  a  noble  fleet  of  six 
ships.  Now  there  remains  but  one,  and  fifty-eight  men. 
At  the  same  rate  we  shall  be  reduced  to  a  cock-boat,  and 
four  men,  before  we  reach  England.  So  keep  up  your 
heart,  there  is  plenty  of  time  before  us." 

So  great  was  the  confidence  which  they  felt  in  Ned  that 
Reuben  was  cheered  with  this  promise,  although  he  knew, 
in  his  heart,  that  these  adventures  fell  upon  Ned  not  from 
any  eifort  of  his  own,  but  by  the  effect  of  accident,  or,  as 
we  may  say,  Providence. 

The  young  men  liked  not  their  stay  in  San  Francisco 
Bay.  Those  who  were  best-looking  and  youngest  were 
especially  chosen  out  by  the  women  as  objects  of  their 
adoration,  and  the  lads  were  horrified  at  the  way  in  which 
these  poor  creatures  beat  and  tore  themselves  and  groveled 
upon  the  ground;  and  so,  being  sick  at  heart  at  these 
mummeries,  and  at  receiving  a  worship  fit  only  for  the 
Creator  of  the  world,  they  remained  on  board  ship  as 
much  as  possible  during  the  time  that  they  tarried  there. 

Except  for  a  group  of  islands  which  they  passed  the  day 
after  sailing  west,  the  Golden  Hind  saw  no  more  laud  from 
the  23d  of  July  until  September  the  30th,  sixty-eight  days 
in  all,  when  they  fell  in  sight  of  some  islands  lying  about 
eight  degrees  to  the  northward  of  the  line.  As  soon  as 
the  ship  was  seen  a  great  number  of  canoes  came  out, 
having  in  them  some  four,  some  six,  some  fourteen,  or 
even  twenty  men  paddling  rapidly  and  bringing  cocoas, 
fish,  and  fruits.  The  beauty  and  workmanship  of  these 
canoes  astonished  the  voyagers.  They  were  made  out  of 
one  tree  of  great  length,  hollowed  with  fire  and  axe,  and 
being  so  smooth,  both  without  and  within,  that  they  shone 
like  polished  wood.  The  bow  and  stern  were  alike  in 
shape,  rising  high  and  falling  inward  almost  in  a  semicir- 
cle, and  being  covered  with  white  and  glistening  shellr  ' 
ornament.  These  canoes  had  upon  either  side  outriggers 


254  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

— that  is,  pieces  of  cane  extending  six  or  seven  feet  beyond 
the,side,  and  to  which  were  fixed  spars  of  very  light  wood, 
so  that  the  boat  could  in  nowise  overturn.  These  people 
evinced  no  fear  of  the  English,  and  it  was  clear  that,  al- 
though they  might  not  themselvesiiave  seen  a  ship  before, 
the  presence  of  the  Portuguese  in  these  seas  was  known  to 
the  islanders,  and  the  manner  of  their  vessels. 

The  nature  of  these  people  was  very  different  from  that 
of  the  gentle  savages  on  the  western  coast  of  America. 
They  did  not  trade  honestly  as  these  had  done,  but  ob- 
tained as  much  as  they  could,  and  then  pushed  off  from 
the  side- of  the  ship  without  handing  up  the  goods  which 
they  had  bargained  to  give,  and  behaved  so  rascally  that 
the  admiral,  seeing  that  their  intentions  were  altogether 
evil,  ordered  a  gun  to  be  fired,  not  with  the  intent  of  hurt- 
ing any,  but  of  frightening  them.  The  roar  of  the  cannon 
was  followed  by  the  instant  disappearance  of  every  native 
from  the  fleet  of  .canoes,  amid  the  laughter  of  those  on 
board  ship.  For  a  long  time  none  could  be  seen,  each  as 
he  came  above  water  keeping  on  the  further  side  of  his 
canoe,  and  then  paddling  with  it  astern,  so  that  the  ship, ; 
as  she  floated  on,  left  them  gradually  behind.  When  they, 
thought  that  they  were  in  safety  they  again  took  their 
places  in  the  canoes,  and  finding  that  none  were  hurt, 
again  paddled  alongside  the  ship  and  made  pretense  to 
barter.  Some  of  them  indeed  came  on  board  with  their 
wares,  but  while  pretending  to  be  engaged  in  honest  trade 
they  stole  the  daggers  and  knives  from  the  men's  girdles, 
and  pillaged  whatever  they  could  lay  their  hands  upon. 
The  admiral,  being  wroth  at  this  conduct,  had  some  of 
these  men  seized  and  flogged,  and  then  driving  the  rest 
into  their  canoes,  hoisted  sail  and  went  onward,  christen- 
ing the  place  the  "  Island  of  Thieves,"  so  as  to  deter  all 
passengers  hereafter  from  ever  visiting  it. 

Passing    through   many   other   islands   they   made   for 


&NDER  SHAKE'S  FLAG. 

Tidore,  the  principal  place  in  the  Moluccas.  But  as  they 
passed  the  island  of  Motir,  which  was  then  called  Ternate, 
a  deputy,  or  viceroy,  of  the  king  of  that  island  came  off  to 
the  ship  in  a  great  canoe,  and  entreated  the  admiral  to 
anchor  at  that  island,  and  not  at  Tidore,  ass'uring  him  in 
the  name  of  the  king  that  he  would  be  wondrous  glad  to 
see  him,  and  to  do  all  that  the  admiral  could  require.  He 
himself  promised  to  return  to  the  king  at  once,  who  would 
get  all  in  readiness;  whereas  if  they  went  on  to  Tidore, 
where  the  Portuguese  held  sway,  they  would  find  in  them 
deceit  and  treachery.  On  these  persuasions  Captain  Drake 
resolved  to  run  into  Ternate,  where  next  morning  he  caine 
to  anchor. 

The  admiral  then  sent  a  party,  consisting  of  Ned  and 
three  other  adventurers,  to  the  king,  bearing  the  present 
of  a  velvet  cloak,  as  a  testimony  of  his  desire  for  friendship 
and  good-will,  with  the  message  that  he  should  require  no 
other  thing  at  his  hands  but  that  he  might  be  allowed  by 
traffic  and  exchange  of  merchandise  to  obtain  provisions, 
of  which',  after  his  long  voyage  across  the  seas,  he  had  now 
but  small  store.  As  the  boat  rowed  to  shore  it  was  met 
by  a  large  canoe  coming  out  with  a  message  from  the  king, 
that  he  had  heard  from  his  viceroy  how  great  was  the 
nobleness  of  the  captain,  and  of  the  queen  whom  he  served, 
and  that  he,  who  was  the  enemy  of  the  Portuguese,  whom 
he  had  expelled  from  his  dominions,  would  gladly  agree  to 
aid  him,  and  to  enter  into  treaties  by  which  all  ships  of 
his  nation  might  come  to  Ternate,  and  trade  for  such 
things  as  they  required,  all  other  white  men  being  excluded. 
On  arriving  at  the  shore  the  deputation  were  met  by  many 
personages.  They  were  dressed  in  white  cloths  of  Indian 
manufacture,  and  the  party  marveled  much  at  the  differ- 
ence between  their  stately  manners  and  ways  and  those  of 
the  people  whom  they  had  lately  left.  Accompanied  by 
these  personages,  and  with  great  honor,  they  were  con- 


256  VNDEH  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

ducted  to  the  interior  of  the  island,  where,  in  a  Vrase  sur- 
prisingly large  for  a  people  so  far  removed  from  civilization, 
and  which,  indeed,  they  afterward  learned  had  been  built 
by  the  Portuguese,  they  found  the  king,  who  received 
them  with  much  honor.  He  was  a  tall  and  stout  man, 
with  much  dignity  in  his  manner.  It  was  clear  that  his 
authority  among  his  people  was  very  great,  for  even  the 
nobles  and  councillors  whom  he  had  sent  to  greet  them 
bowed  to  the  dust  in  his  presence. 

Ned  had  consulted  with  his  comrades  on  the  way,  and 
had  agreed  that,  as  the  messengers  of  the  admiral,  and 
therefore  in  some  way  as  the  representatives  of  the  queen, 
it  was  their  duty  to  comport  themselves  as  equal,  at  least, 
in  dignity  to  this  island  monarch.  Therefore  while  all 
the  people  knelt  in  the  dust  in  humility,  they  walked 
straight  to  his  majesty  and  held  out  their  hands  in  English 
fashion.  His  majesty  was  in  no  whit  offended  at  this, 
and  indeed  by  his  manner  strove  to  express  his  respect. 
A  certain  amount  of  conversation  was  carried  on  with  him, 
for  in  the  island  were  an  Italian  and  a  Spaniard,  who, 
having  been  made  prisoners  by  the  Portuguese,  had  escaped 
to  Ternate.  These  men,  acting  as  interpreters,  conveyed 
to  the  king  the  messages  sent  by  the  admiral,  and  in  return 
informed  Ned  that  the  king  was  in  all  ways  most  anxious 
to  express  his  pleasure  to  the  admiral,  and  that  on  the 
morrow  he  would  himself  visit  him  on  board  ship.  He 
also,  as  a  pledge,  delivered  his  own  signet-ring  to  Ned  to 
carry  on  board. 

Having  returned  on  board  ship  with  these  messages,  they 
waited  for  the  morrow,  when  three  large  canoes  put  off 
from  the  shore.  In  these  were  the  greatest  personages  on 
the  island.  They  sat  in  the  canoes  in  accordance  with 
their  rank,  the  old  men  in  the  stern.  Next  to  these  were 
divers  others,  also  attired  in  white,  but  with  differences  in 
the  way  in  which  the  clothes  were  worn.  These  also  had 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&.  £5? 

their  places  under  the  awning  of  reeds.  The  rest  of  the 
men  were  soldiers,  who  stood  ranged  on  each  side.  On 
the  outside  of  these  again  sat  the  rowers.  These  canoes 
must  have  in  some  way  resembled  the  old  Roman  triremes, 
for  it  is  said  that  "there  were  three  galleries  on  either  side 
of  the  canoe,  one  being  builded  above  the  other,  and  in 
each  of  these  galleries  were  an  equal  number  of  benches, 
whereon  did  sit  the  rowers,  about  the  number  of  fourscore 
in  each  canoe."  In  the  forepart  of  each  canoe  sat  two 
men,  one  holding  a  drum  and  the  other  a  piece  of  brass, 
whereon  both  at  once  struck,  marking  the  time  for  each 
stroke.  The  rowers  on  their  part  ended  each  stroke  with 
a  song,  giving  warning  to  those  on  the  prow  to  strike 
again;  and  so,  rowing  evenly,  they  came  across  the  sea  at 
great  speed.  Each  of  these  canoes  carried  a  small  cannon 
of  about  a  yard  in  length.  All  the  men,  except  the  rowers, 
had  swords,  daggers,  and  shields,  lances,  bows,  and  arrows, 
and  some  had  guns.  These  canoes  came  up  to  the  ship 
and  rowed  round  her  in  solemn  procession,  to  the  great 
admiration  of  all  on  board,  who  had  never  beheld  a  sight 
like  this.  But  the  admiral  said  that  the  vessels  reminded 
him  of  the  descriptions  which  he  had  read  of  the  great 
barges  of  Venice.  As  they  rowed  they  did  homage  to  the 
admiral,  the  greatest  personages  beginning,  first  standing 
up  and  bowing  their  bodies  to  the  ground,  the  others  fol- 
lowing in  order  of  rank.  Then  a  messenger  came  on  board, 
signifying  that  they  had  come  before  the  king,  who  had 
sent  them  to  conduct  our  ship  into  a  better  anchorage, 
and  desiring  that  a  rope  might  be  given  them  out  that 
they  might,  as  their  king  commanded,  tow  the  ship  to  the 
place  assigned. 

Very  shortly  the  king  himself  came  out,  having  with 
him  in  his  canoe  six  grave  and  ancient  fathers,  and  did 
himself  at  once  make  a  reverent  kind  of  obeisance.  He 
was  received  in  the  best  manner  possible.  The  great  guns 


258  VNDttti,  DttAKE-S  FLAG. 

thundered,  and  as  these  had  been  filled  with  a  large  quan- 
tity of  small  shot,  they  tore  up  the  water  in  the  distance, 
and  made  a  fine  show  for  these  people.  The  trumpets 
also,  and  other  instruments  of  music,  sounded  loudly, 
whereat  the  king  was  much  delighted,  and  requested  that 
the  music  might  come  into  a  boat.  The  musicians,  at 
Captain  Francis'  orders,  so  did,  and  laying  alongside  the 
king's  canoe,  were  towed  behind  the  ship  by  the  rowers  in 
the  three  first  canoes. 

The  king  and  many  others  came  on  board  and  were 
bountifully  entertained,  many  presents  being  given  to 
them.  When  the  anchorage  was  reached  the  king  asked 
leave  to  go  on  shore,  promising  that  next  day  he  would 
again  come  on  board  and  in  the  meantime  send  such  vic- 
tuals as  were  requested.  Accordingly,  at  night  and  the 
next  morning  large  quantities  of  hens,  sugar-canes,  rice, 
figos — which  are  supposed  to  have  been  plantains — cocoas, 
and  sago  were  sent  on  board.  Also  some  cloves  for  traffic; 
but  of  these  the  tdmiral  did  not  buy  many,  as  he  did  not 
wish  the  ship  to  be  crowded  with  goods. 

At  the  time  appointed,  all  things  being  set  in  readiness, 
the  admiral  looked  for  the  king's  return,  but  he  failed  to 
keep  his  promise,  to  the  great  discontent  and  doubt  on  the 
part  of  the  crew.  The  king's  brother  came  off  to  invite 
Captain  Drake  to  land  and  visit  him;  but  this  brother, 
who  seemed  to  be  an  honest  gentleman  himself,  whispered 
a  few  words  in  confidence  to  the  admiral,  warning  him 
that  it  would  be  better  that  he  should  not  go  on  shore. 
With  his  free  consent  the  admiral  retained  this  nobleman 
as  a  pledge,  and  then  although,  in  consequence  of  the 
king's  bad  faith,  he  resolved  not  to  land  himself,  he  sent 
many  of  his  officers,  who  were  conducted  with  great  honor 
to  the  large  and  fair  house  inhabited  by  the  king,  where 
at  least  a  thousand  people  were  gathered. 

The  king  was  seated  in  a  great  chair  of  state,  and  many 


UNDER  DHAKE*S  FLAG.  259 

compliments  were  exchanged  between  him  and  the  Eng- 
lish. The  king  was  now  attired  in  his  full  state,  having 
from  the  waist  to  the  ground  a  robe  of  cloth  of  gold,  with 
many  rings  of  plated  gold  on  his  head,  making  a  show 
something  like  a  crown.  On  his  neck  he  had  a  chain  of 
perfect  gold,  the  links  very  large.  On  his  left  hand  were 
a  diamond,  an  emerald,  a  ruby,  and  a  turquoise,  and  on 
his  right  hand  many  beautiful  gems.  Thus  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  king  of  these  islands  was  a  potentate  of  no  mean 
grandeur.  Most  of  the  furniture  and  decorations  of  the 
court  were  obtained  from  the  Portuguese  during  the  time 
that  they  inhabited  the  island.  Had  they  not  followed 
the  tyrannous  ways  of  their  people  they  might  have  re- 
mained there  in  fair  comfort;  but,  desiring  to  obtain  the 
entire  authority,  they  had  killed  the  late  king.  This  cru- 
elty, however,  had  brought  about  a  different  end  to  that 
which  they  had  expected,  for  the  people,  headed  by  the 
king's  eldest  son,  had  risen  against  them  in  great  force, 
had  killed  many,  and  had  driven  the  rest  from  the  island, 
placing  the  king's  son  upon  the  throne,  who  had  become 
the  deadly  enemy  of  the  Portuguese,  and  was  now  prepar- 
ing an  expedition  to  drive  them  from  Tidore.  The  relig- 
ion of  these  people  was  that  of  the  Mussulmans,  and  the 
rigor  with  which  they  fasted — it  being,  at  the  time  of  the 
English  visit,  one  of  their  festivals — greatly  astonished 
those  who  saw  them,  for  during  the  whole  time  they  would 
eat  nothing  between  morning  and  night;  but  the  appetite 
with  which  they  devoured  many  meals  throughout  the 
night  almost  equally  astonished  the  British. 

While  the  Golden  Hind  lay  in  the  harbor  of  Teruate 
they  received  a  visit  from  a  Chinese  gentleman  of  high 
station,  and  who  was  assuredly  the  first  Chinaman  who 
ever  came  in  contact  with  one  of  our  race.  His  reason  for 
being  at  the  Moluccas  was  singular.  He  had  been  a  man 
of  great  rank  in  his  own  country,  but  was  accused  of  a 


260  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

capital  crime  of  which,  though  innocent,  he  was  unable  to 
free  himself.  He  then  implored  the  emperor  to  allow  him 
to  leave  the  country,  placing  the  proof  of  his  innocence  in 
the  hands  of  Providence;  it  being  a  bargain  that  if  he 
could  bring  back  to  the  emperor  strange  and  wonderful 
tidings  of  things  new  to  him,  such  as  he  had  never  heard 
of,  he  should  be  restored  to  his  place  and  honors,  and  held 
to  be  acquitted  of  that  crime.  If  such  news  could  not  be 
gained  by  him  he  was  to  remain  in  exile  and  to  be  accounted 
guilty  of  that  of  which  he  was  accused.  Coming  on  board, 
he  very  earnestly  entreated  the  admiral  to  give  him  the 
account  of  his  adventures  from  the  time  of  leaving  his 
country.  This  Captain  Drake  willingly  did,  and  the 
Chinaman  in  great  delight  exclaimed  that  this  was  fully 
sufficient  for  him  to  bear  back  to  the  emperor.  He  gave 
a  very  warm  and  pressing  invitation  to  Sir  Francis  to  bring 
the  ship  to  China,  where  he  assured  him  of  a  welcome  at 
the  hands  of  the  emperor.  Had  Captain  Drake  been  able 
to  accede  to  this  proposition  it  is  probable  that  our  deal- 
ings with  the  East  on  a  large  scale  might  have  begun  some 
centuries  earlier  than  they  did;  but  the  Golden  Hind  was  ; 
much  battered  by  the  voyage  she  had  gone  through,  being, 
indeed,  not  a  new  ship  when  she  started.  The  crew,  too, ' 
were  all  longing  to  get  home,  and  the  treasure  which  had 
been  gathered  from  the  Spaniards  was  ample  for  all  their 
desires.  The  admiral,  therefore,  although  truly  he  longed 
to  see  this  country,  and  to  open  relations  between  it  and* 
the  queen,  was  yet  forced  to  decline  the  invitation,  and  so 
to  depart  on  his  westward  voyage. 

The  Golden  Hind  now  made  slow  progress  through  the 
water,  her  bottom  being  foul  with  weeds  and  other  things 
which  had  attached  themselves  to  it  during  its  long  voyage. 
The  captain  therefore  determined  to  enter  the  first  harbor 
in  an  uninhabited  island  that  he  came  to,  for  at  none  of 
the  places  at  which  he  had  hitherto  touched  had  he  ven- 


tfNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG,  261 

tured  to  take  this  step.  However  friendly  the  inhabitants 
might  have  appeared,  some  causes  of  quarrel  might  have 
arisen,  and  with  the  ship  hauled  up  and  bent  over  it  might 
have  fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  natives,  and  so  been  de- 
stroyed, and  all  return  to  England  cut  off  from  him.  Five 
days  after  leaving  Ternate  he  found  such  a  place,  and 
fetching  up  in  a  small  harbor  the  whole  party  landed, 
pitched  tents,  and  entrenched  themselves.  Then  they 
took  the  casks  and  water-vessels  ashore  and  thoroughly 
repaired  them,  trimmed  the  ship,  and  scraped  her  bottom, 
and  so  put  her  in  a  state  to  perform  the  rest  of  the  voyage. 

Greatly  here  were  the  crew  astonished  by  the  first  sight 
of  fire-flies,  creatures  which  were  new  to  them  all.  This 
island  swarmed  with  crayfish  of  a  size  sufficient  to  satisfy 
four  hungry  men  at  dinner.  These  creatures  never  went 
into  the  sea,  but  kept  themselves  on  land,  digging  holes  in 
the  roots  of  the  trees,  and  there  lodging  numbers  together. 
Strangely  enough,  too,  these  crayfish,  when  they  found 
themselves  cut  off  from  their  natural  retreats,  climbed  up 
trees,  and  there  concealed  themselves  in  the  branches. 

On  December  the  12th  they  again  set  sail,  being  now 
among  the  Celebes,  where  they  found  the  water  shoal  and 
coasting  very  dangerous.  The  wind,  too,  was  high  and 
contrary,  and  their  difficulties  greater  than  anything  they 
had  found.  On  January  the  9th  the  wind,  however,  came 
aft,  and  they  appeared  to  have  found  a  passage  out  of  these 
dangers,  sailing  then  at  full  speed.  They  were,  at  the 
first  watch  at  night,  filled  with  consternation  at  a  crash, 
followed  by  silence,  and  the  vessel  was  found  to  have  run 
high  upon  a  reef  of  which  the  surface  had  presented  no 
indication.  Not  since  the  Golden  Hind  had  left  England 
had  her  strait  been  as  sore  as  this.  The  force  with  which 
she  had  run  upon  the  reef  seemed  to  have  carried  her  be- 
yond all  hope  of  extrication.  All  considered  that  death 
was  at  hand,  for  they  hardly  hoped  that  the  ship  could 


262  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

hold  long  together.  The  admiral  at  once,  to  still  the  con- 
fusion which  reigned,  ordered  all  to  prayers,  and  the  whole, 
kneeling  on  the  deck,  prayed  for  mercy,  preparing  them- 
selves for  imminent  death.  Presently,  having  finished 
praying,  the  admiral  addressed  them  in  a  consoling  speech, 
and  then,  their  courage  heing  much  raised,  all  bestirred 
themselves  to  regard  the  position.  The  pumps  were  first 
tried  and  the  ship  freed  of  water,  and  to  their  great  joy 
they  found  that  the  leakage  was  no  greater  than  before, 
and  that  the  rocks  had  not  penetrated  through  the  planks. 
This  appeared  to  all  on  board  to  he  an  absolute  miracle 
wrought  in  their  favor,  for  it  seemed  impossible  to  them 
that,  running  at  so  high  a  rate  of  speed,  the  vessel  could 
have  failed  to  break  herself  against  the  rocks.  It  is  prob- 
able that,  in  fact,  the  ship  had  struck  upon  a  newly-formed 
coral  reef,  and  that  the  coral — which,  when  first  made,  is 
not  very  hard — had  crashed  to  pieces  under  the  shock,  and 
so  she  lay  in  safety  upon  the  bed  of  pounded  fragments. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  263 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

SOUTH   SEA   IDOLS. 

order  and  tranquillity  were  perfectly  restored  the 
admiral  ordered  a  boat  to  be  lowered  and  soundings  to  be 
taken,  intending  to  put  out  the  anchors  ahead,  and  to  get 
her  off  by  working  upon  them  with  the  windlass.  It  was 
found,  however,  that  under  the  forefoot  of  the  vessel  the 
water  deepened  so  rapidly  that  at  a  distance  of  a  few  fath- 
oms no  soundings  could  be  obtained.  This  plan,  therefore, 
was  abandoned.  The  prospect  seemed  dark  indeed.  The 
ship's  boats  would,  at  most,  only  carry  half  the  men  on 
hoard,  and  if  the  ship  had  to  be  abandoned  the  whole  of 
her  treasures  must  be  lost,  as  well  as  many  lives. 

"There  is  an  island  far  away  to  the  south,"  the  admiral 
said.  "If  the  worst  come,  we  must  seek  refuge  on  that. 
It  will  be  well  to  send  a  boat  to  examine  it,  and  see  what 
capabilities  it  offers  for  the  purpose.  Then  if  the  weather 
holds  fair  we  can  make  several  trips,  and  land  our  men, 
and  a  portion  at  least  of  our  valuables." 

"Will  you  let  me  go,  sir,  with  my  three  friends?"  Ned 
asked.  "The  canoe  which  we  took  from  our  last  halting- 
place  will  carry  the  four  of  us,  and  as  she  paddles  swiftly 
we  may  be  back  before  many  hours." 

"The  idea  is  a  good  one,"  Captain  Drake  said.  "Make 
for  the  island.  It  is,  I  should  say,  fifteen  miles  off.  When 
you  have  reached  it  see  if  there  be  water,  fuel,  and  other 
necessaries,  and  whether  the  landing  be  good.  If  you 


264  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

should  come  upon  any  natives,  parley  with  them.  Take 
a  few  articles  as  presents,  and  explain  to  them,  if  they  will 
come  out  here  with  their  canoes  and  aid  to  bring  the 
things  ashore  we  will  give  them  presents  which  will  make 
them  wealthy  beyond  their  grandest  dreams.  Be  careful, 
my  boys.  I  know  that  you  will  be  brave  if  necessary;  but 
care  and  caution  are  the  great  things,  and  remember  that 
our  safety  depends  upon  yours." 

The  young  men  speedily  lowered  the  canoe  under  the 
shelter  of  the  lee  side  of  the  ship,  took  some  beads,  calicoes, 
and  other  articles,  and  then,  seating  themselves  in  the 
boat,  paddled  rapidly  away.  At  first  they  felt  a  little 
awkward  in  using  the  paddles,  in  which  they  had  had  no 
practice  whatever.  But  being  powerful  men,  and  accus- 
tomed to  the  use  of  oars,  they  soon  fell  into  regular  stroke, 
and  the  light  boat  danced  rapidly  over  the  waters.  The 
distance  was  further  than  Captain  Drake  had  imagined, 
the  clearness  of  the  air  making  the  land  appear  nearer 
than  it  really  was;  and  it  was  only  after  three  hours  of 
hard  work  that  they  neared  it.  It  turned  out  to  be  an 
island  of  about  a  mile  in  length  so  far  as  they  could  judge. 
A  reef  of  coral  ran  round  it.  The  center  of  the  island 
was  somewhat  elevated,  and  was  covered  with  cocoanut 
trees;  and  it  was  this  alone  which  had  enabled  it  to  be 
seen  from  so  great  a  distance  from  the  deck  of  the  Golden 
Hind.  Paddling  round  the  reef,  they  came  to  an  opening, 
and  entering  this  found  themselves  in  perfectly  smooth 
water,  and  were  soon  on  shore. 

"Our  best  way  to  look  for  water,"  Ned  said,  "will  be  to 
follow  the  beach  all  round  the  island.  If  there  is  any 
stream  we  must  then  come  upon  it.  We  had  better  take 
our  arms,  and  haul  up  the  canoe." 

Ned,  although  the  youngest  of  the  party,  being  an  officer 
of  the  ship,  was  naturally  in  command. 

"It  will  be  hard,"  Reuben  said,  "if  we  do  not  meet  with 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  265 

some  adventure.  This  is  the  first  time  that  I  have  been 
out  with  you,  Ned.  The  others  have  had  their  share,  and 
it  will  be  hard  upon  me  if,  when  I  get  home,  I  have  not 
some  tale  to  tell  my  friends." 

"I  hope  that  it  will  not  be  so,"  Ned  said,  "for  more 
than  story-telling  depends  upon  our  success.  I  fear  the 
Golden  Hind  is  fixed  fast,  and  that  all  the  fruits  of  our 
expedition  are  lost,  even  if  our  lives  be  saved.  Everything 
depends  upon  the  report  we  may  make  when  we  return, 
and  anything  that  should  occur  to  delay  us  or  to  prevent 
our  bearing  back  tidings  of  this  place  to  the  admiral  would 
be  bad  fortune  indeed." 

"I  don't  mean,"  Reuben  said,  u  any  thing  that  would 
prevent  our  returning.  But  we  might  do  something,  and 
yet  return  safely." 

A  walk  round  the  island  showed  no  signs  of  water,  nor 
although  they  searched  for  some  hours,  walking  backward 
and  forward  across  it,  could  they  find  any  signs  of  a  pool. 
It  was  clear  that  there  were  no  fresh-water  springs  on  the 
island,  and  that  the  vegetation  depended  entirely  upon 
the  rain  that  fell  in  the  regular  season.  But  they  discov- 
ered from  the  top  of  the  island  another  and  much  larger 
one  lying  still  again  some  fifteen  miles  to  the  south.  After 
much  deliberation  they  determined  to  make  for  this,  as  it 
was  of  importance  that  they  should  have  some  news  of  a 
place  to  which  the  goods  could  be  transported,  to  carry 
back  to  the  ship.  This  island  was  much  higher,  and 
there  appeared  every  probability  that  water  and  all  they 
required  would  be  found  there.  Accordingly,  taking  their 
place  in  the  canoe,  they  again  paddled  out  through  the 
entrance  to  the  reef,  and  steered  their  course  for  their  new 
discovery.  This  was  a  large  island,  measuring  at  least,  as 
they  judged  from  the  view  of  the  one  side,  twenty  miles 
round.  The  shores  were  steep,  and  they  rowed  for  some 
time  before  they  succeeded  in  finding  a  place  where  a  land- 


'66  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

ing  could  be  effected.  Then  a  deep  bay  suddenly  opened 
out,  and  into  this  they  rowed. 

Scarcely  had  they  fairly  entered  it  when  from  some 
bushes  near  the  shore  two  large  war-canoes,  crowded  with 
natives,  shot  out  and  made  toward  them.  The  lads  at 
first  grasped  their  muskets,  but  Ned  said,  "Let  the  arms 
be.  We  are  here  to  make  peace  with  the  natives,  and 
must  take  our  chance." 

They  stood  up  in  the  canoe,  holding  up  their  arms  h  -, 
token  of  amity.  The  canoes  came  alongside  at  racing 
pace,  the  natives  uttering  yells  of  joy.  The  canoe  had 
evidently  been  seen  approaching  the  island,  and  prepara- 
tions had  been  made  to  seize  it  immediately  on  its  arrival. 
Ned  held  up  in  his  hands  the  beads  and  pieces  of  cloth. 
But  the  natives  were  too  excited  for  pause  or  negotiation. 
In  an  instant  the  boys  were  seized  and  placed  on  board  the 
canoes,  two  in  each.  They  were  tenderly  handled,  and 
were  clearly  objects  of  veneration  rather  than  of  hostility. 
The  moment  that  they  were  on  board  the  contents  of  the 
canoe  were  transferred  to  the  large  boat,  and  it  was  then 
cast  adrift,  and  the  two  war-boats  at  full  speed  made  out 
through  the  passage.  Ned  endeavored  in  vain  to  attract 
the  attention  of  the  leaders  of  the  savages  to  his  gestures, 
and  to  explain  to  them  that  there  was  a  vessel  from  which 
he  had  come  at  a  short  distance  off,  and  that  if  they  would 
accompany  him  thither  they  would  obtain  large  quantities 
of  the  beads  and  cloth  which  he  showed  them.  The  na- 
tives, however,  were  too  much  excited  to  pay  any  attention 
to  his  efforts,  and  with  a  sigh  of  despair  he  sat  down  by 
the  side  of  Reuben, who  was  in  the  same  boat  with  him,  as 
the  canoes  on  emerging  from  the  bay  turned  their  heads 
to  the  southwest  and  paddled  steadily  and  rapidly  away 
from  the  island. 

"Whither  can  they  be  going  to  take  us?"  Eeuben  said. 

"They  must  belong  to  some  other  island,"  Ned  answered, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  267 

"and  be  a  war  party  which  has  come  on  plundering 
purposes  here.  What  a  misfortune!  What  terribly  bad 
luck!  They  have  clearly  never  seen  white  men  before, 
and  regard  us  as  superior  beings,  and  so  far  as  we  are  con- 
cerned it  is  probable  that  our  lives  are  safe.  But  what 
will  the  admiral  think  when  night  comes  on  and  we  do 
not  return?  What  will  become  of  our  comrades?" 

And  at  the  thought  of  their  messmates  left  without 
help  in  so  perilous  a  position  Ned  fairly  broke  down  and 
cried. 

For  some  hours  the  natives  continued  their  course  with- 
out intermission,  and,  gradually  an  island,  which  had  at 
first  seemed  like  a  low  cloud  on  the  horizon,  loomed  up 
nearer  and  nearer,  and  at  last,  just  as  night  fell,  they 
landed  upon  its  shores.  Here,  in  a  bay,  a  village  of 
huts  constructed  of  the  boughs  of  trees  had  been  raised, 
and  the  arrival  of  the  w?r-canoes  was  greeted  with  wild 
and  prolonged  cries  by  the  women  and  children.  All  pros- 
trated themselves  in  wonder  and  astonishment  when  the 
white  men  in  their  strange  attire  were  brought  on  shore, 
and  Ned  saw  that  his  suspicions  were  correct,  and  that 
they  were  regarded  by  their  captors  as  gods.  Further 
proof  was  given  of  this  when  they  were  escorted  to  a  large 
shed  composed  of  a  roof  of  thatch  supported  on  four 
upright  posts  which  stood  in  the  center  of  the  village. 
Under  this  were  placed  some  of  the  hideous  effigies  which 
the  South  Sea  Islanders  worship,  and  which  are  affixed  to 
the  prow  of  their  boats,  and  may  be  seen  in  the  British 
Museum,  and  in  other  places  where  collections  of  Indian 
curiosities  are  exhibited.  These  effigies  were  carved  in 
the  shape  of  human  beings  with  enormous  goggle  eyes, 
splashes  of  bright  paint,  and  strange  and  immense  head- 
dresses of  brilliant  colors.  Here  the  lads  were  motioned 
to  sit  down,  and  the  natives  brought  them  offerings  of 
cocoas  and  other  fruits. 


268  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

The  boys  could  hardly  help  laughing  at  their  strange 
position,  surrounded  by  these  hideous  idols. 

"You  wanted  an  adventure,  Reuben,  and  you  have  got 
one  indeed,"  Ned  said.  "  You  are  translated  into  a  heathen 
god,  and,  if  you  ever  get  home,  will  have  your  story  to 
tell,  which  will  astonish  the  quiet  firesides  in  Devonshire." 

"Ought  we  not  to  refuse  to  accept  this  horrid  worship?" 
Gerald  said. 

"I  think  not,"  Ned  replied.  "It  can  do  no  harm,  am1. 
we  are  at  least  better  than  these  wooden  idols.  So  long  at 
least  as  we  are  taken  for  gods  our  lives  are  safe.  But  I 
would  not  say  as  much  if  they  once  became  convinced,  by 
our  actions,  that  we  are  men  like  themselves." 

"But  we  cannot  sit  here  all  our  lives  among  these  idols," 
Reuben  said. 

"I  agree  with  you  there,  Eeuben;  but  patience  does 
wonders,  and  I  am  not  troubled  in  the  least  about  our- 
selves. Sooner  or  later  a  way  of  escape  will  present  itself, 
and  when  it  does,  be  assured  that  we  will  use  it.  Pa- 
tience is  all  that  we  require  now.  It  is  of  our  poor  ship- 
mates that  I  am  thinking." 

As  night  fell  great  bonfires  were  lighted.  The  natives 
indulged  in  wild  dances  round  them,  and  feasting  and  fes- 
tivities were  kept  up  all  through  the  night.  Four  watches 
were  stationed,  one  at  each  post  of  the  temple,  and  the 
boys  saw  that  for  the  present,  at  least,  all  thought  of. 
escape  was  out  of  the  question.  And,  therefore,  stretch-1 
ing  themselves  at  full  length  on  the  sand  they  were  speedily 
asleep. 

For  some  days  the  position  remained  unchanged.  The 
boys  were  well  fed  and  cared  for.  Offerings  of  fruit,  fish, 
and  other  eatables  were  duly  presented.  A  perfumed  wood 
which,  according  to  the  native  ideas,  personified  incense, 
was  burned  in  large  quantities  round  the  temple,  and 
nearly  choked  the  boys  with  its  smoke. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  269 

Upon  the  fifth  day  it  was  clear  that  some  expedition 
was  being  prepared.  Four  large  war-canoes  were  dragged 
down  and  placed  in  the  water,  and  the  great  idols  which 
stood  in  the  bow  of  each  were  removed  and  carried  up  to 
the  temple,  and  placed  there  in  position.  Then  the  boys 
were  motioned  to  come  down  to  the  beach. 

"I  do  believe,"  said  Tom,  bursting  into  a  shout  of 
laughter,  "that  they  are  going  to  put  us  in  the  bows  of 
their  canoes  in  place  of  their  old  gods." 

The  others  joined  in  the  laughter,  for  to  act  as  the 
figurehead  of  a  canoe  was  indeed  a  comical,  if  an  unpleas- 
ant situation.  When  they  reached  the  boats  the  boys  saw 
that  their  suspicions  wero  correct,  and  that  the  natives 
were  preparing  to  lash  them  to  the  lofty  prows  which  rose 
some  twelve  feet  above  the  water,  in  a  sweep  inward. 

"This  will  never  do,"  Tom  said,  "if  we  are  fastened  like 
that  our  weight  will  cut  us  horribly.  Let  us  show  them 
how  to  do  it." 

Whereupon,  with  great  gravity  he  took  a  large  piece  of 
flat  wood,  and  motioned  to  the  savages  to  lash  this  in  front 
of  the  bow  of  one  of  the  boats  at  a  height  of  three  feet 
above  the  water,  so  as  to  afford  a  little  platform  upon 
which  he  could  stand.  The  natives  at  once  perceived  the 
drift  of  what  he  was  doing,  and  were  delighted  that  their 
new  deities  should  evince  such  readiness  to  fall  in  with 
their  plans.  The  additions  were  made  at  once  to  the  four 
canoes;  but  while  this  was  being  done,  some  of  the  leading 
chiefs,  with  every  mark  of  deference,  approached  the  boys 
with  colored  paints,  and  motioned  to  them  that  they  would 
permit  them  to  deck  them  in  this  way.  Again  the  boys 
jndulged  iu  a  hearty  laugh,  and  stripping  off  their  upper 
garments,  to  the  immense  admiration  of  the  natives,  they 
themselves  applied  paint  in  rings,  zigzags,  and  other  forms 
to  their  white  shirts,  painted  a  large  saucer-like  circle 
round  the  eyes  with  vermilion,  so  as  to  give  themselves 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

something  the  appearance  of  the  great  idols,  and  having 
thus  transmogrified  themselves,  each  gravely  took  his 
place  upon  his  perch,  where,  leaning  back  against  the 
prow  behind  them,,  they  were  by  no  means  uncomfortable. 

"If  these  fellows  are  going,  as  I  expect,  upon  a  war  ex- 
pedition," Ned  shouted  to  his  friends,  as  the  boats,  keeping 
regularly  abreast,  rowed  off  from  the  island  amid  a  perfect 
chaos  of  sounds,  of  yells,  beatings  of  rough  drums  made  of 
skins  stretched  across  hollow  trunks  of  trees,  and  of  the 
blowing  of  conch  shells,  "our  position  will  be  an  unpleas- 
ant one.  But  we  must  trust  to  circumstances  to  do  the 
best.  At  any  rate  we  must  wish  that  our  friends  conquer^ 
for  the  next  party,  if  we  fall  into  their  hands,  might  take 
it  into  their  heads  that  we  are  devils  instead  of  gods,  and 
it  might  fare  worse  with  us." 

It  was  manifest,  as  soon  as  they  started,  that  the  object 
of  the  expedition  was  not  the  island  upon  which  they  had 
been  captured,  but  one  lying  away  to  the  south.  It  was  a 
row  of  several  hours  before  they  approached  it.  As  they 
did  so  they  saw  columns  of  smoke  ijise  from  several  points 
of  the  shore,  and  knew  that  their  coming  there  was  observed 
by  the  islanders.  Presently  six  canoes,  equally  large  with 
their  own  and  crowded  with  men,  were  observed  pulling 
out,  and  yells  of  defiance  came  across  the  water. 

"It  is  clear,"  Tom  said,  "that  this  island  is  stronger 
than  our  own,  and  that  it  is  only  on  the  strength  of  pur 
miraculous  presence  that  the  islanders  expect  to  conquer 
their  foes,  for  they  would  never,  with  four  canoes,  venture 
to  attack  a  place  of  superior  force,  unless  they  deemed  that 
their  victory  was  certain." 

With  wild  yells,  which  were  answered  boldly  from  their 
own  canoes,  the  enemy  approached,  and  the  combat  began 
with  a  general  discharge  of  arrows.  Then  the  canoes 
rowed  -into  each  other,  and  a  general  and  desperate  hand- 
to-hand  combat  commenced.  The  enthusiasm  with  which 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

the  inmates  of  the  boys'  canoes  were  animated  at  first  gave 
them  the  superiority,  and  they  not  only  beat  back  the 
attacks  of  their  foes,  but  leaping  into  their  enemy's  boats 
succeeded  in  clearing  two  of  them  of  their  occupants. 
Kumbers,  however,  told,  and  the  enemy  were,  with  very 
heavy  clubs  and  spears,  pointed  with  sharp  shells,  gradu- 
ally forcing  the  adventurers  back,  when  Ned  saw  that  a 
little  supernatural  interference  was  desirable  to  bring  mat- 
ters straight  again.  Giving  the  word  to  his  friends,  he 
stood  up  on  his  perch,  and  swinging  himself  round,  alighted 
in  the  boat,  giving  as  he  did  so  a  loud  British  cheer,  which 
was  answered  by  that  of  his  comrades.  Then  with  his 
arms  erect  he  began  to  move  along  the  benches  of  the 
canoe  toward  the  conflict  which  was  raging  on  either  side. 
The  sudden  interference  of  the  four  deities  at  the  head  of 
the  boat  was  received  with  a  yell  of  terror  by  the  natives 
who  were  attacking  them,  which  was  increased  when  the 
boys,  each  seizing  a  club  from  the  hands  of  a  native, 
jumped  into  the  enemy's  qanoes  and  began  to  lay  about 
them  with  all  their  strength.  This  was,  however,  required 
but  for  a  moment.  The  sight  of  .so  terrible  and  unexam- 
pled an  apparition  appalled  the  islanders,  who,  springing 
overboard  with  yells  of  despair,  swam  rapidly  toward  land, 
leaving  their  boats  in  the  hands  of  the  victors.  These 
indulged  in  wild  yells  of  triumph,  knelt  before  their  good 
geniuses,  and  then,  taking  their  places,  paddled  toward 
the  shore.  Before  they  had  reached  it,  however,  the  de- 
feated savages  had  landed,  and  running  up  to  their  village 
had  borne  the  news  of  the  terrible  apparitions  which  had 
taken  part  against  them.  The  conquerors  on  reaching 
the  village  found  it  deserted;  plundered  it  of  a  few  valua- 
bles; carried  down  all  their  enemy's  gods  in  triumph  into 
the  canoes;  and  then,  having  fired  the  huts,  started  again 
with  the  ten  canoes  toward  their  own  island. 

Their  triumphant  arrival  at  the  village  was  received 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

with  frantic  excitement  and  enthusiasm.  The  sight  of 
six  canoes  towed  in  by  the  four  belonging  to  the  place  was 
greeted  with  something  of  the  same  feeling  which  in  Nel- 
son's time  Portsmouth  more  than  once  experienced  upon 
an  English  vessel  arriving  with  two  captured  French  frig- 
ates of  size  superior  to  herself.  And  when  the  warriors 
informed  their  relatives  of  the  interposition  of  the  white 
gods  iu  their  favor  the  latter  rose  to  an  even  higher  esti- 
mation in  public  opinion  than  before.  They  were  escorted 
to  their  shrine  with  wild  dancing  and  gesticulation,  and 
great  heaps  of  fruit,  fish,  and  other  luxuries  were  offered 
to  them,  iu  token  of  the  gratitude  of  the  people.  But 
this  was  not  all.  A  few  hours  later  a  solemn  council  was  . 
held  ou  the  seashore,  and  after  a  time  a  great  hurrying  to 
and  fro  was  visible  in  the  village.  Then,  to  the  sound  of 
their  wild  music,  with  dancing,  brandishing  of  spears,  and 
the  emission  of  many  wild  yells,  the  whole  population 
moved  up  toward  the  shrine. 

"What  can   they   be  going   to   do  now?"    Tom   said. 
"Some  fresh  piece  of  homage,  I  should  guess.     I  do  wish 
they  would  leave  us  alone.     It  is  annoying  enough  to  be  - 
treated  as  a  god,  without  being  disturbed  by  these  constant 
worshipiugs." 

When  the  crowd  arrived  before  the  shed  they  separated, 
and  in  the  midst  were  discovered  four  girls.  On  their 
heads  were  wreaths  of  flowers,  and  their  necks  and  arms 
were  loaded  with  necklaces  and  shells  and  other  ornaments.; 

"Don't  laugh,  you  fellows,"  said  Ned.  "I  do  believe 
that  they  have  brought  us  four  wives  in  token  of  their 
gratitude." 

The  lads  had  the  greatest  difficulty  in  restraining  them- 
selves from  marring  the  effect  of  the  solemnity  by  ill-timed 
laughter.  But  they  put  a  great  restraint  upon  themselves, 
and  listened  gravely  while  the  chief  made  them  a  long 
harangue,  and  pointed  to  the  four  damsels,  who,  elated  at 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&. 

the  honor  of  being  selected,  but  somewhat  shy  at  being 
the  center  of  the  public  gaze,  evidently  understood  that 
the  village  had  chosen  them  to  be  the  wives  of  the  gods. 
Although  the  boys  could  not  understand  the  words  of  the 
speaker,  there  was  no  question  as  to  his  meaning,  and  they 
consulted  together  as  to  the  best  steps  to  be  taken  under 
the  circumstances. 

"We  must  temporize,"  said  Tom.  "It  would  never  do 
for  them-to  consider  themselves  slighted." 

After  a  short  consultation  they  again  took  their  places 
in  a  solemn  row  in  front  of  the  shed.  Reuben,  who  was 
the  tallest  and  most  imposing  of  the  set,  and  who  was  evi- 
dently considered  by  the  villagers  to  be  the  leading  deity, 
then  addressed  a  long  harangue  to  the  chief  and  villagers. 
He  beckoned  to  the  four  girls,  who  timidly  advanced,  and 
one  knelt  at  the  feet  of  each  of  the  whites.  Then  Reuben 
motioned  that  a  hut  must  be  built  close  to  the  shrine,  and 
pointing  to  the  sun,  he  traced  its  way  across  the  sky,  and 
made  a  mark  upon  the  ground.  This  he  repeated  fourteen 
times,  signifying  that  the  girls  must  be  shut  up  in  the  hut 
and  guarded  safely  for  that  time,  after  which  the  nuptials 
would  take  place. 

"You  are  quite  sure,  Ned,"  he  said,  pausing  and  turn- 
ing round  to  his  friend,  "that  we  shall  be  able  to  make 
our  attempt  to  escape  before  the  end  of  the  fourteen  days, 
because  it  would  be  fearful  indeed  if  we  were  to  fail,  and 
to  find  ourselves  compelled  to  marry  these  four  heathen 
women." 

"  We  will  certainly  try  before  the  fourteen  days  are  up, 
Reuben;  but  with  what  success,  of  course  we  cannot  say. 
But  if  we  lay  our  plans  well  we  ought  to  manage  to  get 
off." 

The  villagers  readily  understood  the  harangue  of  Reuben, 
and  without  delay  the  whole  scattered  into  the  wood,  and 
returning  with  bundles  of  palm  leaves  and  some  strong 


274  UNDER  DRAK&S 

posts,  at  once  began  to  erect  the  hut.  Fires  were  lighted 
as  the  evening  came  on,  and  before  they  ceased  their  labor 
the  hut  was  finished.  During  this  time  the  girla  had  re- 
mained sitting  patiently  in  front  of  the  shrine.  The  lads 
now  offered  them  their  hands  and  escorted  them  with  grave 
ceremony  to  the  hut.  The  palm  leaves  which  did  service 
as  a  door  were  placed  before  it,  and  the  boys  proceeded  to 
dance  one  after  the  other  in  solemn  order  fourteen  times 
round  the  hut.  They  then  signified  to  the  natives  that 
provisions,  fruit,  and  water  must  be  daily  brought  for  the 
use  of  their  future  wives;  and  having  made  another 
harangue  thanking  the  natives  for  their  exertions  and  sig- 
nifying future  protection  and  benefits  they  retired  under 
the  shelter  of  the  shed  and  the  village  subsided  to  its  ordi- 
nary state  of  tranquillity. 

"There  are  two  difficulties  in  the  way  of  making  our 
escape,"  Ned  said.  "In  the  first  place  it  is  useless  to 
think  of  leaving  this  island  until  we  have  a  sufficient  stock 
of  provisions  and  water  to  put  in  a  canoe  to  last  us  until 
we  can  get  back  to  Ternate.  Did  we  put  into  any  island 
on  the  way  our  position  might  be  ten  times  as  bad  as  it 
now  is.  Here  at  least  we  are  well  treated  and  honored, 
and,  did  we  choose,  could  no  doubt  live  here  in  a  sort  of 
heathen  comfort  for  the  rest  of  our  lives,  just  as  many 
white  sailors  on  the  western  isles  have  turned  natives,  and 
given  up  all  thought  of  ever  returning  to  their  own  coun- 
try. The  Golden  Hind  was  four  days  on  her  journey  from' 
Ternate  to  the  place  where  she  refitted;  another  two  to 
the  spot  where  she  went  on  the  reef.  The  wind  was  very 
light,  and  her  speed  was  not  above  five  knots  an  hour. 
We  should  be  able  to  paddle  back  in  the  course  of  ten  days, 
and  must  take  provisions  sufficient  for  that  time.  The 
first  point,  of  course,  will  be  to  find  whether  the  old  ship 
is  still  on  the  reef.  If  she  is  not  there  she  may  have  suc- 
ceeded in  getting  off,  or  she  may  have  gone  to  pieces.  I 


VNDEU  SHAKE'S  FLAB.  275 

trust,  however,  that  the  admiral,  who  is  full  of  resource, 
has  managed  to  get  her  off  in  safety.  He  will  no  doubt 
have  spent  a  day  or  two  in  looking  for  us;  but  finding  no 
signs  of  us  in  the  island  to  which  we  were  sent,  or  in  the 
other  lying  in  sight  to  the  southward,  he  will  have  shaped 
his  way  for  the  Cape.  The  first  difficulty  then  is  to  pro- 
cure sufficient  provisions;  the  next  is  to  make  our  escape 
unseen.  The  four  natives  who  night  and  day  watch  at 
the  corners  of  this  shed  mean  itasa-great  honor  no  doubt; 
but,  like  many  other  honors,  it  is  an  unpleasant  one.  Our 
only  plan  will  be  to  seize  and  gag  them  suddenly,  each 
pouncing  upon  one.  Then  there  is  the  fear  that  the 
natives,  who  are,  I  must  say,  the  most  restless  sleepers  I 
ever  saw,  may  in  their  wanderings  up  to  look  at  us  find 
that  we  have  gone  before  we  are  fairly  beyond  reach  of 
pursuit,  for  one  of  their  great  canoes  will  travel  at  least 
two  feet  to  our  one.  Hitherto  we  have  only  taken  such 
provisions  from  the  piles  they  have  offered  us  as  were  suf- 
ficient for  our  day's  wants,  and  left  the  rest  for  them  to 
take  away  again  next  morning.  In  future  we  had  best 
each  day  abstract  a  considerable  quantity,  and  place  it 
conspicuously  in  the  center  of  this  shed.  The  people  will 
perhaps  wonder,  but  will  probably  conclude  that  we  are 
laying  it  by  to  make  a  great  feast  upon  our  wedding  day. 
As  to  water,  we  must  do  with  the  calabashes  which  they 
bring  the  day  before,  and  with  the  rnilk  which  the  cocoas 
contain,  and  which  is  to  the  full  as  quenching  as  water. 
With  a  good  number  of  cocoas  we  ought  to  be  able  to  shift 
for  some  days  without  other  food,  and  there  is  indeed  an 
abundance  of  juice  in  many  of  the  other  fruits  which  they 
offer  us." 

This  programme  was  carried  out.  Every  morning  the 
lads  danced  in  solemn  procession  round  the  hut,  lessening 
their  rounds  by  one  each  day.  Daily  the  heap  of  fruit, 
dried  fish,  and  vegetables  under  the  shed  increased,  and 


£76  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

the  natives,  who  believed  that  their  new  deities  were  intent 
•upon  the  thoughts  of  marriage,  had  no  suspicion  whatever 
of  any  desire  on  their  part  to  escape. 

Having  settled  how  to  prevent  their  escape  being  de- 
tected before  morning,  they  accustomed  themselves  to  go 
to  sleep  with  the  cloths,  woven  of  the  fiber  of  the  palm 
«with  which  the  natives  had  supplied  them,  pulled  over 
their  heads. 

Seven  days  after  the  fight  with  the  other  islanders  the 
lads  judged  that  the  pile  of  provisions  was  sufficiently  large 
for  their  purpose,  and  determined  upon  making  the  at- 
tempt that  night.  A  canoe  of  about  the  size  that  they 
desired,  which  had  been  used  during  the  day  for  fishing, 
lay  on  the  shore  close  to  the  water's  edge.  They  waited 
until  the  village  was  fairly  hushed  in  sleep.  An  hour  later 
they  believed  that  the  four  guards  or  worshipers,  for  it 
struck  them  that  their  attendants  partook  partly  of  both 
characters,  were  beginning  to  feel  drowsy,  and  each  of  the 
boys  having  furnished  himself  with  a  rope  of  twisted  cocoa- 
nut  fiber,  stole  quietly  up  to  one  of  these  men.  To  place 
their  hands  over  their  mouths,  to  seize  and  throw  them 
upon  their  faces,  was  but  the  work  of  a  moment,  and  was 
accomplished  without  the  least  noise,  the  natives  being 
paralyzed  by  the  sudden  and  unexpected  assault.  A  piece 
of  wood  was  shoved  into  the  mouth  of  each  as  a  gag,  and 
secured  by  a  string  passing  round  the  back  of  the  head 
and  holding  it  in  its  place.  Their  arms  and  legs  were  tied, 
and  they  were  set  up  against  the  posts  in  the  same  position 
they  had  before  occupied.  Four  of  the  great  effigies  were 
then  taken  from  their  places  and  laid  down  upon  the 
ground  and  covered  over  with  the  mats,  so  that  to  any 
casual  observer  they  presented  exactly  the  same  appearance 
as  the  boys  sleeping  there.  Then,  loading  themselves  with 
provisions,  the  boys  stole  backward  and  forward  quietly  to 
the  boat.  Once  they  had  to  pause,  as  a  sleepless  native 


UNDER  D&AKfrS  FLAG.  27? 

carne  out  from  his  hut,  walked  up  to  the  shrine,  and  bowed 
himself  repeatedly  before  the  supposed  deities.  Fortu- 
nately he  perceived  nothing  suspicious,  and  did  not  notice 
the  constrained  attitude  of  the  four  guardians.  When  he 
retired  the  boys  continued  their  work,  and  soon  had  the 
whole  of  the  store  of  cocoas  and  other  provisions  in  the 
canoe,  together  with  some  calabashes  of  water.  Then  with 
some  difficulty  they  launched  the  boat,  and  taking  their 
places,  paddled  quietly  away  from  the  island. 

Once  fairly  beyond  the  bay  they  laid  themselves  to  their 
work,  and  the  light  boat  sped  rapidly  across  the  waters. 
In  order  that  they  might  be  sure  of  striking  the  point 
where  they  had  left' the  ship  they  made  first  for  the  island 
where  they  had  been  captured,  and  when  day  broke  were 
close  beside  it.  They  then  shaped  their  course  northward, 
and  after  two  hours'  paddling  were  in  sight  of  the  low 
island  which  they  had  first  visited.  By  noon  they  reached 
the  spot  where,  as  they  judged,  the  Golden  Hind  had  gone 
on  the  reef;  but  no  sign  whatever  of  her  was  to  be  discov- 
ered. By  the  position  in  which  the  island  they  had  left 
lay,  they  were  sure  that,  although  they  might  be  two  or 
three  miles  out  in  their  direction,  they  must  be  within 
sight  of  the  vessel  were  she  still  remaining  as  they  had 
left  her.  There  had  been  no  great  storm  since  she  had 
grounded,  and  it  was  unlikely,  therefore,  that  she  could 
have  gone  entirely  to  pieces.  This  afforded  them  great 
ground  for  hope  that  she  had  beaten  off  the  reef  and  pro- 
ceeded on  her  voyage.  Hitherto  they  had  been  buoyed  up 
with  the  expectation  of  again  meeting  their  friends,  but 
they  now  felt  a  truly  unselfish  pleasure  at  the  thought  that 
their  comrades  and  admiral  had  escaped  the  peril  which 
threatened  the  downfall  of  their  hopes,  and  the  termina- 
tion of  an  enterprise  fairly  and  successfully  carried  out 
so  far. 

There  was  nothing  now  for  them  but  to  make  for  Ter- 


DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

nate.  They  found  no  difficulty  whatever  in  doing  without 
water,  their  thirst  being  amply  quenched  by  the  milk  of 
the  cocoas  and  the  juice  of  the  guavas  and  other  fruits. 
They  paddled  for  two  days  longer,  working  steadily  all 
day  and  far  into  the  night,  and  passed  one  or  two  islands. 
In  the  course  of  the  next  day's  passage  they  went  within  a 
short  distance  of  another,  and  were  horrified  at  seeing 
from  the  narrow  bay  a  large  war-canoe  put  out  and  make 
rapidly  toward  them. 

They  had  already  talked  over  what  would  be  their  best 
course  in  such  a  contingency,  and  proceeded  at  once  to 
put  their  plans  into  execution.  They  had,  at  starting, 
taken  with  them  a  supply  of  the  paints  used  in  their  deco- 
ration, and  with  these  they  proceeded  to  touch  up  the  col- 
oring on  their  faces  and  white  shirts,  and  on  the  strange 
ornaments  which  had  been  affixed  to  their  heads.  Two  of 
them  now  took  their  place,  one  at  the  stern  and  the  other 
at  the  bow  of  the  canoe.  The  other  two  stood  up  and 
paddled  very  quietly  and  slowly  along,  and  as  the  canoe 
approached  rapidly  the  four  broke  into  a  song — one  of  the 
old  Devonshire  catches  which  they  had  often  sung  together 
on  board  ship.  The  war-canoe  as  it  approached  gradually 
ceased  paddling.  The  aspect  of  this  small  boat  paddling 
quietly  along  and  taking  no  heed  of  their  presence  filled 
its  occupants  with  surprise.  But  when  the  way  on  their 
canoe  drifted  them  close  to  it,  and  they  were  enabled  to 
see  the  strange  character  of  the  freight,  a  panic  of  aston- 
ishment and  alarm  seized  them.  That  a  boat,  navigated 
by  four  gods,  should  be  seen  proceeding  calmly  along  the 
ocean  alone  was  a  sight  for  which  Indian  legend  gave  them 
no  precedent  whatever,  and  after  gazing  for  awhile  in 
superstitious  dread  at  the  strange  spectacle  they  turned 
their  boat's  head  and  paddled  rapidly  back  to  shore. 

For  an  hour  or  two  the  boys  continued  their  course  in 
the  same  leisurely  manner;  but  when  once  convinced  that 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  279 

they  were  out  of  sight  of  their  late  visitors  they  again  sat 
down,  and  the  four  stretched  themselves  to  their  work. 
On  the  evening  of  that  day  there  was  a  heavy  mist  upon 
the  water.  The  stars  were  with  difficulty  seen  through  it, 
and  the  lads  were  all  convinced  that  a  change  of  weather 
was  at  hand.  Before  nightfall  had  set  in,  an  island  had 
been  seen  at  a  short  distance  to  the  north,  and  they  decided 
at  once  to  make  for  this,  as  if  caught  in  mid-ocean  by  a 
storm  they  had  little  hope  of  weathering  it  in  a  craft  like 
that  in  which  they  were  placed,  although  the  natives, 
habituated  to  them,  were  able  to  keep  the  sea  in  very 
rough  weather  in  these  little  craft,  which,  to  an  English 
eye,  appeared  no  safer  than  cockleshells.  The  boys  rowed 
with  all  their  strength  in  the  direction  in  which  the  island 
lay,  but  before  they  reached  it  sharp  puffs  of  wind  struck 
the  water  and  the  steerage  of  the  canoe  became  extremely 
difficult.  Presently,  however,  they  heard  the  sound  of  a 
dull  roar,  and  knew  that  this  was  caused  by  the  slow  heav- 
ing swell,  of  which  they  were  already  sensible,  breaking 
upon  a  beach.  Ten  minutes  later  they  were  close  to  the 
shore.  Had  it  been  daylight  they  would  have  coasted 
round  the  island  to  search  for  a  convenient  spot  for  land- 
ing, but  the  wind  was  already  rising  so  fast  that  they 
deemed  it  better  to  risk  breaking  up  their  canoe  than  to  run 
the  hazard  of  being  longer  upon  the  sea.  Waiting,  therefore, 
for  a  wave,  they  sped  forward  with  all  their  strength. 
There  was  a  crash,  and  then  they  all  leaped  out  together, 
and  seizing  the  canoe,  ran  her  up  on  the  beach  before  the 
next  wave  arrived, 

"I  fear  she  has  knocked  a  great  hole  in  her  bottom," 
Reuben  said. 

"  Never  mind,"  Ned  replied.  "  We  shall  be  able  to  make 
a  shift  to  mend  it.  The  great  point  now  is  to  drag  it  up 
so  high  among  the  bushes  that  it  will  not  be  noticed  in  the 
morning  by  any  natives  who  may  happen  to  be  about. 


280  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

Until  this  storm  is  over,  at  any  rate,  we  have  got  to  shelter 
here." 

The  canoe,  laden  as  she  still  was  with  provisions,  was 
too  heavy  to  drag  up;  but  the  boys,  emptying  her  out, 
lifted  her  on  their  shoulders  and  carried  her  inland,  until 
at  a  distance  of  some  sixty  or  seventy  yards  they  entered  a 
grove  of  cocoanut  trees.  Here  they  laid  her  down,  and 
made  two  journeys  back  to  the  beach  to  fetch  up  their 
provisions,  and  then  took  refuge  in  the  grove,  thankful 
that  they  had  escaped  on  shore  in  time,  for  scarcely  had 
they  lauded  when  the  hurricane  which  had  been  brewing 
burst  with  terrific  force.  Seas  of  immense  height  came 
rolling  in  upon  the  shore.  The  trees  of  the  grove  waved 
to  and  fro  before  it,  and  shook  the  heavy  nuts  down  with 
such  force  that  the  boys  were  glad  to  leave  it  and  to  lie 
down  on  the  open  beach,  rather  than  to  run  the  risk  of 
having  their  skulls  fractured  by  these  missiles  from  above. 
The  sound  of  the  wind  deadened  their  voices,  and  even  by 
shouting  they  could  not  make  themselves  heard.  Now 
and  then,  above  the  din  of  the  storm,  was  heard  the  crash 
of  some  falling  tree,  and  even  as  they  lay  they  were  some- 
times almost  lifted  from  the  ground  by  the  force  of  the 
wind. 

For  twenty-four  hours  the  hurricane  continued,  and 
then  cleared  as  suddenly  as  it  had  commenced.  The  lads 
crept  back  to  the  grove,  refreshed  themselves  with  the 
contents  of  two  or  three  cocoas  apiece,  and  then,  lying 
down  under  the  canoe,  which  they  had  taken  the  precau- 
tion of  turning  bottom  upward,  enjoyed  a  peaceful  sleep 
till  morning. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  281 


CHAPTER  XX. 

A    PORTUGUESE   SETTLEMENT. 

THE  day  broke  bright  and  sunny.  The  first  care  of  the 
boys  was  to  examine  their  carioe,  and  they  found,  as  they 
had  feared,  that  a  huge  hole  had  been  made  in  her  bottom 
by  the  crash  against  the  rocks  on  lauding.  They  looked 
for  some  time  with  rueful  countenances  at  it,  and  then,  as 
usual,  turned  to  Ned  to  ask  him  what  he  thought  had  best 
be  done. 

"  There  can  be  no  doubt,"  he  said,  "  that  the  natives  make 
a  sort  of  glue  out  of  some  trees  or  shrubs  growing  in  theso 
islands,  and  we  shall  have  to  endeavor  to  discover  the  tree 
from  which  they  obtain  it.  We  can,  of  course,  easily  pull 
off  the  bark  from  some  tree  which  will  do  to  cover  the 
hole.  The  great  point  is  to  find  some  substance  which 
will  make  it  water-tight." 

The  grove  was  a  very  large  one,  and  appeared  to  extend 
along  the  whole  coast.  Seaward,  it  was  formed  entirely 
of  cocoa  trees,  but  inland  a  large  number  of  other  trees 
were  mingled  with  the  palms.  All  day  the  boys  attempted 
to  find  some  semblance  of  gum  oozing  from  these  trees. 
With  sharp  pieces  of  shell  they  made  incisions  in  the  bark 
of  each  variety  that  they  met  with  to  see  if  any  fluid  ex- 
uded which  might  be  useful  for  this  purpose,  but  in  vain. 

"If  we  can  kill  some  animal  or  other,"  Ned  said,  "we 
might  boil  down  its  sinews  and  skin  and  make  glue,  as 
Tom  and  myself  did,  to  mend  our  bows  with,  among  the 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

Indians  on  the  pampas.     But  even  then  I  question  whether 
the  glue  would  stand  the  action  of  the  water." 

As  to  their  subsistence  they  had  no  uneasiness.  Besides 
the  cocoas,  fruit  of  all  sorts  abounded.  In  the  woods  par- 
rots and  other  birds  flew  screaming  among  the  branches  at 
their  approach,  and  although  at  present  they  had  no  means 
of  shooting  or  snaring  these  creatures,  they  agreed  that  it 
would  be  easy  to  construct  bows  and  arrows  should  their 
stay  be  prolonged.  This,  however,  they  shrank  from  doing 
as  long  as  any  possible  method  of  escape  presented  itself. 
Were  it  absolutely  necessary,  they  agreed  that  thev  could 
burn  down  a  tree  and  construct  a  fresh  canoe;  but  they 
were  by  no  means  sanguine  as  to  their  boat-building  capa- 
bilities, and  were  reluctant  to  give  up  the  idea  of  continu- 
ing their  vovage  in  their  present  craft  as  long  as  a  possi- 
bility of  so  doing  remained.  So  they  passed  four  days; 
but  succeeded  in  finding  no  gum  or  other  substance  which 
appeared  likely  to  suit  their  purpose. 

"I  should  think,"  Reuben  said  one  day,  "that  it  would 
be  possible  to  make  the  canoe  so  buoyant  that  she  would 
not  sink,  even  if  filled  with  water." 

"How  would  you  do  that?"  Tom  asked.  "There  are 
many  light  woods,  no  doubt,  among  the  trees  that  we  see, 
but  they  would  have  to  remain  a  long  time  to  dry  to  be 
light  enough  to  be  of  any  use." 

"I  was  thinking,"  Reuben  said,  "that  we  might  use. 
cocoanuts.     There  are  immense  quantities  upon  the  trees,' 
and   the  ground  is  covered  with  them  from  the  effects  of 
the  late  gale.     If  we  strip  off  the  whole  of  the  outside 
husk  and  then  make  holes  in  the  little  eyes  at  the  top  and 
let  out  the  milk,  using  young  ones  in  which  the  flesh  has 
not  yet  formed,  and  cutting  sticks  to  fit  tightly  into  the 
holes,  they  would  support  a  considerable  weight  in  the 
water.     I  should  think  that  if  we  treated  several  hundred 
nuts  in  this  way,  put  them  in  the  bottom  of  the  canoe, 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  £83 

and  keep  them  in  their  places  by  a  sort  of  net  which  we 
might  easily  make  from  the  fibers  of  the  cocoas,  the  boat 
would  be  buoyant  enough  to  carry  us." 

The  idea  struck  all  as  being  feasible,  and  Keuben  was 
much  congratulated  upon  his  inventive  powers.  Without 
delay  they  set  to  work  to  carry  out  the  plan.  A  piece  of 
thin  bark  was  first  taken,  and  by  means  of  a  long  thorn 
used  as  a  needle,  was  sewn  over  the  hole  in  the  canoe  with 
the  fibers  of  the  cocoa.  Then  a  large  pile  of  nuts  was 
collected,  and  the  boys  set  to  work  at  the  task  of  emptying 
them  of  their  contents.  Tt  took  them  some  hours'  work 
to  make  and  fit  the  pegs.  Another  two  days  were  spent 
in  manufacturing  a  net  to  stretch  across  the  boat  above 
them.  The  nuts  were  then  placed  in  the  boat,  the  net 
put  into  shape,  and  choosing  a  calm  night  for  their  trial — • 
for  they  feared  during  the  daytime  to  show  themselves 
beyond  th«i  margin  of  the  forest — they  placed  it  in  the 
water,  and  paddled  a  short  distance  out. 

They  found  that  their  anticipations  were  justified,  and 
that  the  flotation  of  the  cocoas  was  amply  sufficient  to  keep 
the  boat  afloat.  She  was,  of  course,  far  lower  in  the  water 
than  she  had  before  been,  and  her  pace  was  greatly  deteri- 
orated. This,  however,  they  had  expected,  and  returning 
to  shore  they  watched  for  the  next  night.  Then,  taking 
in  a  load  of  provisions,  they  started  at  once  upon  their 
way.  It  was  weary  work  now,  for  the  water-logged  canoe 
was  a  very  different  boat  to  the  light  bark  which  had 
yielded  so  easily  to  their  strokes.  Fortunately,  however, 
they  met  with  no  misadventure.  The  weather  continued 
calm.  They  were  unseen,  or  at  least  not  followed,  from 
any  of  the  islands  that  they  passed  on  their  way.  But  it 
was  ten  days  after  their  final  start  before  a  large  island, 
which  they  all  recognized  as  Ternate,  was  seen  rising  above 
the  water. 

"Easy  all,"  Ned  said,     "We  may  be  thankful  indeed 


284  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

that  we  have  arrived  safely  in  sight  of  the  island.  But 
now  that  we  are  close,  and  there  is  no  fear  of  tempests, 
had  we  not  better  talk  over  whether,  after  all,  we  shall 
land  at  Ternate?" 

"Not  land  at  Ternate?"  the  others  exclaimed  in  con- 
sternation, for,  indeed,  the  work  during  the  last  few  days 
had  been  very  heavy,  and  they  were  rejoicing  at  the  thought 
of  an  end  to  their  labors.  "  Why,  we  thought  it  was  ar- 
ranged all  along  we  should  stop  at  Ternate." 

"Yes,  but  we  arranged  that  because  at  Ternate  alone 
there  seemed  a  certainty  of  a  welcome.  But,  as  you  know, 
Tidore  only  lies  twelve  miles  away  from  Ternate,  and  from 
the  position  we  are  now  in  it  will  not  be  more  than  five  or 
six  miles  farther.  You  see  when  we  were  there  the  king 
was  preparing  for  a  war  with  the  Portuguese  in  Tidore, 
and  he  would  certainly  expect  us  to  assist  him,  and  proba- 
bly to  lead  his  fighting  men." 

"But  we  should  have  no  objection  to  that,"  Reuben  said. 

"Not  in  the  least,"  Ned  replied.  "But  you  see  if  we 
are  ever  to  get  back  to  England  it  must  be  through  the 
Portuguese.  Their  ships  alone  are  to  be  found  in  these 
seas,  and  were  we  to  join  the  King  of  Ternate  in  an  attack 
upon  them,  whether  successful  or  not,  we  could  never 
hope  to  be  received  in  Portuguese  ships,  and  should  prob- 
ably, indeed,  be  taken  to  Goa,  and  perhaps  burned  there 
as  heretics,  if  we  were  to  seek  an  asylum  on  board.  What 
do  you  think?" 

Viewed  in  this  light  it  certainly  appeared  more  prudent 
to  go  to  Tidore,  and  after  some  little  discussion  the  boat's 
head  was  turned  more  to  the  west,  and  the  lads  continued 
their  weary  work  in  paddling  the  water-logged  canoe.  So 
slowly  did  she  move  that  it  was  late  at  night  before  they 
approached  the  island.  They  determined  not  to  land  till 
morning,  as  they  might  be  mistaken  for  natives  and  at- 
tacked. They,  therefore,  lay  down  in  the  canoe  and  went 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  285 

to'sleep,  when  within  about  a  mile  of  the  island;  and  the 
next  morning  paddled  along  its  shore  until  they  saw  some 
canoes  hauled  up  together  with  an  English  boat,  and  sup- 
posed that  they  were  at  the  principal  landing-place  of  the 
island. 

On  either  side  of  the  landing-place  the  cliffs  rose  steeply 
up  at  a  short  distance  from  the  beach.  But  at  this  point 
a  sort  of  natural  gap  existed,  up  which  the  road  ascended 
into  the  interior  of  the  island.  There  were  several  natives 
moving  about  on  the  beach  as  the  boys  approached,  and 
one  of  these  was  seen  at  once  to  start  at  a  run  up  the  road. 
The  lads  had  carefully  removed  all  vestige  of  the  paint 
from  their  faces  and  hands,  and  having  put  on  their  doub- 
lets, concealed  the  strange  appearance  presented  before  by 
their  white  shirts.  No  resistance  was  opposed  to  their 
landing;  but  the  natives  motioned  to  them  that  they  must 
not  advance  inland  until  a  messenger  returned  from  the 
governor.  The  boys  were  only  too  glad  to  throw  them- 
selves down  full  length  on  the  soft  sand  of  the  beach,  and 
to  dry  their  clothes  in  the  sun,  as  for  ten  days  they  had 
been  constantly  wet,  and  were  stiff  and  tired. 

Presently  a  native  came  down  at  a  run,  and  announced 
that  the  governor  was  at  hand.  Rising  to  their  feet  and 
making  the  best  show  they  could  in  their  faded  garments, 
the  lads  soon  saw  a  Portuguese  gentleman  attended  by  four 
soldiers  coming  down  the  road  between  the  cliffs. 

"Who  are  you?"  he  asked  in  Portuguese  as  he  reached 
them,  "and  whence  come  you?" 

"We  are  Englishmen,"  Ned  said  in  Spanish.  "We 
belong  to  the  ship  of  Captain  Drake,  which  passed  by  here 
in  its  voyage  of  circumnavigation.  By  an  accident  we  in 
the  canoe  were  separated  from  the  ship  and  left  behind. 
We  have  come  to  seek  your  hospitality  and  protection." 

"We  heard  of  an  English  vessel  at  Teruate,"  the  gov- 
ernor said  sternly,  "some  weeks  since,  and  heard  also  that 


286  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

its  captain  was  making  an  alliance  with  the  king  there 
against  us." 

"  It  was  not  so,"  Ned  said.  "  The  admiral  stopped  there 
for  a  few  days  to  obtain  supplies  such  as  he  needed;  but 
we  are  not  here  either  to  make  alliances  or  to  trade.  Cap- 
tain Drake  on  starting  intended  to  voyage  round  the  coast 
of  America,  and  to  return,  if  possible,  by  the  north.  After 
coasting  up  the  western  shores  of  that  continent  he  found 
that  it  would  be  impossible  to  pass  round  the  nortb,  as  the 
coast  extended  so  rapidly  toward  the  north  of  Asia.  He, 
therefore,  started  to  return  by  the  Cape,  and  on  his  way 
passed  through  these  islands.  Had  it  been  part  of  his 
plan  to  make  alliances  with  the  King  of  Ternate  or  any 
other  potentate  he  would  have  stopped  and  done  so,  and 
would  have  given  his  armed  assistance  to  the  king.  But 
his  object  was  simply  to  return  as  quickly  as  possible. 
Had  there  been  any  alliance  made,  we  should  naturally 
have  made  for  Ternate  instead  of  this  island.  But,  as  we 
have  no  relations  with  the  king,  and  seek  only  means  of 
returning  to  Europe,  we  preferred,  of  course,  to  come 
here,  where  we  knew  that  we  should  find  Christians,  and, 
we  hoped,  friends." 

There  was  palpable  truth  in  what  Ned  said,  and  the 
governor,  unbending,  expressed  his  readiness  to  receive 
and  help  them.  He  then  asked  a  few  more  questions 
about  the  manner  in  which  they  had  become  separated 
from  their  friends,  and  seeing  no  advantage  in  concealing' 
the  truth,  and  thinking  perhaps  that  it  would  be  well,  if 
an  opportunity  should  offer,  that  the  governor  should  send 
a  vessel  to  search  among  the  islands  near  where  the  wreck 
took  place,  and  see  if  any  of  the  crew  had  sought  refuge 
there,  they  told  him  frankly  the  circumstances  under  which 
they  had  left  the  Golden  Hind. 

"It  would   be  sad  indeed,"  said  the  Portuguese,  "if  so 
grand  an  expedition  under  so  noble  a  commander  should 


UNDER  DRAKE  >S  FLAG.  28? 

have  been  wrecked  after  accomplishing  such  a  work.  We 
in  these  parts  are  not  friendly  to  any  European  meddling. 
His  holiness  the  pope  granted  ns  all  discoveries  on  this 
side  of  the  Cape,  and  we  would  fain  trade  in  peace  and 
quiet  without  interference.  But  we  can  admire  the  great 
deeds  and  enterprise  of  your  countrymen,  and  indeed,"  he 
said,  smiling — for  the  Portuguese  are  as  a  rule  a  very  small 
race — and  looking  at  the  bulk  of  the  four  young  men, 
which  was,  indeed,  almost  gigantic  by  the  side  of  himself 
and  his  soldiers,  "I  am  scarcely  surprised,  now  I  see  you,  at 
the  almost  legendary  deeds  which  I  hear  that  your  coun- 
trymen have  performed  on  the  Spanish  main.  But  now, 
follow  me  to  my  castle,  and  I  will  there  provide  you  with 
proper  appliances.  What  position  did  you  hold  in  the 
ship?" 

"We  are  gentlemen  of  Devonshire,"  Ned  said,  "and  bore 
a  share  in  the  enterprise,  sailing  as  gentlemen  adventurers 
under  Captain  Drake.  I  myself  held  the  rank  of  third 
officer  in  the  ship." 

"Then,  senors,"  the  Portuguese  said,  bowing,  "I  am 
happy  to  place  myself  and  my  house  at  your  disposal.  It 
may  be  that  you  will  be  able  to  render  me  services  which 
will  far  more  than  repay  any  slight  inconvenience  or  trouble 
to  which  I  may  be  put,  for  we  hear  that  the  King  of  Ter- 
nate  is  preparing  a  formidable  expedition  against  us,  and 
as  my  garrison  is  a  very  small  one  and  the  natives  are  not 
to  be  relied  upon  to  fight  against  those  of  the  other  island, 
the  addition  of  four  such  experienced  soldiers  as  yourself 
will,  in  no  slight  degree,  strengthen  us." 

The  boys  replied  that  their  swords  were  at  the  service  of 
their  host;  and,  well  content  with  the  turn  things  had 
taken,  they  proceeded  with  him  up  the  road  into  the  inte- 
rior of  the  island.  Upon  gaining  the  higher  land  they 
were  surprised  at  the  aspect  of  the  island.  In  place  of  the 
almost  unbroken  forest  which  they  had  beheld  in  other 


288  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

spots  at  which  they  had  landed,  here  was  fair  cultivated 
land.  Large  groves  of  spice  trees  grew  here  and  there, 
and  the  natives  were  working  in  the  fields  with  the  regu- 
larity of  Europeans.  The  Portuguese  method  of  cultivat- 
ing the  islands  which  they  took  differed  widely  from  that 
of  the  English.  Their  first  step  was  to  compel  the  natives 
to  embrace  Christianity;  their  second  to  make  of  them 
docile  and  obedient  laborers,  raising  spice  and  other  prod- 
ucts for  which  they  received  in  payment  calico,  beads,  and 
European  goods. 

The  castle,  which  stood  in  the  center  of  a  small  plain, 
was  built  of  stone  roughly  hewn  and  was  of  no  strength 
which  would  have  resisted  any  European  attack,  but  was 
well  calculated  for  the  purpose  for  which  it  was  designed. 
It  consisted  of  a  pleasant  house  standing  in  an  inclosure, 
round  which  was  a  wall  some  fifteen  feet  in  height,  with  a 
platform  running  behind  it  to  enable  its  garrison  to  shoot 
over  the  top.  A  ditch  of  some  ten  feet  in  depth  and  fif- 
teen feet  wide  surrounded  it,  so  that  without  scaling-ladders 
to  ascend  the  walls  or  cannon  to  batter  holes  in  them,  the 
place  could  be  well  held  against  any  attack  that  the  natives 
might  make  upon  it.  The  garrison  was  not  a  formidable 
one,  consisting  only  of  some  thirty  Portuguese  soldiers, 
whose  appearance  did  not  speak  much  for  the  discipline 
maintained.  Their  uniforms  were  worn  and  rusty  in  the 
extreme.  They  were  slovenly  in  appearance,  and  wore  a 
look  of  discontent  and  hopelessness.  A  large  portion  of 
them,  indeed,  had  been  criminals,  and  had  been  offered 
the  choice  of  death  or  of  serving  for  ten  years,  which  gen- 
erally meant  for  life,  in  the  eastern  seas.  Ned  judged  that 
no  great  reliance  could  be  placed  upon  this  army  of  scare- 
crows in  the  event  of  an  attack  of  a  serious  character. 

"  My  men  would  scarcely  show  to  advantage  at  home," 
the  governor  said,  noting  the  glance  of  surprise  with  which 
the  boys  had  viewed  them.  "But  in  a  country  like  this, 


UNDER  DH ARE' S  FLAG,  269 

with  such  great  heat  and  no  real  occasion  for  more  than 
appearances,  it  is  hopeless  to  expect  them  to  keep  up  the 
smartness  which  would  at  home  be  necessary.  The  natives 
are  very  docile  and  quiet  and  give  us  no  trouble  whatever, 
and  were  it  not  for  interference  from  Ternate,  where  the 
people  are  of  a  much  more  warlike  nature,  the  guard  which 
I  have  would  be  ample  for  any  purposes.  I  am  expecting 
a  vessel  which  calls  here  about  once  in  six  months,  very 
shortly,  and  anticipate  that  she  will  bring  me  some  twenty 
more  soldiers  for  whom  I  wrote  to  the  viceroy  at  Goa  when 
she  last  called  here." 

"  What  is  your  latest  news  from  Ternate?"  Ned  asked. 

"I  have  no  direct  news,"  he  said.  "What  we  know  we 
gather  from  the  natives,  who,  by  means  of  canoes  and 
fishing-boats,  are  often  in  communication  with  those  of 
the  opposite  island.  They  tell  rne  that  great  preparations 
are  being  made,  that  several  of  the  largest-sized  canoes 
have  been  built,  and  that  they  believe  when  it  is  full  moon, 
which  is  generally  the  era  at  which  they  commence  their 
adventures,  there  will  be  a  descent  upon  this  island." 

"Then  you  have  seven  days  in  which  to  prepare,"  Ned 
said.  "Have  you  been  doing  anything  to  enable  you  to 
receive  them  hotly?" 

"I  have  not,"  the  governor  said.  "But  now  that  you 
gentlemen  have  come  I  doubt  not  that  your  experience  in 
warfare  will  enable  you  to  advise  me  as  to  what  steps  I 
had  better  take.  I  stand  at  present  alone  here.  The  offi- 
cer who,  under  me,  commanded  the  garrison,  died  two 
months  since,  and  I  myself,  who  was  brought  up  in  a  civil 
rather  than  a  military  capacity,  am,  I  own  to  you,  strange 
altogether  to  these  matters." 

Ned  expressed  the  willingness  of  himself  and  his  friends 
to  do  all  in  their  power  to  advise  and  assist  the  governor; 
and  with  many  mutual  compliments  they  now  entered  the 
house,  where  a  goodly  room  was  assigned  to  them;  some 


2$0  UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG. 

natives  told  off  as  their  servants;  and  the  governor  at  once 
set  two  native  seamsters  to  work  to  manufacture  garments 
of  a  proper  cut  for  them  from  materials  which  he  had  in  a 
storehouse  for  trading  with  the  neighboring  chiefs,  who, 
like  all  savages,  were  greatly  given  to  finery.  Thus  by 
the  end  of  the  week  the  boys  were  able  once  more  to  make 
a  show  which  would  have  passed  muster  in  a  European 
capital.  At  the  governor's  request  they  had  at  once  pro- 
ceeded to  drill  the  soldiers,  Ned  and  Gerald  taking  each 
the  command  of  a  company  of  fifteen  men,  as  they  under- 
stood Spanish  and  could  readily  make  themselves  under- 
stood in  Portuguese;  whereas  Tom  and  Reuben  knew  but 
little  of  the  Spanish  tongue. 

;' I  think,"  Tom  said,  the  first  morning  to  the  governor, 
after  the  friends  had  discussed  the  prospect  together,  "it 
would  be  well  to  throw  up  some  protection  at  the  top  of 
the  road  leading  from  the  shore.  I  should  order  some 
large  trees  to  be  cut  down  and  dragged  by  a  strong  force 
of  natives  to  the  spot,  and  there  so  arranged  that  their 
branches  will  point  downward  and  form  a  chevaux  defri.se 
in  the  hollow  way,  leaving  until  the  last  moment  a  passage i 
between  them,  but  having  at  hand  a  number  of  young, 
saplings  to  fill  up  the  gap.  There  are,  I  suppose,  other 
places  at  which  the  enemy  could  land?" 

"Oh,  yes!"  the  governor  said.  "On  the  other  side  of 
the  island  the  land  slopes  gradually  down  to  the  shore,  and 
indeed  it  is  only  for  a  few  miles  at  this  point  that  the  cliffs 
rise  so  abruptly  that  they  could  not  be  ascended.  Yet 
even  here  there  are  many  points  which  a  native  could  easily 
scale,  although  we  in  our  accouterments  would  find  it 
impossible." 

While  Ned  and  Gerald  drilled  their  men  with  great  assi- 
duity, astonishing  the  Portuguese  soldiers  with  their 
energy  and  authoritative  manner,  Tom  and  Reuben  occu- 
pied themselves  in  superintending  the  felling  of  the  trees, 


TJNDER  BRA  KE*S  FLAG.  &)1 

and  their  carriage,  by  means  of  a  targe  number  of  natives, 
to  the  top  of  the  road.  Preparations  were  also  made  for 
blocking  np  the  lower  windows  of  the  house,  so  that  in 
case  of  the  enemy  succeeding  in  carrying  the  outer  wall  a 
stout  resistance  could  be  made  within.  Large  piles  of 
provisions  were  stored  in  the  building,  and  great  jars  of 
water  placed  there. 

"Are  you  sure,"  Ned  asked  the  governor  one  evening, 
"of  the  natives  here?  for  I  own  that  there  appears  to  me 
to  be  a  sullen  defiance  in  their  manner,  and  I  should  not 
be  surprised  to  see  them  turn  upon  us  immediately  those 
from  the  other  island  arrive.  If  they  did  so,  of  course  our 
position  at  the  top  of  the  road  would  be  untenable,  as  they 
would  take  us  in  the  rear.  However,  if  they  do  so,  I  doubt 
not  that  we  shall  be  able  to  cut  our  way  back  to  the  castle 
without  difficulty,  I  think  that  it  would  be  in  any  case 
advisable  to  leave  at  least  ten  men  to  hold  the  castle,  while 
the  rest  of  us  oppose  the  landing." 

There  were  in  store  four  small  culverins  and  several 
light  wall-pieces.  Two  of  the  culverins  were  placed  on 
the  cliff,  one  at  each  side  of  the  path,  so  as  to  command 
the  landing.  Two  others  were  placed  on  the  roof  of  the 
castle,  which  was  fiat  and  terraced.  The  wall-pieces  were 
also  cleaned  and  placed  in  position  at  the  corners  of  the 
walls,  and  the  boys,  having  seen  that  the  musketoons  and 
arquebuses  of  the  garrison  were  in  excellent  order  and 
ready  for  service,  felt  that  all  had  been  done  that  was  pos- 
sible to  prepare  for  an  attack. 

The  day  before  the  full  moon  a  sentinel  was  placed  at 
the  cliff  with  orders  to  bring  word  instantly  to  the  castle 
in  case  any  craft  were  seen  coming  from  Ternate,  the  dis- 
tance from  the  cliff  to  the  house  being  about  a  mile.  A 
short  time  after  daybreak  next  morning  the  sentry  arrived 
at  full  speed,  saying  that  a  great  fleet  of  canoes  was  visible. 
Hurrying  to  the  spot  with  the  governor,  the  lads  made  out 


292  UNDER  DRAKES  FLAG. 

that  the  approaching  flotilla  consisted  of  eighteen  great 
war-canoes,  each  of  which,  crowded  as  it  was,  might  con- 
tain a  hundred  men;  and  in  addition  to  these  were  a  large 
number  of  smaller  craft.  The  invading  force,  therefore, 
would  considerably  exceed  two  thousand  men.  Eeuben 
had  the  command  of  a  gun  at  one  side,  Tom  at  the  other, 
and  these  now  loaded  and  sighted  their  pieces  so  as  to  pour 
a  volley  of  case-shot  into  the  canoes  when  they  arrived 
within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  shore. 

The  canoes  came  along  in  a  dense  body,  as  close  together 
as  they  could  paddle,  their  rowers  filling  the  air  with  defi- 
ant yells.  When  they  reached  the  spot  upon  which  the 
guns  had  been  trained  Tom  fired  his  piece,  and  its  roar 
was  answered  by  wild  screams  and  yells  from  the  crowded 
fleet.  Reuben  followed  suit,  and  the  destruction  wrought 
by  the  guns  was  at  once  manifest.  Three  of  the  great 
canoes  were  broken  to  pieces,  and  their  occupants  swim- 
ming in  the  water  climbed  into  the  others,  among  which 
aleo  a  great  many  men  had  been  wounded.  The  effect  of 
this  reception  upon  the  valor  of  the  natives  was  very  speedy. 
Without  a  moment's  delay  they  backed  off,  and  were  soon 
seen  making  out  of  range  of  the  guns,  like  a  troop  of  wild 
fowl  scattered  by  the  shot  of  a  fowler. 

"They  have  a  horror  of  cannon,"  the  governor  said 
exnltingly,  as  he  witnessed  their  departure.  "If  we  had  a 
few  more  pieces  I  should  have  no  fear  of  the  result." 

The  dispersal  of  the  canoes  continued  only  until  they 
thought  that  they  were  out  of  range;  for  although  the 
lads  now  sent  several  round  shot  at  them,  these  did  not 
produce  any  effect,  the  canoes  being  but  small  objects  to 
hit  at  a  distance  when  on  the  move,  and  the  culverins 
being  old  pieces,  and  but  little  adapted  for  accurate 
shooting. 

The  fleet  were  soon  seen  to  gather  again,  and  after  a 
little  pause  they  started  in  a  body  as  before  along  the  coast. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  2D3 

"They  are  going  to  make  a  landing  elsewhere,"  Ned 
said,  "arid  we  shall  have  to  meet  them  in  the  open.  It  is 
a  pity  that  we  have  no  beasts  of  burden  to  which  to  harness 
our  pieces;  for  as  these  are  only  ships'  guns  it  is  impossible 
for  us  to  drag  them  at  a  speed  which  would  enable  us  to 
oppose  their  landing.  Where  are  all  the  natives?" 

At  the  first  alarm  a  large  body  of  the  islanders  had  as- 
sembled upon  the  cliff,  but  in  the  excitement  of  watching 
the  approaching  enemy  their  movements  had  not  been  no- 
ticed. It  was  .now  seen  that  the  whole  of  them  had  left 
the  spot,  and  not  a  single  native  was  in  sight. 

"I  think,"  Ned  said,  "we  had  better  fall  back  and  take 
up  a  position  near  the  house,  and  repel  their  attack  with 
the  assistance  of  the  guns  mounted  there.  With  muskets 
only  we  should  not  have  much  chance  of  preventing  their 
landing,  and  indeed  they  will  row  much  faster  along  the 
coast  than  we  could  run  to  keep  up  with  them." 

The  governor  agreed  in  the  justice  of  NecKs  view,  and 
the  whole  force  were  now  ordered  to  fall  back  toward  the 
castle.  As  they  proceeded  they  saw  large  bodies  of  the 
natives.  These,  however,  kept  at  a  distance;  but  their 
exultant  shouts  showed  that  they  must  be  considered  to 
have  gone  over  to  the  enemy. 

"I  will  make  you  pay  for  this,"  the  governor  said, 
stamping  his  foot  and  shaking  his  fist  angrily  in  their 
direction.  "Each  man  shall  have  to  furnish  double  the 
amount  of  spice  for  half  the  amount  of  calico  for  the  next 
five  years.  Ungrateful  dogs!  when  we  have  done  so  much 
for  them !" 

Ned  could  scarcely  help  smiling  to  himself  at  the  thought 
of'  the  many  benefits  which  the  Portuguese  had  bestowed 
upon  these  unfortunate  islanders,  whom  they  had  reduced 
from  a  state  of  happy  freedom  to  one  which,  whatever.it 
might  be  called,  was  but  little  short  of  slavery. 

It  was  late  in  the  evening  before  great  numbers  of  the 


294  ttDEH  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

enemy  were  seen  approaching,  and  these,  swelled  as  they 
were  by  the  population  of  the  island,  appeared  a  formida- 
ble body  indeed  by  the  side  of  the  handful  of  white  men 
who  were  drawn  up  to  defend  the  place.  The  enemy, 
numerous  as  they  were,  appeared  indisposed  to  commence  a 
fight  at  once,  but  began,  to  the  fierce  indignation  of  the 
governor,  to  cut  down  the  groves  of  spice  trees  and  to 
build  great  fires  with  them. 

"I  don't  think  that  they  will  attack  until  to-morrow," 
Ned  said,  "and  it  would  be  well,  therefore,  to  withdraw 
within  the  walls,  to  plant  sentries,  and  to  allow  the  men 
to  rest.  Wo  shall  want  all  our  strength  when  the  battle 
begins." 

"Do  you  think,"  the  governor  asked,  when  they  were 
seated  in  his  room,  and  had  finished  the  repast  which  had 
been  prepared,  "that  it  will  be  well  to  sally  out  to  meet 
them  in  the  open?  Thirty  white  men  ought  to  be  able  to 
defeat  almost  any  number  of  these  naked  savages." 

"If  we  had  horses  I  should  say  yes,"  Ned  said,  "because 
then  by  our  speed  we  could  make  up  for  our  lack  of  num- 
bers, and,  wheeling  about,  could  charge  through  and 
through  them.  But  they  are  so  light  and  active  in- com- 
parison to  ourselves  that  we  should  find  it  difficult,  if  not 
impossible,  to  bring  them  to  a  hand-to-hand  conflict.  We 
have,  indeed,  the  advantage  of  our  musketoons;  but  I  ob- 
served at  Ternate  that  many  of  the  men  have  muskets,  and 
the  sound  of  firearms  would  therefore  in  no  way  alarm 
them.  With  their  bows  and  arrows  they  can  shoot  more 
steadily  at  short  distances  than  we  can,  and  we  should  be 
overwhelmed  with  a  cloud  of  missiles,  while  unable  to 
bring  to  bear  the  strength  of  our  arms  and  the  keenness  of 
our  swords  against  their  clubs  and  rough  spears.  I  think 
that  we  could  hold  the  house  for  a  year  against  them;  but 
if  we  lost  many  men  in  a  fight  outside  it  might  go  harcT 
with  us  afterward." 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  295 

When  morning  dawned  the  garrison  beheld  to  their  dis- 
may that  the  Indians  had  in  the  night  erected  a  battery  at 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  front  of  the  gate,  and  that  in  this 
they  had  placed  the  culverins  left  on  the  cliff,  and  a  score 
of  the  small  pieces  carried  iti  their  war-canoes. 

"This  is  the  work  of  the  two  white  men  we  saw  at  Ter- 
nate,"  Gerald  exclaimed.  "No  Indian  could  have  built  a 
battery  according  to  this  fashion." 

As  soon  as  ifc  was  fairly  light  the  enemies'  fire  opened, 
and  was  answered  by  the  culverins  on  the  roof  of  the  house. 
The  latter  were  much  more  quickly  and  better  directed 
than  those  of  the  Indians,  but  many  of  the  balls  of  the 
latter  crashed  through  the  great  gates. 

"Shall  we  make  a  sortie?"  the  governor  asked  Ned. 

"I  think  that  we  had  better  wait  for  nightfall,"  he  re- 
plied. "  In  passing  across  this  open  ground  we  should  lose 
many  men  from  the  cannon  shots,  and  with  so  small  a 
force  remaining,  might  not  be  able  to  resist  the  on-rush  of 
so  great  numbers.  Let  us  prepare,  however,  to  prop  up 
the  gates  should  they  fall,  and  to-night  we  will  silence 
their  guns." 

At  nightfall  the  gates,  although  sorely  bruised  and  bat- 
tered, and  pierced  in  many  places,  still  stood,  being  shored 
up  with  beams  from  behind.  At  ten  o'clock  twenty  of 
the  garrison  were  let  down  by  ropes  at  the  back  of  the 
castle,  for  Ned  thought  that  scouts  might  be  lurking  near 
the  gates  to  give  notice  of  any  sortie.  With  great  precau- 
tion and  in  perfect  silence  they  made  a  way  round,  and 
were  within  a  hundred  yards  of  the  battery  before  their 
approach  was  discovered.  Then,  headed  by  the  governor, 
who  was  a  valiant  man  by  nature,  and  the  four  English, 
they  ran  at  great  speed  forward  and  were  inside  the  battery 
before  the  enemy  could  gather  to  resist  them.  The  battle 
was  indeed  a  hard  one,  for  the  Indians  with  their  clubs 
fought  valorously.  Reuben  and  Tom,  having  been  fur- 


296  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

nished  with  hammer  and  long  nails,  proceeded  to  spike  the 
guns,  which  they  did  with  great  quickness,  their  doings 
being  covered  alike  by  their  friends  and  by  darkness. 
When  they  had  finished  their  task  they  gave  the  signal, 
and  the  Portuguese,  being  sorely  pressed,  fell  back  fighting 
strongly  to  the  castle,  where  the  gates  were  opened  to  re- 
ceive them.  In  this  sortie  they  lost  eight  men.  The  next 
morning  at  dawn  the  natives,  being  gathered  in  large 
numbers,  came  on  to  the  assault  uttering  loud  and  fierce 
cries.  The  cannon  on  the  roof,  which  were  under  the 
charge  of  Tom  and  Reuben,  at  once  opened  fire  upon 
them,  while  the  soldiers  upon  the  walls  shot  briskly  with 
their  musketoons.  The  natives,  however,  appeared  deter- 
mined to  succeed,  and  firing  a  cloud  of  arrows  pushed 
forward  toward  the  gate.  Among  them  were  borne,  each 
by  some  thirty  natives,  long  trees,  and  this  party,  sur- 
rounded by  the  main  body,  proceeded  rapidly  toward  the 
gate,  which,  damaged  as  it  was,  they  hoped  easily  to  over- 
throw. 

The  fire  of  the  two  culverins  was,  however,  so  deadly, 
and  the  concentrated  discharge  of  the  musketoons  upon 
them  as  they  advanced  so  fatal,  that  after  trying  several 
times  to  approach  close  to  the  gate,  the  natives  dropped 
the  great  logs  and  fled. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  £97 


CHAPTER  XXL 

WHOLESALE   CONVERSION". 

THAT  day  arid  the  three  which  followed  passed  without 
adventure.  The  natives  were  seen  ravaging  the  fields,  de- 
stroying the  plantations,  and  doing  terrible  damage,  to  the 
intense  exasperation  of  the  Portuguese  governor.  But 
they  did- not  show  any  signs  of  an  intention  to  attack  the 
castle. 

"I  believe,"  Ned  said  on  the  fourth  day,  "that  they 
have  determined  to  starve  us  out.  They  must  know  that, 
however  large  our  stock  of  provisions,  they  will  not  last 
forever,  and  indeed  they  will  have  learned  from  the  men 
who  bore  them  in  something  of  the  amount  of  stock  which 
we  have.  It  will  last,  you  say,  for  two  months,  which 
would  be  little  enough  were  it  not  that  wo  are  expecting 
the  ship  you  spoke  of.  If  that  comes  shortly  we  shall, 
with  the  additional  force  which  it  is  bringing,  and  the 
crew,  who  will  no  doubt  aid,  be  able  to  attack  them  in  the 
open.  But  were  it  not  for  that  our  position  would  be  a 
bad  one." 

"I  fear,"  Tom  said,  "that  even  when  the  ship  arrives 
evil  may  come  of  it." 

"How  is  that,  Tom?"  Ned  asked. 

"The  captain  will  know  nothing  of  what  is  passing  on 
shore,  and  if  he  lands  his  men  incautiously  upon  the  beach, 
and  advances  in  this  direction,  the  natives  will  fall  upon 


298  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

them,  and,  taking  them  by  surprise,  cut  them  to  pieces, 
and  our  last  hope  will  then  be  gone." 

"But  we  might  sally  out  and  effect  a  diversion,"  Reuben 
said. 

"Yes,"  Tom  replied;  "but,  unfortunately,  we  should 
not  know  of  the  arrival  of  the  ship  until  all  is  over." 

It  was  clear  to  all  that  Tom's  view  was  the  correct  one, 
and  that  the  position  was  much  more  serious  than  they 
had  anticipated.  For  some  time  the  governor  and  the 
four  young  men  looked  at  each  other  blankly.  The  de- 
struction of.  the  reinforcements,  which  would  be  followed 
no  doubt  by  the  capture  of  the  ship  by  the  war-canoes  and 
the  massacre  of  all  on  board,  would  indeed  be  fatal  to  their 
hopes.  After  what  they  had  seen  of  the  determination 
with  which  the  enemy  had  come  up  to  attack  the  gate, 
they  were  sure  that  they  would  fight  valiantly  outside. 
The  question  of  sallying  forth  was  again  discussed,  and  all 
were  of  opinion  that,  unequal  as  the  fight  would  be,  it 
were  better  to  attempt  to  defeat  the  enemy  than  to  remain 
quiet  and  allow  them  to  triumph  over  the  coming  rein- 
forcements. 

"Upon  what  day  do  you  think  tho  ship  will  arrive?" 
Ned  said,  after  considerable  thought. 

"I  cannot  say  to  a  day,"  the  governor  replied;  "but  she 
should  be  here  this  week.  There  is  no  exact  time,  because 
she  has  to  touch  at  several  other  islands.  She  leaves  Goa, 
always  on  a  certain  day;  but  she  takes  many  weeks  on  her: 
voyage  even  if  the  wind  be  favorable.  She  might  have 
been  here  a  week  since.  She  may  not  be  here  for  another 
fortnight.  But  unless  something  unforeseen  has  occurred 
she  should  be  here  by  that  time,  for  the  winds  are  steady 
in  these  regions  and  the  rate  of  sailing  regular." 

"The  one  chance  appears  to  me,"  Ned  said,  after  think- 
ing for  some  time,  "is  to  give  them  warning  of  what  is 
happening  here." 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG-.  299 

"But  how  is  that  to  be  done?''  asked  the  governor. 

"The  only  possible  plan/'  Ned  said,  "would  be  for  one 
of  us — and  I  should  be  ready  to  accept  the  duty,  knowing 
more  perhaps  of  the  ways  of  natives  than  the  others — to 
steal  forth  from  the  castle,  to  make  for  the  shore,  and  to 
lie  concealed  among  the  woods  until  the  vessel  is  in  sight. 
If  then  I  could  find  a  canoe,  to  seize  it  and  paddle  off  to 
the  ship;  if  not,  to  swim." 

The  other  lads  eagerly  volunteered  to  undertake  the 
work;  but  Ned  insisted  that  he  was  better  suited  to  it, 
not  only  from  his  knowledge  of  the  natives,  but  from  his 
superior  powers  in  swimming. 

"I  may  have,"  he  said,  "to  keep  myself  up  in  the  water 
for  a  long  time,  and  perhaps  to  swim  for  my  life  if  the 
natives  see  me.  It  is  even  desirable,  above  all  things,  that 
whosoever  undertakes  the  work  should  be  a  good  swimmer, 
and  although  you  have  long  ago  given  up  calling  me  'the 
otter,'  I  do  not  suppose  that  my  powers  in  the  water  have 
diminished." 

After  long  consultation,  it  was  agreed  that  this  plan 
offered  more  chances  of  success  than  any  other. 

"It  would  be  most  desirable,"  Gerald  said,  "that  we 
should  have  some  notice  here  of  the  ship  being  in  sight, 
in  order  that  we  might  sally  out  and  lend  a  hand  to  our 
friends  on  their  arrival.  I  will,  therefore,  if  you  will  allow 
me,  go  with  Ned,  and  when  the  ship  is  in  sight  I  will 
make  my  way  back  here  while  he  goes  oil  to  the  vessel." 

"But  it  will  be  impossible,"  Ned  said,  "to  make  your 
way  back  here  in  the  daytime.  I  can  steal  out  at  night; 
but  to  return  unnoticed  would  be  difficult  indeed." 

"But  when  you  see  the  ship,  Ned,  and  get  on  board, 
you  might  warn  them  to  delay  their  landing  until  the  next 
morning,  and  in  the  night  I  might  enter  here  with  the 
news,  and  we  might  sally  out  at  daybreak." 

This  plan  appeared  to  offer  more  advantages  than  any 


300  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

other,  and  it  was  agreed  at  last  that  the  two  lads  should, 
having  darkened  their  skins  and  put  on  Indian  dress,  steal 
out  that  night  from  the  castle  and  make  for  the  shore. 
Torn  and  Keuben  regretted  much  that  they  could  not  take 
part  in  the  enterprise;  but  the  governor  assured  them  that 
even  were  it  desirable  that  four  should  undertake  the  mis- 
sion, they  could  not  be  spared,  since  their  presence  would 
be  greatly  needed  in  the  castle  should  the  natives,  before 
the  arrival  of  the  ship,  make  an  attack  upon  it. 

That  night  Ned  and  Gerald,  according  to  the  arrange- 
ment, stole  out  from  the  castle.  Their  skins  had  been 
darkened  from  head  to  foot.  Bound  their  waists  they 
wore  short  petticoats,  reaching  to  their  knees,  of  native 
stuif.  They  had  sandals  on  their  feet,  for,  as  Ned  said,  if 
they  were  seen  close  by  the  natives  they  were  sure  to  be 
detected  in  any  case,  and  sandals  would  not  show  at  a  short 
distance,  while  they  would  enable  them  to  run  at  full  speed, 
which  they  certainly  could  not  do  barefooted.  They  took 
with  them  a  bag  of  provisions,  and  each  carried  a  sword. 
Eeuben  had  pressed  upon  them  to  take  pistols  also;  but 
Ned  said  that  if  cut  off  and  detected,  pistols  would  be  of 
no  use,  as  nothing  but  running  would  carry  them  through, 
while  should  a  pistol  be  fired  inadvertently  it  would  call 
such  a  number  of  assailants  upon  them  that  their  escape 
would  be  impossible.  A  thrust  with  a  sword  did  its  work 
silently,  and  just  as  well  as  a  pistol  bullet. 

The  natives  apparently  had  no  fear  of  any  attempt  at  a 
sally  from  the  castle,  for  there  was  nothing  like  a  \ratch 
set  round  it,  although  near  the  entrance  a  few  men  were 
stationed  to  give  warning  should  the  garrison  sally  out  to 
make  a  sudden  attack  upon  the  invaders.  The  natives 
were,  for  the  most  part,  scattered  about  in  small  parties, 
and  once  or  twice  the  lads  nearly  fell  in  with  these;  but 
by  dint  of  keeping  their  ears  and  eyes  open  they  steered 
through  the  dangers,  and  arrived  safely  upon  the  coast  at 
a  point  two  miles  to  the  west  of  the  landing-place. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  301 

Here  the  cliff  had  nearly  sloped  away,  the  height  being 
only  some  twenty  or  thirty  feet  above  the  water,  and  being 
practicable  in  many  cases  for  descent;  while  behind  lay  a 
large  wood  in  which  concealment  was  easy,  except  in  the 
case  of  an  organized  search,  of  which  they  had  no  fear 
whatever.  The  next  morning  they  made  along  the  shore 
as  far  as  the  point  where  the  native  war-canoes  had  been 
pulled  up,  in  hopes  of  finding  some  canoe  small  enough 
for  Ned  to  use  for  rowing  off  to  the  ship.  But  none  of 
them  rowed  less  than  twelve  or  fourteen  paddles,  and  so 
cumbrous  a  boat  as  this  would  be  overtaken  in  a  very  short 
time  should  it  be  seen  making  out  from  shore.  Ned  there- 
fore determined  to  swim  out,  especially  as  they  observed 
that  a  watch  was  kept  both  day  and  night  near  the  canoes. 
Five  days  passed  in  concealment.  The  cocoanuts  afforded 
them  both  food  and  drink.  Occasionally  they  heard  the 
boom  of  the  culverius  at  the  castle,  and  knew  that  the 
natives  were  showing  within  range;  but  as  these  shots 
were  only  heard  at  times,  they  were  assured  that  no  per- 
sistent attack  was  being  made. 

It  was  late  In  the  afternoon  of  the  fifth  day  that  the  lads 
observed  a  sail  in  the  distance.  It  was  indeed  so  far  away 
that,  as  the  light  was  fading,  they  could  not  say  with  abso- 
lute certainty  that  it  was  the  longed-for  ship.  They  both 
felt  convinced,  however,  that  they  had  seen  a  sail,  and 
watched  intently  as  night  darkened  for  some  sign  of  its 
passage.  It  was  four  hours  later  when  they  saw  passing 
along  at  a  distance  of  about  half  a  mile  a  light  on  the  ocean 
which  could  be  no  other  than  that  on  board  a  ship. 

"Now  is  the  time,"  Ned  said.  "I  will  keep  along  the 
shore  under  the  cliff  until  I  get  nearly  to  the  landing  and 
will  then  strike  out.  Do  you  make  for  the  castle,  and  tell 
them  that  the  ship  has  arrived,  and  that  we  will  attack  to- 
morrow, but  not  at  daybreak,  as  we  proposed,  but  at  noon." 

As  Ned  proceeded  on  his  way  along  the  shore  he  saw 


302  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

suddenly  blaze  up  far  ahead  at  the  landing-place  a  small 
bonfire. 

"Ah!"  he  mutttered  to  himself.  "The  natives  have 
seen  the  ship  too,  and  are  following  the  usual  custom  here 
of  making  a  fire  to  show  them  where  to  land.  I  trust  that 
they  will  not  fall  into  the  snare." 

When,  however,  he  had  reached  within  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  of  the  landing  he  saw  a  small  boat  come  suddenly 
within  its  range  of  light,  and  two  white  men  step  out  of 
it.  They  were  received  apparently  with  much  respect  by 
the  natives  assembled  there,  and  at  once  advanced  up  the 
road,  while  the  boat,  putting  off,  'disappeared  in  the 
darkness. 

"They  will  be  murdered,"  Ned  said  to  himself,  "before 
they  have  gone  a  hundred  yards.  The  natives  were  crafty 
enough  to  allow  them  to  land  without  hindrance  in  order 
that  no  suspicion  might  arise  among  those  on  board  ship." 

In  the  stillness  of  the  night  he  thought  that  he  heard  a 
distant  cry.  But  he  was  not  sure  that  his  ears  had  not 
deceived  him.  Par  out  he  could  see  a  faint  light,  and 
knowing  that  this  marked  the  place  where  the  ship  wasi 
moored  he  prepared  to  strike  out  for  it.  It  was  a  long, 
swim  and  further  than  he  had  expected,  for  in  the  dark- 
ness the  captain,  unable  to  see  the  land,  had  prudently 
anchored  at  a  considerable  distance  from  it.  Even,  how- 
ever, had  it  been  several  times  as  far  Ned  could  have  swam 
the  distance  without  difficulty;  but  the  whole  way  he 
could  not  forget  that  those  seas  swarmed  with  sharks,  and 
that  any  moment  he  might  have  to  encounter  one  of  those 
hideous  monsters.  He  had  left  his  sword  behind  him,  but 
carried  a  dagger,  and,  as  he  swam,  kept  his  eyes  in  all 
directions  in  order  that  lie  should  not  be  attacked  unpre- 
pared. The  ocean  was,  however,  fortunately,  at  that  time, 
deserted  by  these  beasts;  or  if  they  were  in  the  neighbor- 
hood, the  quiet,  steady,  noiseless  stroke  of  the  swimmer 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  303 

did  not  reach  their  ears.  As  he  neared  the  ship  his  heart 
rose,  and  he  sang  out  blithely,  "Ship  ahoy!" 

"Hullo!"  was  the  reply.  "Where  are  yon?  I  cannot 
see  your  boat." 

"I  am  swimming,"  Ned  answered.  "Throw  me  a  rope 
to  climb  up  the  side.  I  have  a  message  from  the  governor 
for  the  captain  of  the  ship." 

A  minute  later  Ned  stood  upon  the  deck  of  the  Portu- 
guese vessel,  the  soldiers  and  sailors  looking  on  wonder- 
ingly  at  him,  his  hody  being  white,  but  his  face  still  colored 
by  the  preparation. 

The  captain  himself  soon  appeared. 

"I  am  the  bearer  of  a  message  to  yon,  senor,  from  the 
governor,"  Ned  said.  "It  is  herein  this  hollow  reed.  He 
gives  you  but  few  particulars,  but  I  believe  tells  you  that 
you  may  place  every  confidence  in  me,  and  that  I  have 
detailed  instructions  from  him." 

The  captain  split  open  the  little  reed  which  Ned  handed 
to  him,  and  taking  out  a  paper  coiled  within  it,  opened  it, 
and  by  the  light  of  a  lantern  read:  "  We  are  in  a  very  crit- 
ical position,  and  it  will  need  at  once  courage  and  prudence 
to  come  out  of  it.  I  have  sent  my  friend  Don  Eduardo 
Hearne,  an  English  gentleman  of  repute,  to  warn  you 
against  the  danger  which  threatens,  and  to  advise  you  ou 
your  further  proceedings.  He  will  give  you  all  particu- 
lars." 

The  captain  invited  Ned  to  follow  him  to  his  cabin,  and 
calling  in  the  officers,  asked  for  an  explanation  of  this  sin- 
gular visit.  Ned  briefly  entered  into  an  account  of  the 
landing  of  the  natives  of  Ternate,  and  of  the  present  situ- 
ation, and  the  captain  rejoiced  at  the  escape  which  he  had 
had  from  falling  into  an  ambuscade;  this  he  would  assur- 
edly have  done  had  he  landed  the  troops  in  the  morning  as 
he  had  intended,  and  marched  them  inland,  fearing  no 
danger,  and  unprepared  for  attack. 


304  TTNDVR  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

Ned  explained  that  the  plan  was  that  the  troops  on  board 
the  ship  should  land  and  fight  their  way  into  the  interior, 
and  that  simultaneously  the  garrison  should  sally  out  and 
attack  the  natives  in  the  rear,  and  fight  their  way  toward 
each  other,  until  they  effected  a  junction.  They  could 
then  retire  into  the  castle,  where  their  future  plans  could 
be  arranged. 

"I  have,  however,"  Ned  said,  "ventured  to  modify  that 
plan,  and  have  sent  word  to  the  governor  that  we  shall  not 
attack  until  noon,  instead  of  landing  at  daybreak,  as  before 
arranged.  We  have  been  examining  the  position  where 
the  canoes  are  lying.  They  are  all  hauled  up  on  the  beach 
in  a  compact  body.  It  is  in  a  quiet  creek  whose  mouth 
you  would  sail  past  without  suspecting  its  existence.  I 
cannot  say,  of  course,  the  depth  of  water,  but  these  creeks 
are  generally  deep,  and  I  should  think  that  there  would 
be  enough  water  for  the  ship  to  float.  At  any  rate,  should 
you  not  like  to  venture  this,  your  pinnace  might  row  in, 
carrying  a  gun  in  her  bow,  and  might  play  havoc  among 
the  canoes.  Or  better  still,  if  you  could  send  two  boat- 
loads of  men  there  to-night  and  could  manage  to  land  and 
destroy  a  portion  of  the  canoes  and  launch  and  tow  out 
the  others,  I  think  that  we  should  have  a  fair  chance  of 
getting  peace.  The  natives  would  be  terrified  at  the  loss 
of  their  canoes,  and  would  be  likely  to  make  any  terms 
•which  would  ensure  their  return  to  their  island." 

The  captain  at  once  agreed  to  the  proposition.  The 
three  boats  of  the  ship  were  lowered,  and  the  sailors  and 
soldiers  took  their  places,  only  two  or  three  being  left  on 
board  ship,  as  there  was  no  fear  whatever  of  an  attack 
from  the  shore  during  the  night.  Ned  took  his  place  in 
the  leading  boat  of  the  captain,  and  acted  as  guide.  They 
coasted  along  at  a  short  distance  from  the  land,  until  Ned 
told  them  to  cease  rowing. 

"  We  must,"  he  said,  "be  close  to  the  spot  now;  but  it 


'UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  305 

is  needful  that  one  boat  should  go  forward  and  find  the 
exact  entrance  to  the  creek." 

Rowing  very  quietly,  the  boat  in  which  he  was  advanced 
until  within  a  few  yards  of  the  shore,  and  then  proceeded 
quietly  along  for  a  distance  of  a  few  hundred  yards,  when 
the  black  line  of  shore  disappeared,  and  a  streak  of  water 
was  seen  stretching  inland.  Quietly  they  rowed  back  to 
the  other  two  boats,  and  the  three  advancing,  entered  the 
creek  together.  Before  starting,  each  officer  had  been 
assigned  his  work.  The  crew  of  one  of  the  boats,  consist- 
ing principally  of  soldiers,  were  to  land,  to  advance  a  short 
distance  inland  and  to  repulse  any  attacks  that  the  natives 
might  make  upon  them.  Another  party  were  to  stave  in 
all  the  small  canoes,  and  this  done,  they  were  to  assist  the 
third  boat's  crew  in  launching  the  war-canoes  into  the 
water. 

As  they  approached  the  spot  they  were  hailed  in  the 
Indian  tongue  by  some  one  on  shore.  No  reply  was  given, 
and  the  hail  was  repeated  louder.  Then,  as  the  boats 
rowed  rapidly  up  to  the  place  where  the  canoes  were  hauled 
tip,  a  shrill  yell  of  alarm  was  given,  which  was  re-echoed 
in  several  directions  near,  and  could  be  heard  growing 
fainter  and  fainter  as  it  was  caught  up  by  men  inland. 

The  moment  the  boats  touched  the  shore  the  men  leaped 
out.  The  soldiers  advanced,  and  took  up  the  position 
assigned  to  them  to  defend  the  working  parties,  while  the 
rest  set  to  vigorously  to  carry  out  their  portion  of  the 
work.  The  war-canoes  were  heavy,  and  each  required  the 
efforts  of  the  whole  of  the  crew  to  launch  her  into  the 
•water.  It  was  therefore  a  work  of  considerable  time  to 
get  fifteen  of  them  afloat,  and  long  ere  this  had  been  done 
the  natives,  called  together  by  the  alarm,  were  flocking 
down  in  great  numbers.  They  were,  however,  in  entire 
ignorance  as  to  the  number  of  their  assailants,  and  the  fire 
which  the  soldiers  opened  with  their  arquebuses  checked 


306  UNDBR  DHAKE>8  FLAG. 

them  in  their  advance.  Feeling  sure  that  their  canoes 
were  being  destroyed,  they  filled  the  air  with  yells  of 
lamentation  and  rage,  discharging  such  volleys  of  arrows 
at  random  in  the  direction  of  the  Portuguese,  that  a  great 
number  of  these  were  wounded.  Indeed,  the  natives 
pressed  on  with  such  audacity  that  a  considerable  portion 
of  the  workers  had  to  go  forward  to  assist  the  soldiers  in 
holding  them  at  bay. 

At  last,  however,  the  whole  of  the  canoes  were  in  the 
water,  and  every  other  boat  disabled.  The  canoes  were 
tied  together,  five  abreast,  and  one  of  the  boats  towed 
these  out  of  the  harbor,  while  the  crews  of  the  others  re- 
mained keeping  the  natives  at  bay,  for  it  was  felt  that  if 
the  whole  were  to  embark  at  once  while  still  encumbered 
with  the  canoes  they  would  be  able  to  get  out  of  the  creek 
but  slowly,  and  would  for  the  most  part  be  destroyed  by 
the  arrows  of  the  natives. 

When  the  boat  had  towed  the  canoes  well  out  to  sea  it 
cast  them  adrift  and  returned  up  the  creek.  Then,  cov- 
ered by  the  muskets  of  the  soldiers,  the  others  took  their 
places  in  good  order  and  regularity  until  at  last  all  were 
in  the  boats.  The  soldiers  were  ordered  to  stand  up  and 
to  keep  up  a  steady  fire  upon  the  shore,  while  the  sailors 
laid  to  with  a  hearty  good-will.  The  natives  rushed  down 
to  the  shore  in  great  numbers,  and  although  many  of  them 
must  have  fallen  under  the  fire  of  the  soldiers,  they  yet 
waded  into  the  water  in  their  anxiety  to  seize  the  boats, ; 
and  poured  large  numbers  of  arrows  into  them.  When 
the  three  boats  gained  the  open  sea  there  were  few  indeed 
of  the  Portuguese  who  had  not  received  wounds  more  or 
less  severe  by  the  arrows,  and  several  had  been  killed  in 
addition  to  others  who  had  fallen  on  shore.  The  soldiers 
had  suffered  much  less  severely  than  the  sailors,  for  al- 
though they  had  been  more  hotly  engaged,  their  breast- 
pieces  and  steel  caps  had  protected  them,  and  they  were 
principally  wounded  in  the  limbs. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  $07 

The  canoes  were  now  picked  up,  and  with  these  in  tow 
the  party  returned  to  the  ship.  Here  their  wounds  were 
dressed  by  a  priest  who  accompanied  the  vessel  in  her 
voyages,  lauding  at  the  different  stations  and  ministering 
to  the  garrisons  of  the  islands.  He  had  some  knowledge 
of  the  healing  art,  and  poured  soothing  oils  into  the 
wounds  inflicted  by  the  arrows.  The  men  were  much 
alarmed  lest  these  arrows  should  be  poisoned,  but  Ned 
assured  them  that  none  of  those  who  had  been  wounded 
during  the  attacks  on  shore  had  died  from  the  effects,  and 
that,  although  it  was  the  custom  in  many  of  these  islands 
to  use  poisoned  weapons,  the  people  of  Ternate  at  least 
did  not  practice  this  barbarous  usage. 

Morning  was  just  breaking  as  the  party  gained  the  ship, 
and  the  captain  was  glad  that  Ned  had  postponed  the 
landing  until  midday,  as  it  gave  the  tired  men  time  to  rest 
and  prepare  themselves  for  fresh  labors.  As  soon  as  the 
shore  could  be  seen  it  was  evident  that  the  destruction  and 
carrying  off  of  the  canoes  had  created  an  immense  impres- 
sion. The  cliff  was  lined  with  natives,  whose  gesticula- 
tions as  they  saw  their  canoes  fastened  to  the  stern  of  the 
ship  were  wild  and  vehement. 

A  little  before  noon  the  boats  were  hauled  up  alongside, 
the  soldiers  took  their  places  in  them  with  loaded  arque- 
buses, and  as  many  sailors  as  could  be  spared  also  entered 
to  assist  in  their  advance.  The  ship  carried  several  pieces 
of  artillery,  and  these  were  loaded  so  as  to  open  fire  before 
the  landing  was  effected,  in  order  to  clear  the  shore  of  the 
enemy.  This  was  soon  accomplished,  and  the  natives  who 
had  assembled  on  the  beach  were  seen  streaming  up  the 
road  through  the  cliff.  This  was  the  most  dangerous  part 
that  the  advancing  party  would  have  to  traverse,  as  they 
would  be  exposed  to  a  heavy  fire  from  those  standing  above 
them  on  both  flanks.  They  would  have  suffered  indeed 
very  severely  had  not  the  captain  turned  his  guns  upon 


308  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAtt. 

the  masses  gathered  on  the  high  ground,  and,  by  one  or 
two  lucky  shots  plumped  into  the  middle  of  them,  created 
such  an  effect  that  the  fire  of  arrows  kept  up  upon  the 
troops  as  they  advanced  was  wild  and  confused.  Several 
of  the  sailors  were  severely  wounded,  but  the  soldiers,  well 
sheltered  by  their  mail,  pressed  on  and  gained  the  level 
ground,  their  blood  being  fired  as  they  went,  by  the  spec- 
tacle of  the  dead  bodies  of  their  first  officer  and  supercargo, 
who  had  landed  the  night  before. 

Here  the  natives  were  assembled  in  great  force,  and  as 
they  were  now  out  of  sight  of  those  on  board  ship  the  guns 
could  no  longer  render  assistance  to  the  little  party.  These 
showed  a  good  front  as  the  masses  of  the  enemy  approached 
them,  and  charged  boldly  at  them.  The  natives,  however, 
maddened  by  the  loss  of  their  canoes,  and  feeling  that 
their  only  hope  was  in  annihilating  their  enemies,  came  on 
•with  such  force,  wielding  heavy  clubs,  that  the  array  of 
the  Portuguese  was  broken,  and  in  a  short  time  each  was 
fighting  desperately  for  himself.  Several  had  been  stricken 
down,  and  although  large  numbers  of  the  natives  had  been 
killed  it  was  plain  that  the  victory  would  in  a  few  minutes 
be  decided,  when  suddenly  a  great  shout  was  heard,  and  a 
volley  of  musketry  was  poured  into  the  rear  of  the  natives. 
The  hard-pressed  whites  gave  a  cheer,  for  they  knew  that 
assistance  had  arrived  from  the  castle.  The  natives,  whose 
attention  had  been  directed  to  the  attack  in  front,  were 
taken  completely  by  surprise,  and  as  both  the  parties  of 
whites  simultaneously  charged,  large  numbers  were  unable 
to  escape  and  were  cut  down,  while  the  rest  fled  precipi- 
tately from  the  spot. 

Very  hearty  were  the  congratulations  of  the  Portuguese 
as  the  forces  came  together.  Gerald  had  safely  reached 
the  castle  after  some  narrow  escapes,  he,  having  fallen 
among  some  sleeping  natives,  had  been  attacked  and  forced 
to  trust  to  his  speed. 


DRAKE  '8  FLA  a.  300 

After  a  short  consultation  it  was  decided  to  press  the 
enemy,  and  to  leave  them  no  time  to  recover  from  the  de- 
moralization caused  by  the  loss  of  their  boats  and  the 
junction  of  the  two  parties  of  white  jiien.  The  forces 
were,  therefore,  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  and  these 
started  in  different  directions.  Clump  after  clump  of  trees 
was  searched,  and  the  enemy  driven  from  them.  At  first 
some  resistance  was  made;  but  gradually  the  natives  be- 
came completely  panic-stricken  and  fled  without  striking 
a  blow. 

Until  nightfall  the  two  parties  continued  to  hunt  and 
shoot  down  a  large  number  of  the  natives.  Then  they  re- 
turned to  the  castle.  They  now  had  a  consultation  as  to 
the  terms  which  they  should  grant  the  natives,  for  they 
had  no  doubt  that  victory  had  declared  itself  finally  in 
their  favor.  Some  were  for  continuing  the  strife  until  the 
enemy  were  exterminated;  but  the  governor  of  the  island 
was  opposed  to  this. 

"In  the  first  place,"  he  said,  "mixed  up  with  the  Ter- 
nate  people  are  all  the  natives  of  this  island,  and  to  exter- 
minate them  would  be  to  leave  us  without  labor  and  to 
ruin  the  island.  In  the  next  place,  the  havoc  which  has 
been  already  wrought  in  our  plantations  is  such  that  it 
will  take  years  to  repair,  and  the  longer  this  fighting  goes 
on  the  more  complete  will  be  the  destruction.  I  think, 
then,  that  we  should  grant  them  the  easiest  terms  possible. 
They  will  be  only  too  glad  to  escape  and  to  get  back  to 
their  own  land,  and  will  be  long  before  they  invade  us 
again." 

"I  think,"  the  officer  who  had  arrived  with  the  rein- 
forcements of  soldiers  said,  "it  would  be  well,  seflor,  if 
you  were  to  consult  with  the  priest  who  is  on  board.  He 
is  a  man  who  has  the  ear  of  the  council  at  Goa.  He  has 
but  recently  arrived,  and  knows  but  little  of  the  natives; 
but  he  is  full  of  zeal,  and  it  would  be  well,  I  think,  were 


UNDER  SHAKE'S  FLAG. 


we  to  make  an  arrangement  of  which  he  would  perfectly 
approve,  so  that  his  report  when  he  reached  Goa  should 
be  altogether  favorable." 

The  governor  agreed  to  this  proposal,  and  decided  to 
send  a  party  down  to  the  shore  in  the  morning  to  bring 
the  priest  up  to  the  castle. 

Early  in  the  morning  a  large  crowd  of  natives  were  seen 
at  a  short  distance.  In  their  hands  they  held  boughs  of 
trees,  and  waved  them  to  express  their  desire  to  enter  into 
negotiations.  The  governor,  however,  fired  two  or  three 
shots  over  their  heads  as  a  signal  to  them  to  keep  farther 
away,  as  their  advances  would  not  be  received.  Then, 
while  a  party  went  down  to  the  shore  to  fetch  the  priest, 
he  again  sallied  out  and  drove  the  natives  before  him. 

When  the  holy  father  arrived  another  council  was  held, 
and  he  was  informed  that  the  people  were  ready  to  treat, 
and  asked  what  in  his  opinion  should  be  the  terms  imposed 
upon  them.  He  heard  the  arguments  of  the  governor  in 
favor  of  allowing  them  to  return  to  their  island;  but  he 
said,  "In  my  opinion  it  is  essential  above  all  things  that 
they  should  be  forced  to  accept  Christianity." 

At  this  the  Englishmen,  and  indeed  the  two  Portuguese 
officers,  could  with  difficulty  repress  a  smile;  but  the  gov- 
ernor at  once  saw  that  a  wholesale  conversion  of  this  sort 
would  do  him  much  good  with  the  authorities  at  Goa,  and 
he  therefore  willingly  fell  into  the  priest's  views.  The 
next  morning  the  natives  again  appeared  with  their  green 
boughs,  and  the  governor,  with  the  officer,  the  priest,  and 
a  body  of  ten  soldiers,  went  out  to  meet  them.  The  King 
of  Ternate  advanced  and  bowed  himself  submissively  to 
the  ground  and  expressed  his  submission,  and  craved  for 
pardon  and  for  permission  to  return  with  his  people  to 
Ternate,  promising  solemnly  that  never  again  would  they 
meddle  with  the  Portuguese  settlement. 
The  governor,  who  spoke  the  language  fluently,  having 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  311 

been  there  for  some  years,  uttered  an  harangue  reproaching 
him  with  his  folly  and  wickedness  in  wantonly  declaring 
war  against  the  Portuguese.  He  pointed  to  the  destroyed 
plantations,  and  asked  if  any  punishment  could  be  too 
great  for  the  ruin  caused.  The  king  and  his  councillors 
offered  to  pay  large  tributes  annually  of  spice  and  other 
products  until  the  ruined  plantations  were  again  in  bearing. 

"This  will  not  repay  us  for  the  losses  we  have  suffered, 
and  for  the  evil  spirit  which  you  have  introduced  into  this 
island.  We  have,  however,"  the  governor  said,  "only  your 
interests  at  heart,  and  therefore  we  have  decided  to  pardon 
you,  and  to  allow  you  to  return  to  your  island,  upon  the 
condition  that  you  and  all  your  people  embrace  Christian- 
ity, and  pay  such  a  tribute  as  we  may  impose." 

The  king  had  no  understanding  of  the  meaning  of  what 
was  proposed  to  him,  and  the  governor  said  that  he  and 
his  people  were,  in  the  morning,  to  assemble  before  the 
castle,  and  that  the  holy  father,  who  had  been  sent  on 
purpose  to  turn  them  from  the  wickedness  of  their  ways, 
would  then  explain  the  doctrines  of  Christianity  to  them; 
that  if  they  accepted  and  believed  what  he  said,  pardon 
would  be  theirs;  if  not,  they  would  be  hunted  down  until 
all  were  destroyed. 

Next  morning  the  assembly  took  place  in  front  of  the 
castle  gate.  The  King  of  Ternate,  surrounded  by  all  his 
principal  councillors  and  warriors,  took  his  place,  while 
the  fighting  men  stood  around  him.  The  priest  mounted 
on  the  platform  of  the  wall,  the  governor  standing  beside 
him  to  interpret.  The  Englishmen,  much  amused  at  the 
ceremony,  stood  at  a  short  distance  off.  They  did  not 
wish  to  be  recognized  by  any  of  the  people  of  Ternate,  as 
it  was  possible  that  some  English  vessels  might  again  come 
into  these  seas,  and  they  did  not  desire  that  the  pleasant 
remembrance  of  the  visit  of  the  Golden  Hind  should  be 
obliterated  by  the  sight  of  some  of  its  crew  in  alliance 
with  the  Portuguese. 


312  UNDER  DRAKK'S  FLAG. 

The  priest  began  an  elaborate  explanation  of  the  Chris- 
tian religion,  which  he  continued  for  the  space  of  two 
hours,  to  the  surprise  and  astonishment  of  the  natives, 
who  could  not,  of  course,  comprehend  a  single  word  that 
he  said.  Then  he  paused,  and  turning  to -the  governor 
said,  "Will  you  translate  this  for  the  benefit  of  these  be- 
nighted heathens?" 

"I  fear,"  said  the  governor,  "that  it  will  be  impossible 
for  me  to  do  full  justice  to  your  eloquent  words,  and, 
indeed,  that  these  poor  wretches  would  scarcely  take  in  so 
much  learning  and  wisdom  all  at  once;  but  in  a  few  words 
I  will  give  them  the  sense  of  what  you  have  been  telling 
them." 

Then,  lifting  np  his  voice,  he  addressed  the  king. 

"  There  is  only  one  God.  These  idols  of  yours  are  help- 
less and  useless.  We  have  brought  ashore  those  from  your 
war-canoes,  which  my  men  will  now  proceed  to  burn,  and 
you  will  see  that  your  gods  will  be  unable  to  help  them- 
selves. Indeed,  they  are  not  gods,  and  have  no  power. 
God  is  good  and  hates  wickedness.  All  men  are  wicked. 
Therefore  He  would  hate  all  men;  but  He  has  sent  His 
Son  down,  and  for  His  sake  pardons  all  who  believe  in 
Him.  Now,  if  you  believe  in  Him  as  I  tell  you,  you  will 
be  pardoned  both  by  us  and  by  God.  If  you  do  not  be- 
lieve, we  shall  kill  you  all  and  you  will  be  punished  et6r- 
nally.  Now  you  have  the  choice  what  to  do." 

The  matter  thus  pithily  put  did  not  require  much  con- 
sideration. After  a  short  consultation  between  the  chiefs, 
the  king  demanded  what  ceremonies  would  have  to  be 
gone  through  to  become  Christians,  and  was  informed  by 
the  governor  that  the  only  ceremony  would  be  that  he 
would  have  to  declare  himself  a  Christian;  that  the  priest 
would  make  upon  him  the  sign  of  a  cross  with  his  finger, 
and  would  sprinkle  him  with  water;  and  that,  when  this 
was  done,  he  would  be  a  Christian. 


UNDER  DEAKK'S  FLAG.  313 

Much  relieved  to  find  that  the  entry  into  this  new  relig- 
ion was  so  easy,  the  king  and  his  people  at  once  agreed  to 
accept  Christianity.  The  governor  informed  them  that 
the  priest  thought  that  they  were  hardly  yet  prepared,. but , 
that  on  the  morrow  the  ceremony  should  take  place  after 
a  further  explanation.  The  next  day  a  great  altar  was 
erected  outside  the  walls  of  the  castle,  gay  with  banners 
and  waxlights.  Before  this  the  King  of  Ternate  and  his 
people  assembled,  the  gunners  on  the  walls  standing  with 
lighted  matches  by  their  cannon  in  case  of  trouble.  The 
priest  then  made  another  long  oration,  which  was  again 
briefly  and  emphatically  translated  by  the  governor.  The 
king  and  all  his  people  then  knelt,  and  according  to  the 
instruction  of  the  priest  made  the  sign  of  the  cross.  The 
priest  then  went  along  between  the  lines  of  the  people, 
sprinkling  them  with  holy  water,  and  this  being  done  the 
ceremony  was  declared  complete,  and  the  King  of  Ternate 
and  his  people  were  received  into  the  bosom  of  the  Church. 
Then,  escorted  by  the  soldiers,  they  were  taken  down  to 
the  seashore.  The  two  white  men  were  permitted  to 
depart  with  them.  The  governor  had  at  first  insisted  that 
these  should  be  put  to  death.  They  pleaded,  however, 
that  they  had  acted  under  force,  and  Ned  interceding  for 
them  their  lives  were  granted  on  the  condition  that  they 
should,  on  reaching  Ternate,  at  once  embark  for  some 
other  island,  and  never  return  to  Ternate.  The  canoes 
were  brought  alongside,  and  there  being  now  no  fear  of 
any  attempt  at  resistance,  as  the  entire  body  of  invaders 
had  given  up  their  arms,  they  were  allowed  to  enter 
the  canoes  and  to  paddle  away  to  their  own  island,  with 
numbers  greatly  diminished  from  those  which  had  landed 
to  the  attack  of  Tidore  a  week  before. 

The  governor  and  the  priest  were  alike  delighted  at  the 
termination  of  the  war,  the  former  because  he  was  really 
anxious  for  the  good  of  the  colony  which  had  been  intrusted 


314  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

to  him,  and  believed  that  it  would  now  progress  peaceably 
and  without  disturbance.  He  believed,  too,  that  his  suc- 
cessful resistance  to  so  large  a  body  of  enemies  would  insure 
him  the  approval  of  the  viceroy  at  Goa,  and  that  the  re- 
port of  the  priest  would  also  obtain  for  him  the  valuable 
protection  and  patronage  of  the  ecclesiastics,  whose  power 
in  the  eastern  seas  was  even  greater  than  it  was  at  home. 

T  id  ore  was  the  furthest  of  the  Portuguese  settlements, 
and  the  ship,  having  now  made  her  round,  was  to  return 
direct  to  Goa.  The  priest  hesitated  whether  to  remain  or 
to  return  in  her.  He  had  made  it  one  of  the  conditions 
of  peace  with  Teruate  that  a  missionary  should  be  received 
there,  a  place  of  worship  erected,  and  that  he  should  .be 
allowed  to  open  schools  and  to  teach  the  tenets  of  his  re- 
ligion to  all,  and  he  hesitated  whether  he  would  himself 
at  once  take  up  that  post,  or  whether  he  would  report  the 
matter  at  Goa,  where  perhaps  it  might  be  decided  to  send 
a  priest  who  had  acquired  something  of  the  language  of 
the  Southern  Seas.  He  finally  decided  upon  the  latter 
course. 

The  governor  furnished  the  lads  with  letters  recom- 
mending them  most  warmly  to  the  viceroy,  and  stating 
the  great  services  which  they  had  rendered  to  him  in  the 
defense  of  the  island,  saying,  indeed,  that  had  it  not  been 
for  their  prudence  and  valor  it  was  probable  that  the  na- 
tives would  have  succeeded  in  destroying  the  small  body 
of  Portuguese  and  in  massacring  the  reinforcements  landed 
from  the  vessel.  The  priest  also,  while  viewing  the  young 
men  with  the  natural  horror  of  a  Portuguese  ecclesiastic  for 
heretics,  was  yet  impressed  with  the  services  that  they  had 
rendered,  and  considered  their  own  shortcomings  to  be  in 
a  great  measure  atoned  for  by  the  wholesale  conversion 
•which  had  to  some  extent  been  effected  by  their  means. 

Bidding  a  hearty  adieu  to  the  governor,  they  took  their 
places  on  board  ship  and  sailed  for  Goa.  It  was  a  six 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG  315 

weeks'  voyage;  but  the  vessel  was  well  furnished  with  pro- 
visions, and  after  their  hardships  the  boys  greatly  enjoyed 
the  rest  arid  tranquillity  on  board.  In  due  time  they  found 
themselves  lying  ofi  the  mouth  of  the  river  up  which,  at  a 
short  distance  from  its  mouth,  the  capital  of  Portuguese 
India  was  situated. 


3]  6  UNDER  DRAKE' 8  FLAG. 


CHAPTER   XXII. 

HOME. 

THE  captain,  who  was  accompanied  by  the  priest,  rowed 
up  the  river  to  report  the  arrival  of  the  ship  and  the  events 
of  his  voyage  to  the  authorities,  and  to  place  in  their  hands 
the  letter  of  the  governor  of  Tidore.  Twenty-four  hours 
later  the  captain  returned  with  orders  for  the  ship  to  sail 
up  the  river,  and  that  on  their  arrival  the  young  English- 
men were  to  be  landed  and  conducted  to  the  presence  of 
the  viceroy  himself. 

The  young  adventurers,  much  as  they  had  traveled, 
were  greatly  struck  with  the  appearance  of  Goa.  It  was, 
indeed,  a  city  of  palaces,  most  solidly  built  of  stone,  and 
possessing  an  amount  of  magnificence  and  luxury  which 
surpassed  anything  they  had  ever  seen.  In  the  streets  a 
few  Portuguese,  magnificently  dressed  and  escorted  by 
guards,  moved  among  a  throng  of  gayly  attired  natives, 
whose  slight  figures,  upright  carriage,  and  intelligent  faces 
struck  the  boys  as  most  pleasing  after  their  experience  of 
the  islanders  of  the  South  Seas.  The  immense  variety  of 
turbans  and  headgear  greatly  astonished  them,  as  well  as 
the  magnificence  of  the  dresses  of  some  of  those  who  ap- 
peared to  be  men  of  importance  and  who  were  attended  by 
a  retinue  of  armed  followers. 

The  young  men  were  escorted  by  two  officers  of  the  vice- 
roy, who  had  come  on  board  ship  as  soon  as  she  dropped 
anchor,  to  conduct  them  to  his  presence.  At  the  sight  of 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  317 

these  officials  the  natives  hastily  cleared  the  way,  and  made 
every  demonstration  of  respect  as  the  party  passed  through, 
them.  The  vice-regal  palace  was  a  magnificent  building, 
surpassing  any  edifice  the  boys  had  ever  seen,  and  they 
were  still  more  struck  by  the  luxury  of  the  interior.  They 
were  led  through  several  vestibules,  until  at  last  they  ar- 
rived in  a  large  chamber.  At  a  table  here  the  viceroy  was 
seated,  while  around  him  were  a  large  number  of  the  coun- 
cillors and  leading  men  of  the  place.  The  viceroy  rose  as 
the  young  men  advanced  and  bowed  profoundly. 

"You  are,  I  hear,  Englishmen,  and  I  am  told,  but  I 
can  scarcely  believe  it,  that  you  belong  to  the  ship  of  the 
Captain  Drake  whose  exploits  in  the  West  Indies  against 
the  Spaniards  have  made  him  so  famous.  But  how,  be- 
longing to  him,  you  came  to  be  cast  on  an  island  in  the 
South  Seas  is  more  than  we  are  able  to  understand." 

No  news  of  the  expedition  had  reached  the  Portuguese, 
and  the  surprise  of  the  viceroy  was  only  natural. 

"The  Golden  Hind,  sir,  the  vessel  in  which  we  were 
gentlemen  adventurers,  rounded  Cape  Horn,  sailed  up  the 
American  coast,  and  then,  keeping  west  crossed  through 
the  islands,  and  has,  we  trust,  long  since  rounded  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope  and  arrived  in  Engand,  having  circumnavi- 
gated the  globe." 

An  expression  of  surprise  broke  from  the  assembled 
Portuguese.  But  a  frown  passed  over  the  face  of  the 
viceroy. 

"What  was  the  object  of  your  captain  in  visiting  these 
seas?"  he  asked.  "They  are  the  property  of  Portugal, 
and  without  the  permission  of  his  majesty  no  ship  of  any 
other  nation  may  pass  through  our  waters." 

"I  can  assure  you,"  Ned  said,  "that  there  was  no  object 
either  of  conquest  or  of  trade  on  the  part  of  our  admiral 
in  visiting  these  seas.  When  he  rounded  the  cape  his 
object  was  to  discover,  if  possible,  a  passage  round  the 


318  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

northern  coast  of  America  back  to  England.  But  when 
we  went  north  we  found  the  cold  was  great,  and  that  the 
land  stretched  away  so  that  it  would  join  with  Asia  to  the 
north.  Being  convinced,  then,  that  no  passage  could  be 
obtained  in  that  way,  he  sailed  for  England  round  the 
Cape  of  Good  Hope,  fearing  the  dangers  of  a  passage  round 
the  Horn,  by  which  he  lost  on  our  passage  out  two  of  his 
ships,  and  was  well-nigh  wrecked  himself.  He  only  abode 
in  the  islands  of  the  South  Seas  for  a  few  days  to  get  pro- 
visions and  water,  and  then  sailed  straight  for  home." 

Assured  by  this  explanation  the  viceroy  now  begged  the 
boys  to  sit  down,  and  he  and  his  council  listened  with 
admiration  and  astonishment  to  the  records  of  the  expedi- 
tion, and  especially  to  the  passage  across  America  of  two 
of  the  young  men  before  him.  The  depredations  which 
had  been  committed  upon  the  Spaniards  excited  no  indig- 
nation among  the  Portuguese,  for  these  nations  were  rivals, 
and  although  they  did  not  put  their  contentions  to  the 
test  of  the  sword,  each  was  glad  enough  to  hear  of  any 
misfortune  befalling  the  other. 

The  viceroy  now  assured  the  young  men  that  he  was 
proud  to  welcome  the  members  of  so  gallant  a  crew  as  that 
of  the  great  English  navigator.  "England  and  Portugal," 
he  said,  "did  not  clash,  and  were  always  natural  allies. 
He  trusted  they  would  always  remain  so,  and  in  the  mean- 
time he  should  be  glad  to  treat  the  boys  with  all  honor, 
and  to  forward  them  home  by  the  first  ship  which  might 
be  sailing."  Apartments  were  now  assigned  to  them  in 
the  palace,  and  here  they  were  delighted  to  find  a  stock  of 
clothes  suited  for  them. 

For  the  next  fortnight  they  passed  a  pleasant  time  at 
Goa.  They  were  the  objects  of  much  attention  on  the 
part  of  the  Portuguese,  and  all  vied  in  the  attempt  to 
make  their  stay  pleasant  to  them.  They  found  that  the 
town  of  Goa  occupied  but  a  small  space,  and  that  it  was 


VNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  319 

strongly  fortified,  and  the  Portuguese  made  no  attempt  to 
conceal  their  very  high  estimate  of  the  fighting  power  of 
the  natives.  One  young  officer,  who  was  specially  told  off 
to  accompany  the  lads,  and  who  spoke  Spanish  fluently, 
Was  particularly  frank  in  his  description  of  the  state  of 
affairs. 

"All  these  gayly  dressed  natives  that  one  sees  in  the 
streets  are,  I  suppose,  Christians?"  Ned  asked. 

"No,  indeed,"  the  other  said,  surprised.  "What  should 
make  you  think  so?" 

Ned  replied  that  in  America  he  had  found  that  the 
Spaniards  insisted  on  all  the  natives  at  once  embracing 
Christianity  on  pain  of  death. 

"The  Spaniards,"  the  young  Portuguese  said,  "are  lords 
and  masters  there.  The  natives  are  weak  and  timid,  and 
ahle  to  offer  no  resistance  whatever.  That  is  very  far 
from  being  our  position  here.  We  are,  I  can  assure  yon, 
only  here  on  sufferance.  You  can  have  no  idea  of  the 
power  of  some  of  these  native  sovereigns  of  India.  The 
Mahrattas  who  live  beyond  the  mountains  you  see  on  the 
horizon  could  pour  down  such  hosts  of  armed  men,  that  if 
they  combined  against  us  no  resistance  that  we  could  offer 
would  be  likely  to  be  successful.  And  yet  they  are  but 
one  among  a  score  of  warlike  peoples.  So  long  as  we  do 
not  attempt  to  proselytize,  and  are  content  to  appear  as 
merchants  and  traders,  no  general  feeling  exists  against 
our  residence  here.  But  1  can  assure  you  that  if  it  became 
known  in  India  that  we  were  forcing  the  natives  to  accept 
Christianity,  the  footing  which  we  have  obtained  here 
would  be  speedily  lost.  These  people  have  regular  armies. 
They  may  not  indeed  be  trained  as  are  ours  at  home;  but, 
individually,  they  are  very  brave.  They  have  artillery  of 
heavy  caliber.  In  the  South  Seas,  as  you  know,  we  en- 
deavor to  convert  the  heathen.  The  people  there  are 
degraded  savages  by  the  side  of  these  Indians.  But  we  do 


320  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

not  adopt  the  strong  methods  which  the  Spaniards  have 
done.  We  have  in  Portugal  a  good  deal  of  your  English 
freedom  of  opinion,  and  the  Inquisition  has  never  gained 
any  firm  footing  among  us." 

Upon  one  occasion  the  boys  had  the  satisfaction  of  seeing 
a  grand  Indian  durbar,  for  the  chief,  on  the  corner  of 
whose  territory  the  Portuguese  had  built  their  town  with 
his  permission,  came  in  to  see  the  viceroy.  The  boys  were 
surprised  at  the  magnificence  of  his  cavalcade,  in  which 
elephants,  camels,  and  other  animals  took  part,  and  in 
•which  the  trappings  and  appointments  were  gorgeous  in- 
deed; while  the  dresses  of  the  chiefs  absolutely  shone  with 
jewels.  The  attendants,  however,  made  but  a  poor  show 
according  to  European  ideas. 

There  was  at  this  time  in  European  armies  no  attempt 
at  regular  uniform,  but  there  was  a  certain  resemblance 
between  the  attire  and  arms  of  the  men  who  fought  side 
by  side.  When  upon  the  march  regularity  and  order  were 
maintained,  and  the  men  kept  together  in  step.  Nothing 
of  this  kind  was  apparent  among  the  troops  who  accom- 
panied the  Indian  chief.  They  marched  along  by  the  side 
of  the  elephants,  and  in  groups  ahead  and  in  rear  of  them, 
in  a  confused  disorder;  and  it  seemed  to  the  lads  that  a 
mere  handful  of  European  troops  would  rout  such  a  rabble 
as  this.  They  said  as  much  to  their  Portuguese  friend ; 
but  he  told  them  that  the  people  on  the  coast  could  scarcely 
be  considered  as  a  fair  sample  of  those  who  dwelt  in  the 
hill  country  behind.  "The  climate  here,'"'  he  said,  "is 
much  more  relaxing.  Vegetation  is  extremely  abundant, 
and  all  the  necessities  of  life  can  be  obtained  in  the  easiest 
manner.  Consequently  the  people  here  are  enervated,  and 
cannot  be  compared  to  the  horsemen  of  the  plains.  The 
seat  of  the  Indian  power  lies  at  Agra  and  Delhi — some- 
times one  and  sometimes  the  other.  The  emperors  there 
can  take  the  field  with  two  hundred  thousand  men  if  nee- 


DRAKE'S  FLAG.  321 

essary,  and  even  these,  with  all  their  power,  have  difficulty 
in  maintaining  their  authority  throughout  India.  You 
may  judge,  therefore,  of  the  power  of  the  various  territorial 
chiefs." 

A  fortnight  later,  to  their  great  delight,  the  lads  heard 
that  a  vessel  would  start  in  three  days  for  Lisbon.  She 
was  taking  home  a  large  cargo  of  spice  and  articles  of 
Indian  manufacture,  and  a  number  of  invalided  soldiers. 
She  was  said  to  be  a  slow  sailer,  but  as  no  other  was  likely 
to  start  for  some  months  the  lads  did  not  hesitate  to  avail 
themselves  of  the  offer  of  the  viceroy.  At  parting  he  pre- 
sented them  each  with  a  sword  set  with  diamonds,  and  also 
purses  of  money  in  token  of  his  appreciation  of  the  valor 
displayed  by  them  in  the  defense  of  Tidore. 

"It  is,"  the  viceroy  said,  "an  honor  to  us  to  honor  the 
members  of  the  greatest  marine  expedition  which  has  yet 
been  made.  We  Portuguese  may  boast  that  we  have  been 
among  the  foremost  in  maritime  discovery,  and  we  can 
therefore  the  more  admire  the  feats  of  your  valiant  Cap- 
tain Drake." 

The  ship,  the  Maria  Pia,  was  a  large  one,  far  greater, 
indeed,  than  the  Golden  Hind,  and  the  boys  felt  that  in  a 
floating  castle  of  this' description  their  voyage  ought  to  be 
a  safe  and  pleasant  one.  The  captain  had  received  in- 
structions to  do  all  in  his  power  to  make  the  voyage 
agreeable  to  them.  A  handsome  cabin  had  been  placed 
at  their  disposal,  and  their  position  on  board  was  altogether 
an  honorable  one. 

The  result  justified  their  expectations.  The  voyage, 
although  long,  passed  without  incident.  The  Maria  Pia 
experienced  fine  weather  round  the  Cape,  and,  catching 
the  trade  winds,  made  her  course  northward,  and  arrived 
oft*  the  mouth  of  the  Tagus  without  accident  or  adventure 
of  any  kind. 

failing  up  the  river,  she  fired  a  salute  with  her  guns, 


322  TTNDm  SHAKE'S  FLAG. 

which  was  answered  by  those  of  the  fort  at  the  entrance. 
The  news  had  been  signaled  to  the  capital  of  the  arrival 
of  a  ship  from  the  Indies,  and  officials  boarded  her  as  soon 
as  siie  cast  anchor.  The  captain  at  once  went  on  shore 
and  reported  to  the  minister  of  the  Indies  the  news  which 
he  had  brought  from  Goa,  and  gave  an  account  of  his 
voyage.  He  delivered  a  letter  from  the  viceroy,  stating 
that  he  had  given  a  passage  to  four  English  gentlemen, 
who  had  formed  part  of  Captain  Drake's  equipage,  and 
who  had  rendered  very  great  services  in  defeating  an  attack 
upon  the  island  of  Tidore  by  the  people  of  Ternate,  of 
which  matters,  the  viceroy  added,  the  gentlemen  would 
themselves  give  a  full  account.  The  minister  at  once  sent 
on  board  an  official  to  request  the  young  men  to  land,  and 
upon  their  so  doing  he  received  them  with  great  courtesy, 
and  gave  a  grand  banquet  the  next  day,  at  which  the 
British  minister  was  present. 

The  lads  wore  delighted  upon  landing  to  receive  the 
news  that  the  Golden  Hind  had  arrived  safely  in  England 
four  months  before,  and  that  all  Europe  was  ringing  with 
the  great  feat  which  she  had  accomplished.  The  lads; 
found  that  they  were  received  by  the  distinguished  com-, 
pany  which  met  them  at  the  table  of  the  minister  with 
much  honor  and  respect,  and  this  was  heightened  upon 
their  giving  a  detailed  account  of  the  adventures  which 
had  befallen  them  since  leaving  England.  The  British 
minister  offered  them  a  passage  to  England  in  one  of  the 
queen's  ships;  and  having  provided  them  amply  with 
money,  they  were  enabled  to  make  a  good  appearance,  and 
to  enter  with  zest  into  the  round  of  festivities  of  which 
they  were  made  the  objects  during  their  stay.  They  were 
presented  to  the  king,  who  received  them  most  graciously, 
and  presented  each  with  a  sword  of  honor. 

Three  weeks  later  they  sailed  up  the  Thames,  and  upon 
landing  in  London  at  once  inquired  for  the  residence  of 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  323 

Captain  Drake.  This  they  had  no  difficulty  in  discover- 
ing, as  he  was  the  hero  of  the  hour.  It  was  with  great 
pleasure  that  they  were  received  by  the  commander.  He 
expressed  but  little  surprise  at  seeing  them,  for,  as  he  told 
them,  he  made  sure  that  sooner  or  later  they  would  arrive, 
and  had  given  orders  that  upon  the  division  of  the  great 
sums  which  had  been  gained  by  the  Golden  Hind  on  her 
voyage  their  shares  should  be  scrupulously  set  aside. 

"You  had  twice  before,"  he  said  to  Ned,  "appeared 
after  we  had  all  given  you  up  as  dead,  and  I  could  not 
believe  that  the  four  of  you  together  could  all  have  suc- 
cumbed. We  got  off  the  reef  the  next  day,  shifting  her 
cargo  all  upon  one  side  and  hoisting  some  sail,  so  that  the 
wind  bore  her  down,  her  keel  lifted  from  the  reef  upon 
which  she  had  fastened,  and  without  damage  she  went  into 
deep  water.  We  spent  four  days  in  looking  for  you.  AVe 
landed  at  the  island  to  which  you  had  been  directed,  and 
searched  it  thoroughly.  We  then  went  to  an  island  fur- 
ther to  the  south,  and  spent  three  days  in  cruising  round 
its  shores.  We  landed  and  captured  some  natives,  but 
could  not  learn  from  them  that  they  had  seen  any  traces 
of  you  whatever.  Most  on  board  conceived  that  the  canoe 
must  have  upset,  and  that  you  must  have  been  drowned; 
but  I  never  believed  this,  and  felt  convinced  that  from 
some  unknown  reason  you  had  been  unable  to  return  to 
the  ship,  but  that  sooner  or  later  you  would  arrive.  From 
that  point  all  went  well  with  us.  We  had  a  rapid  voyage 
down  to  the  Cape,  and  coasted  along  it  at  a  short  distance. 
The  weather  was  fair,  and  we  turned  our  head  north  with- 
out loss  of  time;  and  so,  by  the  help  of  Providence  and  a 
fair  wind  we  made  our  course  to  England,  where  our  gra- 
cious sovereign  has  been  pleased  to  express  her  approval  of 
our  doings.  I  told  her  something  of  your  journey  across 
the  south  of  the  American  continent,  and  she  was  pleased 
to  express  her  sorrow  at  the  loss  of  such  gallant  and  prorn- 


324  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

ising  gentlemen.  I  am  sure  that  her  majesty  will  receive 
with  pleasure  the  news  of  your  return.  Now  tell  me  all 
that  has  happened  since  I  last  saw  you." 

Ned  recited  the  history  of  their  adventures,  and  Captain 
Francis  approved  of  the  course  which  they  had  taken  in 
making  for  Tidore  instead  of  Ternate.  He  was  greatly 
amused  at  their  experiences  as  South  Sea  deities,  and  said 
that  henceforth,  let  them  be  lost  where  they  would,  or  for 
as  long  as  they  might  be,  he  would  never  again  feel  any 
uneasiness  as  to  their  fate.  He  invited  them  to  take  up 
their  abode  with  him  while  they  stayed  in  London;  and 
although  they  were  eager  to  return  to  Devonshire,  he  told 
them  that  he  thought  they  ought  to  wait  until  he  had 
communicated  with  the  queen,  and  had  seen  whether  she 
would  wish  to  see  the  gentlemen  in  whom  she  had  kindly 
expressed  interest. 

Captain  Drake  had  received  the  honor  of  knighthood 
from  the  queen's  hand  on  his  return  from  his  voyage,  and 
was  now  Sir  Francis  Drake,  and  was  for  the  time  the  pop- 
ular idol  of  the  people,  whose  national  pride  was  deeply 
gratified  at  the  feat  of  circumnavigation,  now  for  the  first 
time  performed  by  one  of  their  countrymen. 

Captain  Drake  dispatched  a  letter  to  her  majesty  at 
Westminster,  and  the  following  day  a  royal  messenger  ar- 
rived with  an  order  that  he  should  bring  the  four  gentlemen 
adventurers  with  him,  and  present  them  to  her  majesty. 
The  young  men  felt  not  a  little  awed  at  the  thought  of 
being  received  by  Queen  Elizabeth.  But  upon  their  pre- 
sentation by  Sir  Francis,  the  queen  received  them  with  so 
much  condescension  and  grace  that  their  fears  were  speedily 
removed. 

"I  thought,"  she  said  to  Captain  Drake,  "that  I  should 
see  four  huge  and  bearded  paladins.  You  told  me  indeed 
that  they  were  young,  but  I  had  not  pictured  to  myself 
that  they  were  still  beardless  striplings,  although  in  point 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  325 

of  size  they  do  credit  to  their  native  country.  I  love  to 
listen  to  tales  of  adventure,"  she  continued,  "and  beg  that 
you  will  now  recite  to  me  the  story  of  those  portions  of 
your  voyage  and  journeyings  of  which  I  have  not  heard 
from  the  lips  of  Sir  Francis." 

Then  modestly  Ned  recited  the  story  of  their  journey 
across  America,  and  afterward  took  up  the  narrative  at 
the  point  when  they  left  the  ship,  and  her  majesty  was 
pleased  to  laugh  hugely  at  the  story  of  their  masquerading 
as  gods.  When  they  had  finished  she  invited  them  to  a 
banquet  to  be  given  at  Greenwich  on  the  following  day, 
gave  them  her  hand  to  kiss,  and  presented  each  with  a 
diamond  ring  in  token  of  her  royal  favor. 

The  following  day  they  went  down  in  the  barge  of  Sir 
Francis  Drake,  which  formed  part  of  the  grand  cortege 
which  accompanied  her  majesty  on  her  water  passage  to 
Greenwich.  There  a  royal  banquet  was  held  with  much 
splendor  and  display,  after  which  a  masque,  prepared  by 
those  ingenious  authors,  Mr.  Beaumont  and  Mr.  Fletcher, 
was  enacted  before  her. 

Three  days  later  they  embarked  upon  a  country  ship 
bound  for  Plymouth,  and  after  a  rough  tossing  in  the 
Channel,  landed  there.  They  were  received  with  much 
honor  by  the  mayor  and  dignitaries  of  Plymouth,  for  Sir 
Francis  had  already  written  down,  giving  a  brief  account 
of  their  adventures  and  of  the  marks  of  esteem  which  the 
queen  had  been  pleased  to  bestow  upon  them;  and  Ply- 
mouth, as  the  representative  of  the  county  of  Devon, 
rejoiced  in  giving  a  hearty  welcome  to  her  sons  who  had 
brought  so  much  credit  upon  them. 

After  a  stay  of  a  few  hours  the  lads  separated,  Tom  and 
Reuben  each  starting  for  their  respective  homes,  while 
Ned,  who  had  no  family  of  his  own,  accompanied  Gerald, 
in  whose  home  he  was  looked  upon  almost  as  a  sou,  and 
where  the  welcome  which  awaited  him  was  as  cordial  as 


326  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLA&. 

that  given  to  Gerald.  The  share  of  each  of  the  adven- 
turers in  the  Golden  Hind  was  a  vefy  large  one,  and  Ned 
purchased  a  nice  little  property  and  settled  down  upon  it, 
having  had  enough  of  the  dangers  of  the  seas,  and  resolv- 
ing no  more  to  leave  his  native  country  unless  his  duty  to 
his  queen  should  demand  his  services. 

That  time  was  not  long  in  arriving,  for  toward  the  end 
of  1586  all  Europe  rang  with  the  preparations  which 
Philip  of  Spain  was  making  to  invade  England.  The 
Devonshire  gentlemen  who  had  fought  on  the  Spanish 
Main,  and  who  but  lightly  esteemed  Spanish  valor  at  sea, 
at  first  scoffed  at  the  news,  but  soon  no  doubt  could  be 
entertained.  Early  in  1587  Sir  Francis  Drake  wrote  to 
his  friends  who  had  fought  under  him  that  her  majesty 
had  honored  him  with  a  commission  to  beat  up  the  Span- 
ish coast,  and  invited  them  to  accompany  him.  The  four 
friends  hastened  with  many  others  to  obey  the  summons, 
and  on  joining  him  at  Plymouth  he  was  pleased  to  appoint 
each  to  the  command  of  a  ship.  Some  weeks  were  spent 
in  earnest  preparation,  and  in  March  a  fleet  of  thirty  ves- 
sels set  forth,  full  manned  and  equipped.  Accustomed  as  1 
the  young  men  were  to  see  great  Spanish  ships  taken  by 
single  boats,  and  a  whole  fleet  submissive  before  one  ship, 
it  seemed  to  them  that  with  such  an  armament  they  could 
destroy  the  whole  navies  of  Spain,  and  even  then  that  little 
glory  would  be  divided  between  each  vessel.  Upon  the 
18th  of  April  the  fleet  was  off  Cadiz,  and  Sir  Francis  made' 
the  signal  for  the  captains  of  the  fleet  to  go  on  board  the 
flagship.  There  he  unfolded  to  them  his  plan  of  forcing 
the  entrance  to  the  port,  and  destroying  the  Spanish  fleet 
gathered  there.  Cadiz  was  one  of  the  strongest  places  of 
Spain,  and  the  enterprise  would  to  most  men  have  seemed 
a  desperate  one.  But  to  men  who  had  fought  in  the 
Spanish  Main  it  seemed  but  a  light  thing.  As  they  left 
the  admiral's  cabin  Ned  invited  his  three  friends  to  dine 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  327 

on  board  his  ship  the  Sovereign,  and  a  right  merry  gather- 
ing it  was,  as  they  talked  over  their  past  adventures,  and 
marveled  to  find  themselves  each  commanding  a  ship  ahout 
to  attack  the  fleet  of  Spain  in  its  own  harbor. 

Upon  the  following  day  the  fleet  sailed  holdly  toward 
the  port  of  Cadiz,  where  the  people  could  scarce  believe 
that  the  British  intended  to  force  the. entrance  to  the  fort. 
When  they  saw  that  such  was  indeed  their  purpose  they 
opened  fire  with  all  their  batteries,  great  and  small.  The 
English  ships  sailed  on,  unheeding  their  reception,  and 
delivering  their  broadsides  as  they  neared  the  port.  Al- 
though they  had  been  in  many  fights  this  was  the  first 
great  battle  at  which  the  friends  had  been  present,  and 
the  roar  and  din  of  the  combat,  the  sound  of  their  own 
guns  and  of  those  of  the  enemy,  the  crash  and  rending  of 
wood,  and  the  cheers  of  the  sailors  in  no  little  surprised 
them.  The  Spanish  gunners  in  their  haste  shot  but  badly, 
and  with  Sir  Francis  Drake's  ship  leading  the  way  the 
fleet  forced  the  entrance  into  the  port.  As  they  entered 
they  were  saluted  by  the  cannon  of  $ie  Spanish  vessels 
within,  but  without  more  ado  they  lay  these  aboard.  So 
mightily  were  the  Spaniards  amazed  by  the  valor  and  bold- 
ness of  the  English  that  they  fought  but  feebly,  jumping 
over  for  the  most  part  or  making  their  way  in  their  boats 
to  shore.  Then  Sir  Francis  caused  fire  to  be  applied  to 
the  Spanish  ships,  and  thirty  great  war-vessels  were  de- 
stroyed before  the  eyes  of  the  townspeople,  while  the 
English  fleet  sailed  triumphantly  away.  Then  following 
the  line  of  coast  as  far  as  St.  Vincent  the  admiral  captured 
and  burned  a  hundred  other  ships,  and  destroyed  four  great 
land  forts.  Looking  into  the  Tagus,  the  King  of  Portugal 
having  been  forced  by  Spain  to  aid  her,  Captain  Drake 
captured  the  St.  Philip,  the  largest  ship  of  their  navy, 
which  was,  to  the  gratification  of  the  sailors,  laden  with  a 
precious  cargo.  After  these  exploits  the  fleet  returned  to 


328  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

England  in  triumph,  having  for  the  time  crippled  the 
forces  of  Spain.  Philip,  however,  redoubled  his  prepara- 
tions, the  fleets  of  Naples  and  Sicily,  of  Venice  and  Genoa, 
were  added  to  those  of  Spain,  the  dockyards  worked  night 
and  day,  and  by  the  end  of  the  year  all  was  in  readiness. 

In  England  men  had  not  been  idle.  A  great  army  was 
raised  of  people  of  every  rank  and  condition,  Catholics  as 
well  as  Protestants  uniting  in  the  defense  of  the  country; 
while  in  every  port  round  the  din  of  preparation  was 
heard.  The  army  was  destined  to  combat  the  thirty  thou- 
sand Spanish  soldiers  commanded  by  the  Duke  of  Parma 
in  the  Netherlands,  where  a  fleet  of  transports  had  been 
prepared  to  bring  them  across  when  the  great  armada 
should  have  cleared  the  sea  of  English  ships.  By  dint  of 
great  efforts  one  hundred  and  ninety-one  English  ships  of 
various  sizes,  these  mostly  being  small  merchantmen — mere 
pigmies  in  comparison  with  the  great  Spanish  galleons;  were 
collected,  while  the  Dutch  dispatched  sixty  others  to  aid 
in  the  struggle  against  Spain.  On  the  29th  of  May  the 
Spanish  armada  sailed  from  the  Tagus,  but  being  delayed 
by  a  storm  it  was  not  till  the  19th  of  June  that  its  advance 
was  first  signaled  by  the  lookout  near  Plymouth. 

Then  from  every  hill  throughout  England  beacon-fires 
blazed  to  carry  the  tidings,  and  every  Englishman  betook 
himself  to  his  arms  and  prepared  to  repel  the  invaders. 
Instead,  however,  of  attempting  to  land  at  once,  as  had 
been  expected,  the  Spanish  fleet  kept  up  channel,  the' 
orders  of  the  king  being  that  it  should  make  first  for 
Flanders,  there  form  junction  with  the  fleet  of  the  Duke 
of  Parma,  and  so  effect  a  landing  upon  the  English  coast. 
As  the  great  fleet,  numbering  a  hundred  and  thirty  large 
war-vessels,  and  extending  in  the  form  of  a  crescent  nine 
miles  in  length  from  horn  to  horn,  sailed  up  channel,  the 
spectacle,  although  terrible,  was  magnificent  indeed. 

The  ships  at  Plymouth  at  once  slipped  anchor  and  set 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  329 

out  in  pursuit.  Sir  Francis  Drake  led,  and  close  by  him 
were  the  vessels  commanded  by  the  fonr  friends.  Paltry 
indeed  did  the  squadron  appear  by  the  side  of  the  great 
fleet,  but  from  every  port  as  they  passed  along  came  rein- 
forcements, until  in  numbers  they  equaled  those  of  the 
groat  ships  of  Spain.  These  reinforcements  were  com- 
manded by  Admirals  Hawkins,  Frobisher,  and  other  gal- 
lant seamen,  while  Lord  Howard,  lord  high-admiral  of 
England,  was  in  chief  comtnand.  There  was  no  general 
action  attempted,  for  the  floating  Spanish  castles  could 
have  ridden  over  the  light  ships  of  England}  but  each 
commander  fell  upon  the  enemy  like  dogs  upon  the  flank 
of  an  array  of  lions.  Sir  Francis  threw  himself  into  the 
center  of  the  Spanish  lines,  followed  by  many  other  Eng- 
lish ships,  and  thus  separated  several  of  the  great  galleons 
from  their  consorts,  and  then  fell  to  work  battering  them. 

The  Spaniards  fought  valiantly,  but  at  a  disadvantage, 
for  the  smaller  ships  of  the  English  were  so  quickly  han- 
dled that  they  were  able  to  take  up  positions  to  rake  their 
enemy  without  exposing  themselves  to  the  broadsides, 
which  would  have  sunk  them.  When  at  last  they  had 
crippled  their  foes  they  would  either  close  upon  them  and 
carry  them  by  boarding,  or,  leaving  them  helpless  wrecks 
upon  the  water,  would  hoist  all  sail  and  again  overtake 
the  Spanish  fleet. 

The  battle  continued  day  and  night  for  five  days  with 
scarce  an  intermission ;  the  various  English  admirals  some- 
times attacking  all  together,  sometimes  separately.  The 
same  tactics  ever  prevailed,  the  Spaniards  sailing  on  and 
striving  to  keep  in  a  compact  body,  the  English  hovering 
round  them,  cutting  off  every  ship  which  lagged  behind, 
breaking  the  ranks  of  the  enemy,  and  separating  vessels 
from  their  consorts.  Hard  was  it  to  say  that  in  that  long 
struggle  one  man  showed  more  valor  than  another,  but  the 
deeds  of  the  ships  commanded  by  the  Devonshire  gentle- 


330  UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG. 

men  were  second  to  none.  On  the  27th  their  ships  were 
signaled  to  sail  to  join  those  assembled  near  Dunkirk,  to 
check  the  progress  of  the  Duke  of  Parma's  fleet.  They 
reached  the  English  fleet  in  time,  and  soon  the  Spaniards 
were  seen  approaching.  They  kept  in  a  compact  mass 
which  the  English  ships  could  not  break.  For  awhile  the 
fight  went  badly,  and  then  a  number  of  fire-ships  were 
launched  at  the  Spaniards.  Seized  with  panic  these  at 
once  scattered,  and  the  English  falling  upon  them  a  series 
of  desperate  conflicts  ensued,  ending  almost  always  in  the 
capture  or  destruction  of  the  enemy.  The  Duke  of  Medina- 
Sidonia,  who  commanded  the  main  Spanish  fleet,  sailed 
north,  intending  to  coast  round  the  north  of  Scotland  and 
so  return  to  Spain.  The  English  ships  followed  for  awhile, 
but  were,  from  the  shortness  of  the  supplies  which  had 
been  placed  on  board,  forced  to  put  into  harbor;  and  a 
great  storm  scattering  the  Spanish  fleet  and  wrecking 
many,  only  sixty  vessels,  and  these  with  their  crews  dis- 
abled by  hardship  and  fatigue,  ever  returned  to  Spain. 

As  a  consequence  of  their  gallantry  in  these  battles,  and 
upon  the  urgent  recommendation  of  Sir  Francis  Drake, 
her  majesty  was  pleased  to  bestow  the  honor  of  knighthood 
upon  each  of  the  four  young  Devonshire  gentlemen,  as 
upon  many  other  brave  captains. 

After  this  they  went  no  more  to  sea,  nor  took  any  part 
in  the  disastrous  expedition  which  Admirals  Drake  and 
Hawkins  together  made  to  the  Spanish  Main,  when  the 
brave  Sir  Francis  lost  his  life  from  fever  and  disappoint- 
ment. 

Soon  after  their  return  from  the  defeat  of  the  armada 
Sir  Edward  Hearne  married  the  only  sister  of  his  friend 
Gerald,  and  lived  with  her  happily  to  a  green  old  age.  The 
friendship  between  the  four  friends  never  diminished,  but 
rather  increased  as  they  grew  in  years,  and  many  marriages 
took  place  between  their  children  and  grandchildren. 


UNDER  DRAKE'S  FLAG.  331 

Four  times  a  year,  upon  the  occasion  of  special  events 
in  their  lives,  great  family  gatherings  were  held  at  the 
house  of  one  or  other.  Sir  Gerald  generally  held  festival 
on  the  anniversary  of  the  defeat  of  the  Spanish  attack  on 
the  forest  fortress  in  Porto  Rico;  Tom  upon  that  of  his 
escape  from  the  prison  of  the  Inquisition ;  Reuben  gener- 
ally celebrated  the  day  when  in  the  character  of  a  South 
Sea  idol  he  aided  to  defeat  the  hostile  islanders;  while 
Ned  kept  up  the  anniversary  of  their  return  to  England. 
As  to  the  victory  over  the  armada,  they  always  had  to  draw 
lots  as  to  the  house  in  which  that  great  event  should  be 
celebrated.  Upon  all  these  occasions  stories  were  told  at 
great  length,  and  their  children,  grandchildren,  and  great- 
grandchildren, for  all  lived  to  see  these  growing  up,  were 
never  tired  of  listening  to  tales  of  the  Spanish  Main. 


THE 


A.  L.  BURT'S  PUBLICATIONS 

For  Young  People 

BY  POPULAR  WRITERS, 

97-99-101  Reade  Street,  New  Yorkr 


Bonnie  Prince  Charlie  :  A  Tale  of  Fontenoy  and  Culloden.     By 

G.  A.  HENTY.     With  12  full- page  Illustrations  by  GORDON 

BROWNE.     12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

The  adventures  of  the  son  of  a  Scotch  officer  in  French  service. 
The  boy,  brought  up  by  a  Glasgow  bailie,  is  arrested  for  aiding  a 
Jacobite  agent,  escapes,  is  wrecked  on  the  French  coast,  reaches 
Paris,  and  serves  with  the  French  army  at  Dettingen.  He  kills 
his  father's  foe  in  a  duel,  and  escaping  to  the  coast,  shares  the 
adventures  of  Prince  Charlie,  but  finally  settles  happily  in  Scot- 
land. 

"  Ronald,  the  hero,  is  very  like  the  hero  of  '  Quentin  Durward/  The  lad'a 
journey  across  France,  and  his  hairbreadth  escapes,  make  up  as  good  a  nar- 
rative of  the  kind  as  we  have  ever  read.  For  freshness  of  treatment  and 
variety" of  incident  Mr.  Henty  has  surpassed  himself.1'— Spectator. 

With  Clive  in  India ;  or,  the  Beginnings  of  an  Empire.  By 
G.  A.  HENTY.  With  12  full-page  Illustrations  by  GORDON 
BROWNE.  12rno,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

The  period  between  the  landing  of  Clive  as  a  young  writer  in 
India  and  the  close  of  his  career  was  critical  and  eventful  in  the 
extreme.  At  its  commencement  the  Knglish  were  traders  existing 
on  sufferance  of  the  native  princes.  At  its  close  they  were  masters 
of  Bengal  and  of  the  greater  part  of  Southern  India.  The  author 
has  given  a  tulr  and  accurate  account  of  the  events  of  that  stirring 
time,  and  battles  and  sieges  follow  each  other  in  rapid  succession, 
while  he  combines  with  his  narrative  a  tale  of  daring  and  adven- 
ture, which  gives  a  lifelike  interest  to  the  volume. 

"  He  has  taken  a  period  of  Indian  history  of  the  most  vital  importance, 
and  he  has  embroidered  on  the  historical  facts  a  story  which  of  itself  is  deeply 
interesting.  Young  people  assuredly  will  be  delighted  with  the  volume."— 
Scotsman. 

The  Lion  of  the  North  :  A  Tale  of  Gustavus  Adolphus  and  the 
Wars  of  Religion.     By  G.  A.  HENTY.     With  full-page  Illus- 
trations by  JOHN  SCHONBERG.     12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
In  this  story  Mr.  Henry  gives  the  history  of  the  first  part  of  the 
Thirty  Years'  War.     The  issue  had  its  importance,  which  has  ex- 
tended  to  the  present  day,  as   it   established  religious  freedom 
in  Germany.     The  army  of  the  chivalrous  king    of  Sweden  was 
largely  composed  of  Scotchmen,  and  among  these  was  the  hero  of 
the  story. 

"The  tale  is  a  clever  and  instructive  piece  of  history,  and  as  boys  may 
trusted  to  read  it  conscientiously,  they  can  hardly  fail  to  be  profited. ' ' — 


A.  L.  BURT'S  PUBLICATIONS, 


The  Dragon  and  the  Raven ;  or,  The  Days  of  King  Alfred.  By 
G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  C.  J.  STANI- 
LAND,  R.I.  12rno,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

In  this  story  the  author  gives  an  account  of  the  fierce  struggle 
between  Saxon  and  Dane  for  supremacy  in  England,  and  presents 
a  vivid  picture  of  the  misery  and  ruin  to  which  the  country  was 
reduced  by  the  ravages  of  the  sea-wolves.  The  hero,  a  young 
Saxon  thane,  takes  part  in  all  thf  battles  fought  by  King  Alfred. 
He  is  driven  from  his  home,  takes  to  the  sea  and  resists  the  Danes 
on  their  own  element,  and  being  pursued  by  them  up  the  Seine,. 
is  present  at  the  long  and  desperate  siege  of  Paris. 

"  Treated  in  a  manner  most  attractive  to  the  boyish  reader." — Athenaeum, 

The  Young  Carthaginian :  A  Story  of  the  Times  of  Hannibal. 
By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  C.  J.  STANI- 
LAND,  R.I.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

Boys  reading  the  history  of  the  Punic  Wars  have  seldom  a  keen 
appreciation  of  the  merits  of  the  contest.  That  it  was  at  first  a 
struggle  for  empire,  and  afterward  for  existence  on  the  part  of 
Carthage,  that  Hannibal  was  a  great  and  skillful  general,  that  he 
defeated  the  Romans  at  Trebia,  Lake  Trasimenus,  and  Cannae, 
and  all  but  took  Rome,  represents  pretty  nearly  the  sum  total  of 
their  knowledge.  To  let  them  know  more  about  this  momentous 
struggle  for  the  empire  of  the  world  Mr.  Henty  has  written  this 
story,  which  not  only  gives  in  graphic  style  a  brilliant  descrip- 
tion of  a  most  interesting  period  of  history,  but  is  a  tale  of  ex- 
citing adventure  sure  to  secure  the  interest  of  the  reader. 

"  Well  constructed  and  vividly  told.  From  first  to  last  nothing  stays  the 
Interest  of  the  narrative.  It  bears  us  along  as  on  a  |stream  whose  current 
varies  in  direction,  but  never  loses  its  force.'1''— Saturday  Review. 

In  Freedom's  Cause  :  A  Story  of  Wallace  and  Bruce.  ByG.  A. 
HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  GORDON  BROWNE. 
12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

In  this  story  the  author  relates  the  stirring  tale  of  the  Scottish 
War  of  Independence.  The  extraordinary  valor  and  personal 

Erowess  of  Wallace  and  Bruce  rival  the  deeds  of  the  mythical 
eroes  of  chivalry,  and  indeed  at  one  time  Wallace  was  ranked 
with  these  legendary  personages.  The  researches  of  modern 
historians  have  shown,  however,  that  he  was  a  living,  breathing 
man — and  a  valiant  champion.  The  hero  of  the  tale  fought  under 
both  Wallace  and  Bruce,  and  while  the  strictest  historical  accuracy 
has  been  maintained  with  respect  to  public  events,  the  work  is 
full  of  "hairbreadth  'scapes"  and  wild  adventure. 

"  It  is  written  in  the  author's  best  style.  Full  of  the  wildest  and  most  re- 
markable achievements,  it  is  a  tale  of  great  interest,  which  a  boy,  once  he  has 
begun  it,  will  not  willingly  put  on  one  side."— The  Schoolmaster. 


A.  L.  BtJRT'S  PUBLICATIONS.  8 

With  Lee  in  Virginia:  A  Story  of  t>  •»  American  Civil  War.  By 
G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  illustrations  by  GOBDON 
BROWNE.  12ino,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

The  story  of  a  young  Virginian  planter,  who,  after  bravely 
proving  his  sympathy  with  the  slaves  of  brutal  masters,  serves 
tvith  no  less  courage  and  enthusiasm  under  Lee  and  Jackson 
through  the  most  exciting  events  of  the  struggle.  He  has  many 
hairbreadth  escapes,  is  several  times  wounded  and  twice  taken 
'prisoner;  but  his  courage  and  readiness  and, 'in  two  cases,  the 
devotion  of  a  black  servant  and  of  a  runaway  slave  whom  he  had 
assisted,  bring  him  safely  through  all  difficulties. 

\    "  One  of  the  best  stories  for  lads  which  Mr.  Henty  has  yet  written.    The 
\  picture  is  full  of  life  and  color,  and  the  stirring  and  romantic  incidents  are 

skillfully  blended  with  the  personal  interest  and  charm  of  the  story."— 

Standard. 

By  England's  Aid ;  or,  The  Freeing  of  the  Netherlands   (1585- 
1604).     By  G.   A.    HENTY.     With  full-page  Illustrations  by 
ALFRED  PEARSE,  and  Maps.     12rno,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
The  story  of  two  English  lads  v\ho  go  to  Holland  as  pages  in 
the  service  of  one  of  "  the  fighting  Veres."     After  many  adven- 
tures by  sea  and  land,  one  of  the  lads  finds  himself  on  board  a 
Spanish  ship  at  the  time  of  the  defeat  of  the  Armada,  and  escapes 
only  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  Corsairs.     He  is  successful  in 
getting  back  to  Spain  under  the  protection  of  a  wealthy  merchant, 
and  regains  his  JSjjwe  country  after  the  capture  of  Cadiz. 

"  It  is  an  admirable  book  for  youngsters.  It  overflows  with  stirring  incl 
dent  and  exciting  adventure,  and  the  color  of  the  era  and  of  the  scene  art 
finely  reproduced.  The  illustrations  add  to  its  attractiveness.11 — Boston 
Gazette. 

By  Right  of  Conquest ;  or,  With  Cortez  in  Mexico.      By  G.  A. 

HENTY.     With  full-page  Illustrations  by  W.  S.  STACEY,  and 

Two  Maps.     12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.50. 

The  conquest  of  Mexico  by  a  small  band  of  resolute  b*en  under 
the  magnificent  leadership  of  Cortez  is  always  rightly  ranked 
among  the  most  romantic  and  daring  exploits  in  history.  With 
this  as  the  groundwork  of  his  story  Mr.  Henty  has  interwoven  the 
adventures  of  an  English  youth,  Roger  Hawkshaw,  the  sole  sur- 
vivor of  the  good  ship  Swan,  which  had  sailed  from  a  Devon  port 
to  challenge  the  mercantile  supremacy  of  the  Spaniards  in  the 
New  World.  He  is  beset  by  many  perils  among  the  natives,  but 
is  saved  by  his  own  judgment  and  strength,  and  by  the  devotion 
of  an  Aztec  princess.  At  last  by  a  ruse  he  obtains  the  protection 
of  the  Spaniards,  and  after  the  fall  of  Mexico  he  succeeds  in  re- 
gaining his  native  shore,  with  a  fortune  and  a  charming  Aztec 
bride. 

''• '  By  Right  of  Conquest '  is  the  nearest  approach  to  a  perfectly  successful 
Historical  tale  that  Mr.  Henty  has  yet  published."— Academy. 


A.  L.  BTJRT'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


In  the  Reign  of  Terror :  The  Adventures  of  a  Westminster  Boy 
By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  J.  ScnfiN- 
BERG.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

Harry  Sandwith,  a  Westminster  boy,  becomes  a  resident  at  tlie 
chateau  of  a  French  marquis,  and  aft<  r  various  adventures  accom- 
panies the  family  to  Paris  at  the  crisis  of  the  Revolution.  Im- 
prisonment and  death  reduce  their  number,  and  the  hero  finds 
/himself  beset  by  perils  with  the  throe  young  daughters  of  the 
•house  in  his  charge.  After  hairbreadth  escapes  they  reach  Nan 
^tes.  There  the  girls  are  condemned  to  death  in  the  coffin-ships, 
but  art,  -aved  by  the  unfailing  courage  of  their  boy  protector. 

"  Harry  Sandwith,  the  Westminster  boy,  may  fairly  be  said  to  beat  Mr  J 
Henty's  record.  His  adventures  will  delight  boys  by  the  audacity  and  peril 
they  depict.  .  .  .  The  story  is  one  of  Mr.  Henty's  best."— Saturday 
Review. 

With  Wolfe  in  Canada  ;  or,  The  Winning  of  a  Continent.  By 
G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  GORDON 
BROWNE.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

In  the  present  volume  Mr.  Henty  gives  an  account  of  the  strug- 
gle between  Britain  and  France  for  supremacy  in  the  North 
American  continent.  On  the  issue  of  this  war  depended  not  only 
the  destinies  of  North  America,  but  to  a  large  extent  those  of  the 
mother  countries  themselves.  The  fall  of  Quebec  decided  that 
the  Anglo-Saxon  race  should  predominate  in  the  New  World; 
that  Britain,  and  not  France,  should  take  the  lead  among  the 
nations  of  Europe;  and  that  English  and  American  commerce,  the 
English  language,  and  English  literature,  should  spread  right 
round  the  globe. 

"  It  is  not  only  a  lesson  in  history  as  instructively  as  it  is  graphically  told, 
but  also  a  deeply  interesting  and  often  thrilling  tale  of  adventure  and  peril  by 
flood  and  field.11— Illustrated  Londvn  News. 

True  to  the  Old  Flag :  A  Ta2e  of  the  American  War  of  Inde- 
pendence.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by 
GORDON  BROWNE.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

*  In  this  story  the  author  has  gone  to  the  accounts  of  officers  who 
took  part  in  the  conflict,  and  lads  will  find  that  in  no  war  in  which 
American  and  British  soldiers  have  been  engaged  did  they  behave 
with  greater  courage  and  good  conduct.  The  historical  portion  of 
the  book  being  accompanied  with  numerous  thrilling  adventures 
with  the  redskins  on  the  shores  of  Lake  Huron,  a  story  of  exciting 
interest  is  interwoven  with  the  general  narrative  and  carried 
through  the  book. 

"  Does  justice  to  the  pluck  and  determination  of  the  British  soldiers  during 
the  unfortunate  struggle  against  American  emancipation.  The  son  of  an 
American  loyalist,  who  remains  true  to  our  flag,  falls  among  the  hostile  red- 
skins in  that  very  Huron  country  which  has  been  endeared  to  us  by  the  ex- 
ploits of  Hawkey©  and  Chingachgook."'— The  Time*. 


A.  L.  BUBT's  PUBLICATIONS; 


The  Lion  of  St.  Mark :  A  Tale  of  Venice  in  the  Fourteenth 
Century.     By  G.  A.  HENTY.     With  full-page  Illustrations  by 
GORDON  BROWNE.     12ino,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
A  story  of  Venice  at  a  period  when  her  strength  and  splendor 
were  put  to  the  severest  tests.     The  hero  displays  a  fine  sense  and 
manliness  which  carry  him  safely  through  an  atmosphere  of  in- 
trigue, crime,  and  bloodshed.     He  contributes  largely  to  the  vic- 
tories of  the  Venetians  at  Porto  d'Auzo  and  Chioggia,  and  finally 
wins  the  band  of  the  daughter  of  one  of  the  chief  men  of  Venice 

"  Every  boy  should  read  *  The  Lion  of  St.  Mark.1  Mr.  Henry  has  never  pro 
duced  a  story  more  delightful,  more  wholesome,  or  more  vivacious."— Satur 
day  Review. 

A  Final  Reckoning: :  A  Tale  of  Bustl  Life  in  Australia.  By  G.  A. 

HENTY.     With  full-page  Illustrations  by  W.   B.    WOLLEN. 

12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00, 

The  hero,  a  young  English  lad.  after  rather  a  stormy  boyhood, 
emigrates  to  Australia,  and  gets  employment  as  an  officer  in  the 
mounted  police.  A  few  years  of  active  work  on  the  frontier, 
where  he  has  many  a  brush  with  both  natives  and  bushrangers, 
gain  him  promotion  to  a  captaincy,  and  he  eventually  settles 
down  to  the  peaceful  life  of  a  squatter. 

41  Mr.  Henty  has  never  published  a  more  readable,  a  more  carefully  con- 
structed, or  a  better  written  story  than  this." — Spectator. 

Under  Drake's  Flag :  A  Tale  of  the  Spamish  Main.  By  G.  A 
HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  GORDON  BROWNE. 
12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

A  story  of  the  days  when  England  and  Spain  struggled  for  the 
supremacy  of  the  sea.  The  heroes  sail  as  lads  with  Drake  in  the 
Pacific  expedition,  and  in  his  great  voyage  of  circumnavigation. 
The  historical  portion  of  the  story  is  absolutely  to  be  relied  upon, 
lout  this  will  perhaps  be  less  attractive  than  the  great  variety  of 
exciting  adventure  through  which  the  young  heroes  pass  in  the 
course  of  their  voyages. 

"  A  book  of  adventure,  where  the  hero  meets  with  experience  enough,  one 
would  think,  to  turn  his  hair  gray."— Harpers  Monthly  Magazine. 

By  Sheer  Pluck  :  A  Tale  of  the  Ashanti  War.  By  G.  A.  HENTY 
With  full-page  Illustrations  by  GORDON  BROWNE.  12uio, 
cloth,  price  $1.00. 

The  author  has  woven,  in  a  tale  of  thrilling  interest,  all  the  de- 
tails of  the  Ashanti  campaign,  of  which  he  was  himself  a  witness. 
His  hero,  after  many  exciting  adventures  in  the  interior,  is  de- 
tained a  prisoner  by  the  king  just  before  the  outbreak  of  the  war, 
but  escapes,  and  accompanies  the  English  expedition  on  their 
Anarch  to  Coomassie. 

"  Mr.  Henty  keeps  up  his  reputation  as  a  writer  of  boys1  stories.  '  By  Sheet 
Vluck '  will  be  eagerly  read."—  Athenaeum. 


A.  L.  BURT'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


By  Pike  and  Dyke  :  A  Tale  of  the  Rise  of  the  Dutch  Republic 
By  G.  A.  HENTY.     With  full-page  Illustrations  by  MAYNABD 
BROWN,  and  4  Maps.     IStno,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
In  this  story  Mr.  Henty  traces  the  adventures  and  brave  deeds 
of  an  English  boy  in  the  household  of  the  ablest  man  of  his  age — 
William  the  Silent.     Edward  Martin,  the  son  of  an  English  sea- 
captain,  enters  the  service  of  the  Prince  as  a  volunteer,  and  is  em- 
ployed by  him  in  many  dangerous  and  responsible  missions,  in  the 
discharge  of  which  he  passes  through  the  great  sieges  of  the  time,. 
He  ultimately  settles  down  as  Sir  Edward  Martin. 

"  Boys  with  a  turn  for  historical  research  will  be  enchanted  with  the  boofc^ 
while  the  rest  who  only  care  for  adventure,  will  be  students  in  spite  of  them 
selves."— Si.  James*  Gazette. 

St.  George  for  England  :  A  Tale  of  Cressy  and  Poitiers.  By 
G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  GORDON 
BROWNE.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

No  portion  of  English  history  is  more  crowded  with  great  events 
than  that  of  the  reign  of  Edward  III.  Cressy  and  Poitiers;  the 
destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleet;  the  plague  of  the  Black  Death; 
tbe  Jacquerie  rising;  these  are  treated  by  the  author  in  "  St. 
George  for  England."  The  hero  of  the  story,  although  of  good 
family,  begins  life  as  a  London  apprentice,  but  after  countless  adi 
ventures  and  perils  becomes  by  valor  and  good  conduct  the  squire, 
and  at  last  the  trusted  friend  of  the  Black  Prince. 

"  Mr.  Henty  has  developed  for  himself  a  type  of  historical  novel  for  boys 
which  bids  fair  to  supplement,  on  their  behalf,  the  historical  labors  of  Sir 
Walter  Scott  in  the  land  ®f  fiction.  "—The  Standard. 

Captain's  Kidd's  Gold  :  The  True  Story  of  an  Adventurous  Sailor 
Boy.  By  JAMES  FRANKLIN  FITTS.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
There  is  something  fascinating  to  the  average  youth  in  the  very 
idea  of  buried  treasure.  A  vision  arises  before  his  eyes  of  swarthy 
Portuguese  and  Spanish  rascals,  with  black  beards  and  gleaming 
eyes — sinister-looking  fellows  who  once  on  a  time  haunted  the 
Spanish  Main,  sneaking  out  from  some  hidden  creek  in  their  long, 
low  schooner,  of  picaroonisb  rake  and  sheer,  to  attack  an  unsus- 
pecting trading  craft.  There  were  many  famous  sea  rovers  in 
their  day,  but  none  more  celebrated  than  Capt.  Kidd.  Perhaps 
the  most  fascinating  tale  of  all  is  Mr.  Pitts'  true  story  of  an  adven 

'turous  American  boy,  who  receives  from  his  dying  father  an 
ancient  bit  of  vellum,  which  the  latter  obtained  in  a  curious  way. 

,  The  document  bears  obscure  directions  purporting  to  locate  a  cer- 
tain island  in  the  Bahama  group,  and  a  considerable  treasure 
buried  there  by  two  of  Kidd's  crew.  The  hero  of  this  book, 
Paul  Jones  Garry,  is  an  ambitious,  persevering  lad,  of  salt-water 
New  England  ancestry,  and  bis  efforts  to  reach  the  island  and 
secure  the  money  form  one  of  the  most  absorbing  tales  for  GUI 
youth  that  has  come  from  the  press. 


A.  L.  HURT'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Captain  Bayley's  Heir :  A  Tale  of  the  Gold  Fields  of  California, 

By  G.   A.   HENTY.     With  full- page  Illustrations  by  H.   M. 

PAGET.     12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

A  frank,  manly  lad  and  his  cousin  are  rivals  in  the  heirship  of  a 
co  siderable  property.  The  former  falls  into  a  trap  laid  by  the 
latter,  and  while  under  a  false  accusation  of  theft  foolishly  leaves 
England  for  America.  He  works  his  passage  before  the  mast, 
joins  a  small  band  of  hunters,  crosses  a  tract  of  country  Infested 
with  Indians  to  the  Californian  gold  diggings,  and  is  successful 
both  as  digger  and  trader. 

"Mr.  Henty  is  careful  to  mingle  instruction  with  entertainment;  and  the 
humorous  touches,  especially  in  the  sketch  of  John  Holl,  the  Westminster 
dustman,  Dickens  himself  could  hardly  have  excelled.11— Christian  Leader. 

For  Name  and  Fame  ;  or,  Through  Afghan  Passes.      By  G.  A. 

HENTY.     With  full -page  Illustrations  by  GORDON  BROWNE. 

12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

An  interesting  story  of  the  last  war  in  Afghanistan.  The  hero, 
after  being  wrecked  and  going  through  many  stirring  adventures 
among  the  Malays,  finds  his  way  to  Calcutta  and  enlists  in  a  regi- 
ment proceeding  to  join  the  army  at  the  Afghan  passes.  He  ac- 
companies the  force  under  General  Roberts  to  the  Peiwar  Kotal, 
is  wounded,  taken  prisoner,  carried  to  Cabal,  whence  he  is  trans- 
ferred to  Candahar,  and  takes  part  in  the  final  defeat  of  the  army 
of  Ayoub  Khan. 

f *  The  best  feature  of  the  book— apart  from  the  interest  of  its  scenes  of  ad- 
venture—is its  honest  effort  to  do  justice  to  the  patriotism  of  the  Afghan 
people.11— Daily  News. 

Captured  by  Apes  :  The  Wonderful  Adventures  of  a  Young 
Animal  Trainer.  By  HARRY  PRENTICE.  12mo,  cloth,  $1.00. 
The  scene  of  this  tale  is  laid  on  an  island  in  the  Malay  Archi- 
pelago;  Philip  Garland,  a  young  animal  collector  and  trainer,  of 
New  York,  sets  sail  for  Eastern  seas  in  quest  of  a  new  stock  of 
living  curiosities.  The  vessel  is  wrecked  off  the  coast  of  Borneo 
and  young  Garland,  the  sole  survivor  of  the  disaster,  is  cast  ashore 
on  a  small  island,  and  captured  by  the  apes  that  overrun  the 
place.  The  lad  discovers  that  the  ruling  spirit  of  the  monker 
tribe  is  a  gigantic  and  vicious  baboon,  whom  he  identifies  as 
Goliah,  an  animal  at  one  time  in  his  possession  and  with  whose 
instruction  he  had  been  especially  diligent.  The  brute  recognizer 
him,  and  with  a  kind  of  malignant  satisfaction  puts  his  former 
master  through  the  same  course  of  training  he  had  himself  ex- 
perienced with  a  faithfulness  of  detail  which  shows  bow  astonish* 
ing  is  monkey  recollection.  Very  novel  indeed  is  the  way  by 
which  the  young  man  escapes  death.  Mr.  Prentice  has  certainly 
worked  a  new  vein  on  juvenile  fiction,  and  the  ability  with  which 
he  handles  a  difficult  subject  stamps  him  as  a  writer  of  undoubted 
skill. 


8  A.  L.  BUHt'S  PtJfiLlCAf  tOttS. 

The  Bravest  of  the  Brave ;  or,  With  Peterborough    in  opain. 

By   G.    A.    HENTY.     With   full-page   Illustrations  by   H.    M. 

PAGET.     12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

There  are  few  great  leaders  whose  lives  and  actions  have  so 
completely  fallen  into  oblivion  as  those  of  the  Earl  of  Peter- 
borough. This  is  largely  due  to  the  fact  that  they  were  over- 
shadowed by  the  glory  and  successes  of  Marlborough.  His  careei 
as  general  extended  over  little  more  than  a  year,  and  yet,  in  that 
time,  he  showed  a  genius  for  warfare  which  has  never  been  sur 


"  Mr.  Henty  never  loses  sight  of  the  moral  purpose  of  his  work — to  enforce 
the  doctrine  of  courage  and  truth.  Lads  will  read  '  The  Bravest  of  the  Brave 
with  pleasure  and  profit;  of  that  we  are  quite  sure." — Daily  Telegraph. 

The  Cat  of  Bubastes  :  A  Story  of  Ancient  Egypt.     By  G.  A. 

HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

A  story  which  will  give  young  readers  an  unsurpassed  insight 
into  the  customs  of  the  Egyptian  people.  Amuba,  a  prince  of  the 
Rebu  nation,  is  carried  with  his  charioteer  Jethro  into  slavery. 
They  become  inmates  of  the  house  of  Ameres,  the  Egyptian  high- 
priest,  and  are  happy  in  his  service  until  the  priest's  son  acci- 
dentally kills  the  sacred  cat  of  Bubastes.  In  an  outburst  of  popular 
fury  Aroeres  is  killed,  and  it  rests  with  Jethro  and  Amuba  to 
secure  the  escape  of  the  high-priest's  son  and  daughter. 

"  Thi  story,  from  the  critical  moment  of  the  killing  of  the  sacred  cat  to  the 
perilous  exodus  into  Asia  with  which  it  closes,  is  very  skillfully  constructed 
and  full  of  exciting  adventures.  It  is  admirably  illustrated.'1— Saturday 
Review. 

With  Washington  at  Monmouth :  A  Story  of  Three  Phila 
delphia  Boys.  By  JAMES  OTIS.  12rno,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
Three  Philadelphia  boys,  Seth  Graydon  "whose  mother  con- 
ducted a  boarding-house  which  was  patronized  by  the  British 
officers;"  Enoch  Ball,  "son  of  that  Mrs.  Ball  whose  dancing 
school  was  situated  on  Letitia  Street,"  and  little  Jacob,  son  of 
"  Chris,  the  Baker,"  serve  as  the  principal  characters.  The 
story  is  laid  during  the  winter  when  Lord  Howe  held  possession 
of  the  city,  and  the  lads  aid  the  cause  by  assisting  the  American 
spies  who  make  regular  and  frequent  visits  from  Valley  Forge 
One  reads  here  of  home-life  in  the  captive  city  when  bread  was 
scarce  among  the  people  of  the  lower  classes,  and  a  reckless  prodi- 
gality shown  by  the  British  officers,  who  passed  the  winter  in 
feasting  and  merry-making  while  the  members  of  the  patriot  army 
but  a  few  miles  away  were  suffering  from  both  cold  and  hunger. 
The  story  abounds  with  pictures  of  Colonial  life  skillfully 
drawn,  and  the  glimpses  of  Washington's  soldiers  which  are  given 
show  that  the  work  has  not  been  hastily  done,  or  without  con- 
siderable study. 


A.  L.  BtmM  PUBLICATIONS; 


For  the  Temple  :  A  Tale  of  the  Fall  of  Jerusalem.     By  G.  A. 

HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  S.  J.  SOLOMON.  12inos 

cloth,  price  $1.00. 

Mr.  Henty  here  weaves  into  the  record  of  Josephus  an  admirable 
and  attractive  story.  The  troubles  in  the  district  of  Tiberias,  the 
march  of  the  legions,  the  sieges  of  Jotapata,  of  Garnala,  and  oi 
Jerusalem,  form  the  impressive  and  carefully  studied  historic 
setting  to  the  figure  of  the  lad  who  passes  from  the  vineyard  to 
the  service  of  Josephus,  becomes  the  leader  of  a  guerrilla  band  of 
patriots,  fights  bravely  for  the  Temple,  and  after  a  brief  term  of 
slavery  at  Alexandria,  returns  to  his  Galilean  home  with  the  favor 
of  Titus. 

"  Mr.  Henty's  graphic  prDse  pictures  of  the  hopeless  Jewish  resistance  oo 
Roman  sway  Add  another  leaf  to  his  record  of  the  famous  wars  of  the  world  v> 
-  ^Graphic. 

Facing  Death  ;  or,  The  Hero  of  the  Vaughan  Pit.     A  Tale  of 

the  Coal  Mines.     By  G.  A.   HENTY.     With  full-page  Illustra- 

tions by  GORDON  BROWNE.     12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

"  Facing  Death"  is  a  story  with  a  purpose.     It  is  intended  to 

show  that  a  lad  who  makes  up  his  mind  firmly  and  resolutely  that 

he  will  rise  in  life,  and  who  is  prepared  to  face  toil  and  ridicule 

and  hardship  to  carry  out  his  determination,  is  sure  to  succeed. 

The  hero  of  the  story  is  a  typical    British   boy,  dogged,  earnest, 

generous,  and  though  "  shamefaced"  to  a  degree,  is  ready  to  face 

death  in  the  discharge  of  duty. 

"  The  tale  is  well  written  and  well  illustrated,  and  there  is  much  reality  in 
the  characters.  If  any  father,  clergyman,  or  schoolmaster  is  on  the  lookout 
for  a  good  book  to  give  as  a  present  to  a  boy  who  is  worth  his  salt,  this  is  the 
book  we  would  recommend.'"  —  Standard. 

Tom  Temple's  Career.    By  HORATIO    ALGER.     12mo,   cloth, 

price  $1.00. 

Tom  Temple,  a  bright,  self-reliant  lad,  by  the  death  of  his 
father  becomes  a  boarder  at  the  home  of  Nathan  Middleton,  a 
penurious  insurance  agent.  Though  well  paid  for  keeping  thf 
boy,  Nathan  and  his  wife  endeavor  to  bring  Master  Tom  in  line 
with  their  parsimonious  habits.  The  lad  ingeniously  evades  their 
efforts  and  revolutionizes  the  household.  As  Tom  is  heir  to 
$40,000,  he  is  regarded  as  a  person  of  some  importance  until  by 
an  unfortunate  combination  of  circumstances  his  fortune  shrinks 
to  a  few  hundreds.  He  leaves  Plympton  village  to  seek  work  ir 
New  York,  whence  he  undertakes  an  important  mission  to  Cali- 
fornia,  around  which  center  the  most  exciting  incidents  of  his 
young  career.  Some  of  his  adventures  in  the  far  west  are  so 
startling  that  the  reader  will  scarcely  close  the  book  until  the  last 
page  shall  have  been  reached.  The  tale  is  written  in  Mr.  Alger's 
most  fascinating  style,  and  is  bound  to  please  the  very  large  class 
of  boys  who  regard  this  popular  author  as  a  prime  favorite. 


16  A.  L.  BURT'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

i-  '  '  '  in  *- 

Maori  and  Settler:  A  Story  of  the  New  Zealand  War.  By 
G.  A.  HENTY.  With  full-page  Illustrations  by  ALFRED  PEARSE. 
12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

The  Renshaws  emigrate  to  New  Zealand  during  the  period  of 
the  war  with  the  natives.  Wilfrid,  a  strong,  self-reliant,  coura- 
geous lad,  is  the  mainstay  of  the  hotwehold.  He  has  for  his  friend 
Mr.  Atherton,  a  botanist  and  naturalist  of  herculean  strength  and 
unfailing  nerve  and  humor.  In  the  ad  ventures  among  the  Maoris, 
there  are  many  breathless  moments  in  which  the  odds  seem  hope- 
lessly against  the  party,  but  they  succeed  in  establishing  them- 
selves happily  in  one  of  the  pleasant  New  Zealand  valleys. 

"Brimful  of  adventure,  of  humorous  and  interesting  conversation,  and 
vivid  pictures  of  colonial  life.11— Schoolmaster. 

Julian  MortimerJ:  A  Brave  Boy's  Struggle  for  Home  and  Fortune. 
By  HARRY  CASTLEMON.  12nio,  cloth,  price  $1.00, 
Here  is  a  story  that  will  warm  every  boy's  heart.  There  is 
mystery  enough  to  keep  any  lad's  imagination  wound  up  to  the 
highest  pitch.  The  scene  of  the  story  lies  west  of  the  Mississippi 
River,  in  the  days  when  emigrants  made  their  perilous  way  across 
the  great  plains  to  the  land  of  gold.  One  of  the  startling  features 
of  the  book  is  the  attack  upon  the  wagon  train  by  a  large  party  of 
Indians.  Our  hero  is  a  lad  of  uncommon  nerve  and  pluck,  a  brave 
young  American  in  every  sense  of  the  word.  He  enlists  and  holds 
the  reader's  sympathy  from  the  outset.  Surrounded  by  an  un- 
known and  constant  peril,  and  assisted  by  the  unswerving  fidelity 
of  a  stalwart  trapper,  a  real  rough  diamond,  our  hero  achieves  the 
most  happy  results.  Harry  Castlemon  has  written  many  enter- 
taining stories  for  boys,  and  it  would  seem  almost  superfluous  to 
say  anything  in  his  praise,  for  the  youth  of  America  regard  him 
as  a  favorite  author. 

"Carrots:"  Just  a  Little  Boy.     By  MRS.  MOLESWORTH.     With 
Illustrations  by  WALTER  CRANE.     12mo,  cloth,  price  75  cents. 
"  One  of  the  cleverest  and  most  pleasing  stories  it  has  been  our  good  for- 
tune to  meet  with  for  some  time.    Carrots  and  his  sister  are  delightful  little 
beings,  whom  to  read  about  is  at  once  to  become  very  fond  of." — Examiner. 
"A  genuine  children's  book;  we've  seen  'em  seize  it,  and  read  it  greedily. 
Children  are  first-rate  critics,  and  thoroughly  appreciate  Walter  Crane's 
il  lustrations. '  '—Punch. 

Mopsa  the  Fairy.      By  JEAN  INGELOW.      With  Eight  page 
Illustrations.     12nio,  cloth,  price  75  cents. 

"  Mrs.  Ingelow  is,  to  our  mind,  the  most  charming  of  all  living  writers  for 
children,  and  '  Mopsa '  alone  ought  to  give  her  a  kind  of  pre-emptive  right  to 
the  love  and  gratitude  of  our  young  folks.  It  requires  genius  to  conceive  a 
purely  imaginary  work  which  must  of  necessity  deal  with  the  supernatural, 
without  running  into  a  mere  riot  of  fantastic  absurdity;  but  genius  Miss  In- 
gelow has  and  the  story  of  '  Jack  '  is  as  careless  and  joyous,  out  as  delicate, 
as  a  picture  of  childhood."— Eclectic. 


A.  L.  BURT'S  PUBLICATIONS.  11 

A  Jaunt  Through  Java :  The  Story  of  a  Journey  to  the  Sacred 
Mountain.  By  EDWARD  S.  ELLIS.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00, 
The  central  interest  of  this  story  is  found  in  the  thrilling  ad. 
ventures  of  two  cousins,  Hermon  and  Eustace  Hadley,  on  their 
trip  across  the  island  of  Java,  from  Samarang  to  the  Sacred  Moun- 
tain. In  a  land  where  the  Royal  Bengal  tiger  runs  at  large; 
where  the  rhinoceros  and  other  fierce  beasts  are  to  be  met  with 
at  unexpected  moments;  it  is  but  natural  that  the  heroes  of  this 
book  should  have  a  lively  experience.  Hermon  not  only  dis- 
tinguishes himself  by  killing  a  full-grown  tiger  at  short  range. 
but  meets  with  the  most  startling  adventure  of  the  journey. 
There  is  much  in  this  narrative  to  instruct  as  well  a~  entertain  the 
reader,  and  so  deftly  has  Mr.  Ellis  used  his  material  that  there  is 
not  a  dull  page  in  the  book.  The  two  heroes  are  brave,  manly 
young  fellows,  babbling  over  with  boyish  independence.  They 
cope  with  the  many  difficulties  that  arise  during  the  trip  in  a  fear- 
less way  that  is  bound  to  win  the  admiration  of  every  lad  who  is 
so  fortunate  as  to  read  their  adventures. 

Wrecked  on  Spider  Island;  or,  How  Ned  Rogers  Found  the 
Treasure.  By  JAMES  OTIS.  12ruo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
A  "  down-east"  plucky  lad  who  ships  as  cabin  boy,  not  from 
love  of  adventure,  but  because  it  is  the  only  course  remaining  by 
which  he  can  gain  a  livelihood.  While  in  his  bunk,  seasick, 
Ned  Rogers  hears  the  captain  and  mate  discussing  their  plans  for 
the  willful  wreck  of  the  brig  in  order  to  gain  the  insurance.  Once 
it  is  known  he  is  in  possession  of  the  secret  the  captain  maroons 
him  on  Spider  Island,  explaining  to  the  crew  that  the  boy  is 
afflicted  with  leprosy.  While  thus  involuntarily  playing  the  part 
of  a  Crusoe,  Ned  discovers  a  wreck  submerged  in  the  sand,  and 
overhauling  the  timbers  for  the  purpose  of  gathering  material 
with  which  to  build  a  hut  finds  a  considerable  amount  of  treasure. 
Raising  the  wreck;  a  voyage  to  Havana  under  sail;  shipping  there 
a  crew  and  running  for  Savannah;  the  attempt  of  the  crew  to 
seize  the  little  craft  after  learning  of  the  treasure  on  board,  and, 
as  a  matter  of  course,  the  successful  ending  of  the  journey,  all 
serve  to  make  as  entertaining  a  story  of  sea-life  as  the  most 
captious  boy  could  desire. 

Geoff  and  Jim :  A  Story  of  School  Life.     By  ISMAY  THOKN.     IJ 
lustrated  by  A.  G.  WALKER.     12mo,  cloth,  price  75  cents. 

"  This  is  a  prettily  told  story  of  the  life  spent  by  two  motherless  bairns  at 
a  small  preparatory  school.  Both  Geoff  and  Jim  are  very  lovable  characters, 
only  Jim  is  the  more  39;  and  the  scrapes  he  gets  into  and  the  trials  he  en- 
dures will,  no  doubt,  interest  a  large  circle  of  young  readers.11—  Church 
Times. 

"This  is  a  capital  children's  story,  the  characters  well  portrayed,  and  the 
book  tastefully  bound  and  well  illustrated."— Schoolmaster. 

"The  story  can  be  heartily  recommended  as  a  present  for  boysJ1— 
Standard, 


12  A.  L.  BURT'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

The  Castaways ;  or,  On  the  Florida  Reefs.    By  JAMES  OTIS. 

12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

This  tale  smacks  of  the  salt  sea.  It  is  just  the  kind  of  story 
that  the  majority  of  boys  yearn  for.  From  the  moment  that  the 
Sea  Queen  dispenses  with  the  services  of  the  tug  in  lower  New 
York  bay  till  the  breeze  leaves  her  becalmed  off  the  coast  of 
Florida,  one  can  almost  hear  the  whistle  of  the  wind  through  her 
rigging,  the  creak  of  her  straining  cordage  as  she  heels  to  the 
leeward,  and  feel  her  rise  to  the  snow-capped  waves  which  her 
sharp  bow  cats  into  twin  streaks  of  foam.  Off  Marquesas  Keys 
she  floats  in  a  dead  calm.  Ben  Clark,  the  hero  of  the  story,  and 
Jake,  the  cook,  spy  a,  turtle  asleep  upon  the  glassy  surface  of  the 
water.  They  determine  to  capture  him,  and  take  a  boat  for  that 
purpose,  and  just  as  they  succeed  in  catching  him  a  thick  fog 
cuts  them  off  from  the  vessel,  and  then  their  troubles  be:  in. 
They  take  refuge  on  board  a  drifting  hulk,  a  storm  arises  and  they 
are  cast  ashore  upon  a  low  sandy  key.  Their  adventures  from 
this  point  cannot  fail  to  charm  the  reader.  As  a  writer  for  young 
people  Mr.  Otis  is  a  prime  favorite.  His  style  is  captivating,  and 
never  for  a  moment  does  he  allow  the  interest  to  flag.  In  "  The 
Castaways  "  he  is  at  his  best. 

Tom  Thatcher's  Fortune.    By  HORATIO  ALGER,  Jw.    12mo, 

cloth,  price  $1.00. 

Like  all  of  Mr.  Alger's  heroes,  Tom  Thatcher  is  a  brave,  am- 
bitious, unselfish  boy.  He  supports  his  mother  and  sister  on 
meager  wages  earned  as  a  shoe-pegger  in  John  Simpson's  factory. 
The  story  begins  with  Tom's  discharge  from  the  factory,  because 
Mr.  Simpson  felt  annoyed  with  the  lad  for  interrogating  him  too 
closely  about  his  missing  father.  A  few  days  afterward  Tom 
learns  that  which  induces  him  to  start  overland  for  California  with 
the  view  of  probing  the  family  mystery.  He  meets  with  many  ad- 
ventures. Ultimately  he  returns  to  his  native  village,  bringing  con- 
sternation to  the  soul  of  John  Simpson,  who  only  escapes  the  con- 
sequences of  his  villainy  by  making  full  restitution  to  the  man 
whose  friendship  he  had  betrayed.  The  story  is  told  in  that  en- 
tertaining way  which  has  made  Mr.  Alger's  name  a  household 
word  in  so  many  homes. 

Birdie :  A  Tale  of  Child  Life.    By  H.  L.  CHI^DE-PEMBERTON. 
Illustrated  by  H.  W.  RAINEY.     12mo,  cloth,  price  75  cents. 

"  The  story  is  quaint  and  simple,  but  there  is  a  freshness  about  it  that 
makes  one  hear  again  the  ringing  laugh  and  the  cheery  shout  of  children  at 
play  which  charmed  his  earlier  years. "— New  York  Express. 

Popular  Fairy  Tales,     By  the  BROTHERS  GRIMM.     Profusely 
Illustrated,  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
From  first  to  last,  almost  without  exception,  these  stories  are  delightful/' 


A.  L.  BURTS  PUBLICATIONS.  13 

With  Lafayette  at  Yorktown :  A  Story  of  How  Two  Boys 
Joined  the  Continental  Army.  By  JAMES  OTIS.  12mo,  cloth, 
price  $1.00. 

The  two  boys  are  from  Portsmouth,  N.  H.,  and  are  introduced 
in  August,  1781,  when  on  the  point  of  leaving  home  to  enlist  in 
Col.  ScamineH's  regiment,  then  stationed  near  New  York  City. 
Their  method  of  traveling  is  on  horseback,  and  the  author  has 
given  an  interesting  account  of  what  was  expected  from  boys  in 
the  Colonial  days.  The  lads,  after  no  slight  amount  of  adventure, 
are  sent  as  messengers — not  soldiers — into  the  south  to  find  the 
troops  under  Lafayette.  Once  with  that  youthful  general  they 
are  given  employment  as  spies,  and  enter  the  British  camp, 
bringing  away  valuable  information.  The  pictures  of  camp-life 
are  carefully  drawn,  and  the  portrayal  of  Lafayette's  character  is 
thoroughly  well  done.  The  story  'is  wholesome  in  tone,  as  are  all 
of  Mr.  Otis'  works.  There  is  no  lack  of  exciting  incident  which 
the  youthful  reader  craves,  but  it  is  healthful  excitement  brim- 
ming with  facts  which  every  boy  should  be  familiar  with,  and 
while  the  reader  is  following  the  adventures  of  Beu  Jaffreys  and 
Ned  Allen  he  is  acquiring  a  fund  of  historical  lore  which  will 
remain  in  his  memory  long  after  that  which  he  has  memorized 
from  text-books  has  been  forgotten. 

Lost  in  the  Canon  :  Sam  Willett's  Adventures  on  the  Gre*t 
Colorado.  By  ALFRED  R.  CALHOUN.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
This  story  hinges  on  a  fortune  left  to  Sam  Willett,  the  hero, 
and  the  fact  that  it  will  pass  to  a  disreputable  relative  if  the  lad 
dies  before  he  shall  have  reached  his  majority.  The  Vigilance 
Committee  of  Hurley's  Gulch  arrest  Sam's  father  and  an  associate 
for  the  crime  of  murder.  Their  lives  depend  on  the  production 
of  the  receipt  given  for  money  paid.  This  is  in  Sam's  possession 
at  the  camp  on  the  other  side  of  the  canon.  A  messenger  is  dis- 
patched to  get  it.  He  reaches  the  lad  in  the  midst  of  a  fearful 
Btorm  which  floods  the  canon.  His  father's  peril  urges  Sam  to 
action.  A  raft  is  built  on  which  the  boy  and  his  friends  essay  to 
cross  the  torrent.  They  fail  to  do  so,  and  a  desperate  trip  down 
the  stream  ensues.  How  the  party  finally  escape  from  the  hor- 
rors of  their  situation  and  Sam  reaches  Hurley's  Gulch  in  the  very 
nick  of  time,  is  described  in  a  graphite  style  that  stamps  Mr.  Cal- 
houn  as  a  master  of  his  art. 

Jack :  A  Topsy  Turvy  Story.  By  C.  M.  CRAWLEY-BOEVEY 
With  upward  of  Thirty  Illustrations  by  H.  J.  A.  MILES. 
12nio,  cloth,  price  75  cents. 

"  The  illustrations  deserve  particular  mention,  as  they  add  largely  to  the 
interest  of  this  amusing  volume  for  children.  Jack  falls  asleep  with  his  mind 
full  of  the  subject  of  the  fishpond,  and  is  very  much  surprised  presently  to 
find  himself  an  inhabitant  of  Waterworld,  where  he  goes  though  wonderful 
*nd  edifying  adventures.  A  handsome  and  pleasant  book-  "—Literary  World. 


14  A.  L.  BURT'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

Search  for  the  Silver  City  :  A  Tale   of  Adventure  in  Yucatan. 

By  JAMES  OTIS.     12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 

Two  American  lads,  Teddy  Wright  aud  Neal  Emery,  embark 
on  the  steam  yacht  Day  Dream  for  a  short  summer  cruise  to  the 
tropics.  Homeward  bound  the  yacht  is  destroyed  by  fire.  AU 
hands  take  to  the  boats,  but  during  the  night  the  boat  is  cast  upoi, 
the  coast  of  Yucatan.  They  come  across  a  young  American 
named  Cummings,  who  entertains  them  with  the  story  of  the 
wonderful  Silver  City,  of  the  Chan  Santa  Cruz  Indians.  Cum- 
miugs  proposes  with  the  aid  of  a  faith i'ul  Indian  ally  to  brave 
the  perils  of  the  swamp  and  carry  off  a  number  of  the  golden 
images  from  the  temples.  Pursued  with  relentless  vigor  for  days 
their  situation  is  desperate.  At  last  their  escape  is  effected  in  an 
astonishing  manner.  Mr.  Otis  has  built  his  story  on  an  historical 
foundation.  It  is  so  full  of  exciting  incidents  that  the  reader  is 
quite  carried  away  with  the  novelty  and  realism  of  the  narrative. 

Frank  Fowler,  the  Cash  Boy.  By  HORATIO  ALGER,  JR.  12mo, 

cloth,  price  $1.00. 

Thrown  upon  his  own  resources  Frank  Fowler,  a  poor  boy, 
bravely  determines  to  make  a  living  for  himself  and  his  foster- 
sister  Grace.  Going  to  New  York  he  obtains  a  situation  as  cash 
boy  in  a  dry  goods  store.  He  renders  a  service  to  a  wealthy  old 
gentleman  named  Wharton,  who  takes  a  fancy  to  the  lad.  Frank, 
after  losing  his  place  as  cash  boy,  is  enticed  by  an  enemy  to  a 
lonesome  part  of  New  Jersey  and  held  a  prisoner.  This  move  re- 
coils upon  the  plotter,  for  it  leads  to  a  clue  that  enables  the  lad  to 
establish  his  real  identity.  Mr.  Alger's  stories  are  not  only  un- 
usually interesting,  but  they  convey  a  useful  lesson  of  pluck  and 
manly  independence. 

Budd  Boyd's  Triumph ;  or,  the  Boy  Firm  of  Fox  Island.  By 
WILLIAM  P.  CHIPMAN.  12mo,  cloth,  price  $1.00. 
The  scene  of  this  story  is  laid  on  the  upper  part  of  Narragansett 
Bay,  and  the  leading  incidents  have  a  strong  salt-water  flavor. 
Owing  to  the  conviction  of  his  father  for  forgery  &ad  theft,  Budd 
Boyd  is  compelled  to  leave  his  home  and  strike  out  for  himself. 
Chance  brings  Budd  in  contact  with  Judd  Floyd.  The  two  boys, 
being  ambitious  and  clear  sighted,  form  a  partnership  to  catch 
and  sell  fish.  The  scheme  is  successfully  launched,  but  the  un- 
expected appearance  on  the  scene  of  Thomas  Bagsley,  the  man 
whom  Budd  believes  guilty  of  the  crimes  attributed  to  his  father, 
leads  to  several  disagreeable  complications  that  nearly  caused  the 
lad's  ruin.  His  pluck  and  good  sense,  however,  carry  him  through 
his  troubles.  In  following  the  career  of  the  boy  firm  of  Boyd  & 
Floyd,  the  youthful  reader  will  find  a  useful  lesson — that  industry 
and  perseverance  are  bound  to  lead  to  ultimate  success. 


14  DAY  USE 


RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


LOAN  DEPARTMENT 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


A   »-7O     ^PWi   ft     ft 

flECT)  UJ  FEB  2 

4  f  u  *^  '  ™  o  \j 

MAY  8    1977  5  A 

"    •  , 

RSk  CIR-OtC  14  '77 

- 

~ 

LD21-35m-8,'72 
(Q4189S10)476 — A-32 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CD55D73flD7 


